om hares oY rae ara ~ ee oe tee ee PAA Gt te Ber hE eh A nl 8 Poet A Beto one int. Bo Barton lm Gil tee. cide Dind gm ane 5-8-8 beh Bebe 2 hag) > @ 0 Ae totes uh e- GA ht Ae Me Gln TAP EM nro. Gtr Bod Wy Ao ed oe hi > Se ee - wr “ = rere res vo eS we oe ee aemeod ows ore ee ae ar > tt “ > = aa Tei De BM A-3. oP HE Be >, . ‘ O eQte > ae? im Peer — wy © DMF Ape DAD RAB PDI DAL LME: MI I = >> 7h, @& Poke apnert ey ORD le Ke oe Pal a IEG Te Pe nt tet niin Ar oA A I e 6n o O ee Ot Mae - fo eae ta Pate Obed TPebe Bae wid GBs hel Pe Pst Ge tent sy 2 > PBL te nt ed ab ee ere ee -n oe bath» See nd sediedhhiatn angie anda ee nea - ~ oct we eS ee ee th Sead tik clea Le eee re a . t ey ee ee ee ee er . he ee a ee > FPP Ca Be 4 Go t- BaP tig b-—— ee 2 —s : Sethe ie etiontin Ta ani wi Deh Des- PO d~ Gn! - Bando Qe eho te © 6 Lee ® Dab PEt Mag er ue tL «n * heel, , is p> ee eae oe OG Hobe eee Me tet ne 2 = Rata He Rg BP Ot BH Pl 0 Orn Wo? B-OnF ete O48 © hE EA #27 O 2 Qn 4.5 Sided ied atta Uiten Ee, te ee ee Soe Ba te et teh et Bi a ee ent ee a Se oe ae Bae ee a ae ee See ee ae A Beh POA Dhol -toG-O-geFai 2. T-' ate Oe > ew Ci REIN Dati Nether Bo. ds ba OO DN mee _* Pat Tm oe eet tae he Fue oP Oh ReMi E10 GaP e-em “> . tet ipa eee et ee a Son So a SS a) ee oe ee in WF A ee Oe Pte, Bot ee DN Ble Oe Rae Lee Bd hs! . Se ew a te ae > StS the, “ Pate ~ ane ne 6. 44: ek F heat Hy Se te hae hh Sm ~ PoP 1 PuG-A Buh E-P Gea Ore 9 <- Pa “= ’ Ni Ail: DP e > athaintheaaenai aide = Cant nlite etn — Se ee ere ee a Se SO a ee a =~. =>»? a Crt thatete <_ > ~ 7 =) _ a ae |. pm o® rae 7 = oe =< > ets : a : ; a a ef Bice | 7 =) _ $50. C42 Gec/og, 3 Nik em ponm, GROROETLCAL SoOcingTy Sean ee eer EC OUR EA L Ld y 65-7 v TABLE OF CONTENT PART I1.—ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS. Page ANSTED, Professor D. T. On some remarkable Mineral Veins ...... 240 Bouuarrt, W., Esq. On the Occurrence of Bones of Mastodon in Chile. [Abridged.] See ive ieee onl anata oats aides Unde aie leans 291 Buist, Dr. G. On the Occurrence of Crystallization in a 3 ee I Aa os ih, wsiaind naicgin sds doccniy enemas dasa seames eas varie neue CAMPBELL, R., Esq. On the Occurrence of an Earthquake at Rhodes 176 CLARKE, Rey. W. B. Additional Notice of the Occurrence of Vol- canic Bombs in Australia. [Abstract.] ........ccccccssssesceres ei doe ol Oe CLEGHORN, JoHN, Esq. On the Rock-Basins of Dartmoor ......... aL Coan, Rev. Trrus. On the Volcanic Eruptions in Hawaii.......,.... 170 EGERTON, Sir PHILIP DE MAupas Grey, Bart., M.P. Palichthy- ologic Notes (No. 9}. On some Fish-remains from the neigh- bourhood of Ludlow. (With 2 Plates.) ........ccccacssessoncessseees 282 Fa.coner, Dr. H. Description of Two species of the Fossil Mamma- lian Genus Plagiaulax from Purbeck ......... Sod saicd eee wAdavowss 261 ——. On the species of Mastodon and Elephant occurrmg in the fossil state in Great Britain. Part I.—Mastodon. (With 2 Plates.) 307 Gopwin-AusTeEN, R., Esq. On the Newer Tertiary Deposits of the Re RE Rich at gen ia ae dee ska nes cag si re ae — 2 imo a ay 7 + dl io. . wi g ? c a * Sie ; . a .. 2 a et Pe ail 3 Fe ” eX ae fi - S s bd or ° >. a i - > ah) F é Po ; ; 5 ‘ 2fi> » ‘ = e <~ eis ts ; a t , Py Me ‘ : ta “Ay 1 bg + . ~ b ; fob - agigx . : ‘ 7 y, & + . as.’ f i ‘2 Se Epit . - . . Ss esr A” ge ’ | ee | » o* ‘ ’ . “5 cua % ° / 7 \ » nl t, P ta | \ ' — } : a 4 i 7 ws > one wie iy . eeu U ' . & = ” nid * * * ’ , *Z Po eu = Ses” & b i* Ad t “ es -/- pees _ , : . * a a ' 7 ve : [ > s ska |" > ree ’ a jt SOC Eee niet Pet iy ae 7 P.# iy . ali » sacs al tend o iy grits) C ; wh . al past wi whe ron | 4 er : ‘ Ora ee, at al ——— ‘sva4T, “HOIMISAUd HAASOL ‘LOST ‘6 ‘Qa G 91 10LtF [‘papnjaue auay 7ou st anbopngny fiunug erence -v'T pun ‘ynuinor fipsaganng ‘shurpaaroag ‘suory -ovsun4y, pjosun Jo yaojs ‘aangauangy ‘havag “VT ‘suorjoapjog qosouny oyp fo anjoa ayy “g'N} G 91 I10LtF _- — OF 2 Tit TURUPREUEEUORUOEU UEC OET Ee Te eee eee (poo3 OFT gra Seats suolnqujyuoy ‘uuy jo sivally 0 ZI Fg ***(pood patoapisuod) saaq UOlssItupy JO sivalry 5 eee CT 66T Pee e eer e reese cere eres sere reeset ee eess deer arenes spuog yonbayoxy Il * COPE eet eeereveeecerseererees LIZTIIOG JY} JO MOARJ UI vouLT eg oa € itis: 0 CL Go terttteeeseeees Sugmmg snoaueqjaosrpy “ O B Tolprrttt* OG ye ‘s[osuoy "pz *s6T “WSlor ‘Ayredorg popuny 0 8lzZ renee Recerne veers ggguadxg oynUatag “ g LT 8 Cen e ree eee e ree ewesern essere es eeeseese?® spuey 8,419] ul aouvleg 9 rd L¢ tuleate anSojeye9 Saequowoddng Areaquy “ 6) FI POL woke ep eaceeecnsern tees as ¢ tenes +See etary Ss Joyueg ul aouRleg 9 LI PP i ee ee ue ‘TTA "TOA ‘SUOTJOVSURI, “cc 9 OT 6 Peewee twee eee eee jvuinor ul SUOTJIIIIOZ Ssloyyny 10j and 9 el 66 eet seen eae "1OA ‘qeumor uo 9 ZI Ls Cee ecereccceracarerccsensecces jeuinor 0} smorydiiosqng IO} and pe > :*OD 2 AoyAvy, ‘sussayy 03 9NG |9 GI 89 [IX ‘1OA ‘/eatnor uo “oD pue uvusuo'y *sIssofAy WoOly ong ‘sLdaqd pe F *ALUAAOUG "OG8T Suaquasag ysTE ‘hjuadoug s fiqaio0g ays fo NOLLVATVA "1981 “6 “927 6 91 09F 6 10 *s.49700N { ‘NOSILLVd “Wd ‘S lle HPP HOTAL CHIATV "4091100 WY} PUY PUL ‘sJUdTMOZLIg ISOT]} YITM SN 04 poyuasoid sxayonoa pus syoog oy} pexedumoo savy OM, ! og ac icks cunt lse eee ooh *syuayg Jad ¢ he ee ee ee IgG 0} papleme ‘Tepapy UOyseTIOAA SBa1avisuy Jo 4sog ; seseeeeeesseeeeeeesesseesereseeeres DUNT MOLLUO(T WO%SP| Of Cee erent eeewmere cess tee cow ceseeeseeeee saAvysa(y ‘Ww 0} pleay 6 6 o€ “OM oy} uo “ocsT Arenue jo 4ST ‘s aoyueg ye aoueleg F *SINDNAVG ag ae *SLd1DOAY “SEINQOODDY LsaAUy, of eve veccccncwmecceccce (puny WOFSPT]O MA) S$ ,layaegd ye souryeg 0) 62 Income and Expenditure during the INCOME. Balance at Banker’s, January 1,1856.... 117 16 0 Balance in Clerk’s hands ...... ne ereet ae rit 0 sy ad Bonds, invested out of Income 199 15 3 ——= ola oe Composition received). keep. cas eee ene seas 31 10 Arrears of Admission Peesas. co. @iciaies2 vl2 12, 20 Arrears of Annual Contributions ........ 1212 O Admission Nees ofAS56: Fo niue se ste. see ens et Annual Contributions of 1856-......:..... es ciel 584 6 Dividends on 3 perscentConsolse.4,%- 4. 2-1 sn 2s 128 4 Dividends on Exchequer Bonds, 7. youn os Vase 6 10 Publications : Longman & Co. for Sale of Journalin 1855 . 57 7 6 Sale‘of Transactions: .../dvecesssessseteee- eco oaee 22609 sale of Proceedings (sage: o-qauss S8 -G6 Sale of Journal Vol. sx: v.2);te eee aces ea oe Sale of Journal Valse Xd.’ 4c coicscaee ea ceeeeeee 50 15 0 Sale‘or Journal; Vol; XVI © oy. cee ceaccetenes 124 17 6 — 300 1 male of Library Catalooue (7221..0.05 > emia ee 12 Sale of Geological Map of England (Greenough) ee) ee We have compared the Books and Vouchers presented to us with these Statements, and find them correct. ALFRED TYLOR, d, OLhDOO Feb. 9, 1857.‘ S. R. PATTISON, \ Auditors. £1626 13 11 * Due from Messrs. Longman and Co., in addition to the above, on Journal, Vol. XIT.. £68 12 6 Due from Fellows for Subscriptions ......... 57 12 6 Due from Authors for Corrections ...........- 9:16 46 £136 1 6 Year ending December 31st, 1856. EXPENDITURE. a Poa” General Expenditure : Sg... de INN! sco keiniuan dae nan sWenthpASinaxsbiode 5117 8 Me MOMIIMATIIS (oo at acu adtoct tes ideccncccucascs 3 0 0 I ERNIE oo wad ane awa secinws op aps casene stuns 19 14. 9 PIS MOMIEN, |. inns Bin aemin'a ane vipieactanyentzkc cp isto 2 raed niiann datdecs ser ceneenvesssadprabs 41 12 0 MER rpiicind svendseccesdnvanscuesenagenssaecssechesee a2 16° 2 Miscellaneous House Expenses, including O53. 9 8 Postages ........0.».9 aonb s antew ese seamen SEMMIOUETY ...2....cccedssneesss Jo stascencnsesaccosees 19 0 5 Miscellaneous Printing*...........sseseseseeseeees 22 12 0 Tea for Meetings .........csccssesceccscsceceveees 23 5 6 ————— 290 1) 2 Salaries and Wages: Assistant Secretary and Curator ....+..-+...00 200 0 0 2 a Se ae nee oe eee Se 1276: 2 8 Assistant in Library and Museum ............ 6 0 0 Pe a seD «eats oacdavansccsqhieauesPincend fe 90. 0° 0 Re One ee oe aan-4 -0 Secentana) ALLEndANtS: .... 6. cscascasvccsscncences Heke & NIN arc shaban dacte read ssn BE RT. 2211 8 ——_——— 483 12 6 a eR eek om a8 93 10 10 eA ee cer Sen Se eas td 20 14 9 Diagrams at Meetings ........ ey Pe Clee a Se eh ge Miscellaneous Scientific Expenses*................ 6 2°1 Publications : MIRED 2525, Loan dunn eennsdtie uakee 014 0 Srapgsactions, Vol. VIL. Pt. 4*. ..25.0..000s.. ie OL 8 Lg SS ee eee ne oe 010 0 Meme OM: BLO) Wy. cee. ohicnvacs wceaceazenel~ ee EMO: WEE oo cas dace apbtenuuecenandiees 7 6 pM INES Mat 50.0.5.. Saviazdn as uscwecteuts (Gohan: 014 0 ES ea ey pt ee eS Pak 6 CS SS) ee iets ee cee eS S22 of LS 1S SS ae OS SP 308 4 8 Lo Be Ae. | a Ap UE A 9 5° 0 386 4 2 Balance at Banker’s, Dec. 31, 1856.... 124 14 0 Haamee m Clerk’s hands ......:..... -8 17 ‘8 Exchequer Bonds, invested as above 199°15 °3 —_———._ 383 661i * Due to Messrs. Taylor & Co., in addi- £1626 13 11 tion to the above, on Journal, Vol. XII. ... £99 13 6 ———— On Transactions, Vol. VII. Pt. 4 ............ 4417 6 »» Library (Supplementary Catalogue) ey Bek 99 SCientific Expenses ........ccccccccsecssesee 218 0 »» Miscellaneous Printing ............ceseseees a pa £208 11 6 “LEST ‘6 “QM 9 GI TESlF 9 ST LESlt#¥ "svauy, “HOIMLSAUd Hdasor 9 Sisk 806 SUOURE eee ee Oe (qa0y4 goueled 08) : j fe [PE “SLT GGL 07 punown pynon eee ic aaa a at es oC a GT Ajaaog ay) fo unoanf wu aounjog ayy ‘amoauyz 0 O O€¢ oo OF =~ pass tccomomreum, > Swwah sty, sof aqnjivav sp yoym buasaprs 0 0 OgP crm g(wainor Spoyreng : suoRROY ANE “ua YSSE Mom west sonbaycam se Bape. 0 0 G ‘TTT! ysasuadxy syUaIIg snooURTazsi fy 2°PS SCL 66LF epnjow 7 P SYD. “T'N ©. @ Ef strewn “sdunaayy ye smesseig, | 0, ST SP “verre tttesrsneeerseeneeeseoemenes Moinog ayy JamlEais aouRlEd O O GE tiittrrstttteetteresssreeeseeseesseeeeeee UMmasn Ay 8) 9) GE ETE SR aa ‘syooq MON “Are1quy 0 F 80% €Z eee ee eer ee eT 10JD9T [OQ ZL eee sa epuagy [eUOIstIOG €¢ Beare Se gee ee ae re osnoy]T Gah Oeioiataelyvinde if-ie feo tna kiten Sete yn ine ocooooooo ocooootoo S for) Oke COG: = og cc umoesnyy pue Arerqry ut 1 4URISISSV ee HreseereseeesseeeQe@RT UL [eUINOL JO a]VS OJ tel sha weg tee een o creo f, 3 | yeu.in 00% “ttt qoyBaNg pur himaee queqsissy oun Ul ‘OD pue UeWsuUOT “sissapy Aq ong 1 Sade pue solves (6) 0 CBG Coo eer eerrescescesocesen jeurnor Ajioyrene jo ales F 0 SRz 6 4 ae te andiien Ben na Capple. en na Rhee .---- Isle Oransay. a. Gneiss (lower). x. Porphyry. iy 6, Red Sandstone. y. Syenite. : ; e. Quartzite. z. Clay-stone-porphyry. this hollow, red sandstone and conglomerate beds appear, at first broken and disturbed, but soon dipping regularly toW.N.W. at angles ranging from 25° to 40°. The sandstone is of a reddish-brown colour, with thin yellowish layers of finer materials, but is much hardened and altered, and at first sight might easily be mistaken for gneiss. In many respects it closely resembles the beds above the coarse breccia at the Gairloch. At the head of Loch Daal the sand- stone is followed by thick beds of greyish quartzite, dipping N.W. at 20°. Further north, beds resembling greywacke, with light-yellow and blue slates, follow, dipping at 40° to 60° W.N.W. ‘TRese beds have the general character of the Balmacarra slates, but are softer, and without cleavage. In Ben na Rhee and Ben na Capple, on the east of the road, the beds appear to dip at a much higher angle, and to be more quartzose in character. The next higher group of strata is again red sandstone, but lighter in colour, and softer than the sandstones below the quartzite. The syenite or felspar-porphyry of Ben na Charn interrupts this series, but without altering the direc- tion of the dip. On the north of the igneous rock, the sandstone is of a whiter colour. On Broadford Bay the lias shale and limestones, full of Gryphee, Ammonites, and other characteristic fossils, appear dipping 8° N. 50° W., and intersected by the most complex groups of trap-veins. Beyond Broadford Bay the lias is covered by beds of green-coloured columnar porphyry, both the igneous and stratified rocks being again intersected by vertical veins of grey greenstone. This section, though the lower rocks are clearly identical, differs in many important points from those formerly described. The dip of the beds is now to the N.W. instead of tu the S.E., as on the mainland. The quartzite is no longer the white granular quartz- rock of the northern sections, but in many parts rather a grey- wacke or slate. The limestones do not appear in the section, but the quartzite is now covered by soft red or white sandstones, and these by the shales and limestones of the lias, instead of the hard metamorphic gneiss of Ullapool and Loch Eriboll. The lower red sandstone is evidently the same rock with that seen on the main- ~ land, and the quartzite may also be probably identified, though some- what different in characters. How far the upper red and white sandstones belong to this group is more doubtful. 32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Nov. 19, Order of succession.—This review of the red sandstone and quartzite as they appear in the long course of more than 100 miles along the west coast from Durness and Cape Wrath to Loch Alsh and Skye establishes the following important facts in the geology of this part of Scotland. First. The red sandstone is the lower formation, resting only upon gneiss, and forming a narrow band along the western shore, never reaching to the watershed of the country, and not exceeding twenty miles in breadth in its widest portions, as on the Gairloch. Secondly. The quartzite isa distinct and newer formation, resting unconformably on the red sandstone on the west, but on the east spreading out beyond it over the gneiss. Its present breadth, in- cluding outlying portions, does not exceed ten miles, and is gene- rally much less. The limestone forms the upper portion of this band. Thirdly. That the general dip, though at a different angle, both of the red sandstone and quartzite is to the south-east; and that at many points on its eastern side the quartzite and limestone have been ascertained to dip under gneiss inclined in the same direction. Organic remains.—This inferiority of a vast series of sedimentary deposits—for what is true of the quartzite must be true also of the red sandstone on which it rests—to a highly metamorphic rock like gneiss has acquired additional interest from the discovery of undoubted organic remains in some of the beds. These remains I shall now notice in the order of the formations. In the red sandstone no organic remains have been found, partly perhaps from the nature of the beds, partly, we may presume, from the few opportunities they present, from quarrying or other operations, for their discovery. In the quartzite probable indications of organic beings are more numerous. In his first Memoir on Quartz-rock, published in 1814, Dr. Mac- culloch noticed the ‘imbedded cylindrical bodies”? seen both on the surface and in the interior of the quartzite, and described them as ‘the remains of some animal, a Saéella or other marine worm.”’ The organic origin of these bodies has subsequently been denied, but as it appears to me erroneously. Consisting entirely of sand— and thus rather casts than petrifactions—they can scarcely be ex- pected to show any structure, so as to decide positively their true character. Their branched forms and their immense numbers, closely crowded together over wide spaces, are opposed to the view that they are the mere burrows of marine worms, as Macculloch suggested. Both in general aspect and mode of grouping the cylin- drical forms much resemble the Lithodendron corals, whilst the conical, rounded or polygonal bodies in other beds have more simi- larity to Cyathophylle. I shall, however, leave to further investi- gation to determine their true nature, as at present we can draw no argument from them in regard to the age of the strata. In other beds of the quartzite, I have mentioned plant-like im- pressions as occurring in abundance. But these are in general nothing 1856.]| NICOL—QUARTZITES, ETC. OF N.W. SCOTLAND 33 more than a confused mass of carbonaceous markings, more like fucoids than any higher forms. This, however, seems to have arisen in part from the changes the rocks have undergone, as we occasion- ally find straight, cylindrical fragments, like stems or branches of trees, 2 to 4 inches in diameter and 12 to 14 inches long. Some of these are marked with obscure scars, as of leaves or branches. Round or oval markings, like those on the Stigmaria of the coal, are also not uncommon, scattered irregularly over the surface of the rock. On afew specimens they were arranged quincuncially, as on the Stigmaria ; but, from the imperfect nature of the specimens, I would not place much weight on this mere resemblance, though the indications of a higher terrestrial vegetation at this period are of much importance. In his ‘ Western Isles,’ Dr. Macculloch mentions his discovery ‘in a porous or incompact granular quartz, alternating with the lime- stone,” on Loch Eriboll, of ‘‘ conical bodies not exceeding a quarter of an inch in length, being evidently the fragments of Orthoceratites or some analogous fossil, possibly entire shells *.’’ These bodies have subsequently been noticed by other observers ; and in 1855 Sir R. Murchison and myself found them in considerable numbers. The best-preserved specimens are, as Macculloch states, of a conical form, about a quarter of an inch long, and on the cross fracture show that they have been hollow at the broader end. ‘Their minute size, and the nature of the stone in which they are imbedded, and from which they cannot be separated, render their character un- certain. The want of septa, of which I can discern no trace, shows _ that they were not Orthoceratites ; and if shells, I should regard them rather as belonging to small Pteropod mollusca. By far the most distinct fossils, however, are those found in the Durness limestone, for the discovery of which we are indebted to Mr. Charles Peach. When I visited this place in company with Sir R. Murchison, we found these fossils in considerable abundance, both in the beds described by Mr. Peach, and in others at a lower level. They are principally seen on the surface of the rock where wasted by the sea or weather, but the hard refractory nature of the stone renders it almost impossible to extract them in a state fit for description. The results of a careful examination of these fossils are thus stated by Sir R. Murchison. “It had been suggested that the fossils in question, being of a whorled form, might prove to be the Clymenie of the Devonian rocks; but although, according to Mr. Salter, one or two of them have a certain resemblance to that genus, and some even to Goniatites, the evidence of their being chambered shells is too obscure to decide the case. The principal fossil is probably a Euomphalus: it resembles the Maclurea or Raphistoma of the Lower Silurian rocks, except that the former, to which it most approaches, has a sinistral and not a dextral curve. Even should some of these whorled shells prove to be chambered, there is nothing about them to gainsay their belonging to the Lituites * Vol. ii. pp. 512, 513. VOL. XIII. PART I. D 34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL sociETy. [Nov. 19, of the Lower Silurian rocks. Another fossil is certainly an Ortho- ceratite”’ *. I may further remark, that many of the singular forms brought out on the surfaces of this limestone by weathering are probably, as Dr. Macculloch long ago conjectured, of organic origin; ‘in particular the red vermicular forms very similar to many that occur in the well-known marble of Babicomb.’’ I have little doubt that these are truly corals. Better and more determinable specimens will probably yet be procured from some of the less altered beds of this series; but in the mean time the question arises, To what geo- logical period do these organic remains belong? What age do they indicate for the beds in which they are found? The only certain genera are the Orthoceras and Huomphalus, but these characterize rather the Paleeozoic beds in general than any of the formations in particular. The mere resemblance of others to Lituites, Clymenia, or Goniatites—to Silurian, Devonian or Carboniferous forms—is too uncertain a foundation on which to build any argument. Beyond the mere fact, therefore, that these formations belong to the great series of Paleozoic strata—and this fact is one of very high im- portance,—I do not think that these organic remains will as yet safely carry us. Distinctive physical characters.—Being thus, as it were, thrown back on the general characters and relations of these deposits, the question arises, Do they furnish us with any aid in determining their age? The red sandstone has hitherto been generally regarded as of Devonian age; and so strongly are the characters of this formation, as seen in other parts of Scotland, impressed on it, that we may affirm no doubt would ever have existed on the question, except from its relation to the quartzite f. As it is now proved to lie below the quartzite, its age must evi- dently be affected by our views regarding the latter rock, which, as I have shown, is a distinct and newer formation. Now the close analogy of this group to the mountain-limestone and associated sand- stones, has forced itself on every observer, and in describing it com- parisons with the coal-formation in the central districts of Scotland constantly recur. The mineral characters of the beds are almost identical—more so indeed than we might have expected, consider- ing the distance of the localities and the changes the northern de- posit has undergone. It consists of fine- or moderate-grained white siliceous sandstones, not harder than many in Fife or the Lothians in the vicinity of trap ; disposed in regular beds of moderate thick- ness, with ripple-marked surfaces and false stratification ; of thinly * Brit. Assoc. Report for 1855, Trans. Sect. p.87. In addition I may mention, thatia specimen of Orthoceratite, which I procured from these beds, measures 1:4 inch in length, with a diameter of *4.at the upper and ‘2 at the lower end. It is somewhat compressed, and quite smooth on the external surface. t Dr. Macculloch seems to have been inclined to regard it as a primary red sandstone ; Mr. Cunningham named it “ Transition.’”’? Professor Sedgwick and aay Murchison in 1828 classed some portions as “ Primary,” others as ‘‘ Old ed. 1856.] NICOL—QUARTZITES, ETC. OF N.W. SCOTLAND. 35 laminated, blue or grey shales, full of carbonaceous, plant-like im- pressions, and strongly impregnated with iron ;—and lastly, of blue or grey limestones alternating with shales, and in some places black, bituminous, and emitting a ‘‘fcetid odour similar to that detected im various mountain-limestone strata.’’ Even the external features of the fine cliff of Stronchrubie, with its beds of limestone, sandstone, and trap, are entirely those of the coal-formation : whilst those of the quartzites of Ben Spiannue and Loch Eriboll are just those of the sandstones in the south of Scotland or north of England. Now though the occurrence of one of these beds or groups alone—of a red sandstone and conglomerate, of a white sandstone and shale, or of grey and bituminous limestone—would furnish no strong indica- tion of age, yet the coincidence of the whole three in their proper order is a far more powerful argument. It seems highly improbable that in such a limited region as Scotland there should have occurred in the palzeozoic age two such complex series of deposits, so nearly identical in mineral characters and order, and yet that they should not be contemporaneous. The chief objection to assigning so recent a date to these quartzites and limestones is the remarkable fact, that on the east they dip below gneiss. Now the gneiss of the central region of Ross and Suther- land, dipping, with few exceptions, continuously to the south-east, is observed passing under the Old Red Sandstone of Ross-shire and Caithness. This clearly appeared in three traverses of this region, from the east to the west coast, which I made in company with Sir R. Murchison in 1855, and is indeed admitted by the most com- petent observers*. If, therefore, this gneiss, that overlies the quartzites of the west coast, is truly a portion of the great formation of the central regions which underlies the Devonian rocks on the east, and has been originally deposited and metamorphosed in the place where it occurs, it seems necessarily to throw the red sandstones and quartzites of the west coast into a much earlier geological period,— most probably into the Lower Silurian. This continuity of the over- lying gneiss of the west with the underlying gneiss of the east coast has, however, not been established, and would indeed be a work of great difficulty in such a wild and pathless country. In those parts of Ross-shire, also, where the quartzite directly overlies gneiss, it is evidently the lower gneiss of the same agé with that on the west coast of Sutherland, that forms the surface. The fact also of the overlying gneiss having been metamorphosed in situ, and not pushed up over the quartzite, is one requiring further investiga- tion. The occurrence of igneous rocks—syenitic porphyries or serpentines, at many points along the line of union, seems to indicate a fault. On the other hand, the great extent over which this relation has been observed, of fifty or a hundred miles, is un- favourable to the view that it is the result of a slip or convolution of the beds. The quartzite also and the limestone have undergone * “Tt is generally, but not universally true, that the dip [of the gneiss] is to the south-eastward.”—Macculloch, Mem. on Geol. Map of Scotland, p. 63. See also the dips laid down on Mr. Cunningham’s Map of Sutherland. p2 36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Nov. 19) great metamorphic action, which seems to have less affected the upper portion of the red sandstone ; whilst the bottom beds of the sandstone again, as on the Gairloch, have been exposed to it in a much higher degree. In other words, the red sandstone and quartzite appear to have been more affected at the two extremities, above and below, than in the middle of the series*. Probable Age.—On the whole, therefore, though all doubt can only be removed by the discovery of better-preserved characteristic fossils, I regard the theory, that the red sandstones of the West Highlands are of Devonian age, the quartzite and limestone of Lower Carboniferous, as the more probable. Whether we consider the gneiss resting on the latter as a newer metamorphic group, or merely as a portion of the lower gneiss forced up over it in some. great convulsion, we have still views of very great interest opened up to us in the history of these Highland mountains. They can no longer claim that remote geological antiquity which has hitherto been assigned to them, but belong, at least in their present form, to a far more recent period in the history of the earth,—to one posterior to the deposition of the horizontal coal-fields and sandstones of the south. In offering to the Society, first a statement of facts, and then my views of the probable age of the quartzites and limestones, I wish it, however, to be understood that my Memoir has reference only to the north-west coast of Scotland. How far it may apply to the quartzites of other parts of the Highlands must be left to future consideration. It is also clear, that these facts in no way affect the accuracy of the Devonian classification of the great ascending triple series of the east coast,—of the coarse conglomerates and red sandstones, the dark bitumimous Caithness flags, and the overlying red sandstones of Dunnet Head and the Orkneys,—as established by Sedgwick and Murchison in their most important memoir. I am fully convinced that Scotland contains red sandstones and conglomerates of various dates ; and should it ultimately prove that the quartzite and lime- stones now under consideration are of Silurian age, I shall deem it no small matter to have established, as the facts now stated would then clearly prove, that the red sandstones of the west coast belong to a far different period from the corresponding rocks on the east, with which they have hitherto been identified. Geological History of the North-western District of Scotland.— Before concluding, there are a few considerations on the succession * T have not referred in the text to Mr. Hugh Miller’s views of the age of these beds, as I am not aware he has ever fully published them, except in an article in the ‘ Witness’ newspaper printed before the discovery of the fossils by Mr. Peach. He appears to consider the whole as Devonian,—the red sandstones representing the lower conglomerate, the limestone the middle calcareo-bituminous flags of Caithness, and the quartzite the upper red sandstones of Dunnet Head. My rea- sons for not adopting this classification will be readily suggested by the text. [The lamented death of this distinguished geologist offers another reason for not con- troverting a theory which he is no longer spared to defend.—J. N. January, 1857.] 1856.] NICOL—QUARTZITES, ETC. OF N.W. SCOTLAND. Se of geological pheenomena in this portion of Scotland which I would wish to introduce. The oldest formation is undoubtedly the gneiss seen underlying the red sandstone, from Cape Wrath to the Gairloch and Skye. Its chief mineralogical peculiarity is the prevalence of hornblende and the comparative rarity of mica, though the more ordinary kinds are far from being unknown. Though granite-veins often intersect this rock, there is no mass of granite which can be assigned to this first period. Indeed the fragments in the red sand- stone, and the composition of its grits, would lead us to conclude that granite was not an abundant rock in this region, more especially the regular compound of quartz, felspar, and mica, which appears to have been chiefly formed at a more recent period*. This older gneiss, in the region indicated, has a general direction to the N.W., apparent not only in the strike of the rocks, but also in many of the lakes and valleys. In the mountain ranges this direction is far less marked, having, it appears, been obliterated by subsequent denuding action. Over the gneiss thus elevated, a large deposit of red sandstone has been thrown down. Where the bottom beds are a coarse angular breccia, intercalated amidst the broken ends of the gneiss, as on the Gairloch, the deposition of this rock must have immediately suc- ceeded some violent convulsion, either local or general. The red sandstone on the west forms a narrow band along the shore, and never extended far into the interior; still less over the whole country, as has often been imagined. This is proved by its thinuing out on the east, below the quartzite ; whilst the conglomerates on its margin in Caithness and Kaster Ross also appear to indicate proximity to the shore on that side of the island. The thickness of this deposit must be very great,—from 2000 to 3000 feet being still exposed in the mountains of Applecross, Gairloch, Loch Broom, and Assynt, whilst the dip of the strata implies that its original dimensions were far greater. At the close of this period the country must have been still more depressed towards the east, allowing the quartzites to extend much farther into the interior. At present the quartzite-fragments uncon- nected with the red sandstone stretch from five to ten miles beyond its boundary, but may probably have once reached much farther over the gneiss. A change in the mineral character of the deposits also took place, the red sediments ceasing and others more favourable to organic life coming in their place, as shown in the fossiliferous lime- stone above. The quartzite including the limestone has no great thickness, probably not exceeding from 300 to 500, or at most 800 feet. To this, however, must be added the quartzite of Ben More Assynt, if truly overlying, and also the upper gneiss, so far as this has been metamorphosed in place. * Micaceous granites are also rare in the Old Red Conglomerates in many parts of Scotland, and the granite-boulders in the Silurian conglomerates on the Ayr- shire coast rarely contain this mineral; thus showing that they have not been derived from the granite-mountains in the vicinity, but from an older formation.— See Murchison on the Silurian Rocks of Scotland: Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. vii, p- 153. 38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL sociETy. | Nov. 19, The termination of the quartzite-period seems again to have been marked by convulsions. To these we must ascribe the action by which the higher portions were converted into gneiss ; or this gneiss, if a pre-existing rock, forced over the quartzite. At the same time we may suppose that those serpentinous felspar-rocks were formed which we have mentioned as occurring at Loch Alsh, Ullapool, and Assynt, and which probably exist in other places. In the same period also we may place the serpentinous rocks mixed with the gneiss of Loch Greinord. The effect of this action has been to raise up the strata along a N.K. and §.W. line, running nearly parallel to the west coast, from a point between Cape Wrath and Durness on the north, by Loch Gremord and Loch Keeshorn, to near Kyle Rhea in Skye. The red sandstone dips west from this axis on the west side, and on the east side east, with all the superior strata. The watershed of the country is a parallel line, but les much farther in the mterior ; and the influence of this line of elevation may also be traced in many other physical features of the north-west Highlands*. The next great action to which this region was exposed has been that process of denudation by which the mountains have been cut out into their present forms. If the newer red sandstone on Loch Greinord be, as Macculloch supposed, red marls or triassic, this action must have begun shortly after this elevation, as it is chiefly made up of fragments of these older strata. At the same time, or soon after, the lias of Skye may have been forming in the deeper and more distant parts of the sea. But at whatever time this denudation took place, we may form some idea of the manner in which it was effected. The whole west coast seems to have been slowly and uniformly rismg, until it stood like a long mural ridge above the waters. But these waters were not idle,—breaching this rampart from point to point along the old lines of fracture, and hollowimg out those great sea- and land-lochs by which the country is now imter- sected. Even after this process was completed, the elevation seems still to have gone on,—carrying the mountains far up into the regions of ice and snow, when those enormous glaciers were produced which filled their deepest valleys, and polished their hardest rocks, from the sea-level to many hundred feet above it, as with a lapidary’s tool. But the land must have again gone down, even below its present level, leaving only the mountains, like islands, rismg up out of the ocean. In no other way can we explain the peculiar forms of the low rounded gneiss hills between Loch Enard and Loch Inchard, and the singular detritus with which they are covered. The innumerable islands lying off the coast of Edderachyllis are only a portion of such * These two lines of elevation which I have thus noted in the rocks of this region, it will be observed, correspond with two of the most ancient lines described by M. Elie de Beaumont, in his ‘‘ Notice sur les Systemes de Montagnes.” The N.W. line may be referred to the system of Morbihan, which at Milford has the direction of W. 36° 35’ N.; the N.E. line to the Longmynd System, with a direc- tion N. 21° 24’ E. at Milford. The order of succession is not, however, the same, and my observations are not sufficiently numerous to make a more precise com- parison worth while. So far as they go, these coincidences may be regarded as favourable to the more ancient date of the beds. 1856.] NICOL—QUARTZITES, ETC. OF N.W. SCOTLAND. 39 land, not yet raised out of the ocean. At this time, too, has taken place the transport of those innumerable “perched stones’? which we have noticed throughout all this region, apparently floated away on icebergs from the mountains on the east, and deposited on the tops of the lower hills as they again rose above the waters to their present elevation. It is an important fact in connexion with all these great and repeated changes of level, that this district is remarkably free, for Scotland, of igneous rocks. No large masses of any of them are seen at the surface, and even veins are by no means common. The granite-veins at Cape Wrath, and near Lochs Inchard and Laxfiord, are the most important exceptions; and then the porphyries and serpentines of Assynt, Loch Broom, and Loch Greinord. Trap- veins occur rarely in Assynt, but seem scarce known on the main- land, either to the north or to the south. This is the more remark- able when we consider the proximity of Skye, where these rocks, of many different ages, are so fully developed; or contrast this part of Scotland with the west coast of Argyll, where they break out almost every hundred yards. It thus appears that this portion of Scotland has formed a peculiar isolated region, even from an early period. Perhaps a still more important lesson to the geologist may be found in the fact, that changes so singular in character, and so immense in extent, have taken place in this country, and yet almost no trace of the powerful agent by which they were effected appears on the surface. 40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. POSTPONED PAPERS. On the Newer Tertiary Deposits of the Sussex Coasr. By R. Gopwin-AvstTEN, Esq., F.R.S., F.G.S. [Read November 7, 1855*.] ConrTENTS. I. The land bounding the eastern portion of the English Channel. English coast : Dorset, Hants, Sussex. French coast: Somme, Seine Inférieure, Eure, Calvados. II. Detrital accumulations of the east end of the Channel Basin. Dorset and Hants, Isle of Wight, Sussex. III. Deposits of the Sussex-levels, above the gravel. 1. Mud-deposit, with Lutra- ria rugosa. 2. Yellow Drift-clay. 3. Marine gravel above the Drift-clay, and its equivalents. 4. The Brick-earth. 5. Equivalents of the Brick-earth. IV. Indications of recent changes of level. 1. Solent. 2. Portsmouth. 3. Isle of Wight. 4. Pagham and its neighbourhood. V. Summary. At the Meeting of the British Association held at Ipswich in 1851, I called the attention of the Geological Section to the evidences of repeated oscillations of level of no remote date, which were to be ob- served in parts of the coast of Cornwall, Devon, the Channel Islands, and the Cotentin—an area comprising the western opening of the English Channel+. I was fully aware that like changes were to be traced round its eastern extremity, but many circumstances tending to render the evidence less distinct in that direction, the subject was reserved for separate consideration. § I. The land bounding the eastern portion of the English Channel. Enewisnu Coast. Dorset and Hants.—It will be seen, by reference to any geological map of England, that the great bay west of Portland corresponds * For the other Communications read at this Evening’s Meeting, see Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 1 &c. + Several papers by the author, relating to the English Channels and the superficial accumulations along its coasts, and on the drift-gravels of the south of England, may be referred to in the Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. vi. p. 69; vii. p- 118 and p. 278; xi. p. 112. See also papers by Sir R. Murchison on the Flint Drift, op. cit. vol. viii. p. 349; Mr. Trimmer on theErratic Tertiaries, vol. ix. p. 282; and Mr. Martin’s paper, vol. xii. p. 134. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 4l exactly with the breadth of the series of yielding oolitic strata, along which line the rate of destruction and removal is now so great as to warrant the supposition that this particular portion of the south coast has been mainly produced within a comparatively recent period. Weymouth Bay is partly due to a line of depression and partly to sea-waste. From Portland to Durlston the coast-line presents advancing cliffs of hard strata; but, whenever yielding beds come in, as to the east of Swanage, the coast-line recedes. At some time therefore, not very remote, the line of this part of the south coast of England must have been less irregular, or more linear in an east and » west direction than at present. The remains of Elephants and other large Mammalia occur in all the valleys which open out into Charmouth Bay, from the Exe to the Brit ; the gravel-beds in which these occur are much above the present sea-level, and have been cut through, at some time subsequent to their original accumulation, along the central lines of these valleys. These valley-gravel-beds are quite distinct from those, with pebbles of quartz and granite, which cap the Haldon, Blackdown, and other ranges which run down to the coast as far east as the Bridport valley, and which gravel-beds do not contain mammalian remains. The beds of peat with timber-trees which are to be seen at low water opposite the openings of some of these valleys, as at the mouth of the Char, must not be taken as indications of recent changes of level, but only as serving to mark the continuation of those valleys before the coast-line had been cut back. A little caution is necessary with respect to numerous local deposits of a terrestrial character which are exposed detween tide-levels round the whole of the east end of the English Channel, but I am not aware of any special cha- racter by which these accumulations can be distinguished from those older land-surfaces which were coeval with the large Mammalia, and older than the gravels containing their remains. The accumulations of shingle on this part of our coast consist principally, as in the great Chesil Bank, of chalk-flints and chert ; but it is deserving of notice that the so-called “raised beach”’ at Portland Bill is mainly composed of local materials, and with only a few fints : so that, at the time the water-level stood at the line thus indicated, materials were not available for flint-shingle as at present : the cause of this must obviously be sought for in the change of level itself. The flint-shingle of the beaches of Studland and Christ Church Bays is derived from the gravel-beds which cover the adjacent parts of Dorset and Hants: this is the case with respect to the shingle- beaches of the whole of the eastern extremity of the English Chan- nel,—the great bulk of the material is o/d gravel, which has been worked over again and again during various successive periods. Some peculiar features in the parts of the Isle of Wight and South Hants, bordering the Solent, will be noticed in the sequel. Sussex.—Further east, the Chalk Downs of Sussex present a ridge from three to six miles broad, trending from Beachey Head in a direction about E. by S., W. by N.; from this headland to Selsea 42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Bill, the coast-line lies due E. and W., so that there intervenes a tract between the chalk-range and the sea, which ultimately acquires a width of ten miles, as from Lavant to Selsea; this tract is low and level, and presents the series of superficial accumulations which will be here described. The escarpment of the chalk-range which overlooks the Weald is very abrupt; the outward or south slopes are also steep. The rivers which pass through the range, such as the Arun, the Adur, the Ouse, and the Cuckmere, have very little fall in the lower portions of their courses, so that the country at the base of the znner slopes of the chalk-range, as along the Rother, is but little higher than the tract outside ; a very slight depression, such as would submerge the area south of the chalk, would cause the same mass of waters to occupy the transverse valleys and their ramifications beyond. The tract south of the chalk-range consists of accumulations which have a thickness of from 30 to 35 feet at most; these rest on a surface of chalk or else of nummulitic strata, which have expe- rienced a uniform levelling at some former period, a counterpart of what is being produced at present by sea-action ; as around the island of Heligoland,* and other coast-lmes. The chalk comes to the surface about South and North Berstead, Shrapley, and Poole Farms at Felpham, and in the parish of Siddlesham. | The higher levels of the chalk-range, which rise to the edge of the escarpment, present a clear surface, free from detritus; remains of lower tertiary deposits are also wanting ; in which respects the Downs on the south of the Weald differ from those on the north. Patches of lower tertiary strata occur between High Down Hill (north of Little Hampton) and the main line of the chalk, as also near Brighton ; there is again the well-known outlier of Castle Hill, near Newhaven, where the lower fluvio-marine beds (plastic clay, or Woolwich and Reading Series) are covered, as on the North Downs, with gravel. Further west blue and mottled clays of the same series cecur close up to the base of the chalk-hills near Goodwood. The line of coast from Beachey Head to Folkestone need not now be noticed, as the pheenomena connected with it belong to changes, and to a condition of the English Channel of much later date than that indicated by the newer tertiary deposits of Selsea. The manner in which the beds of this series are cut off by the present coast-line suggests that at one time a like condition of surface with that of the Sussex levels extended along the whole range of the chalk, not only as far as Beachey Head, but even across from the Chalk Downs of Sussex to those of the south limit of the Boulonnais, before the sub- sidence of the land of that interval had taken place. The rate of removal along the line of the deposits of the Sussex levels is so rapid, as to assure us that the present breadth of that tract is no indication of what its extent has been, even within his- torical timest, still less of what it was at yet earlier periods. * Ueber die geognostischen Verhaltnisse von Heligoland, t. 2. Von Dr. G. H. Otto Volger. + See Mantell, Dixon, and the Volumes of the Sussex Archeological Society. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 43 The lower nummulitic strata near the entrance to Pagham Creek present conditions of deposition which deserve notice: between the beds of compact sand are numerous large root-like bodies, which spread over each surface ; the beds themselves contain in abundance the casts of bivalve shells, all placed as when living, whilst at inter- vals are lines of rounded bodies, which consist of clay formed into pebbles, as may be observed now along the margins of lakes, ponds, or estuaries, and which are produced by the ripple of the water where it breaks gently along a marginal line. Coarse detritus, such as rounded and subangular shingle, is not uncommon in other parts of the lower nummulitic series ; it consists wholly of chalk-flints. FreNcH Coast. Somme.—The land bordering on the east end of the Channel need not be described in any detail, inasmuch as it consists mainly of second- ary strata. The littoral deposits of the Somme Department have not been surveyed or described so as to supply us with any very definite details as to the deposits of the low levels, which, from Etaples, occupy a considerable breadth southwards. The valleys of the Canche, the Authie and the Somme, which have their steep sides on the south- _ west, are all parallel with the axis of Artois, and are probably referable to lines of fracture. The lower portions of these valleys contain sub- aérial and alluvial accumulations, which include abundantly the remains of large mammalia, associated with land and freshwater shells of existing local species. At the mouths of the Canche and the Somme there are moreover indications of a small change of level of recent date: this change has somewhat complicated the geological phenomena of these valleys: the sequence on the whole will be found, however, to correspond with the upper part of that on our own Sussex coast. Seine Inférieure.—Along the rest of the coast of Upper Normandy, the sea now reaches the base of the vertical chalk-cliffs* which are continued with a uniform height as far as Cape Antifer. Perhaps one of the most striking features of the Channel coast is this lofty wall of dazzling white chalk, when seen from a short distance in the offing. The district which extends inland from this part of the coast is overlaid, though not uniformly, by an accumulation of clayey gravel, containing flints much broken, but not worn. I am not aware that any true tertiary strata occur over this surface, at least on the coast-section, till near Tréport; here, and again beyond Dieppe, are the well-known fluvio-marine beds of the nummulitic formation, corresponding with those at Newhaven, but which are here surmounted by a marine deposit of dark sandy clayt. These beds seem to owe their preservation to their having been accu- mulated in an old depression of the chalk, for the process has been one of filling up—the higher beds overlapping the lower. The upper surface here presents just the same uniform level as does the rest of the coast, and the ouly peculiarity to be noticed with respect to * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. p. 118. t Prestwich, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. p. 230. 44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. the superficial accumulation consists in its very marked horizontal bedding, with layers of drifted sand; I here found pebbles of quartz. Two sets of gravel-accumulations may be observed here,—one overlying the furrowed surface of that just described; both may be considered distinct, as to age and circumstances of origin, from the clayey angular gravel which covers much of the chalk-area inland. With reference to our own coast, the gravel-beds of Sainte Mar- guerite with quartz-pebbles may perhaps be of the same age as those of the high levels near Poole (see p. 45). The chalk attains its greatest elevation at Fécamp. About ten miles further the strata begin to rise. The lower cretaceous beds there appear on the sea-level, and thence continue to the mouth of the Seine. The beds subjacent to the chalk are visible for a greater distance along the right bank of the Seine, than they are on the seaboard ; they rise in the same direction, or towards Cap la Héve. The rapid reduction in the thickness of the chalk which accompanies this rise of the beds is very remarkable, and with it there is a corresponding increase in the superficial beds of angular flint-gravel. Wells which have been sunk at Havre show that an old terrestrial surface lies considerably below the water-level in that valley, buried beneath sand and shingle; and like evidences of depression are to be met with along the coast of Calvados. Whatever may be the age of the accumulations of the platforms of chalk of this part of France, thus much is clear, that they are an- terior to the formation of the valleys which have been cut through them*. Thick beds of subaérial detritus are to be found on the sides and the lower slopes of these valleys. Sections of such masses may be seen where the valleys open out on the coast-section; but they do not contain any true gravel-beds, showing the action of moving water, as is the case with so many of the gravel-valleys of this country. Even the great valley which extends from the coast at Dieppe to the denuded district of the Pays de Bray has not the slightest trace of them. Eure.—Beyond, or south of the Seine, the chalk does not appear in the upper part of the cliffs, but the same rapid diminution in its thickness is continued across the Department. All the circumstances under which this takes place—such as the very irregular surface, pro- duced by lines of deep troughs—agree in a remarkable manner with what may be observed over the Blackdown range of Devon, particu- larly in the cliff-sections E. and W. of Sidmouth. In the Department of the Eure, as in the west angle of that of the Seine Inférieure, the accumulation of angular flint-gravel which accompanies the reduction of the chalk-strata often exceeds 100 feet in thickness: it is not limited to the chalk, but outspreads it, and covers up the beds of the lower cretaceous series. It diminishes in thickness, however, with its distance from the chalk, so that the oolitic platforms of the Department are mostly free from it. As also in Calvados,—where the detritus on the surface of the country, between * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. p. 118. Fig. 1.—Section of the Coast from Highcliff towards Muddiford (true scale). AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 495 f. Valley-gravels. d. High-level gravels. e. Old cliff. c. Barton clay. b. Line of pebbles. Caen and the Orne* consists almost exclusively of waterworn quartzose and old Silurian rocks. § IL. Superficial Detritus of the East End of the Channel. Dorset.—Detritus caps the summit-levels of all the hills which extend from Devonshire into Dorset ; it presents a twofold division+—the lower consisting of more irregular materials than the other, with a marked line of separation, and with this further characteristic for the upper portion, that it contains rounded pebbles of white quartz, porphyry, and granite. It is only in the valleys that those local accumulations are met with which include the remains of the large mammalia. The whole of these high-level gravel-beds were spread out before the surface of these counties was in- tersected by its present system of deep combes and broad valleys, showing the vast lapse of time which separates these two accumulations. Passing thence into the tertiary area of Dorset and Hants, we find the vast amount of detritus which covers the surface strongly marked from the coast as far inland as Salisbury. For the purpose of comparing this tertiary area with that beyond it on the west, the geologist cannot do better than follow the coast-sections from Portland and Wey- mouth Bay, by Studland, and thence to the Solent f. Poole Harbour is partly due to denudation and partly to depression. On the east is high ground, which at a spot.a little to the right of the road lead- ing to Bournemouth will be found to be capped by an isolated mass of gravel, in which are several very extensive pits. This accumulation differs in many respects from the ordinary gravel-beds of the di- strict, the most important point with reference to the present sketch being the presence of water- worn specimens of white quartz, granite, and por- phyry. It is very probable that similar gravel- beds may occur over the area which lies between Poole and Dorchester, but whether such is the case or not, I am disposed to consider the high-level gravel east of Poole as an outlying mass of the same age as that which caps all the tabular hills of Devon and Dorset, as far as the valley of the Char; and this, from the presence of these materials alone. * De Caumont, Topog. de Calvados. + Trans. Geol. Soc. 2 ser. vol. vi. p. 448. t See Lyell, Trans. Geol. Soc. 2 ser. vol. ii. pl. 30, for a section of part of this line. 46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Isle of Wight.—The superficial accumulations of the Isle of Wight are remarkably well exhibited in numerous sections along its coast- line, as well as in the interior. From these it will readily be seen that they are referable mainly, first, to an old series which extended uniformly over the whole of the northern or tertiary portion of the island, and, occupying in part the transverse valleys of the central chalk-ridge, was spread out over the whole of the valleys of denu- dation, nearly to the base of the chalk-range on the south. These old or high-level gravels are well seen on the hill-tops along the northern coast, and the following section illustrates their general characters. Fig. 2.—Section of Gravel-beds above Cowes. fo ig wianiGh Sr --a=-— = 29!) Gravel: hin ih Wilthe| areas 3. Red and mottled brick-earth. eh I, tli . Clay-bands. . Yellow and buff sandy gravel. Gravels. . Coarse gravel. - Red coarse gravel, much waterworn. ; Nearly all the valleys of the tertiary area, as well as of the green- sand, have been cut out since the original outspread of this accumula- tion. The beds of this age have not been found to contain any animal remains ; and, whatever their age may be, this much is certain, that they came next in order of time, after the uppermost fluvio- marine deposits of the Nummulitic formation. The gravel-beds next in age mostly overlie portions of those just described ; but they are superior also to the remains of old terres- trial surfaces. The relations of these two sets of gravel-beds are well shown in the cliff-section at Freshwater Gate, which has been fully described elsewhere*, but of which part is represented in the following woodcut. Fig. 3. —Section showing the relations of the Gravel-beds at Freshwater. a. Chalk. 6. Lower or older red gravel. c. Old surface and talus. d. Gravel with elephant-remains. e. Brick-earth. These overlying gravel-beds, both here and in other parts of the * Memoirs of the Geological Survey, 1856; Isle of Wight, pp.3 & 103. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 47 island, have been found to contain the remains of the Llephas pri- migentus. The changes which are recorded in the section here given, and which may be taken as a type of the relations of two sets of accu- mulations, both having an extensive range, are as follow :— 1. The older gravel-beds were accumulated, partly in some old valleys (which will be found to be mostly in lines of disturbance) and in part over an extended level surface. 2. The next result indicated is that of excavation, by which the beds along the old valleys were cut out along a central line; the broader expanses were also greatly denuded, and this: process in some cases extended deep into the subjacent strata. 3. Terrestrial conditions followed. This was the period of the Elephas primigenius and associated fauna ; and it was during the long lapse of time which is indicated by the great abundance of these re- mains, that the older gravel-beds became cemented and charged by peroxide of iron, from the percolation of surface-water. 4. This surface was submerged to as great as, or even to a greater extent than the subsidence that existed during the accumulation of the older gravel-beds: the valleys which had been cut out were again filled with detritus that caught up with it the harder and more per- sistent portions of those animals which had left their remains there. These gravel-beds were themselves excavated as we now find them, and nearly along the same lines as before. In these changes each pro-_ cess of accumulation corresponds to a period of gradual depression, and each denudation to a rise. 6. The highest or newest beds, which are referable to a state of things somewhat different from such as exists at present, are those described as the “ brick-earth,’’? which is a subaérial accumulation, and therefore necessarily at places cotemporary with fluviatile and lacustrine depositions: such, for instance, in the Isle of Wight, are the beds of sand, clays, and marl which are to be seen in the cliff sec- tion of Tolland’s Bay*. Gravel Beds of the Sussex Levels.—No detritus whatever is found along the base of the escarpment of the South Downs, as from Cocking to Duncton, whereas chalk-flints form broad and thick accumulations at the foot of their outer slopes. The tract beneath the chalk-downs, of which Chichester may be taken as the centre, has been described as a plain, which it is to the eye; but, though the difference of level may be slight, it will readily be seen that it presents two levels; and that, bordering on the chalk, there is an upper zone composed of flint-gravel, as at West Hampnet. In places this gravel has a banded arrangement, from the presence of seams of sand; but where it contains much clay, as is often the case, no such arrangement can be traced. The whole is coloured and often cemented by iron. Of this age are the gravel-beds of the Broile, thence extending eastwards. They usually overlie lower tertiary clay strata. * Mem. Geol. Surv. Isle of Wight, pp. 8 & 105. 48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. This upper gravel-terrace has a very marked slope or face along its southern edge. The second level is that which extends from the base of the upper terrace ; it is also composed of gravel, and may be seen in numerous excavations about Chichester, as over the Port-field, and eastwards, along the line of railway. This gravel is much more worn than the other, is cleaner, and has a very marked horizontal arrangement, with seams of diagonally drifted sands. It thickens rapidly from north to south, or seawards. In places where these latter gravel-beds are worked through, as along or near the line where they meet those first described, the relative positions of the two accumulations may be seen, the lower beds of the red gravel being continued beneath the second or lower- level series. The gravel-beds of the south of Sussex may therefore be divided into two groups, distinguishable by colour, composition, and relative position; the oldest is locally known as the ‘‘red gravel,” and the newer as the “‘ white gravel.” The beds of red gravel, of which a portion alone now remains, at one time extended over the whole of the chalk and nummulitic plat- form which supports the deposits of the Sussex levels and patches of it may be seen in advance of the present coast-line as far as low water (see fig. 4, f, p. 49). The line of slope which marks their westward boundary is nothing more than the coast-line of the period of the “‘ white gravel” series. The materials of the one have been taken from the other accumulation, and re-arranged. In addition to chalk-flits, the ‘‘red gravel’’ contains blocks of grey-wether-sandstone from the lower tertiary strata; but no animal remains have ever been found; in which respect, notwithstanding its low position, it resembles the gravel-beds of the higher-level gravels on the chalk, and to that series I am disposed to refer it. § III. Deposits of the Sussex Levels, above the Red Gravel. 1. Marine Deposits with Lutraria rugosa.—The oldest of the newer tertiary deposits of the Sussex levels, taking the series in ascending order, is to be seen only at extreme low-water in Bracklesham Bay, thence round or in advance of Selsea Bill, as far as the entrance into Pagham Harbour ; it has been met with beneath the overlying deposits of the Selsea peninsula at a depth which places its upper surface below the high-water-level there, and the consequence of this position is, that it is only occasionally and imperfectly exhibited ; towards the upper limit of the tide it is generally covered up by sand and shingle; lower down it is presented in detached patches. This portion of the Sussex series forms the ‘‘ mud-deposit”’ of Mr. Dixon’s description,—a very fitting name, as, apart from other con- siderations, its composition distinguishes it from the beds above ; it consists of an extremely fine sandy mud, which is so firm and cohe- rent that even small patches resist the action of the sea for a con- siderable time; but for this, it would be rapidly removed from off AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 49 the platform of consolidated nummulitic strata on which it rests. (See fig. 4, g.) Fig. 4.—Diagram-section showing the general relations of the newer Tertiary deposits of the Sussex Levels. uy as ‘9 |) 5S il ‘i 3A ain iS) Ss ar] a al‘ Pe oleae | a a gaa eo Se Us Low-water-level. SS ee us CEUTA a. Vegetable mould. J%. Brick-earth. c. Gravel, with occasional seams of sand and pebbles, and with shells. d. Yellow clayey gravel, with large blocks. e. Marine mud-deposit, with Lutraria rugosa, &c. jf. Lower red gravel. 4g. Older tertiary strata. The thickness of this deposit, and the probability of its increase seawards, can only be properly estimated when seen at low-water spring-tides ; on one such occasion I measured thicknesses of from 18 to 20 feet at places where the mass was partly above water, and at the same time intersected by deep channels ; in these positions it is seen passing away beneath the sea-bed of this part of the Sussex coast ; or, in other words, the area of its accumulation had its main extension im that direction. From low-water landwards the deposit diminishes in thickness. This is in part due to ordinary coast-line destruction ; but it will be seen that where it passes beneath the higher deposits of the Sussex levels, as in the coast-sections, it has a furrowed uneven surtace, showing that it experienced considerable denudation in this direction either before or at the time those newer beds were accumulated. It is not found far inland. It evidently, however, had at one time a greater continuous extension in this direction, from the small patches which occasionally occur. The dark colour of these beds seems to be partly due to diffused vegetable matter ; their composition, in the uniform minuteness of their particles, indicates tranquil deposition; the condition of the water beneath which this took place must, however, be mainly de- rived from the habits of the included Testacea. ‘The whole of this deposit, so far as the limits within which it can be observed extend, is seen to rest on a portion of that broad platform of chalk and nummulitic strata which has been already noticed, with the occasional intervention of patches of gravel (fig. 4,7) ; this platform, when denuded, exhibits a surface which is of some interest in the his- tory of the change the area has undergone. On the coast near Medmeney, on the Bracklesham Bay side, the surface is occupied by the remains of a colony of the Pholas crispata which has burrowed into it; and the first peculiarity which strikes the attention is the enormous size which this species here attained. This is not confined VOL. XIII.—PART I. E 50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. to some few cases, which might be exceptional, but every individual has dimensions exceeding the largest known recent examples. The perforations made by this mollusk are filled with fine sand, such as forms occasionally the lowest portion of the “‘ mud-deposit ;”’ and it is in these cavities, and between the valves of the Pholades, that some of the characteristic shells to be noticed have occurred, such as the Pecten polymorphus. The largest that I have seen of these Pho- lades measured six inches in length ; and it is somewhat strange that so remarkable a form, which has been known to shell-coilectors for some time, should not have succeeded in drawing attention to the Hots as to what species might be associated with it in the same beds.* The Pholas crispata is not only a littoral species, but is one which, from its very restricted range, serves well to determine the level of the tidal waters at the commencement of the Selsea deposits. Fossils of the Mud-deposit, and its relative age.—The only Mam- malian remains which have been found in this old estuarine deposit of Selsea are those of the Hlephas primigenius; these are tolerably abundant: and there is this point of geological interest attaching to these specimens, that they do not here occur as single and detached teeth, or portions of tusks, as happens in the overlying gravel-beds ; but so many parts of the animal have been found together, as to leave no doubt but that entire skeletons lie embedded in this deposit. Such was certainly the case in one instance which came to my knowledge, where the head, with the teeth and tusks, and numerous bones lay together in close juxtaposition. Gasteropods. Fusus turricula, Mont. | Mangelia| [Clavatula, Lam.]. Living, and common on all British Coasts, but essentially a Boreal Atlantic species. Fossil, in the Red Crag, common ; also in the Faluns [ Pleuro- toma clavula, Duj.], where it is scarce. Bridlington. Buccinum undatum, Lam. Living in the Northern Atlantic, but does not extend to the Coast of Spain. Fossil ; in the Coralline Crag scarce, in Red Crag common ; and extended into the Mediterranean at the time of the Sicilian beds.—Philippi; vol. i. p. 226. Nassa reticulata, Linn.= Buccinum. Living; has a wide range ; common on all British Coasts ; Mediterranean. A salt-lagoon shell.— Phil. Fossil; Mr. S. Wood states that he has not seen an undoubted specimen of this species from any of the three divisons of the Crag formation. Monog. Crag Moll. p. 33. It is not quoted by Philippi as pecleerine in the Sicilian beds. Cyprea europea, Lam. Living ; common on all British Coasts. * [have been informed that these Pholades were considered by most collectors as recent and not as fossil shells. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 51 Natica monilifera, Lam. Living, on most of our coasts ; ranges as far as North Coast of Spain. Fossil, in the Red Crag. Cerithium reticulatum, Da Cost.=C. lima, Brug. Living ; British distribution, West and South ; it is remarked by Messrs. Forbes and Hanley that this species is ‘‘ appa- rently of comparatively recent origin within our area.” It ranges along the Coasts of Spain, Portugal, Mediterranean, Africa, Canaries, &c. Fossil ; has not been found in the Crag deposits, but occurs in the marine beds of the Nar Valley (Norfolk), and abun- dantly in Sicily (PAzl.). Sealaria communis, Lam. Living; British distribution, West and South, to the Medi- terranean. Inttorina petrea, Gray,=L. neritoides, Linn. Living; absent or very local on the shores of Kent and Sussex.—Forbes and Hanley, Br. Moll. vol. iii. p. 28. Marks the upper tide-lme on most coasts: ranges South to Mediterranean, where it is very scarce (PAil.). Lacuna pallidula, Da Costa. Common on the British coasts. Rissoa cimex, Mont.=R. crenulata, Mich. A Southern and Western species ; common about the Channel Islands, Spain, Portugal, and Mediterranean. Has not been noticed in the Crag. Rissoa reticulata, Mont.=R. punctura, Mont. British distribution, mostly South and West ; its wider range has not been ascertained. Mr. 8. Wood identifies this as a Coralline Crag shell. It is not the R. reticulata of Philippi. Rissoa costata, Mont. R. exigua, Mich. Common on the South coast of England, becoming scarcer northwards; both in Irish Channel and German Ocean ; most abundant about the Channel Islands; common in Mediterranean. Not quoted from the Crag; occurs in the marine beds of Sicily and Calabria. Trochus cinerarius, Linn. A common marginal shell ranging from high northern lati- tudes to the North coast of Spain. A Red Crag species. Chemnitzia elegantissima, Mont. On most coasts, but most abundant on the South and West coasts of Spain and Portugal, Mediterranean, Canaries. Scarce in the Coralline Crag ; not noticed in the Red Crag. Bivalves. Pecten maximus, Linn. Along the Atlantic shores of the British Islands (Forbes and E2 52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Hanley). Ascends the English Channel; ranges along the coasts of Spain and Portugal to the Canaries. Occurs fossil in the Crag deposits, in the Clyde beds, and in Ireland, Italy, and France. Pecten varius, Lam. On all our coasts, and those of France, Spain, Portugal, and Mediterranean. Is not found in the Crag deposits, and sparingly in Pleisto- cene beds (Forbes and Hanley) ; abundant in Italian and Sicilian beds. Pecten polymorphus, Bronn. See Philippi, Enum. Moll. Sic. Ranges from Lisbon South ; common in the Mediterranean ; in Mr. M‘Andrew’s list of Madeira species. Fossil in Italian and Sicilian beds. Note.—This interesting shell was identified by Mr. G. B. Sowerby. Nucula margaritacea, Lam.: N. nucleus, Linn. Common; with a wide European range ; Mediterranean, West Africa. Scarce in Cor. Crag; common in Red Crag. Cardium edule, Linn. Cardium tuberculatum, Lam. [rusticum, Linn.| (Forbes and Han- ley). “Essentially a Southern species.’”’—Forbes and Hanley. Not in the Crag deposits. Cardium exiguum, Mont. ** More Southern than Northern ;” ranges along the Western coasts of the British Islands. In the Mediterranean and ABgean. Has not been found in the Crag. Lucina borealis, Linn. =L. radula, Lam. A widely distributed Northern species, but does not appa- rently rangeas far South as the coasts of Spam.—M ‘Andrew. Not noticed by Philippi as living in Mediterranean. Common in Crag of the Germanic area, and in some marine beds near Valogres. In Italian and Sicilian beds? Venus verrucosa, Linn. A South-coast specimen ; abundant about the Channel Islands, and occurs as high as Little Hampton. On coasts of Por- tugal, Mediterranean, and Canaries. Was not in the German Ocean area at the time of the Crag. Glas in the marine beds of Wexford. Tapes pullastra, Wood. British Coasts, Channel Islands, and North coast of Spain. Littoral species, not found in the Crag. Tapes decussata, Linn. More common on the South-west portion of our coast than elsewhere ; ranges South but not North of the British Islands.—Forbes and Hanley. Common in Mediterranean. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 53 Tapes aurea, Gmelin. Along the West of the British Islands ; in the Channel as high as Little Hampton. It occurs in some marine beds near Dublin. One specimen only has been seen from the Crag. Mr. G. Sowerby remarks that the fossil specimens from Sussex resemble the Mediter- ranean variety. Mactra stultorum, Linn. Common, with a great range. In the Crag deposits. Mactra subtruncata, Da Costa. A common shell, with a great European range. In Red Crag. Lutraria Listeri=L. piperata, Gm. Common in most estuaries and muddy bays. Lutraria oblonga, Chem.=L. solenoides, Lam. Rare; British distribution, South and West. Lutraria elliptica ?, Lam. Lutraria rugosa, Linn. Encl. Meth. pl. 254. fig. 2. Desh. Tr. Elem. vol. i. pt. 1. p. 274. Living on the coasts of Algeria and Morocco (Desh.) ; and of the Canaries, South of Spain, and Por- tugal (M‘Andrew). Fossil in Italy: Desh., Sismonda; but not noticed by Phi- lippi; in Sicily either recent or fossil. Syndosmya Boysii. An Atlantic species ; rare ; ranging to coast of Spain. In Mr. G. Sowerby’s list of Selsea species. Solen siliqua, Linn. Common on all muddy shores. Mya arenaria, Linn. In bays and estuaries, common ; range Northern. Mya truncata, Linn. Common in muddy estuaries; range Northern. Fossil in Crag: Sicilian deposits. Pholas crispata, Linn. According to Messrs. Forbes and Hanley “on the southern shores of England, it is reckoned among the less common shells ;”’ it is more abundant to the North.—Brit. Moll. vol. i. pp. 115, 116. It is a Scandinavian species ; but is not cited by Mr. M‘Andrew from the coast of Spain or Por- tugal; nor by Philippi as either recent or fossil. The largest known examples exceed 3 in. in length, and are about 1? in. in breadth; the specimens alluded to are in a subfossil state from some estuary sands near Dublin. It occurs in the Crag, but the examples from that formation are much less than as above. Pholas dactylus, Linn. The foregoing list is a limited one, containing only 38 species ; it includes some forms not noticed by Mr. Sowerby in Mr. Dixon’s 54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. work, such as Cerithium reticulatum, which is very abundant im this deposit, and it omits several* which I have not seen. Taking the assemblage as it is here given, and in conjunction with what has been said respecting the deposit itself, we may infer, from the circumstances of position of the Pholas crispata, that the relation of the land to sea-level was then, for this spot at least, much what it is now, or that these ledges in which it is found, then lay, between tides, on a coast-line. The Pecten polymorphus, which occurs in the sand filling the cavities of the Pholades and in other sands immediately above, belongs, when living, to a sea-zone deeper than that occupied by Pho/ades, and ranging from 10 to 12 fathoms; in these sands it is met with only in detached valves, and must have been washed up from a lower to a higher zone. Subsequently to the condition of coast-line here indicated, some change must have happened which caused the same spot to be in- cluded within an area admitting only of the tranquil deposition of mud and silt. Many of the bivalved molluses of the foregoing list lived in and on this mud, as is evident from the positions in which the shells are now found, more particularly the Mye, Lutrarie, and Pullastre (Tapes) ; or the whole of this assemblage of shells, as well as the composition of the beds containing them, indicates that this area became an enclosed salt-water lagoon, so that the list must be con- sidered as a special one,—the result of local conditions subordinate to, but also clearly indicative of, a much larger marine fauna, which had its full development in some adjacent sea. We may further fairly presume that this fauna, as a whole, differed as much from that of the present Channel waters, as the fossil contents of the Selsea ‘‘mud deposit’? do from the Mollusca now inhabiting the series of large creeks and lagoons extending from Fareham to Pagham. It will be seen from the notices appended to the several species, and which have been carefully compiled with reference to their dis- tribution, that the character of the whole assemblage is essentially Southern and Western; that some of the species, for instance, are such as abound cn the rocks and in the bays of the Channel Islands, but others hardly reach beyond Torbay on our own coasts. Some which are now found on the Sussex coast do not seem to range further, or into the German Ocean area. This southern relation of the fauna of the lower Selsea deposit is further very strikingly illustrated by the presence of the two very remarkable and abundant forms, Pecten polymorphus and Lutraria rugosa, neither of which, at pre- sent, are to be found ranging further north than Lisbon. We seem therefore to have indications, Ist, of a warmer condition * Pholas candida, Lutraria arenaria?, Cardium fasciatum, Rissoa varia ?, Trochus cinereus? [is not this the young of 7. millegranus or striatus ?], Pur- pura lapillus, Helix nemoralis, H. hortensis, Assiminia Grayana, Bulla hydatis. Great care is necessary in collecting the shells from the lower mud-deposit, par- ticularly on the Bracklesham Bay side, as recent species or such as belong to the present coast, together with shells of the nummulitic series, become imbedded in it on the surface. I entertain some doubt whether Nassa reticulata and Fusus turri- cula should have been included. I have no doubt, however, but that the list will ultimately be considerably enlarged. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 55 of the waters of the channel, which permitted southern forms to take a more northern range than at present ; and 2ndly, of a limitation of these forms to the area of the Channel. Without entering at present on the question of the relative age of the older beds of the Sussex levels, as compared with the Crag deposits of the Germanic basin, it is clear, even from this short list of species, that the physical conditions which caused this limitation may be carried back in time: the English Channel may not have existed as an internal sea at the time of the accumulation of the Crag series ; but, if it did, a natural bar was interposed, and the waters of the two areas did not communicate as they do at present; nor did they communicate with each other until after that climatal change which caused the southern forms to retreat from our shores. The inference to be derived from the manner in which the Elephants’ remains occur in this deposit is an obvious and an interesting one, inasmuch as we thereby arrive at a relative geological date, which is this,—that the lower estuarine beds of Selsea and of the Sussex levels generally were contemporary with what is known as the period of the Large Mammalian fauna. It is, moreover, equivalent as to time with the subaérial accumulations of the chalk-downs, as at Peppering in the Valley of the Arun (beneath which an entire skeleton of an Elephant was found by Mr. Drewett), and of all the peat and freshwater beds of the valleys of the Wealden area, in which the remains of this animal have been met with under like circumstances. Some terms have of late crept into very general use in descriptive geology, and to which a sufficiently definite meaning has not been attached: thus certain gravel-beds, which in this country have a most extensive range, are commonly designated as “ Elephant-gravel,” as if the presence of such remains was alone sufficient to mark a geological date. It must be borne-in mind that fossil remains are only truly characteristic of any beds when they necessarily belong to the time and conditions under which such beds were formed. Certain assemblages of shells indicate salt, brackish, and freshwater conditions ; but, though the remains of terrestrial animals may in some eases be carried out and mixed up with the exuviz of the marie deposits of their time, such cases must be considered as exceptional. With respect to the gravel-beds in question, the presence of the Elephants’ remains is owing to the circumstance that vast numbers of these animals had occupied a given area, and left their remains there anterior to the accumulation of the said gravels. The remains of the Elephas primigenius belong to a period of wide-spread ter- restrial conditions ; the gravel-beds which contain the detached and harder portions of their remains show to how great an extent the area of these terrestrial conditions was submerged. This consideration equally applies to the case of the Mammalian remains which are found in the Upper Crag of Norfolk and Suffolk. 2. Yellow Drift Clay.—The next accumulation which, in parts of the coast-section, overlies the marine deposits with Lutraria rugosa, 56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. consists of an exceedingly tough calcareous, and at times sandy, clay (fig. 4,d). Chalk in small fragments is abundant in it throughout ; it contains also chalk-flints, some of great size, not much aegis though water-worn. The tenacity of this bed enables it to resist the wash of the sea along the coast-line long after the overlying beds have been removed. As to its mode of accumulation, it may be observed, that it nowhere presents any indications whatever of horizontal ar- rangement or bedding; but that it is of marine origin is clearly indicated by the shells it contains, such as Lttorine and numerous fragments of Mytili: these marginal forms are disseminated irre- gularly throughout the mass. This accumulation is well seen between Aldwick and the entrance to Pagham Harbour; it occurs over the whole of the Selsea penin- sula, and extends inland beneath the Sussex-levels for a considerable distance: its upper surface is much eroded, and it has apparently been thinned off much in the same way as has been noticed with re- spect to the “‘ mud-deposit”’ on which it rests. Independently of materials from the chalk-formation, there are also occasionally fragments from oolitic strata, and of fossiliferous chert-sandstone from the upper greensand ; but the great peculiarity of this part of the series consists in the presence of rocks, which, from their ages, composition, points of origin, size, and condition, render its mode of accumulation a problem of no slight geological in- terest. The rocks in question consist of grey porphyritic granites (these are the most abundant), compact red granites, syenite, hornblendic greenstone, mica-schist, green fissile slates, and fibrous chloritic semi- crystalline rocks, masses of quartz from veins, siliceous sandstones, such as those which occur in the paleeozoic strata (Lower Silurian) of Normandy, coarse siliceous conglomeratic masses from the same series, micaceous sandstones with Orthides (Devonian), and black micaceous shaly sandstones, perhaps from some coal-measure series. With these are blocks of compact limestone, but whether mountain- limestone, or from the older middle paleeozoic series of Devon and ~ the Cotentin, is as yet uncertain. Inasmuch as the upper surface of the yellow-clay deposit has been much abraded, and must by such process have been made to contribute materials to the beds above, some of the series of rocks just enumerated are to be met with there also, as will be presently noticed: their accumulation, however, belongs primarily, and perhaps exclusively, to the period of the deposit now under consideration *. Mr. Dixon notices them in Bracklesham Bayt. Sir R. Murchison met with ‘‘a few pebbles of granite’? in the lower marine beds between Hove and Brighton f. The condition in which the old sedimentary or crystalline rocks occur in the yellow-clay gravel-deposit is either that of perfectly * Crystalline rocks, in the form of “ rounded shingle,” were first described by Dr. Mantell beneath the “ Combe rock” or “ elephant-bed” near Se Geology of the South-east of England, p. 32. t Dixon, Foss. Suss. &c. p. 14. t Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. vii. p. 396. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. a7 formed elliptical shingle, or that of large subangular blocks; the rocks of the granitic series are much the most rounded, some pre- senting beautifully smooth and polished surfaces ; the greenstones, though their angles are worn, retain much of the forms resulting from the jointed structure of those masses. On the other hand, many of the blocks are sharp and angular, as is particularly the case with respect to the quartz and slate rocks. In size these older materials range from coarse shingle up to masses of 20 tons weight ; the granitic blocks, which are by far the most numerous, are also of larger dimensions than the others. Fragments of greenstone are to be met with from 3 to 4 feet in length. A rounded block of porphyritic granite has recently been exposed near Pagham, by coast-line denudation, at a spot which only a very short time since formed part of a cultivated field; this block measures 27 feet 5 ches in circumference. It is difficult to define the precise area over which such materials as these, so foreign to the rock-formations of the district, have been distributed, but they will be found wherever the yellow-clay-gravel occurs: they have a wide range beneath the whole of the level ex- tending towards Selsea, locally known as the Man-wood, being met with in the formation of water-courses, and other works. Guided by the coast-section, these materials, either taken numerically or according to their bulk, seem to be most abundant and characteristic in that por- tion of the accumulation between Bracklesham Bay and Worthing : their apparent increase about the Selsea peninsula may perhaps, how- ever, be owing to the advance which the coast-line there makes. Rounded blocks of large size also occur as far inland as north of the South Coast Railway, and certainly beyond the limits of the yellow- clay gravel-deposit ; they are there covered over by beds of a series which will be presently described. At one time I imagined that the presence of these granitic boulders indicated that the beds in which they occurred belonged to one and the same period, and that the altered character of the beds which contained them was the result of accumulation under shallower water conditions than the yellow-clay gravel-beds: such, however, I have since ascertained is not the case. In many instances where large blocks occur amidst beds which in the coast-sections overlie the yellow-clay-gravels, they have served to protect from denudation small patches, subjacent to them, of the characteristic accumulation in which they were originally deposited : in these positions the larger blocks are outliers, showing the former extent of the yellow-clay gravel-beds ; and they may also serve as a measure of the moving power of the water, which when it denuded that area was insufficient to displace the larger masses. The great . rounded boulder at Pagham is a good illustration of the relative force of this denudation, which will be further alluded to. The smaller water-worn specimens of old or of crystalline rocks are of various sizes, such as may be met with on the beaches of the French or English coast of the western extremity of the Channel ; and coast-line materials may, we know, be conveyed to great distances. The formation of perfectly rounded shingle, however, 58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. as compared with masses of subangular gravel, implies lengthened attrition in places, such as bays, where the materials remain long impounded. If we assume that the rounded granitic and other shingle, now found in the beds of the Sussex-levels, may have fol- lowed the coast-line from Cornwall and Devon eastwards, it should happen, that a// these materials should be water-worn, that similar pebbles should occur along the intermediate space, and that they should increase in bulk and in number westward; but such is not found to be the case. Again, under the supposition that these materials may have been derived from our own western districts, it is necessary that all the different rocks above enumerated should occur in that quarter. In- stead of this, some only of the granites, greenstones, fibrous slates, and limestones are referable to rock-masses occurring between Torbay aud the Land’s-end. On the other hand, if the fragments contained in the yellow drift-clays of Sussex be compared with a series taken from the rocks composing the Cotentin and the Channel Islands, the agreement will be found very close and strikig, so much so, that I was at one time disposed to think that they must have been derived directly from that quarter; and it was very reluctantly, and from the insuperable difficulties which such a supposition involved, that I abandoned it in favour of the view which is here taken. With respect to the perfectly rounded materials, or shingle, we know that, previous to its removal to where it now occurs, it must have been formed and accumulated on some coast between tide-lines ; on one side of the Channel such spot could not be less than seventy miles distant ; and although, as has been stated, the materials them- selves lead us to look to the French coasts of the Channel, it by no means happens that the whole of the series from which they may have been derived is to be met with at the coast-line there. This view involves the supposition of a condition of the Channel-area such as it presents now,—under such conditions no one part of its coast, nor even the whole of the present coast-line taken together could have furnished all the foreign materials now buried beneath the Sussex-levels. Even were this otherwise, the law regulating the distribution of coast-shingle renders the supposition of derivation from the French coast wholly inadmissible. Shingle can only travel to any distance in the direction of the coast-line on which it has been formed. A section across the Channel from the Cotentin to Selsea shows an undulating surface of sea-bed, and deep troughs of 300 feet, across which such materials could not have been so moved. But, admitting that the smaller shingle from some distant coast might have found its way to our Sussex-levels, by some possible application of the drifting powers of the sea along its marginal line, such powers become wholly insufficient with reference to the more bulky masses which have been here noticed. The dimensions of the boulder now exposed near Pagham, and the many others of scarcely inferior size which must have been met with, seem to admit but of one supposition with reference to the mode AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 59 by which they were conveyed,—floating ice is not only a fully ade- quate, but is perhaps the sole known agent which could have trans- ported these masses; and such I shall now assume it to have been in this case. Thus much, then, has been established, that at a period indicated by the clay-gravel-beds of the Sussex-levels, marginal shingle and great blocks were drifted away from some coast-line composed of crystalline and old palzeozoic strata, and which was neither that of the West of England, nor yet of France (Cotentin). It may, perhaps, be objected to this latter exception, that, if we admit of the supposition of climatal conditions favourable to the for- mation of coast-ice, materials might have been floated away, not only from the Cotentin and the Channel Islands, but also from much greater distances along the French coasts, as from Brittany ; by in- cluding which locality, the difficulty as to the points of origin of the various materials at the present sea-level would be partly got rid of. The seemingly limited area over which the drifted materials are distributed has an immediate bearing on the question as to what was the distance and position of the place whence they were derived. If we suppose that the Channel-area then stood in its present rela- tions to the Atlantic, the nearest points from the Sussex-levels at which coast-ice could pick up the various materials which have to be accounted for, would be from 70 to 150 miles distant: once detached from the coast, the floating masses would become obedient for many days, at the very least, to the combined influence of the wind and tide, before they were stranded, and would hence be distributed in- differently over a very wide area. The juxta-position of the larger drifted blocks seems, therefore, to exclude this supposition, to point at the same time to some nearer source, and to a somewhat different agency of coast-ice. I have shown elsewhere that the western portion of the English Channel area was occupied during several distinct geological periods by a mass of crystalline and old paleeozoic rocks (Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 45) ; that this mass gave way and subsided from time to time, in a direction from west to east, by which process the present area of depression was gradually formed. It will also be seen that the eastern extension of this mass can be defined for several definite geological periods. Apart from the older physical arrangements which form the sub- ject of investigation in the memoir here referred to, it must have been felt by most geologists that an eastern extension of the old axis of the Channel-area is necessary to enable us to account for many of the differences which present themselves in connexion with the secondary and tertiary formations of France and England, so that the supposition of a submerged mass of old rocks is by no means a violent hypothesis, contrived to meet a special difficulty. This is not the place where such views as these can be enlarged upon and illustrated. I may, however, be permitted to state, that we have abundant proof that this old Channel-ridge existed and served to define the form of the area in which the upper fluvio-marine por- 60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. tion of the nummulitic series of the Isle of Wight was deposited, —that it extended to the west and south of it,—and that streams brought down pebbles of its component strata, and deposited them in that basin*. I believe that the older materials found in the upper tertiary deposits of the Sussex-levels were derived from rocks now lying within the limits of the present Channel-area, and that physical arrangements of old date were continued down, with modified pro- minency, even to the period of the large pachyderm mammals. To such geologists as may have had opportunities of examining the relations of the oolitic strata to the subjacent paleeozoic rocks along the valley of the Dives (Calvados), and have seen the slight distance from the present coast-line at which these old rocks come to the surface, the view here taken may have already suggested itself ; but even to such as may not have visited this part of Normandy, the study of a good geological map will be quite sufficient to satisfy them of the very great probability that this relation of the two series may be continued beneath the adjacent sea. With the waters of the Channel at their present level, the process of coast-line waste will some day reach great masses of old palaeozoic slates and sandstones, and project them on the cliff-sections of the French coast. These masses will supply shingle and detritus to the sea-bed then forming, and these will be in part identical with much that is now found in the Sussex deposits: this will happen on a part of the French coast opposite to, or on the meridian of Brighton. Or, if at some past time, not remote, a tract contiguous to a sea-bed so composed has been placed at the sea-level, it must in like manner have caused a similar association of materials in its marginal detritus. The case here taken, and which thus far is purely hypothetical, becomes extremely probable, if we can show that a portion of the east end of the English Channel area has experienced depression since the period of the large pachyderm fauna. Starting from the coast-line of France, and applying the same rule as in the case of the Dorset coast (p. 41), namely, that terrestrial surfaces between tide-levels do not prove change of level, but that, when they pass down beneath low-water, they necessarily do, we have evidences of depression extending along a line 50 miles in extent. The most striking of these are from Benerville to Villers, between the Toucques and the Dives, and again, on a grand scale, east of Vier- ville, where a wood of trees of large size is seen to pass down beneath the lowest tidal level. In these cases, as in those on our own coasts, the line of depression seems to incline towards the central area of the Channel. Whether this depression was local, such as merely gave greater depth and width to the valley of the Channel, or whether, the whole remaining relatively unchanged, some much larger area was so moved that the Channel-valley was at one time in the condition of dry land, and at another occupied by water, is not a consideration affecting the present question in the least, which resolves itself * Some beds in the fluvio-marine series of the Isle of Wight are wholly com- posed of small quartz-pebbles. AUSTEN-—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 61 simply into this—what was the condition of the English Channel as to its coast-line when certain marginal accumulations were being formed ? If next we examine the bed of the English Channel midway be- twixt Calvados and Sussex, we meet with features of outline—such as lines of troughs and an advancing platform, indicative of an old coast-line*: from out of the most northern of these depressions an isolated mass rises nearly to the surface. The bed of the sea in this part of the Channel is remarkably clean, being composed exclusively of subangular shingle. I had opportunities of examining this in 1854, during a calm day, and found the detritus in this portion of the Channel to have been derived partly from old roeks (Silurian of Normandy), and to be mixed with granitic pebbles, and some pebbles of hard apparently oolitic sandstone, together with chalk-flints. Such a condition of sea-bed at such a depth (45-50 fathoms) in- dicates subsidence ; and if we restore it to such a position relatively with the present water-level as is alone compatible with the accumu- lation of subangular shingle, the whole of the area to the east, which _ has an average depth of from 25 to 30 fathoms, would be raised into the condition of dry land. It is on such considerations that I am satis- fied that an old coast-line may be drawn across the area of the English Channel which defined its limits in an eastern direction until some time after the accumulation of the yellow boulder-clay of the Sussex levels +. If this supposition be well founded,—and it has the support of several distinct, but concurrent, sets of considerations,—the next infer- ence to be drawn is this, that, inasmuch as no possible points of origin for all the varied materials to be met with in the Sussex accumulation are to be found around the present coast-line of the Channel, their source must have been along some part of that coast- line which is now submerged: the course of that coast will be in con- formity with lines laid down long since, and without reference to the present argument. Lastly, should a group of old sedimentary and crystalline rocks occur in this interval, it could be easily proved, by reference to their arrangement in the Department of Calvados, or it will be readily seen by reference to a map, that they would agree with, because they would be simply an extension of, the Normannic group. 3. Marine Gravel above the Drift-clay.—From Aldwick to the entrance to the Pagham Creek may be taken as the portion of the Sussex coast along which the above-described boulder-formation, as also that which overlies it, may be best seen. Very much, however, . depends on the quantity of shingle which may have collected along the upper tide-line. Wherever the yellow drift-clay (fig. 4,d, p. 49) is well exhibited, its surface is invariably furrowed and uneven; on this rests an accu- mulation of coarse flint-gravel (fig. 4, ec). At some places this mass has no definite arrangement, but at others it passes into horizontal * See Map of the English Channel, Pl. XI. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. vi. tT See the Map above referred to; and especially the Map, 7d. Pl. I. vol. xii. 62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. bands of sand and shingle, with sea-shells. One of these, and the principal one, having a continuous range over a very wide area of the Sussex levels, occurs towards the upper part of this accumulation ; but there are other seams which are fairly included in it. In these last shells are scarce, and usually much broken; bemg much in the condition of those to be met with in the upper portions of gravel- beaches ; but their variety is by no means so great as the present beach affords. The upper shell-zone contains abundantly a large form of Cardium edule: at one place there was a most wonderful collection in a band of fine sand, but owing to their matrix the shells were in a very friable condition. It gould be seen that very many had the valves joined ; some few were closed, but mostly gapmg; with these was Turritella terebra. This condition of the bivalve shells indicates a disturbance of the sea-bed where these animals had lived, and which had trans- ferred them to the higher marginal zone. The materials of this bed are much water-worn, and consist mostly of chalk-flints. There are also pebbles of granite, porphyry, and other old and crystalline rocks, but which also are much water-worn, and never of large size. It is for this reason, and from the circum- stance that the larger blocks of the subjacent drift-formation have never been disturbed by the process of denudation which the latter has experienced, that I am disposed to consider that the foreign materials of this stage have been derived from the waste of the subjacent one, and that the conditions under which the larger blocks have been conveyed to the places where we now find them, had altogether ceased. (See p. 57.) I believe it to be this stratum which, appearing in many places over the Sussex-levels, and along the courses of some of the rivers (as the Arun), with its characteristic sea-shells, has been taken as an indication of a recent change of level, whereas it is truly anterior to the spread of the brickearth-formation. It is to this level, too, that I think must be referred the old sea-beach from Brighton to Rottingdean. Of this age also are the beds of sand, shingle, and clay described by Sir Roderick Murchison as seen between Brighton and Hove, and of the identity of which with the old beach at Kemp Town he considers there is the clearest proof. 4. The Birick-earth.—The uppermost deposit on the coast-section consists of a uniform layer of unstratified clay, with an average thick- ness of from 2 to 3 feet. (Fig. 4,6.) It is of a dark-chocolate colour, contains small sharp splinters of flint, and occasionally a few rounded pebbles, which have apparently been derived from some lower tertiary beds. These materials are dispersed irregularly throughout the mass. In following this bed from the coast-section inwards, it is seen to form part of that great layer of earthy matter which overlies all the gravel and other beds of the Sussex-levels, and is extensively used for brick-making. The beds fittest for this purpose are those nearest the hills, and where tertiary clay-strata come to the surface ; but throughout it is characterized by the small angular fragments of flint, which, when near high ground, are often arranged somewhat AUSTEN-—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 63 in lines. The differences to be observed in the brick-earth of the coast-sections, as compared with that in the pits about West Hampnet and inland, are such as result from the nature of the deposit. Along the present coast-line the brick-earth contains abundantly and throughout small concretions of iron-ore. There are occasion- ally also intervals of mud or silt, with a breadth of from 40 to 50 feet, which look much like the old courses of very sluggish waters ; but, after very diligent search, I was unable to find any shells, either in the brick-earth or in the silt. The small seeds of some plant are not uncommon. The brick-earth nearer the hills contains Helices and Succinee, as usual. The beds are much thicker, and seams of sand also occur. It may perhaps appear to some persons in examining the sections on the Sussex coast, that at certain spots the brick-earth passes down into the detrital accumulation next beneath it. Such appear- ances are very common in beds of all ages. In this case, the two sets of conditions under which the deposits were formed render any such supposition wholly out of the question; and the apparent passage is owing to the circumstance, that the fine sediment of the brick-earth deposit found its way down amongst the coarser gravel as it began to collect over it. In places where the uppermost of the underlying beds consists of fine sea-sand with shells, and only a few pebbles, the line which separates the two accumulations is clearly marked. With reference to the conditions under which the brick-earth has been formed, it may be stated generally, that it is a subaérial de- posit. In every instance, in every country, it partakes of the nature of strata immediately contiguous. Its great thickness in places, as well as the abundance of the remains of certain land-shells now scarce, indicate conditions somewhat different to such as obtain here now. Its most usual character is that of the wash of a terrestrial surface, under a far greater amount of annual rain-fall than we have at present. 5. Equivalents of the Brick-earth.—From the subaérial conditions under which the brick-earth was formed, here, as elsewhere, its equi- valents will assume every form which materials acted on by meteoric or alluvial action can possibly take; the only characteristic of those accumulations consisting in their larger scale, as compared with similar ones in the present time. On approaching the chalk-range, the brick-earth passes into a calcareous marl, next into an accumulation of small rounded particles of chalk, and so finally passes into the mass of rubble or talus which is found at the base of the chalk-slopes. The alluvia of the large rivers, with their more torrential character, which are to be seen in all the valleys which open out from the Wealden area, are also partly referable to the same conditions ; for the Wealden district bemg physically the same then that it is at present, both for extent and elevation, could only have supplied more copious streams under the supposition of a much more abun- dant rain-fall. Some of these phenomena, however, as regards the 64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Wealden district, will date back to the time of the large mammalia, as it is beneath the mass of subaérial talus that their remains, as entire skeletons, have been found (see above, p. 55), either beneath _ the chalk-downs or the sand-hill escarpments. To this period also must be referred the ‘‘ combe-rock”’ of Sussex and the mass of detritus which at Brighton overlies the raised marine beds to be seen in the cliff-sections*, and to which Dr. Mantell, in his excellent description, has given the name of the Elephant-Bed. I would, however, remark, that the remains of the animal in question have been found underneath the talus, as in the deep wells in the town of Brighton, in the foundations for the wall of the Chain Pier Esplanade, and elsewhere in the coast-sections. The remains them- selves are mostly more or less water-worn, as if they had been rolled about on the beach on which the talus had fallen. In any speculations respecting the origin and circumstances of the brickearth-deposit, it must be constantly kept in mind that the pre- sent physical features are not those of the period when the brick- earth was deposited. It is further probable that over the ridges of rocks lying in advance of the Sussex Coast, such as the Barns and Owers, the original land may have been somewhat higher than the level of the plain which now intervenes between the sea and the chalk-range. The Sangatte beds described by Mr. Prestwich+, and with whom I saw them in 1852, are of the same age with the combe-rock of Sussex, and are accumulated against an old sea-cliff and overlying sea-beds about 10 feet above the present sea-level. The range of this cliff is inland. The marine shingle, which extends so far inland east from Calais, is an indication of a slight rise of recent date. The marls beneath the peat in the direction of St. Omer are the equivalents of the brick-earth. § IV. Indications of recent changes of relative level. 1. Solent.—From Hurst eastwards, as far as the entrance to the Beaulieu river, mud-banks a mile or more in breadth extend along the coast-lme. Their upper surfaces are remarkably tabular, and they are only covered at high water. Their mud-banks must have originated under a very different condition of the Solent sea to that of the present time. They have now a steep front along their outer edge seen at low water; it is entirely free from weed, which covers the upper surface; and this is owing to the wasting action of the sea, by which these mud-banks are being cut back along the outer edge; they receive no additions to the surface, and are there- fore on the decrease. In this we have an indication of a rise of small amount. East of the mouth of the Beaulieu river there is a broad expanse of shingle, which, near Stone Poit, is nearly a fourth of a mile in breadth. The upper surface of this tract is now raised above the highest reach of the Solent sea, as may be seen by following its * Geol. Sussex, by Dr. Mantell, 1822. T Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. vii, p. 274. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 65 outer edge. This state has been a permanent one, as part of this shingle has become overgrown by trees and bushes. On the land- side is a line of vertical cliffs which the sea never now reaches, but which belonged to the period of the accumulation of the shingle at its base, and when the whole was placed at a lower level ; so that here again is an indication of a rise. Like proofs of the elevation of a former line of coast-shingle may be seen on the opposite side of the entrance into the Southampton Water, as in the parish of Alverston round from Gomer to Anglesey. 2. Portsmouth Harbour.—In 1847, Capt. (now Col.) H. James, R.E., described a section which was exposed in excavating the new steam-dock in Portsmouth Harbour*. Beneath an upper bed of Fig. 5.—Section at Portsmouth Harbour. High-water-line. WHE 1. Mud of the present Estuary ...... 1 || Bt Low-water-line. Se Sand andsahingle. o. o3 acedascss Q Fea Secsaos: 3. Estuary mud with shells: 4f. ....3 |) | 4, Mud and vegetable matter: 2ft. ..4 £ 5. Stumps of trees ..................5 Poe MIMO ON CNS? a a 5.n iain cxninc a sains cece 6 ZH mud (fig. 5,1), such as now covers the whole of the Portsmouth Harbour area, was a bed of flint-shingle ; the level of this was about 2 feet under the lowest ebbs: beneath this was a deposit of blue mud, with the usual estuary shells; and lastly, a band containing much vegetable matter. In this last, the common Grass-wrack (Zostera marina) was recognized, together with Truncatella Mon- taguet. There were also the prostrate stems of trees, and stems rooted in the subjacent London clay. The inferences to be drawn from Capt. James’s observations are as follow :— This section shows a former terrestrial surface at 8 feet and more under the level of low-water (from 163 to 29 feet below high-water), and which passes with a slight dip to a greater depth still beneath the adjacent portion of the harbour. The original terrestrial surface must necessarily have been above the high-water level,—or the vertical depression here indicated must be estimated at from 40 to 50 feet at the very least. The band with Zostera and Truncatelle shows that the depression was gradual, and that the Portsmouth Creek at that spot was then more brackish than it is now. * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe. vol. iii. p. 249. VOL. XIII.—PART I. FE 66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. An old terrestrial surface of the same age and level as that of Portsmouth Harbour is to be seen at extreme low-water to the east of Southsea Castle, passing beneath the sea. On the land-side it is overlaid by a thick accumulation of mud, sand, and shingle, part of which is now permanently raised above the level of high-water ; there has therefore been a rise at this place subsequent to the original depression: the lower mud-deposit of the harbour-section represents a condition of the estuary such as exists at present; and the presence of the intermediate shingle-band is an indication of a greater amount of depression, just as a slight subsidence now would cause the shingle of Stokes Bay to be spread out over the present mud-flats of the harbour. 3. Isle of Wight.—At the north-eastern end of the Isle of Wight the latest movement also appears to have been one of depression. There is abundant evidence that rather more than a century ago there existed a line of broad mud-flats in advance of the shore, such as those on either side of Lymington Creek, above described: this fact is noticed by Sir H. Englefield. When Fielding was at Ryde, on his voyage to Lisbon in 1753, he describes it as totally maccessible by sea, except at or near high water, as the tide left a vast extent of mud too soft to bear the lightest weight. This mud-bank is now entirely covered by a stratum of fine sand, smooth and firm enough to bear wheel-carriages. This bed of sand now extends from Nettlestone Point, as far as Binstead, having covered two miles of shore during the last half century ; and the inhabitants say that it is still extending to the westward. These sands are many feet in thickness on the east of Ryde, and I ascertained that they everywhere overlie the former mud-bank. The sands are bare at low water, but not to a greater extent than were the former mud-banks: there must therefore have been a sub- sidence along this part of the coast of very recent date; and, if we may judge from the increasing thickness of the sands from west to east, the depression has been greatest in that direction. An attempt was made some time since to reclaim Brading Har- bour, an area of considerable extent at the eastern end of the Isle of Wight, and much of which is left dry at low water. The sea was shut out, and in the course of the works for the drainage of the tract, there was discovered an old well, lined with stone and filled with estuary-mud, at a spot which previously had been, and now is, per- manently submerged. In this case a movement of subsidence seems to have taken place within a very recent period. It would then seem, that, taking the central line of the valley of the Medina, there have been depressions on either side, east and west (Newton River and Ryde). Beyond the Yarmouth valley the late Prof. Edward Forbes noticed some evidences of recent elevation. On the extreme south of the Isle of Wight there is evidence of like unequal movements, which seems unexceptionable. There are three headlands here lying east of one another ; of these, St. Catherine’s Down, 850 feet, is on the west, distant aia three miles from Week Down ; and at about one and a half further east, Shanklin Down or AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 67 Dunnose, 792 feet. ‘Concerning these downs, a singular circum- stance is remarked by the inhabitants of Chale. Dunnose is now about 100 feet above the line of Week Down, “ yet old persons affirm that within their remembrance Shanklin Down was barely visible from St. Catherine’s ;” and that ‘‘old men have told them they knew the time when Shanklin Down could not be seen from Chale Down, but only from the top of the beacon *.”’ I examined carefully the whole of the low tract which extends from the sluice at the upper end of Brading Harbour, in order to ascertain whether this evidence of depression was confirmed. This tract is now so low that a depression of a few feet would insulate the whole parish of Yaverland; as it is, the sea is excluded on the side of Sandown Bay by groins, which serve to collect a great shingle- bank. The sluice at Brading, by which the water of the Yar escapes, shows a fall of about 8 feet, which will give 10 feet at most for the elevation of Sandham Levels above low-water. Had there ever been a greater amount of depression at this place, deposits like those of Brading Harbour would be found over it ; that such do not occur is evident from the materials thrown out in forming the deep water- courses. On the other hand, the roots of trees are not uncommon, as if it had at some time been a wooded tract. It would therefore seem that the Sandham Levels now occupy a lower level, with refer- ence to present sea, than they have ever done before. 4. Pagham Harbour and its neighbourhood.—In Bracklesham Bay, and off the entrance into Pagham Harbour, at extreme low- water, estuarine deposits, with shells in their positions of life, are to be seen. Taken by themselves, these beds would not indicate change, inasmuch as they might possibly be the remains of certain depressed or estuarine areas at a time before the coast had been cut back to its present outline. Within the area of Pagham Harbour, however, there are sections which show a change like that to be observed at Portsmouth (p. 65). A silt-deposit, with bands of Cardium edule, Scrobicularia piperata, and Mactra solida, overlies an old terrestrial surface with trees, which are rooted in the uppermost of a series of beds which must have been part of a marginal sea- zone. According to this section (fig. 6, p. 68) there have been, first, a movement of elevation of beds into subaérial conditions, then a long period of terrestrial surface, and finally a subsidence, followed by the accumulation of estuarine mud (fig. 6,1), which corresponds with the lower deposit (fig. 5, 4) in the Portsmouth section. At Felpham, east of Bognor, the order is precisely the samef. The old terrestrial surface at these places indicates depression ; but the overlying deposits show that the area in which they were formed was permanently submerged, whereas it is only very partially so at present ; there has therefore been a movement of elevation. In the fourteenth century mention is made of a sudden irruption of the sea on the Selsea coast, and the consequent loss of 2700 acres ; that this was brought about by subsidence, and not by the gradual * Worsley (1781), quoted by Englefield, Isle of Wight, &c., p. 44. tT See Dixon, Foss. Geol. Suss. p. 31. F2 68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. encroachment of the sea, is evident from the incidental notice of Camden. “In this isle remaineth the dead carcase only as it were Fig. 6.—Section at Pagham Creek. ti ie aes >. a ere Sh. |, a ae High-water-level. Low-water-level. . Estuary-mud, with a strong band of shells(*). . Stools of trees with their roots in situ; a. Platform with roots and trees. . Ochreous and blue mud, with shingle and shells. . Gravel and sand with marine shells. . Ferruginous gravel. . Lower Tertiary sands and clays, with a band of mud-pebbles at +. Om CODD of that ancient little city (Selsey), hidden quite with water at every tide, but at low water evident and plainly to be seen.” The only place at which a good section of the estuary-beds of South Sussex is to be seen is at low water on the east of Pagham Creek, and is as follows (see fig. 6) :—(No. 1) a deposit of estuary- mud, which thins away east and west, resting on muddy shingle and subangular gravel (No. 3), which, though of small thickness, is di- vided into two bands, the upper being bright-yellow, the lower blue ; together they are not more than a foot in thickness, and it is difficult to say whether the trees (No. 2), the stems of which are seen sur- rounded by the gravel, grew where the gravel-bed formed the highest stratum, or whether it has been accumulated round them ; that they were rooted in the subjacent clayey gravel is shown over a large extent of denuded surface (fig. 6, a) at this place. Beneath No. 3 is a deposit of clayey and sandy shingle, containing sea-shells and from 3 to 4 feet thick (No. 4); No. 5 indicates patches of the old glacial gravel, resting on older tertiary sands and clays. The whole of this section is about midway between extreme tide- levels, so that there must have been several oscillations of level here subsequently to the brickearth-deposit. Ist. The main beds (No. 4) must have been raised into a sub- aérial surface, which (2ndly) must have been depressed to receive the covering of estuary-silt (No. 1). It would thus seem, that, whilst the coast-line of Hants and Sussex has been undergoing the process of recent elevation, the opposite one of the Isle of Wight has experienced depression. And also that the estuary deposits from Portsmouth eastwards, as far as Lewes, show a like series of oscillations throughout. There is a great deal of authentic evidence as to the extensive AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 69 waste which the land of this part of the coast has experienced within the historical period; and, when to this are added the effects produced during that long period antecedent to such records, it is not too much to speculate on a time when a low level plain extended over the rocky ledges of the Middleton, Bognor, and Barn rocks, and from Selsea so as to include the Owers. (See p. 64.) § V. Summary. It was only a very short time since, and that, too, in the most advanced treatises on systematic geology, that certain superficial accu- mulations of every European district were grouped together, as be- longing to ‘the diluvial period.’ Recent investigations are now beginning to assure us of the great amount of physical change which is referable to that period, and also that it was not transitory, nor convulsive, as it has been frequently represented. Already it is separable into stages and subdivisions, whereby the lapse of time is becoming clearly marked out. The knowledge we possess of the history of these later changes is as yet a very imperfect one, and it is not perhaps too much to assert, that, of all geological periods, that which comes nearest to our own times is the one which is the d/east understood. If the accumula- tions themselves in these regions are wanting in those vertical di- mensions which speak directly to the eye as to the vast duration of the older palzeozoic, secondary, and tertiary periods, the very fact of great physical changes having taken place durmg comparatively much shorter periods of time is in itself a consideration which renders the earth’s recent history even more strange than its re- moter one. The amount of change which took place in the relative distribu- tion of land and water over the whole northern hemisphere of the globe during this same “ Diluvial period’’ will be found to be as great, if estimated according to area, as that indicated at any earlier times; whilst it presents moreover such a wonderful uniformity in the direction in which the change took place, that, when fully worked out in all its details, it may perhaps enable us to arrive at a cosmical law for the cause of such changes on the earth’s surface. In the introductory observations on the land bordering on the English Channel, the superficial accumulations were particularly alluded to, in order to point out, that even in places where these had all been considered as of one age, yet two or more intervals, marked by great changes in the configuration of the surface, were clearly in- dicated. The interest which attaches to the deposits of the Sussex levels consists in this, that through them several more terms are intercalated in the series-of superficial accumulations, and are there characterized by forms of life, whereby the conditions of the stages are clearly marked. This circumstance is owing to the very re- markable fact, that a portion of the Sussex coast has been placed at several periods, dating back to the oldest tertiary times, in precisely the same position with respect to the sea-level. The high-level gravel-beds, which in their extension from the south- 70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. east into the western districts of this country pass over the edge of all the lower tertiary strata, must be obviously referable to some period intermediate between the upper fluvio-marine series of the Isle of Wight and the Crag: such may also be the case as to the gra- vel-beds next in succession, in respect of age; but with reference to the question as to what were the conditions under which this wonderful outspread of detritus took place, and what were its equi- valents elsewhere, we know nothing whatever ; we have not even any certain indication as to whether the mass of water by which it was effected was salt or fresh. The vast accumulations of angular chalk- flints which progressively thicken as the chalk is reduced, both in Devon and in the Department of the Eure, as if they had been dis- solved out, but not moved, are inexplicable by any agencies with which we are as yet familiar. The British area had however become, at least in part, a terrestrial one at the period of the fauna marked by the Rhinoceros Schleier- macheri and the Mastodon angustidens, anterior to the accumulation of those marine deposits of the Germanic area which are known as the Crag. This terrestrial fauna occupies a distinct place over a large European area. The next group of terrestrial forms is that of the Elephas primi- genius, Rhinoceros tichorhinus, &c. with which, as we have seen, the marine deposits of Selsea were contemporary : and, according to the present state of our knowledge, these two assemblages of terres- trial animals differed more from one another than the existing mam- malian fauna of our area does from that of the Hlephas primigenius. The next question which arises relates to the condition of the English Channel area at the period of the Crag-deposits of the German Ocean. As far back as the year 1825, M. Desnoyers gave an account of certain tertiary strata which occur in parts of the Co- tentin ; and, referring more particularly to the beds which are found at Santenay and at Auxais, he then stated that he considered them as “ analogue aux terrains du basin de la Loire.” Sir Charles Lyell, in 1841, after an examination of the several localities described b M. Desnoyers, and a comparison of the fossil shells with those of the rag and Faluns deposits, suggested that the beds of the Cotentin belonged to the Crag, and were the equivalents of the Faluns, and that all were referable to his miocene period.* The beds in the neighbourhood of Carentan, by the presence of Terebratula grandis, suggest comparisons with the Crag. With this exception, there are no deposits on any part of the western shores of the Channel, none certainly on our coasts, which can be compared with that formation. All the raised marine beds on our western coasts are clearly referable to a period during which the marine fauna was excessively poor ; and, with the exception of Terebratula grandis, the other shells of the Carentan deposits, such as Lucina borealis and Pecten pusio, are such Atlantic shells as are now found abundantly about the Channel Islands. * Subsequently Mr. Wood and Sir C. Lyell have referred the Crag to the plio- cene period. AUSTEN—TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF THE SUSSEX COAST. 71 On the whole, I am disposed to consider that the fossiliferous de- posits of Carentan more nearly correspond with those of Selsea than they do with the Crag, and that the English Channel area was mostly in the condition of dry land at the time that the area of the German Ocean was occupied by the Crag-sea. The peculiar molluscan forms of the Selsea deposits point to a limitation of a marine province in that direction, whilst their habits indicate at the same time shallow water and marginal conditions ; circumstances which concur in showing that for that period the eastern extension of the channel may be represented by a line ex- tending from the coast of Sussex to that of Lower Normandy*, and that the remaining portion, or what is now the eastern end of the English Channel, was in the condition of dry land. The connexion of our area with that of the Continent was de- pendent on the continuity of those lines which connect our Wealden- area with that of the Boulonnais. The temperature of the waters of the English Channel during the period of the Elephas primigenius and its associates was such as may now be met with twelve degrees further south. To this period there succeeded one of a much lower sea-tempera- ture ; and this is indicated alike by a comparatively poor molluscous fauna, and by the results of the formation of coast-ice ; but the con- dition of the Channel-area, as to extent, must have been much the same as during the former period,—provided the speculations as to the source of the foreign materials found in the Sussex-levels be correct (see p. 61). The old rock-masses which entered into the composition of that former coast-line, and which are now traceable in 45 fathoms water, imply that the depression producing the present central line of the channel had at that time only extended thus far east. The first stage in this process of depression is that which is in- dicated by the marine gravel-beds which overlie the accumulation with the drifted boulders, and in which, as we have seen, we have indications of only ordinary moving powers along the coast-line, and a return of an assemblage of mollusca, without the peculiar forms of the subjacent deposits, but very like such as we have now. This stage shows also that the sea then had a greater extension than during the deposition of the boulder-group, as the gravels over- he and overlap it; or, in other words, the eastern end of the channel was depressed, so that its marginal line reached portions of the chalk- ridge, as from near Brighton eastwards. The climatal conditions indicated by the brickearth-deposit are excessive rain-fall and great moisture of the surface. The first of these may be implied by the vast thickness to which these sub- aérial beds sometimes attain, and the distances to which they have been spread out ; the second is shown by the very general diffusion of Succinea oblonga. If the suppositions as to the equivalents of the brick-earth be correct, then the depression of the remaining portion of the English * See Map, Pl. I. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. ia PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Channel to such limits as it has now, and the final opening of a communication with the North Sea, must have taken place subse- quently to this same brickearth-period. On the GEoLoay of Varna, and the Neighbouring parts of Buuiearia. By T. Spratt, Capt. R.N., F.R.S., F.G.S. [Read June 18, 1856.] Varna and the Coasts to the South.—The Varna district seems to consist generally of two distinct formations: viz. Ist, a series of yellowish and grey deposits, composed of calcareous sandstone and sandy marls, with sometimes an oolitic bed interstratified ; 2ndly, a series of arenaceous marls, sands, and fine gravel, of a reddish-brown and greyish colour, which overlie the former, and occupy the tops of the ridges, or occur on the sides of some of the valleys. The lower group is marine and appears to be of the Eocene Ter- tiary age ; it attains a thickness of fully 1000 feet in some localities. The overlying red sands and marls are seldom found in greater thick- ness than from 100 to 200 feet in the immediate vicinity of Varna ; having been no doubt much denuded from that district. On the coast, however, at Cape Aspro, about fifteen miles south of Varna, and ten miles north of Cape Emeneh, the termination of the Balkan, the cliffs show a section of the two series of deposits together, as seen in the following sketch (fig. 1). A local disturbance has here tilted Fig. 1.—Section at Cape Aspro. S: Cape Aspro. N. the two formations to a greater inclination than usual, and exposed a thickness of fully 1000 feet of the red sand and marls. This coast-section shows that the two groups are unconformable ; the lower, and evidently marine series, dipping to the southward, at an angle of nearly 30°; whilst the red sands and marls, which are probably partially, if not wholly, of freshwater origin, overlie them at an angle of about 20°. Cape Aspro is so called from the whitish colour of the cliffs that commence at this cape and extend northward along the whole coast to Cape Kaliakra and Cape Shablur, and present everywhere the yellowish white marls and calcareous strata; varying, however, in some few localities, by the more marly and less calcareous nature of some of the beds; but all lying nearly horizontal. To the southward of Cape Aspro, the disturbances in the deposits increase with the increasing elevation of the ridges, as they approach the Balkan: and the sections exhibit occasionally some of the shales and schistose rocks of an older formation; until at Cape Emeneh, SPRATT—BULGARIA. 7° the termination of the Balkan range, we have these strata appearing almost vertical, under the monastery that stands upon the Cape. The strata dip here to the northward, as seen in the accompanying sketch (fig. 2), taken from the sea while passing. Fig. 2.—Section at Cape Emeneh. Cape Emeneh. Some two or three valleys were briefly examined by me on the south side of the Cape towards Monembasia ; but I could find no fossils in the shales at either of them. In mineral character they greatly resemble the shales of the Bosphorus. The shores of the Gulf of Bourgas, from Monembasia to Bourgas, are lined with low flat hills, composed of red unfossiliferous marls, from 40 to 60 feet in thickness, and apparently of recent and per- haps volcanic origin, since on the south shore of the gulf there are evident volcanic productions, which appear to be partially of a late geological age. The Island of Anastasia (or Papas, as it is sometimes called, from the monastery upon it) is composed of an indurated volcanic mud, which contains quartz-crystals, like a porphyry. It is of a reddish or tusty-grey colour, and is stratified ; but with irregular strata. The points and the coast adjacent to the island, and to the westward, are composed of yellowish and brown marly sand, about 30 feet in thick- ness, overlying reddish volcanic rocks, similar to those of Anastasia ; with conglomerates of serpentine and other igneous productions. The reddish marls overlying the latter seem to have been derived from the waste of the volcanic rocks; and to have been deposited in quiet but muddy waters. The point to the east of St. Anastasia, towards Liziopoli, as well as the hills south of it, are composed entirely of granite, and pro- bably are of much older origin than the serpentine-conglomerates and the indurated and contorted strata of the Island of Anastasia. Varna Bay and the Lakes at Allahdyn.—Returning to the neigh- bourhood of Varna,—the cliffs are composed of the yellow and white calcareous strata and sandy marls, here containing abundant fossils ; chiefly the casts of marine shells, both univalves and bivalves ; but the specimens are too fragile to be preserved. There are, however, Oysters and Pectens perfect. I could find no Nummulitoid shells in the deposits immediately around Varna; but at the upper part of the lake near Allahdyn, where the formation seems to be the same in general mineralogical age, character and size, Nummulites are most abundant ; particularly in the cliff close to the watering-place of the Light Division, when encamped there. Over Kepedjeh also, on the 74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. south side of the river connecting the two lakes, the Nummulites were equally abundant. At both these localities the formations consisted of a series of calcareous sandstones, of very fine grain, which pass sometimes into a compact limestone, several feet in thickness: but this is partial ; in general the more durable stone is confined to the uppermost strata in this neighbourhood, and attains a thickness of 20 and 30 feet ; beneath which are white arenaceous marls and sandstones with oolite, which together are fully 1000 feet thick near Devno. The upper and more indurated stratum is here composed of a mass of organic remains, chiefly Nummulites, Operculine, and Orbi- toides, in all ages of growth; with Pecten, Terebratula, and an Ostrea with a very thick shell; as seen in the specimens for- warded *. Columnar condition of the Nummulitic Rocks at Allahdyn.—Con- nected with the highly fossiliferous condition of the upper existing stratum of this deposit, a curious feature has resulted from the manner in which the rock in some places has apparently become weather-worn into vertical pillars. A large group of these columnar masses exists about a mile and a half north of the ground occupied by the Light Division and close to the upper Shumla road, see fig. 3. When I visited the camp, they were generally believed to be artificial, such as relics of a rude temple of some early people. Certainly a passing glance might easily lead to the idea of their having been formed by man for some such purpose. But a close investigation, showing their irregularity in position, shape, and height, clearly indicates that they are not artificial, as Col. Hamilton, of the Grenadier Guards, has already stated +. For there are some partially formed in some of the rocks in the vicinity, as seen in a pair that are nearly formed out of a detached mass of rock over the village of Kepedjeh on the south side of the plain dividing the two lakes. In this instance the accidental hardness of the upper portions has hitherto retained the two columns united. The resemblance of this mass of rock to a Cromlek or a Druidical altar, together with the rude columnar masses scattered over the country near, is naturally suggestive of their having some connexion with the earlier worship of the East. They may indeed have been so used, from their adaptation to the religious ideas and worship of an earlier people; but certainly they were not the erection or the work of man. They are, in my opinion, natural productions, and having, as such, a geological interest, I am induced to give two sketches { of the group near Allahdyn and to dwell more upon them. * For a list of the fossils accompanying this COMmUAMESHE see Appendix, 82. ie t Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. p. 10. t Fig. 3 is a reduction from the author’s original sketch of the northern half of the group of columns at Allahdyn; with the exception of the characteristic column on the right-hand foreground of the engraving, which has been transferred from the author’s sketch of the southern portion of the group. SPRATT— BULGARIA. Columnar Rocks near Allahdyn, Varna, in Bulgaria. yy a rock is seen to be weathering into a columnar state, by the formation of a cavern with pillars left standing at the entrance. 76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. The surface of the rock in the vicinity of these columnar masses is, 1 observed, sometimes much split into vertical cracks, causing the portions denuded of soil to bear some resemblance to an open pavement of flat slabs. The atmosphere and rain, probably, operating together in those rents early exposed, wearing down the sides and angles, and in- creasing the openings, have finally left the hardest portions standing as isolated columnar masses, or reduced to detached spherical no- dules. The contained fossils have, from their greater hardness, re- sisted the degradation, which probably was more chemical than mechanical ; and the Nummulites, so abundant in the stratum from whence the columnar masses were derived, having thus become de- tached, may be gathered in great quantities at their bases. At the small group of columns over Kepedjeh, this nummulitic sand is so thickly strewed, together with rounded nodules of the limestone, as to resemble the dry bed of a river, although situated upon the slope and top of the ridge. Similar conditions exist in every group of the columnar rocks that I saw in the neighbourhood: they are derived, as I before noticed, from the uppermost remaining deposit of the Lower Marine Tertiaries at this locality, which is, in the vicinity, immediately over- laid by the reddish-brown sandy marls of the second series of deposits which I have noticed. The rounded and apparently water-worn character of these co- lumnar masses and nodules, and their existence on the surface of the Marine Tertiaries, are suggestive of their having originated at so early a period as the time intermediate between the two groups of deposits, and during some moving condition of the covering waters at that period. I am not prepared to deny this; for it seems very probable ; although my impressions on the spot were always favour- able for an origin, degradation, and waste at a recent period, and in fact now in process, under the atmospheric influence. But in support of their older origin, I am induced to mention a curious fact, that seems to support this idea; viz. the apparent existence of a corresponding group of columnar rocks in the Bay of Varna, which rise up in pinnacles from 5 to 8 and 9 feet above the bottom. They were not discovered in sounding the bay until it became crowded with our transports upon the preparation for the Crimean expedition. No one at the locality was aware of their existence, until the hawsers of an English transport and the chain- cable of a French brig, anchored near the spot, were found entangled at the bottom amongst what the French captain expressively called «A group of columns;”’ for the lead would not remain upon their summits, but fall, as I myself proved, from 33 fathoms into 5 fathoms, the average depth around them. A diver sent down by me confirmed the fact of their being elevated pinnacles of rock ; and not a wreck, as might be imagined. This fact seems to suggest the occurrence of a group of columns in the bay corresponding to those at Allahdyn: and thus, if the former be identical in respect to the deposit with the latter (for they SPRATT— BULGARIA. 77 must have been also covered subsequently by the group of red mazrls, &c., and entirely denuded again), we have the fact or idea of the Deyno Valley and Varna Bay having been formed by a depression of comparatively recent date. North of Varna.—I shall now make a few remarks upon the de- posits lying north of Varna, towards the Danube and the Dobrudcha. A line of steep banks or cliffs extends from Varna to Cape Kaliakra, which are everywhere formed of the yellowish limestone and sandy marls, with a thickness of from 400 to 500 feet; and this group extends to near Mangalia, where the overlying reddish sands and marls take their place, and form generally the Steppe-country of the Dobrudcha. The ridges or plateaux of the latter district attain generally an elevation of between 200 and 300 feet, as in the direct line across from Kustenjeh to the Danube. On this line, rocks of the older Tertiary period are exposed at the base of the reddish marls and sands, on the edge of the lower Korason Lake, but are not seen on the Black Sea shore of the Dobrudcha. At Baljik the edge of the steppe is nearly 600 feet above the sea. These deposits are generally less indurated than at Varna, and are, for the most part, more marly, passing, in some strata, into an indu- rated calcareous marl. The upper portion, for nearly 100 feet, is a white and grey marl, of fresh-water origin, and apparently conform- able with, or passing gradually into, the marine deposits below ; both being nearly horizontal. The freshwater deposits appear to have resulted from the waste of some of the former, although somewhat more sandy. Land-shells are also found in some of the overlying beds of white arenaceous marls above the purely freshwater deposits. The whole are here capped by a few feet of a red earthy marl, that seems to belong to the second group of deposits, usually red or brown; and to connect those below, of freshwater origin, with them also. [In a letter* received since this paper was read, Capt. Spratt says— Having touched at Baljik for two or three hours in August last, I had an opportunity of making additions to my former account of its formations. I found the general distribution of the strata to be as follows : — At the base are 150 or 180 feet of dark-grey and brownish marls, thinly laminated, and containing numerous marine fossils, generally very minute+. These marls form apparently an upper member of the Varna series. They lie nearly horizontal, and are overlaid by about 200 feet of a white thick-bedded marl, containing only casts of a small striated bivalve, like a Cardium, especially like the one in the freshwater deposits of the Dardanelles. This mass of white chalky-looking marl seems to be unconform- able to the lower marine bed, although nearly horizontal also. I think that probably it is of brackish-water origin: it passes upwards into a series of white and greyish marls, indurated occasionally in * Read at the Evening Meeting, December 3, 1856. t+ A small packet of this shelly deposit has been brought to England by a friend of Capt. Spratt. The shells are small, and prove to be Trochus, Buccinum, Bulla, 78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. thin strata, which are replete with freshwater shells, associated some- times with the above-mentioned Cardium. These are also from 150 to 200 feet in thickness, and the fossils belong to the genera Planorbis, Limnea, Paludina, Cyrena, and Cyclas’?, with abundant specimens of Helix in the upper 40 or 50 feet of the series. The whole is capped by a fragment of reddish earthy marl, only a few feet thick. Capt. Spratt also remarks,— I have satisfaction in stating that my idea of the reddish and grey sands and marls of the Dobrudcha (Kustenjeh, &c.) being of fresh- water instead of marine origin or “ drift’? was made somewhat more evident by a recent examination and visit to Kustenjeh, where I found the lower bed of grey marl or clay to contain a fragment of an Ele- Fig. 4.—Section of the Strata at Kustenjeh, Black Sea. a.—A4 to 6 feet of oolitic yellowish-white limestone with fossils, probably a mem- ber of the nummulitic series, and very like the Varna and Sebastopol rocks. (This was not seen by me in 1853.) It dips 8° or 10° to the N.E. 6.—12 to 15 feet of unconformable greyish marl or clay, with an Elephant’s tusk. e.—Gypseous bands with casts of Cyclas or Cyrena. d.—25 to 30 feet of reddish marl, with nodules of gypseous crystals, but no fossils. It passes into e.—About 12 feet of reddish-black earthy clay, which is without apparent stratifi- cation, except of colour, and passes into JF and g.—Reddish-grey and whitish-grey sandy marl, from 20 to 30 feet thick, very like the alluvial mud formed by the Danube, and without fossils. A.—Superficial soil with pottery. This section gives a good idea of the soft superficial deposits extending through the Dobrudcha. Rissoa, Cardium, &c. There are also numerous Foraminifera, of which the fol- lowing is the list :— Lagena. Textularia. Entosaienia. Amorphina (Parker, MS.), Rosalina Beccarii. Spiroloculina. Nonionina granosa. Quinqueloculina. Polystomella crispa (presenting Triloculina. numerous varieties, and consti- Articulina. tuting the majority of the fora- minifers in this deposit). Excepting the Articulina, these Foraminifera appear to be those commonly met with in shallow waters.x—Ep. Q. G. J. SPRATT—BULGARIA. 79 phant’s tusk, and a few feet above it an indurated stratum of gypseous bands, with impressions of a shell much like a Cyclas or Cyrena, and apparently such as I found in the Dardanelles deposits. They are not drifted shells, but were tranquilly imbedded in the bed of the lake in which they lived. This band passes into beds of grey-reddish and greyish-white porous earthy marls and clay, more stratified by colour than by change of mineral character. Fig. 4 is a section of these deposits. I wish it to be understood (continues Capt. Spratt) that I am not confounding any member of the “northern drift’? with fluviatile or lacustrine deposits, although I think that has been frequently done in describing some of these late freshwater formations in which gravels are found. But that there are evidences of a “drift”’ of a very late period I am aware ; and I think the formation at Gallipoli (Sea of Marmora) to be an example. This is a bed of coarse gravel cemented into a hard conglomerate, in which the valves of a large species of Dreissena and a Cardium are abundantly intermixed ; the mass being more than 100 feet thick. There is another fragment of it over Nazara Point, near the Dardanelles Castles, and capping the freshwater marls and sands which dip to the eastward, whilst the mass of conglomerate dips to the south-west. On the north shore of the Sea of Marmora the “ drift’ is shown by a mass of cemented valves of Driessena, intermixed with only a few small pebbles. T. S. October 1, 1856.] Comparison of the Geological Features of Bulgaria and the Crimea.—I merely give these facts from a hasty examination during war; and present a series of the fossils I procured to the Society. Future researches, or the observations already made by others, but. which I have not had the opportunity or time to inquire into, may perhaps explain the relative ages and peculiarities here touched upon. Taking, however, a general view of the geological facts here briefly: given, we have the secondary rocks of the Balkan terminating over the shore of the Black Sea at an elevation of nearly 2000 feet, and, with the formations lying to the north, presenting geological features similar to those of the Crimea. For, extending from the roots of the Balkan, we have the older marine Tertiaries inclining gradually from them, and succeeded by a broad district composed of reddish marls and sands, forming the Steppe of the Dobrudcha, as along the north parts of the Crimea. There is a remarkable resemblance in the red marly cliffs that extend from the Balbek in the Crimea, along the whole coast to Eupatoria, and repose directly upon the old Ter- tiary deposits of the Khersonese and Sevastopol, with the second group of deposits on the coast of Bulgaria. I have examined these deposits at Eupatoria, at Old Fort, at the Alma Heights, at the Katcha, and on the north side of the Balbek, and was struck with the similarity of their mineral character and with the absence of fos- sils, as in those of the Dobrudcha. 80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. In Demidoff’s Geological Map of the Crimea, the formation in this district is referred to a Tertiary of the Miocene age, which I much doubt ; at any rate, it is numbered and coloured the same as the western half of the Khersonese, with which it certainly does not agree in geological characters or age. Thus we have, as I have shown, a close resemblance in the deposits of the opposite shores.of the Black Sea,—that is, of the Crimean and the Bulgarian coasts, although an exact geological correspond- ence in respect to age has not been yet made out. We have, how- ever, an evident submarine connexion of the two mountain-ranges of the Balkan and the Tauric Peninsula, traceable across the Black Sea _ in a line between them. For from Odessa we have a shallow sea, increasing out from 10 to 40 fathoms only a little north of this line, —forming in fact a gradually inclined bank, until its edge descends suddenly from 300 feet to 3000 and upwards*, as on the south face of the Tauric Range; thus showing the evident continuity of the great displacements of the older formations, by which the Balkan and the Crimea were elevated. This submarine plateau or steppe is thus the link connecting the Balkan with the Caucasus as a topo- gtaphical feature. It was along the margin of this submarine plateau that the electric cable connecting Bulgaria with the Crimea was laid, so as to take advantage of its convenient depth, instead of risking an accident over the deep region of the sea in a direct line across; for the edge of the bank forms a slight curve to the north-west of the direct line. The freshwater deposits.—The freshwater deposits overlying the marine above Baljik are deserving a special remark ; because, from their position, they seem not to have been formed in a very limited lacustrine basin. Their absence, however, at Devno would rather imply the contrary ; but it is possible that they have been denuded from that locality. The real age of the overlying red marls, &c. has yet to be deter- mined. Iam led to remark, however, that they bear some resem- blance to the freshwater deposits on the north shore of the Sea of Marmora, at Buyuk Tchekmejeh ; and also very much so with those forming the lesser hills along the Macedonian coast, from Salonica, and also in the north end of Eubcea and the Locrian shore ; fossils from which have been long since given by me to the Museum of Economic Geologyt. The localities from whence these fossils came have not yet been described{ ; but the corresponding deposits are noticed as a group of ‘‘ brownish sandy marls and gravels” overlying the Eocene freshwater beds of Samos and Eubcea, in a paper by me, published in the Geological Society’s Journal § of 1847. * Since ascertained to descend abruptly from 50 to 500 or 600 fathoms, or nearly 4000 feet in depth: and in the middle of the western basin of the Black Sea the depth has been ascertained by me to be nearly 7000 feet, or nearly twice that of the Tauric range in the southern part of the Crimea. [T.S., October, 1856. ] + Amongst them is Limnea Adelina in great abundance. t Since this paper was read, Capt. Spratt has communicated a description of the deposits here referred to, in his memoir ‘‘ On the Freshwater Tertiaries of Eubeea,” &c., read Dec. 17, 1856.—Epir. Q.G. J. § Vol. vii. p. 70. SPRATT—BULGARIA. 81 I had at that time found no fossils in any of these largely-deve- loped deposits of red sandy marls, &c. ; but I subsequently identi- fied their freshwater origin, as evidenced by the fossils found near Ta- lanta on the Locrian coast, where all the lesser hills are composed of these deposits, also at Thermopoli, the valley of Xero Khori (Eubcea), and along the Macedonian coasts up to Thessalonica, where I found them to contain freshwater fossils, the bones of a Snake (afterwards given to Prof. Owen), and also some Mammalian bones, which were sent to the Museum in Jermyn Street *. The localities deserve a brief description (which I hope to give hereafter), from their evident con- nection with the Pleiocene freshwater deposits of Lycia, Rhodes, and Cos, and with some in Crete also; and, I think I may add further, with the extensive freshwater deposits that occur on both sides of the Dardanelles from the Troad to Gallipoli, and along the coast of the Sea of Marmora, where they contain thin beds of lignite} in some places, as at Buyuk Tchekmejeh. Almost all the Thracian Peninsula, indeed, is composed of deposits of freshwater origin, consisting of brown and grey marls and sand- stones, or sands, lying nearly horizontal and attaining a thickness apparently of fully 500 and 600 feet; and, from their fossils, they seem to be of a type corresponding with the latter or Pleiocene fresh- water deposits on the western side of the Archipelago, in Eubcea, and Macedonia, and in Rhodes, &c. on the south. The specimens sent to the Society from the deposits on the north side of the Dardanelles will best determine this; they consist of a Cyclas, Paludina, Planorbis, Melanopsis, &c., and there is a cast of some large Seed-vessel with them, resembling a pine-fruit ; this was procured from above Meitos. The deposits immediately over the Europe Castle of the Dardanelles, Killid Bahr, contain fossils in the greatest abundance ; but, excepting the species of Melanopsis here- with sent, these are generally too fragile to be preserved perfect. The inquiry as to the boundaries of these freshwater lakes, if they were a chain of lakes, or its range and extent if there were but one large lake, still forms a very interesting subject of research connected with the geology of the Egean, the Sea of Marmora, and the Black . Sea. Post-Tertiary or Recent deposits.—On several parts of the shores of the Dardanelles there are the remains of a recent marine deposit, indicative of a change in the present sea-level since it succeeded the Pleiocene lake above referred to. For at the base of the hills north of Meitos, and on the opposite coast, there are Oyster-beds at an elevation of about 40 feet above the sea. These Oysters correspond exactly with those now existing plenti- fully in the channel near Meitos, which are largely exported to Con- * These fragmentary mammalian bones were submitted by Prof. E. Forbes to Prof. Owen, but were not determinable. The ophidian vertebrae have been de- scribed in a paper read before the Society by Prof. Owen, Jan. 7, 1857, who referred them to an extinct, and previously undescribed genus, Laophis.—Epir. Q.G. J. t+ For a notice of the occurrence of lignites in the north-western districts of Asia Minor, see this Journal, no. 45, p. 1.—Enrr. Q. G. J. VOL. XIII.— PART I. G 82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. stantinople, &e. The sea-level no doubt was 15 or 20 feet higher than the Oyster-bank, as this does not appear to have been a beach. At Gallipoli, also, there are the remains of an old sea-bed, forming the crest of the Point near the Lighthouse, and containing great quantities of a large Cardiwm, apparently the existing species, and with it I found intermixed the detached valves of a Dreissena (see specimens sent to the Society), which were probably washed out of the freshwater deposits that this recent sea-bed overlies: its elevation is about the same as of that at Meitos. APPENDIX. Mr. J. Morris has kindly assisted the Editor in drawing up the following rough list of the fossils accompanying Capt. Spratt’s Notes on the Geology of Varna, the Bulgarian Coast, and the Dardanelles. 1. Fossils from Allahdyn. (See page 73.) Mollusca. Foraminifera. Teredo? Numumulina distans, Deshayes. Ostrza latissima, Deshayes. N. (Assilina) granulosa, D’ Archiac ; Ostree ; small species. (nearly smooth var., rare). Anomia. Operculina canalifera, D’Archiac ; Plicatula ? (very fine specimens). Pecten; two species. Orbitoides Fortisu, D’Archiac. Terebratula; resembling T.carnea. Cristellaria rotulata, Lamarck, sp. Truncatulina vulgaris, D’ Ord. Annelida. Nonionina communis, D’ Orb. Vermicularia; like V. Bognoriensis. Rosalina ammonoidea, Reuss. Serpula. Rotalia, sp. Entomostraca. Bairdia subdeltoidea. Cythere, sp. 2. Fossils from Varna Bay. (See page 73.) Trochus. Pecten. Buccinum or Nassa. Chama. Cerithium. Casts of small univalves and bivalves. Lucina. Cardium (in the oolitic rock). Modiola (a ribbed species). 3. Baljik; greyish crystalline limestone. Planorbis. Helix ? (fragment). Limnea. Cyrena ? (fragment). Hydrobia ? 4. Baljik; soft white calcareous rock. Helix; a small depressed species. 5. Balik; soft white calcareous rock. Mactra. SALTER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS, ABERDEENSHIRE. 83 6. Baljik. Helix; (in the same packet as No. 5, but the matrix of the Helices, as seen by their contents, was sandy). 7. Fossils from the Dardanelles. (Hard brownish rock.) Cypride. Paludina? and Opercula ? Cardium. Unio? 8. Dardanelles ; (grit). Paludina. Unio. Cyrena? 9. Dardanelles; (sandy rock). Paludina. Cyrena. 10. Dardanelles ; (fissile brownish calcareous sandstone). Cypride. Cardium. Unio. 11. Dardanelles ; (rock similar to No. 10, but more crystalline). Ligneous fossils (referred to above, p. 81). 12. Dardanelles ; Europe Castle. Melanopsis (see page 81). 13. Dardanelles. (See page 82.) Cardium. Dreissena. On the Cretaceous Fossits of ABERDEENSHIRE. By J. W. SatTer, Esq., F.G.S. With a Note on the position of the Chalk- fints and Greensand ; by W. FerRGuson, Esq., F.G.S. [Read June 18, 1856*.] [Plate II.] No apology need be offered for presenting to the Society a list of the cretaceous fossils discovered in Aberdeenshire by Mr. W. Fer- guson, and figures of the new and characteristic species; for there are many points of interest connected with the former extension of the cretaceous rocks from Sweden over the northern part of Britain, and thence to the north of Ireland, which must receive illustration by the recording of such facts as those which he has observed. (See Appendix, p. 88.) His own impression is, that there might be a possibility of the fossils in question having been drifted to their present position. But, * For the other communications read at this Evening’s Meeting, see Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 384, &e. G 2 84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. settmg aside the improbability that masses of soft sandstone con- taining still perfectly preserved casts should be drifted from any known locality in Britain northwards, the point of greatest interest is that the indications are not only of the near neighbourhood of some members of the cretaceous formation, but actually of the “ Upper Greensand’’ itself,—a formation not known to exist further north in Britain than Cambridgeshire. It is probably, however, represented in Antrim *. There appears to me every reason to believe too, that the Green- sand is im situ, occurring as it does at a low level compared with those local accumulations of Chalk-flints which are described in Mr. Fer- guson’s memoir on the subject +. The following list of fossils will serve to show the geographical range of the species, as well as to identify the formations. From the flints of the chalk-formation we are able to add three or four inter- esting fossils to the British list ;—one is the Lima elegans of Nilsson, a species figured also by Hisinger. The occurrence of Crania costata, Kingena lima, Spondylus striatus, Inoceramus striatus, Micraster cor-anguinum, &c., leaves no doubt as to the age of the formation. And the presence in the Greensand of such species as Galerites castanea, Arca carinata, Pinna tetragona, and especially the Thetis major, indicates as clearly that it is the Upper, and not the Lower, Greensand, which here underlies the Chalk. Nilsson and Hisinger, in their enumeration of the Cretaceous fossils of Scania, give many which are characteristic of the chalk, and mention some also which are from the green-sand (‘arena viridi’’?). Amongst the former the Lima (Plagiostoma) elegans belongs to the chalk of Balsberg, associated with Inocerami, as in the Scottish locality. In the hard lower siliciferous chalk of Sweden, the Lama semisul- cata, Pecten orbicularis, Sow., and the so-called P. corneus occur. As this rests on, and passes down into Greensand full of fossils (amongst others the Belemnitella mucronata), there is probably the same succession on the south coast of Sweden, which we are now enabled to indicate for the East of Scotland; and the latitudes are nearly the same. List of Fossils found in Chalk-flints from Aberdeenshire. [ Note. + signifies the more abundant species; — rare ones. | Ventriculites, several species; fragments ...... + Bogingarry, &ce. Parasmilia centralis, Manic viene: tyoete aerzis «6 + Bogingarry. Micraster cor-anguinum, Leske .............. + Bogingarry. Amanchytesilayis Dele. .!. Sate ok cts ola sta 'e bitches — Bogingarry. Galerites (Discoidea) subuculus, Leske ........ — Moreseat. Cidaris clavigera, Mant., spine and plate ...... — Bogingarry, Cruden. he] Umer Sckb ~ Sy op GOCE Or SDI EE IEC eres he — Smallburn. * The collections of Mr. James M‘Adam of Belfast have unfortunately not yet been made available. The occurrence, however, of Exogyra columba in the upper beds has been noted by Col. Portlock in his work on Tyrone. There seems little doubt of the presence of the Upper Greensand in North Ireland. Tt Phil. Mag. 1850, p. 430. SALTER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS, ABERDEENSHIRE. 85 Semiescharipora mumia, D’Orb. PI. II. ree 1.. — Bogingarry. Flustrellaria dentata, D’ Orb. Pitt. fies? — Bogingarry. 2 ISS S| SAIS (A oe — Bogingarry. RIN ESR 3 ofa) s 3/5 a) has sfcl'Sie fs dja ado ne wn ay 9 le — Moreseat. mea, DIOP. es a 8 aig ws ale ie ieee ees + Dudwick. Rhynchonella Mantelliana, Sow............... — Moreseat. Pemren: One OF tWO SPECIES... ....55...000-05 — Smallburn. RPI TDIANIS> SSO8Ds aia aidrin.b Sie 6. o.c-3ie! severe eas — Smallburn. SPMOG IS SETIAUS,- SOW... 0k cece e eee eee + Bogingarry. Inoceramus striatus, Maniell ............000. — Bogingarry. EET ods RE esc enee — Bogingarry. PIPOMPUIGITL, SOW. sess cde cs we ween oe + Bogingarry. Lima elegans, Nilsson. Pl. II. fig.3.......... — Moreseat. Fossils in Upper Greensand at Moreseat. Microbacia coronula, Goldf.... — | Arca carinata, Sow. .......-... + BEEMIRCHVECS, SP... 02-6. 00050- — | Pectunculus umbonatus, Sow.? — Toxaster, sp. Pl. II. fig. 4.... — | Limopsis texturata, n. sp. PI. II. Galerites castanea, Brongn..... _ SEPAEY Gite, cianchaet« ote teaet sats (Discoidea), sp. ........ Cyprina Fergusoni, n. sp. PI. IT. Diadema, small species ...... = ET fev nis fac tins telp aah nb + Rhynchonella compressa, Lam.. + | Dentahum ccelatulum, on. sp. BUDS cc: dele foxy. «oy se — Pecten (probably the P. corneus Trochus; asmall elongatedform — of Nilsson, not of Sow.) .... + Lima semisulcata, Sow. .....- — | Ammonites Selliguius, Brong.? — Avicula simulata, n. sp. Pl. I. SSPaet ey Abe TO NON ra ss — Us ES ABR IE eae Lae ae = sp. allied to A. Paillet- Pinna tetragona, Sow......... + teanus, D’Orb. PI. II. fig. 9 + I am indebted to my friend Mr. W. H. Baily, of the Geological Survey, for several of these identifications; and he has also taken the trouble to describe some of the following forms. Description of some of the Fossils from the Chalk-fiints. 1. Lima evecans. PI. II. fig. 3. Plagiostoma. Nilsson, Petrific. Suecica, pl. 9. f. 7. Hisinger, Lethzea Suec. pl. 15. f. 10. Mr. Baily has identified this beautiful species. Our specimen agrees almost exactly with that of Nilsson and Hisinger ; although their figures are somewhat coarse representations. Loc. Moreseat in chalk-flint. (Nilsson’s specimens were from Balsberg, where chalk-fossils abound.) The Bryozoa figured are new to Britain; one belongs to the group Eschariporide, and the other to the Flustrellaride. 86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. 2. SEMIESCHARIPORA MumiA. PI. II. fig. 1. -D’Orbigny, Pal. Franc. Terr. Crétacées, vol. v. pl. 718. f. 10. Both the upper and under surfaces are preserved; the circum- scribed area of the fossettes, and the position of the two accessory pores in a line with the cell-mouth are good characters; the coarse tuberculation of the lower side helps also to identify it. Loc. Bogingarry ; in chalk-flint. 3. FLusTRELLARIA DENTATA. PI. II. fig. 2 D’Orb, J. ec. pl. 725. f. 19. This is, without much doubt, referred to Flustrellaria; and the very irregular and dentated outline of the rhomboidal cells will, I think, safely connect it with F'. dentata, although we have not the upper surface. Loc. Bogingarry, in chalk-flint. Description of some of the Fossils from the Upper Greensand. 4. ToxasTer, sp. PI. II. fig. 4. This form, though too imperfect for description, appears to be distinct from either of the other two described British species. It is more depressed than either 7. Greenovii or T. Fittont, Forbes. It has a shallower sulcus than the former, and the vertex is more central than in the latter. If new, it might be called 7. Scoticus. 5. AvicuLa stmuLaTA, Baily. Pl. II. fig. 5. We have only the left valve: it is obliquely ovate and moderately convex ; auricle small; umbone prominent; costee about 14, radiating, unequal and distant, with fainter ones in the interstices, crossed by well-marked concentric lines of growth. This specimen is a cast of the interior of a single left valve, with the smaller ear broken away; it is otherwise well preserved. It bears some resemblance to Avicula inequivalvis ; but differs in its greater obliquity. It is very distinct from the only other Upper Greensand species, 4. grypheoides, as well as from A. anomala, found in the greensand of Blackdown (W. H. B.). 6. PECTUNCULUS UMBONATUS, Sow. ?, Min. Conch. pl. 472. f. 3. Sowerby’s figure has so much coarser ribs than our specimen, which, though only an internal cast, shows numerous strize on the margin, that it is not at all certain they are identical. Goldfuss’s figure (Petret. pl. 126. f. 2) seems intermediate in this respect. “The interior cast of P. subconcentricus, Lamarck, as figured by D’Orbigny (Terr. Crét. pl. 306. f. 12-19), would much resemble our shell; but that species was wider in proportion, even in the young state. 7. Limopsis TEXTURATA, Salter. PI. II. fig. 6. Obliquely ovate, considerably longer than wide, and with a convex produced beak; radiated by 14 or 15 coarse sharp- -edged_ coste, SALTER—CRETACEOUS FOSSILS, ABERDEENSHIRE. 87 which are themselves covered by close sharp lines of growth, decus- sated by longitudinal striz. An intermediate narrow rib lies between each pair of costee. The shell seems to have been thick, the poste- rior side steeply bent inwards, and probably (like the anterior slope) free from ribs. The hinge-line had but few teeth, and only at the outer angles. 8. Cyprina Fercusont, Salter. Pl. II. fig. 7. Moderately convex, rounded, with an elevated and pointed beak, which is lateral and overhangs a shallow lunette ; anterior and poste- rior sides rounded, the posterior slope arched, convex, not at all angular or flattened above. Surface striated concentrically by close sharp lines, and a few more prominent ridges of growth. Height, 1 inch; length, 1 inch; depth of two valves united, $ inch. Most like in general shape to Venus Vassiacensis, D’Orb. (an internal cast). But it is clearly not a Venus, as it has posterior lateral teeth. Cyprina consobrina, D’Orb., is also like, but is described as smooth, or nearly so. Our shell is closely and sharply striate, and has not a very large lunette. 9. DENTALIUM C@HLATULUM, Baily. PI. II. fig. 8. Elongated ; slightly curved, and gradually tapering posteriorly. The surface, which is preserved in a sandstone-mould, is ornamented with both concentric and longitudinal strize closely set, producing a finely reticulated appearance. Aperture somewhat oval. It differs from the Gault species Dentalium decussatum, Sow., or its cast, D. ellipticum, in being straighter, and in having its surface more finely reticulated, as well as in the absence of the more promi- nent striations which occur on the posterior portion of that species (W. H. B.). The two following species of Ammonites are figured, but are not sufficiently perfect to make it worth while to give them names :— 10. Ammonites, sp. PI. II. fig. 9. Discoid, whorls somewhat depressed and crossed by numerous strong flexuous ribs, sometimes simple, but mostly dividing into two about the middle of the side, and continuing over the rounded back. It is distantly allied to A. Pailletteanus, D’Orb. (Terr. Crét. pl. 102), but that species has narrow ribs, none of which are distinctly bifurcated (W. H. B.). 11. Ammonites, sp. PI. II, fig. 10. Discoid, whorls moderately rounded, with many flexuous ribs which are prominent towards the umbilicus and bear a small com- pressed tubercle at the point of bifurcation. The ribs are frequently trifurcate, and one of them again branched from about the middle of the side, so as to form groups of three or four; umbilicus small. Apparently a smaller species than the last; it is alhed to A. Jean- noti, D’Orb., U. ce. pl. 56,—a species which has considerably closer ribs, and occurs, I believe, in the English Gault (W. H. B.). 88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Note on the CHALK-FLINTS and GREENSAND found in ABERDEEN- SHIRE. By W. Fereuson, Esgq., F.L.S., F.G.S. WaTER-WoRN flints are found mingled with other pebbles for the distance of about three miles along the shore north and south of Bu- channess, on the eastern coast of Aberdeenshire ; especially between the Black Hills on the north and Stirling Hill on the south, wherever the rocks admit of a beach. Similar flints are found, though spa- ringly, on Stirling Hill; and they occur more plentifully on the Black Hill and the neighbouring hill of Invernettie, almost covermg the surface ; they are traceable also along the ridge, of which these last-mentioned hills are the eastern termination, at several points to a distance of five miles inland from the sea. Here they occur at the extreme verge of the parish of Old Deer, and are well seen upon the farm of Bogingarry, on the estate of Kinmundy, where they are closely packed in a clayey matrix, and contain numerous organic re- mains, chiefly in the condition of casts and impressions. Near Peterhead also (not far north of Buchanness) flint-casts of Echini and other fossils are very abundant. Flints are also found on the surface of the hill of Skelmuir, adjoming Bogingarry ; and to the south-west on the hill of Dudwick in the parish of Ellon. This seems to be their southernmost limit. In these localities the flints are angular. According to Mr. Christie* chalk-flints are found in the drift on the high grounds between Turriff and Delgaty Castle (Aberdeen- shire), and among the shingle at Boyndie Bay, west of Banff. The Greensand was found at Moreseat, in the parish of Cruden, south-west of Buchanness and about four miles from Kinmundy above-mentioned. It was first met with in making an excavation for a water-wheel; and was again found about 400 yards to the north-east of this point in digging a ditch to drain a field lately re- claimed from the moss. Here it was from 1 to 3 feet below the surface, and traceable in the ditch for more than 100 yards. The ditch was 7 feet deep, and the section presented irregular layers of unctuous tough clay, of a dark-brown colour and soapy feel, and containing thin layers or patches of a compact sandstone. These layers were not continuous ; they graduated into each other, thinned out, disappeared, and reappeared most confusedly. They were much inclined, dipping to the south. The whole mass had much the ap- pearance of having been drifted; although, from the nature of the material, and the state of preservation in which the shells are found, it does not appear as if it could have been transported far. The sandstone is soft when newly dug, but hardens on exposure to air, and becomes light-coloured in drying. When wet, it presents a mottled appearance, the colouring being greenish; when dry this almost disappears. The exterior surface of the masses are reddened with iron. Many of the organic remains in this sandstone are casts, and occur * Edinburgh New Philos. Journ. 1831, vol. x. p. 163. > 4 ating T ee Ney Quart. Journ .Geol’. Soc. Vol XT PII. fossils tn the Chalk-Flints and Upper Greensar l OF ABERDEENSHIRE. J De C. Sowerby. fec® —————— PRESTWICH-—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 89 both on the outside of the masses and within. In a few instances the shelly matter is preserved. Flattened spatangoid urchins are the most abundant of the fossils. [See Proceedings Phil. Soc. Glasgow, 1849, vol. iii. No. 1. p. 33, &c.; and Phil. Mag. 1850, vol. xxxvii. p. 430, &c.] EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. [ Figs. 1-3 are from the Chalk-flints, and figs. 4-9 from the Upper Greensand, of Aberdeenshire. ] Fig. 1 a. Semiescharipora mumia, D’Orb. 1b. Portion of the lower surface mag- nified ;—some of the cells are broken away on the right, and show impressions of the ornamented upper surfaces. 2a. Flustrellaria dentata, D’Ord. 26. Portion of the under surface magni- fied. 3a. Lima elegans, Nilsson. 36. Portion of exterior magnified. 4a. Toxaster, sp.; internal cast. 40. Side view of the same. 4c. Portion magnified. 5 a. Avicula simulata, Baily ; cast of the interior. 5. Portion of the same magnified. 6 a. Limopsis texturata, Salter; cast of the interior. 64. Portions of the exterior magnified. 7. Cyprina Fergusoni, Salter ; cast of the exterior. (Some perfect internal casts have been omitted by accident from the plate.) 8a. Dentalium ceelatulum, Baily. 8 b. Portion of the exterior magnified. 9a. Ammonites, sp., fragment. 9 6. Edge-view of the same. 10. Ammonites, sp. The upper portion is only an impression of the outside in the matrix. On the CorRELATION of the Eocene TerTIARieEs of ENGLAND, France, and Bexcium. By J. Prestwicu, Esq., F.R.S., F.G.S. [Read June 18, 1856*.] CONTENTS. Part 1I.—Tue Paris Group (continued). § 1. The Bracklesham Sands and Calcaire grossier,—general features, and shells common to the two deposits. § 2. The Calcaire grossier,—its divisions, and their organic remains compared with those of Bracklesham. The relative conditions under which these deposits were formed. § 3. The Belgian equivalent of the Calcaire grossier and Bracklesham Sands, —the Bruxellian System. § 4, The Barton Clay, Sables moyens or Grés de Beauchamp, and Laekenian System. Fossils of the Barton Clay. § 5. Concluding Remarks—physical conditions prevailing during this part of the Paris Tertiary period. : * For the other communications read at this Evening’s Meeting, see Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 384, &c. 90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Part II.*—Tue Paris Grove (continued). § 1. The Bracklesham Sands and Calcaire grossier ; general features and shells common to the two deposits. In my paper of June 1854 I expressed an opinion that the lower members of the Sables Inférieurs of France,—the Landenian and Lower Ypresian Systems of Belgium,—and the Thanet Sands, Wool- wich series, and London Clay of England, formed a natural and well- marked geological division of the Eocene Tertiaries, to which, as their development is most complete in this country, I proposed the term of the “ London Tertiary Group.” Above this group commences a new order of things ; the rich fauna of the Calcaire grossier extends over the French, Belgian, and En- glish areas, accompanied by a profuse exhibition of nummulites—a feature the more marked from the absence of these Foraminifera in the underlying London Group. For this next overlying series I have proposed the name of the ‘‘ Paris Tertiary Group” +. The commencement of the Paris Group is in England represented by the unfossiliferous Lower Bagshot Sands {, in Belgium by the partially fossiliferous Upper Ypresian System, and in France by the nummulite-bearig Lits coquilliers and associated sands of M. D’Archiac, or the Glauconie moyenne of M. Graves. With the evi- dence bearing on the synchronism of these beds I concluded my former paper, and I now propose to consider the exact correlation we should assign to the Bracklesham Sands and to the Barton Clay. It so happens that where the Bracklesham series is well exposed and easily accessible, as at Alum Bay and in the opposite Hampshire Cliffs, it contains no organic remains, with the exception of the perish- able impressions of shells in the soft sandy strata near Christchurch. In the cliffs at White Cliff Bay,—where, on the contrary, the strata are in parts very fossiliferous,—the beds are much masked by the falling of the cliffs, and their separation from the Barton Clays is not so well seen as at the former places; and, excepting a few leading species, the fossils have not been worked out with that care and atten- tion which have been bestowed on them at Bracklesham. At this latter place, however, no superposition is visible. The beds crop out below high-water mark in the open cliffless bay for the distance of above two miles; and the fossils have to be picked up or dug out, when, aiter favourable conditions of wind and tide, the surface of the * For Part I., see Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. p. 206, &c.; where will also be found a section (pl. 8) partially exhibiting the range of some of these divi- sions. I have there used the old term “ Grés de Beauchamp ”’ instead of “‘ Sables moyens.” + Its upper limits I leave as a matter of future inquiry. + I had applied the term of the Lower Bracklesham Sands to the 100 feet of yellow unfossiliferous sands (No. 5 of my White Cliff Bay section, Quart. Journ. Feb. 1846) overlying the London Clay in the Isle of Wight; and I took them then, as I still do, to be the equivalent of the Lower Bagshot Sands. I think, however, it will be more convenient to confine the term of the Bracklesham series to the overlying fossiliferous strata, and only to call the lower unfossili- ferous sands the Lower Bagshot Sands. PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 91 beds is free from the sand which at other times often covers them. Under these circumstances it would be difficult to say whether, on the one side, any of the Lower Bagshot Sands (supposing they might be here fossiliferous), or, on the other side, some portion of the Barton Clays, may not have contributed to enrich the Brackles- ham collections. Not that I believe this foreign element to prevail to any extent; still it is possible that some fossils, especially of the ad- jacent Barton series, may under such circumstances have been asso- ciated with those of the Bracklesham Sands*. The error, however, if it do exist, is probably not a very serious one, and will not mate- rially affect the question we have in view ; whilst, on the other hand, we may feel assured that, thanks to the able and indefatigable re- searches of Mr. Edwards, the fossil shells of these beds have been worked out and determined with an accuracy and to an extent in no instance surpassed and rarely equalled*. In a paper read in November 1847 I referred the Bracklesham Sands to the lower part of the Calcaire grossier—a position which I yet partiy assign to them, though I am now disposed to give them a much greater extension. There are many points to be noted in common between these Bracklesham Sands and the lower Calcaire grossier. In the one as in the other, green sands are more or less mixed ; whilst at the base of the series, both m England and France, there is an occasional band of small flit pebbles, that, taken together with a certain prevailing coarseness of the sands, form physical fea- tures which, although not very strong, are sufficiently persistent and sufficiently on the same plane to give a distinctive character to the commencement of the Calcaire grossier series both in this country and in France. With these is combined the appearance of a distinctive group of organic remains that continues in successive and changing phases through the Middle Kocenes up to the period of the Sands of Fontainebleau and the Limburg beds, when we find the fauna of this Paris group replaced by another, still of the same type, but equally distinctive in individual characters, as the former is from that of the London Group which it had supplanted. In this paper I will confine myself to the inquiry connected with the correlation only of the marine beds of the Bracklesham and Barton periods, leaving the inquiry connected with the freshwater conditions subsequently pre- vailing in part of the latter to a future occasion. For the lower divi- sion of the Eocene series, or the London Group, I took the strata in this country as types. With regard, however, to the Middle Eocenes, they are so well developed in France, have been so admirably worked out by Cuvier and Brongniart and many subsequent observers, and * As, however, the greater part of the fossils are obtained from the centre of the Bay—from those beds containing the Venericardia planicosta, Cerithium gi- ganieum, and Voluta spinosa, or from others closely associated with them—there can be little doubt that the great bulk of the organic remains procured from Bracklesham Bay belong truly to the Bracklesham series. + The collection of Mr. Bowerbank is also very extensive, as likewise was that of the late Mr. Dixon, to whom we are indebted for an important list of all the fossils known to occur at Bracklesham, with valuable monographs on the several classes of organic remains contributed by various scientific friends. See Dixon’s ‘Geology of Sussex,’ London, 1850. 92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. are so singularly rich in organic remains, that they there afford on all points the best types to which to refer the English and Belgian beds. The divisions I have adopted are those of M. D’ Archiac, mo- dified in parts by those of M. Chas. D’Orbigny and of M. Graves, the latter of whose valuable work on the Beauvais and Chaumont district affords the most complete data for the comparison of the French with the English Eocene faunas. In comparing the fauna of the several deposits I have confined myself as before almost entirely to the shells alone, as these organic remains are not onlv far more numerous than any others, but have been much more fully worked out. Still so much remains to be done even with the shells, that M. Graves and many other French geologists have abstained from defining the exact number of species common to the several deposits. Nevertheless I believe that the lists they give are sufficiently complete to guide us at all events in a preliminary inquiry and to show the direction which the argument should take. This is the more essential, as with a perfect identity im many common fossils, there are nevertheless important differences in the totality of the faunas of the French and English formations, whilst in lithological structure and thickness they also present but few points of resemblance. The Bracklesham Sands are about 500 feet thick in the Isle of Wight, whereas the Calcaire grossier does not exceed, taking each division of it at its fullest development, 140 to 150 feet ; but as the several divisions are not all in full force in any one place, the actual average thickness rarely exceeds 100 feet. The French formation is however much richer than the English in organic remains. M. Graves enumerates a total of 824 species, whereas at Bracklesham there are only 451 known species. Amongst the latter there are 368 molluses, and in the former 651. Of this large number only 144 species have been at present determined to be common to the two countries, and yet there can be very little doubt that these for- mations are perfectly synchronous; the difference, I believe, arising both from the different geographical conditions which commenced to obtain at the period of the London Clay, and also to the differences of the sea-beds of the two regions. The general list of the Brack- lesham fossils I have given in a previous paper*. I now annex a list of all the Bracklesham shells identified with French species, with columns showing the extent of their range either in the Calcaire grossier or in higher or lower beds}. Although the several divisions of the Calcaire grossier fossils pass one into another, still the species are differently distributed, and there is a marked distinction as a group between the fossils of the lower and upper zones: they are far less numerous in the latter, and some few are peculiar to each. In the following Table I have therefore found it convenient to take the two lower and the two upper divisions separately. * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. x. p. 450. + Notwithstanding every care, I feel satisfied that both this and the Barton list (p. 118) yet require considerable correction. Of their essential truth I, however, feel more convinced. PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 93 List of those Bracklesham Shells which occur also in the Paris Tertiaries, showing their vertical distribution in the latter series. [The chief authorities for the species in France are the works of Des- hayes, Graves, and D’Archiac ; in England, Edwards, Morris, and Dixon.] Calcaire Sables Tits grossier. Inférieurs, | Coquilliers [ —the three and The | The Sables Bracklesham Mollusca. : lower divi- | Glauconie | two | two Moyens. [This list contains some species which do not sions. Moyenne. | lower upper ee oo ren divi- | divi slons,| slons. Beloptera belemnitoides, Blainv.| ...... ee * Belosepia Cuviert, Desh. .....2..-]. ...00 Bekanas * sepioidea, Blatnv..........002] seeeee 2 Real da * Nautilus ziczac, Sow. ......c..00+| seceee * Acteon(Tornatella)suleatus,Lam.| ...... * * Adeorbis (Turbo) planorbicularis, i See ecoves ecccce * * eos * Ampullaria depressa, Sow. (Na- tica intermedia, Desh.) ......| ..++. * Btls Patila, Lam. cecccscccecsces], Lower Sands. | ‘3 London Clay. | S Bracklesham Sands, > Sables de Bracheux. © Lits Coquilliers. © Calcaire grossier. & Sables Moyens. & Systéme Bruxellien. t) Systéme Laekenien. GASTEROPODA. Acteon (Tornatella, Lam.) crenatus, Sow. Var. Clongatus, Sow. .......:.00.sce0e|sccesel scenes * —— fenestratus, Charlesw. ......ccccccceeleceeee|ernees * inflatus, Fer... 22%. es SUR an Saalscatsnlee eee * see deek *? | x (Bulla, Brand.) simulatus, Sow. ...|...006] | 2 |[escaselececeelecsees|eeeees a * Adeorbis elegans, Charlesw. ........+.. dees Ancillaria buecinoides, Lam. (A. subu- Tatas SOW!) ci cceekmantacneercseeseckaseocelans sablaaes |e tae | Bao a ee —— canalifera, Lam. (A.turritella, Sow.)|...... Sate al POM teat * * * Buccinum (Daphnella) junceum, Sow....| * | * | * lavatum, Sow. (B. desertum, Br.).. Biulleear Sans iene cccenwatees toda sae ons een ee Bulla attenuata, S. (var. semistrata, DNicctaalt FW) BGieceee a Uiiesesontese * Conus; -Deshe?: |e. ceciebovsacids «.cecj'sulwes ths |Web sie egwews Mclem bani aap * —— ,Coronata, Lams scatssiescce cecuceaveecs lasseas|ame eillidecre * * —— Defrancii, Sow. (B. lignaria, Desh.)}...+04|+ soos) Isao ce abi Vaveives|acageal lane Sae|| oe constricta, Sow. .......006 Side ecesusesl coca |seraeal a sitesellleselcael scam tena hinceman aeeaet * elliptiea, SOW. ..c5..s.cscecse ce owters|.csmem|unesns * EXt@lsa, SOW. wots teeds osan’ 6ci5e- oben, Sacos * — filosa, Sow. (striatella, Desh.)...... Sabre Bepar * | x incisa, Edw. ..... ah biota Rialacia ste olsle viele ace — lanceolata, Sow. ......... SGN PEE rEy, end Bae * ovulata, Lani. Sicssiccn ste whe Siatclaictarabteteill toe ctaiies se Ms Sale ‘fas al) tie * Sowerbyl, Nyst wi. .cercca sees. sinidwSrclleie sian [somes |poeminellwak wai) sairucrl|tesmpnll ae seul eeeRe * Calyptrzea obliqua, Sow. ....... sapien eucatal trochiformis, Lam. ...... pesaiaeiae wel ed | oe CR ee Wiccan * | Ox Cancellaria canaliculata, Hdw. ............ crenulata, Desh. Val. ...cssccscscves|tscaseloecess RT * Evulsay Brandsrcewsscs dactin weniger sad dlcctninal aeweur eh Aaaseur Pn rcicc ae... — microstoma, Charlesw........ coer quadrata, Sow. ...... Sa seuetresecmmiaen eae si se al UMUC aba. plaice Sdwemetvteeae Oolltn + See laamhik * Cassidaria (Buccinum) ambigua, Brand.|......|...-.- * carinata,Zam.(B.nodosum,Brand.)|...... Se Passe yeh ils: * Cerithium (Murex, Br.) angulatum, Br. (C. hexagonum, Lam. ; pyramidale, CINCH, LAM ccrdetanetensckseedscnss| .=<0is.) ai svelackmelfoes —— concinnun, Charl. (C. lima, Desh.) —— emarginatum, Lam.........0....++ oéi —— filosum, Charlesw. ...c00.cstccesecss PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 119 TABLE (continued). Range of species. London area. Paris area. ee Mollusca of the Barton Clay. 3 Fr Z 5 . =i aa) | gu vee Pee eee eee | ie lel2#|e/ ele al a 12) a ) = Lr lx Nn o 2 a) & Py —) © o Sale oe | Be) Saree eos | a Basa | 2. || eee al ae eee hh a 4 a Dn 4 oO n N Hi A. B. D. A. C. D. E. D E. Cerithium geminatum, Sow.? ............ mutabile, Lam. ....... staeeeees hope. i Atal pena colleen ocn|awenae | dees Bs rigidum, Brand. .......++... Tene Chemnitzia rudis, Charlesw...........06+++ SORMEUIIOFMILOT, SOW. 00h ..0cccecccccrees lineatus, Brand. (C.corculum, Sow.)|,.....)...... *? scabriculus, Sow. .....-..ssseeeeeeee ee Fee liaestolnr ae Bn Cae * Cuma Charlesworthi, Edw. ............... Cyprza Bartonensis, Edw. .........+++... platystoma, Edw. .........++- meacniaas Dentalium acuminatum, S.(D. entale,B.) striatum, S. (D.acuticosta, Desh.?)|......|...... * Eulima gracilis, Charlesw. ..........+.... — macrostoma, Charlesw. ......... - polygvra, Charlesw....... gist cate eae PAE CEMICULOSR DCS... 25 once ss ..0l, cc ceclavcess|peese:|{cecene| «xe Ae Fusus (Murex) porrectus, Brand. f. 36 ; (aciculatus, Lam.; F.acuminatus, Sow.)|.....- 24. : It ates: se. U1) Seeded ee aca ook bulbus, Br. ? (Pyrula leewipata, 2...) ccc| ei HK. |lennsale Pee ae —— canaliculatus, Sow. f.18 ............ Carmella, Sow. .....0..cc0se- eT BPA oe aa * PREMISED 5s) cagsiels nee siney ngiee snes |oteace| ses ly Se MR toactilie t sahil wauatt Je all Pak —— (Strepsidura) ficulneus, Lam. (F. purpidus, Brand.) \....060.....0. Padhenioeee ale Aaa a | eee x | * | x * —— (Murex) interruptus, Po) Sa oe Oe ea * LTE Se, Carte tenth enews longevus, Lam. ......... Ata re Be eae $6 HAS be ee sR | PORE gcd ao ake —— porrectus, Brand. (F. asper, Sow. ; ; oe Ua 7 (7) ee eee Be J i: ey | eee kel, 3 —— pyrus, Brand. (F. bulbiformis, Lam. | Ree ee # x | * | x | * * regularis, S. (Murex antiquus, Br.)|......) * | * Hipponyx (Pileopsis, Lam.) squame- formis, Desh. .....< Lge: Sear EO | 2 Se ie eae eee sieire weeks * PSOo rancor rites tM 217) ae a ee as a Se ok Marginella bifido-plicata, Charlesw.......|... seeliee att a PTAs, LOD... ©. crevasecudwesssave= PUstla, Haw... casescceneacsnpes ae Melampus tridentatus, Edw.............++ Melania carinata, Charlesw........ oh eee COSA; SOU. \ciuneeace wee sp hitas Caden PHfASCIALA, SOW. pons cevacs siiiacadetas 24. Miosevdtvmnos obs Se bisickisin e 3 Sultira seneide Pedipes glaber, EMD css ccseee ais iaeinsisiibiele sal Phasianella...o.4 ssc.0. sini pani onl Seca REET Pleurotoma brevirostrum, Sow. ....... st ——. COMMA, SOW. |.....c\..c0cccee ee, eee * — (Murex) conoides, Brand. ......... —— desmia, Hdw....... oe eee ane —— exorta, Brand. ............c0006- at SA sieall sf toeee formosa, Charlesw. .......... ee granulata, LAM. ..-...ceeeeeeeeeee nee) ceee[eeeees wesoslecss..| F | innexa, Brand. (P. amfeKae Lam.) \ 0. veel oe -| oR * lanceolata, Edw. ....... Se ee eae | —— levigata, Sow. ..2002teivensedeusede. | ———- macilenta,,.brand... tow. sete ens Phe eee microdonta, Edw. ...... sigba bane SO 02hG [pee Bee ge | PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 12] TABLE (continued). Range of species. London area. Paris area. Belgian area, 3 || 3 3 | Mollusca of the Barton Clay. & a a 5 . 3 5 a = g = iS a B 4 o as) 3 fac] = ° > & 3 2/Oo/ealo|/B | &®/ ef ala io) ¢ R as) = ra) =) co) © Pile lei sic |\a}a la | & eae) ie We) ee eee oe — 4 fQ n con Oo n mn n A. B, Dp: A. C. IDE) 134 D; E Pleurotoma prisca, Sow. .......... ne oe ee Bs eS ME IR ot ed (a EAMES cactieswassewacenaces —— semicolon, Sow. ..........eeceeeeeeee — colon, Sow. ....... So ener 1 ee) ee Eo} caemallocusice * turrella, Desh. ....... area eves See ws sae jealwonaeeiere =|) Eee * * 2 OS) Eee BE Cor eee Pyrula Greenwoodi, Sow........ aS eit eid (Murex, Brand.) nexilis, Lam. ...|......)ece000|. ) |leeeecelers ve} * Ringicula parva, Charlesw. ........+000.4. turgida, Charlesw........ re ee Rissoa Bartonensis, Charlesw. ....... woes Rostellaria ampla, Brand. (R. macro- ptera, Lam.; Strombus, Brand.)...|...... * Fe cbwoees ce Oe eee *? Womprond, Faw. § s..c0000.-cecrseeeses (Murex, Brand.) rimosa, SOw.? ...|...<0<|..0<0+|.000c-|laccsesoecens|secees * ? Rotella (Helicina, Desh.) dubia, Lam....}......|......|.00.00||e0 wool OE 1 Oe | oe — Oe iaien PP ee ee neue) ck Scalaria acuta, Sow. ..........0.0- na alae R Gate cil Satay ee nell cial grees) THe STGEITUPUA, SOW. ....0000000s000e0. Art) Seem) a Sane * reticulata, Br. (semicostata, Sow.) a SET) ame * MPMMMATNCNA, PICT. cacocostvedsaessvelsnccnolaccsss eo leedeee * ae een ee * SS AONE oc Son concn ~cnasedosec eee he Seal ics Sigaretus canaliculatus, Sow. ....00......|..000 CRs Nee raed | reg Pere: * * Solarium canaliculatum, Lam. ............Jsee0 al tick MeL. ols 2 * * discoideum, Sow. ............ EE ee —— distinctum, Edw.? ....... b Sadontepads —— plicatum, Lam............ BE ee Ae eat ceelas FP iNsomeesle, ape pe i ie —— spiratum, Lam.......... Eo ee eee se eee ee | eee ee 1s Sei * Strombus Bartonensis, Sow. (ornatus, D.)|......]......[....c.||eeceeeleseeee X* Terebellum fusiforme, Lam.......... Sduten ladenetaca netic ndy iits canted * * sopita, Brand. (Bulla, Brand. ; Se- raphs convolutus, Montf.)....... BaGaitesenadied ade dlacimaodl th masts teed lek * Terebra plicatula, Lam. ....... aa Be eee Oe) OS, [2 ee oy bach ke Triton (Murex, Brand.) argutus, ua, Cares BA ieahoewanal, of Trochus (Phorus) agglutinans, Zam. ...|......)...... mei Mts 22 J ee * miomlifer,s Lane: (TU. nodulesus, 9, )| 2. .loda.8<\cobeuil have. oches econ] ocovek ** —— patellatus, Desh. ?..............4 Raina she RUatabeas ent Lower Sands. SS London Clay. Voluta (Strombus, Br.) athleta, Sow. ... costata, Brand. at eect eteee eee rd —— digitalina, Lam. (V. scabricula, oh he Brand. ; V. lima, Sow.)....s.0+0...+2-/e0 ae ecceee maga, Edw. (Magorum, Sow.)......|... nodosa, Sow.........- scalaris, Sow. — Solandri, Zdw. (Strombus luctator, Brarid., 69; 09) eccour.c-cataccseoe ose SUSPENSA, SOW. .......sceceeseres cere sf Volvaria acutiuscula, Sow. ee eeeeree Che eeeeesesere LAMELLIBRANCHIATA. Arca appendiculata, Sow. ...... — barbatula, Lam. duplicata, Sow. (A. lactea, Brand.)). Capsa tenera, Edw. ......... seth cwiaisen tate Cardilia radiata, Sow. Cardita acuticosta, Lam. (V. carinata, S.)|......|. deltoidea, Sow.........++ srigeeeie oblonga, Sow. (Chama) sulcata, Brand. (V. cor- avium, Lam.?; V.globosa, Sow.)...|...0.-J.sssesJeeeses er ee oe eeeee PORTO eee Bee eer asr eS OPaee turgidum, Brand.............sceesseee|eoece|ecveee]esesee —— var. semigranulosum, Desh..........Jese-.-[eseees Chama squamosa, Br.(C.turgidula, Lam.) Clavagella,coronata, Desh. ....0....sseseeJeceeee|eneees Corbula costata, Sow. (C. revoluta, Sow.) Ficus, Brand. (Solen, Brand.; C. umbonella, Desh.)...csseesss008 eter leeeses weet ee leeterrl ares esleerteer eeeeeeleesesel|seeeee Crassatella plicata, Sow. .....0..0.sescese|eereoe| ses a sulcata, Sow. (C. lamellosa, Lam.) === tenuismlcnta, Haws, pesca te-mepeee= Cypricardia pectinifera, Sow. (Venus, 5.) ere er PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Range of species. Paris > Sables de Bracheux. © Lits Coquilliers. eee *? eeeeoe Sr eee: * eae oH Wa aedistsis * we * * * Sunes ST es * * * Bibi * * eu Gate ae * area. grossier. S Caleaire Belgian area. S Systéme Bruxellien. t} Systéme Laekenien. & Sables Moyens. * * *? eeeeee * *? * * * * wee eerleseees seeeseleeeserl|ireeee* PRESTWICH —BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 123 TABLE (continued). Mollusca of the Barton Clay. > Lower Sands. Cyrena cycladiformis, Desh.? (Erycina levis, Lam.) ........- Paeietin eh a iaSieinies sahadesvebes Bevel EEE | Cette es Se OOOVEHUA, DOW. .ccsccscccscccsccccoeses Cytherea elegans, Lam. (Venus gallina, RARE.) vunnss ss Seat aes ee ee eee Pansbhavens| halt Sables de Bracheux. Paris area. © Lits Coquilliers. S Calcaire grossier. Belgian area, S 2 4 ; || 3 | & nD gi] 3/3 — he oS & -Q 4 i o o g | & | 4 a D ” os at ime NM mM M E. D. E. * * * oer alee: *? * *K * * * =" * | eee * * * eeeesilemena * * * * * ee * * so | * * 124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. TABLE (continued). Range of species. London area. Paris area. Belgian area. a\ 4 g | ¢ Mollusca, &c., of the Barton Clay. a a n 5 a a 5 a/8)/al£iai) 2} si ele S = 3 aa) =| =o = ra) | A Se lS le eee eee = g 3 n 5 i n I g Oo Lie} rs) o 3 o a “uo e| 2,8 | sls | asia 4 4 -Q a 4 oO n n a) A B. ID} I Ney | (0% D. E. D. E Syndosmya convexa, Charlesw.......... oes Tellina ambigua, Sow. .........seessseeeees Branderi, Sow. (T. bimaculata, Br.) deccealia A EO ig Remo al eae * * * * * * filosa, Sow. Bean sesed Aivaie mnconaerly aiatorerel erstatetene * pranulosa, Edw... .-sssccocenss suena —— Hantoniensis, Edw. .......... SRS —— levis, Edw. ......... Set Cres Sever lamellulata, BdW. s0s..sc000s aeeeen scalaroides, Lam. ......s+0. Ae Nee a ab wen ses esl idee: am |e = * * squamula, Edw. ......... seedcnasnent TeredO reer encnesccteceeceeesres Shapamenea sess Anomia lineata, Sow.(A.tenuistriata, Dh.)|...... a ee |G Ma fiees h e|ic ey hor yf oc Avicnla Media, SOW: t..sesacesasccsaneaseeculesesice| iek * Ostrea dorsatia; Desks, Ascasaneeccanscnscoee Sctllic biased coe All atarcte| ase en eee * flabellula,Lam.(Chama plicata, Br. DI. RA ee es aoe | ae a oe Alek : oe (ee 2 — gigantea, Sow. (O. latissima, Desh).|......]......|++ weol| acetone Be pak a ark fa ki Ines Pecten-carinatus; ow. +..4s0dessesecseeorns —— plebeius, Sow. .........000.+ aisiondnes segeveleactiar hs \loasems|ecwnealeenaneficee PE | [ic gs TECONGITUS, OTARG:. 2.22, -ckacacecnens|teseaelaneee * PUNTA Bi oho esansce ss semese sececeteons Secor: Vulsella deperdita, Dae SBC OR OA SET Co Mesleseaaalines as'llsnniorste| asec * Brachiopoda. Terebratula bisinuata, Lam........... Sed Als ce scle toa leouteen teem crac x 6 | 36 |103)| 10 | 47 | 82.) 77 \,32 38 Crustacea (Entomostraca). Cythere Wetherellii, Jones ..........00.+- striatopunctata, Reamer ......... cosleccccsleccans cen eg ee ee fe Jul icaer | ok 5 — attenuata, Jones ........++ Serabe Oe —— consobrina, Jones ............eeeeeeeee —— plicata, Miinster ...........eeeeeee waelleaeeicc| ese * —— (Cythereis) horrescens, Bosg. ......|... aay octets ok, 1) | hoi ee et ee — (Cytheridea) Mulleri, Miinst. ......]......Jecseee]eceeee|[eceeeel scenes * —— —— debilis, Jones .....cccccccnscons —— —— perforata, Reamer ......600...)-000. oo Poe sco acc. ae —— (Cytherideis) Bartonensis, Jones... —— (Bairdia) subdeltoidea, Mist. ...|...... de): | stant leeetee sband | pore ee * —— —— contracta, Jones ....ccecesessss —— (Cytherella) Munsteri, Rem. ......). «++. a | a PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 125 TABLE (continued). Range of species. Belgian London area. Paris area. aca ai 3 ; g | 3 Zoophyta, &c. of the Barton Clay. a A a | & : 3 g Sesh B a oe an a a1 | = 3 jaa} b= | & Ve 9 § a oO ao o = a0 = Vege hr ace waeueee: o | sg na 2 e a | 2 a | 2 00 AN ae Oe: ea lee ee eal 4 4 aa) W 4 i>) Nn Ti n A B. DE A. Cc. 1D E. D. E Cirripedia. Balanus unguiformis, Sow. ............ ee Annelida. BPERPMIM CEASED, SOW. .....20ceccassocsrsccces RUE ODD, cocasnacessesccsdovns cxvows —— extensa, Brand. .......cccseccccccees —— heptagona, Sow. .........cscscsceeees|ees aie ERS tA oe IN NO od ucds Caisse vce ariedacsenven|eesdeefoene ve * Ditrupa strangulata, D. (incrassata, S.)|.. Gb lacasbalhs tecatese ON OI Ce Echinodermata. Cidaris Websteriana, Ford. ..... Sradestee sla sdact * Echinus Dixonianus, Ford. ............ Ses Echinopsis Edwardsii, Ford. ...........[eseeee|eceece * Hemiaster Branderianus, Ford. .........|..0+++ *? Eupatagus Hastingiz, Ford.............. a Schizaster D’Urbani, Ford. ............0- Spatangus Omalii, Gal.......... Pectacacdrusteekerclacciselets ceillsetescle cugacleacsestaasssdll Ophiura Wetherelli, Ford. ? .............00|-s-0e- * Zoophyta. Turbinolia Bowerbankii, M.-Ed. ......... — Fredericiana, M.-Ed. ............00. — humilis, M.-Ed. .............05- deer: MIMRE OE ENE. oda vs bscsnacteccases gl PS ES SOR oe eee ae Holarea Parisiensis, M.-Ed. ............c0e[ecees. Patewaladiacslleseckslsaawes h ust Graphularia Wetherelli, M.-Ed. ......... wigewsl” Foraminifera. PCMAGIILES WATIOIAEINIS, LQH4, Spee escaee.|eeatv closets] % “Wosecus|eowenc|eccees * *?2 | x Anomalina. Glandulina. Globulina. Polymorphina. Quinqueloculina. Rotalina. Triloculina. 126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. TABLE (continued). Range of species. | R London area. Paris area. Belgian area. Z| 3 ee . 2 : 2 2 Pisces, &c. of the Barton Clay. 3 a a 5 4 3 s . a 5 ‘DR S 4 ad n ina] S MM = n o =} oS ao} 3 5 = ° > | & 3S a I oj —Q | = ~ ° faa] — 3 oO GS o | B &p = N mn Ls} a o “ o o u S = n | © = S g ) s x o | v 3 ‘ A a Co al - ~~ B18 | fee | a ane ee Ss 4 fa N 4 'S) wi Nn N A B. D. A. C. 1D) E. D. E Reptilia. | Chelome ies Sanaicocteitataniec setae bioaeaies : | Pisces | Marne Ge severe. eae cane cee c tesceeenee | Myliobatis marginalis, 4g. . ............. | | TUGLOIS§ (AG: «cid sjoisin Sena ooiaeiettars mere eineh oman * PEtObALIS SUDANCHBDUS, AGss ca. cetes seme neal ss sees * Notidamus serratissimus, 4g. ...........-].....- * | | § 5. Concluding Remarks—Physical conditions prevailing at the Paris Tertiary Period. I have named that portion of the Eocene series, of which the foregoing deposits form the centre and type, the ‘Paris Tertiary Group *,” because it is in the Paris area that this group is most complete and best exhibited, and that the animal life of the period has been most perfectly developed. Of marine Testacea alone above 1200 species existed in the French areat, whilst in the English area they were apparently but about half that number. A somewhat similar proportion appears to hold good with respect to the Corals, Echinoderms, and Foraminifera; but of Fishes, Reptiles, and Crus- tacea, the English series shows a considerable preponderance. The Paris group originated, as I have before mentioned, with the period of the Lower Bagshot Sands and Glauconie moyenne in the subsidence of a southern land and extension of the sea { over the previously littoral and dry portions of the Paris district, leading to the introduction of the Nurnmulitic fauna and of forms indicating * This is nearly synonymous with M. Alc. D’Orbigny’s ‘ Systéme Parisien,” but he includes in this the ‘*‘ London Clay”? and excludes the ‘ Lits Coquilliers ; ”’ whereas I consider the London Clay older than the Lits Coquilliers, and as the centre of another (the London) group; the Lits Coquilliers and Glauconie moy- enne I would place in the Paris group. + The supplement now in course of publication by M. Deshayes for his great work on the Fossil Shells of the Paris Tertiaries promises to add largely to the number already known—even to the extent of nearly doubling that number. + Ithink it probable that the sea of the London area became connected at this period with a southern sea by the depression of the intermediate land. PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 127 warmer seas. A further but minor change afterwards took place, marking the commencement of the Bracklesham Sands and the Cal- caire grossier period: the former sea-bed seems to have been en- larged and further extended, and a fauna of a still more southern facies introduced—which fauna, fixing upon the favourable localities in the French area, multiplied exceedingly *. In reviewing the general characters of that portion of the Paris group which succeeds at this last change, we cannot fail to be struck with the distinctive physical features of the French and En- glish formations, and by the less independent nature of their Belgian equivalent. That the three areas, however, were at the Paris geo- logical period closely connected and partially continuous, seems to be proved both by the occurrence of some intermediate tertiary out- liers ¢, and by a certain amount of common mineral elements and structural peculiarities. At the same time there were, as we have before noticed, important specific differences in the organic remains and in the volume of the deposits; but these zoological and physical differences are such as would apparently have resulted more from the variable character of the sea-bed and from the different rate of sub- sidence or elevation affecting each district, than from the isolation of any of these sea-areas. The period of the Lower Bracklesham Sands and of the two lower divisions of the Calcaire grossier was, in the Paris area, after the in- troductory somewhat sudden disturbance, one of comparatively little change—there was a calcareous sea-bed and an absence of muddy sediment, consequently conditions peculiarly favourable for the exist- ence of a rich and varied testaceous fauna, such as then became there developed. Whilst this comparative tranquillity prevailed in the French area, in England a more rapid subsidence was, by giving greater depth to the sea, tending to increase the vertical dimensions of the strata; and at the same time causing, either by too sudden a change of depth or by too rapid an accumulation of sediment, occa- sional intervals during which particular parts of the sea-bed were depopulated of those Molluses which flourished in the same area under other more favourable conditions that intervened from time to time. At the same time the more argillaceous character of the silt in the seas of the English area was calculated to foster the exist- ence of many local species ; whilst, on the other hand, such a sea-bed was not favourable to the immigration of a greater proportion of the French species. These were causes which must necessarily have stamped the animal life of the two areas with certain peculiarities distinctive of each, and may, in great part, account for so large a number of species being confined to the French and English districts respectively. Notwithstanding the extent of this Tertiary sea over the north of * As the Glauconie moyenne overlaps the estuarine and freshwater beds of the “ Argile Plastique,” so does the Calcaire grossier overlap the Glauconie moyenne, extending further south and south-east than the latter. + Of the lower beds principally, but also of the Lower Bagshot Sands and Glauconie moyenne when the hills are high enough. 128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. France, south-east of England, and south of Belgium, it is evident that dry land existed near the first two of these tracts; for in the English series there are several beds of lignite, and fragmentary * remains of vegetables are dispersed in abundance through many of the strata; and in the French series are found the remains of plants, of land and freshwater shells, and of land animals. There is, however, a difference in the floras, which renders it not improbable that these two land-areas were not connected ; for the French flora, which is not large, is the more tropical, consisting chiefly of some species of large Palms; whereas the English flora, as far as we can judge from very imperfect indications, exhibits apparently a more varied vegeta- tion, but one of a different character. (If the leaf-beds of Alum Bay and of Bournmouth should be found to belong to the Bracklesham series, then we have species related to laurel, fig, maple, yew, zamia?, &c.) Supposing, therefore, such to have been the distribution of land and water, we see a cause why, notwithstanding the presumptive evidence of a common sea, the deposits going on in that sea being derived from two lands, there would be, in all probability, a differ- ence in the character of the coast-sediments +. Passing upwards to the third division of the Calcaire grossier, there is a rapid increase in the number of estuarine, freshwater, and land shells; leading to the inference, not so much that the French area was rising, as that the estuary, or gulf, in which the Calcaire grossier was accumulating, was gradually silting up; whilst in the English area a continued subsidence preserved the depth of sea and kept up the marine population. [See note §at p.134.] This distinction attains its maximum in the upper part of the Calcaire grossier, which seems to be almost entirely fresh water, whereas the upper beds of the Bracklesham series continue to exhibit purely marine characters. That these deposits were continuous during the Paris Tertiary period is in accordance with the sketch given of the structure of the Calcaire grossier in the preceding pages, where it is shown that the resemblance in mineral structure of the French to the English series increases from east to west, or as the French series ranges towards the English area; at the same time that the differences diminish in the same di- rection. Thus the beds of mixed green sands, thin at the base of the. * Many of the leaves, both in the French and English stiata, are extremely well preserved, and were evidently carried but a short distance out to sea. fT Still, admitting the operation of all these varied geographical and structural conditions, it may be a question, although they may account for certain generic differences in the French and English faunas, whether, on the other hand, such extremes of conditions may not also have modified, to a greater extent than is at present admitted, the form and size of the same species in the different areas, and have been the cause of extreme specific differences. Looking at the separate marine faunas of the Calcaire grossier and of the Bracklesham Sands, we find a certain number of species common to the two, but a far larger proportion pecu- liar to each area. Such, necessarily, must be the case, to a certain extent, in sea-beds so differently constituted; nevertheless we cannot fail to remark on the fact, that, even where there is no relation in species, still there is often a marked concordance in genera,—in mary cases the species of various genera existing in each area in the same relative proportion: thus, amongst others, the following 11 genera are in nearly equal force in both countries, nevertheless out of the PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 129 Calcaire grossier in the east of the Paris basin, expand as they range westward, giving indications of the development which they attain 136 species of which they consist there have only been 14 identified as common to the French and English series. This is shown in the following Table. Bracklesham Sands and Calcaire grossier *. Total number of Species species. common to both France. | England. countries. Genera common to the two areas. Nautilus ...... Sedat padwoeedeitied La. gen 2 2 ERM es alae dadcnn camiadl Garinmeneeesmes ol ae Meee aeacaacan ad apeniat Wassidaria .....0s000 Be Spee aneatueene es Dentalium ...... Ep Se ee eee 1 UP ATIE aS cc hdnandecsaaeccado nue sonics 9 3 5 EMER as wn dees acdc steeccctteaceas. 5 2 3 Scalaria ........ mepeeancehs Gaited ores bawelsy 8 a Ons oo P P OW © > OonrKKnN NK ON OS oO — for) Oo _ > So in the next period another 10 genera with a total of 121 species show only 13 in common. Barton Clay and Sables Moyens. Total number of Species species. common to both France. | England. countries. Pilaken teste tances cal och saveuersievs 3 2 Genera common to the two areas. 0 See ee aioendaste cca acetenenecsissens 16 13 5 Marginella ....... daaundee Séaheenooumananctes 2 3 0 MMe oo reas cd ainicle dea bmon sonics ys clecewie 8 4 1 ease tcepwavand cas anntgermnseacare 5 5 0 Deraaisin lech scan ccae oewesaigenesecccne. 3 4 1 OAPI THE EY an shoes nse cavasdsrece cates ers Ti 16 3 WolePie Jussecdcicis Scie ee AG eo eek De 12 12 3 MUWRSADOLA docs coca cond sate Rat trae Ue 2 3 0 OCLOM: Ss veccayes 8 Oe Ee a orate adeseh : 2 a 0 70 64 13 The same remarks may be made of some of the Zoophytes: thus there are four specise of 7'urdbinolia in the Sables moyens, and five in the Barton Clay, all considered different. Of ten Serpule on one side and five on the other, none agree. The species seem to be representative species ; yet would I ask palzontologists to consider in such cases, when the definite synchronism of certain strata is esta- blished upon structural and general grounds, how far some of these apparent dif- ferences in the species may be varieties brought about by the great differences of * The number of French species are those given by M. Graves. VOL. XIII.——PART I. K 130 _. PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. at Bracklesham. Whereas the freshwater marls at the top of the Calcaire grossier have their maximum development in the east of the Paris area, and gradually thin out as they range westward, disap- pearing nearly, if not altogether, before we reach its western confines ; wherefore the absence of like conditions in the English area is thus a priort shown to be probable. In Belgium there was neither the amount of subsidence expe- rienced in England nor the extent of silting up going on as in France ; the Bruxellian System with even less vertical dimensions than its French equivalent, and a fauna less extensive than its English equi- valent, exhibits throughout the same marine characters as the latter. Also the land seems to have been at a greater distance: there are re- mains of a Jand-vegetation, but composed of specimens which seem to have been drifted from a distance ; for it is the harder fruit (ipa- dites) and not the more delicate leaves of the Palm which there occur; and they are often drilled by Teredine, as though they had long floated out at sea. The next change is, in the French area, one of a very marked character: marine strata of entirely different composition to the Cal- caire grossier overlie that deposit, and at the base of this upper de- posit are scattered here and there the debris and wreck of the older tertiary beds and of the chalk. A sudden change, I believe, here took place: the estuaries, bays, and gulfs of the Calcaire grossier were invaded by the sea. That the movement was sudden, and of some considerable force, I infer from the circumstance that the con- solidated beds of the Calcaire grossier, including even its upper fresh- water marls with the chert beds, together with the solid beds of the Glauconie moyenne and Glauconie grossiére, were partially . broken up and denuded ; for rolled fragments of all these beds are found in places at the base of the Sables moyens, and at a consider- able distance from where the lower beds rise from beneath the Cal- caire grossier. With these rock-debris are also found the harder and larger rolled shells of the Sables de Bracheux, and the shells of the Argile plastique ; whilst well-worn small flint-pebbles form the main part of this conglomerate-bed—pebbles probably formed on the shores of the Calcaire grossier sea, and scattered at this subsequent period. Once spread over the bed of the sea, and the state of tran- sea-ved, temperature, depth, &c. — whether these causes have not operated to a greater extent than is here allowed. In these instances the conditions are so strongly marked, that they lead me to believe that such an amount of variation may have been thereby produced as might, viewing each area separately and in- dependently, cause some varieties to assume the permanence and importance of specific differences ; and I therefore think it not improbable that eventually there will be found a greater number of species common to the two countries. Until the exact synchronism of any deposit is established, the paleontologist cannot in each case take the actual value of these causes into full and sufficient consideration, and many admirable monographs on Tertiary fossils have neces- sarily been founded simply upon the differences actually apparent and persistent in the fossils of the several areas, after allowing for such differences as do take place in each respective area separately. The limits of variations require, how- ever, to be studied for the several areas conjointly. PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 131 quillity restored, then these pebbles of the older Tertiaries were subjected to the attacks of boring molluscs, and small corals grew amongst the pebbles. The sea-sediments now changed entirely : quartzose sands, derived from other shores and different sources, and forming the main and common mineral element in the two countries, are substituted for the calcareous deposits of the Calcaire grossier. In England a change of nearly like value took place: the alternating sandy beds of the Bracklesham Sands are suddenly succeeded by a thick mass of compact clays and quartzose sands, the change being marked by a thin but continuous bed of well-rounded chalk-flints strewed over the bed of the sea in which the Barton Clay commenced its formation, Some of these pebbles are as large as cannon-balls ; they are evidently removed from the position in which they were formed, for they usually overlie loose sands—a floor on which the flints could not have been worn down as we now find them. Accompanying this break in the sequence and this change in the mineral character, a partially new fauna appears in both areas, but still many of the old forms remain. The change in this respect in the English and French areas is about equal in degree. A long period of rest now succeeded, during which the lower beds of the Sables moyens, with their large and varied fauna, were formed, In England the same relatively greater amount of subsidence which we noticed at the former period was continued in this one: the Bar- ton Clay is many times thicker than the corresponding beds of the Sables moyens. ‘The fossils in it are not so numerous, and are much dispersed. Other changes then succeeded in the French area; and probably the sea again became more restricted*, In Belgium the change appears less marked. The Barton-clay sea seems again to have been more connected with water opening to the northward than did that of the Bracklesham Sands; for several species of the London-elay sea, which, as I have before shown, was probably connected with northern seas, that had disappeared in the intermediate Bracklesham period, reappear in the Barton series. In fact the fauna of this group, together with that of the Sables moyens, has not so southern an aspect as that of the Calcaire grossier and Bracklesham period. It is interesting to note the evident migration of species going on all through these periods. Many physical changes, some slow and others rapid, took place from time to time ; many of them were only local, whilst several extended over wider tracts and affected the several areas, but in such cases we find that the effects were in some places stronger than in others. It would seem that larger or smaller portions of the fauna of each period or of each subdivision were in all instances preserved and transmitted or continued upwards. Some- * M. D’Archiac has suggested that the great accumulation of barren sands on the north-eastern edge of the area of the Sables moyens are probably the dunes of an old land (D’Archiac, Progr. de la Géol. vol. ii. p. 971). The large shingle beds mentioned by M. Graves might also suggest that land was not far off—pos- “sibly part of the Pays de Bray might at this period have been an island with ranges of chalk cliffs. K 2 {Ia }94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. times this seems to have been effected by direct vertical transmission. At other times many species appear to have been destroyed in some particular part of the area at the period of these changes, or rather, the change brought about unsuitable conditions whereby they were tem- porarily displaced. Yet nevertheless, when during a recurrence of somewhat similar conditions, subsequent immigrations introduced at a later period a comparatively distinct newer fauna, many of these old forms which had been preserved in the less disturbed districts, and had there remained, as it were, in exile during the whole, or during one or more divisions, of an intervening period, returned. At other times some species seem to have travelled more rapidly or more readily in a horizontal than in a vertical direction ; and thus many forms, which are common in some particular zone in one area and absent in the adjacent ones, seem, in process of time, to have migrated into these latter, and flourished there in the next subse- quent geological period ; whereas in the area in which they first ap- peared they have not been transmitted upwards, and are not found in these newer beds. Thus, though extinct im one area, they may continue to mark a higher series in an adjacent area. It is also a point of very considerable interest to note how constant and steady is the progression of change in the several subdivisions of each formation. The disappearance of some species and the appearance of new species seem continued quite apart from those great breaks which from time to time give abruptness and prominence to a law equally operative throughout all time. How far the Upper Bagshot Sands are related to the Bracklesham series it is difficult to say. The few fossils I have found in those sands are not sufficiently distinctive to enable me to pronounce a de- cided opinion. As, however, the fossiliferous Middle Bagshot Sands are very thin, and represent apparently only the lower or middle part of the Bracklesham series, I think it probable that it is the upper beds of sand and clay of the latter which pass northward into the thick sands of the Upper Bagshot Sands. Still it is possible that part of them may represent the Barton series, for we see at Barton how shifting the upper part of that series is—how clay predominates at one place and sands at another*. If we had to limit the Calcaire grossier series at Cassel to the beds beneath the Nummulites vario- larius zone, it would render the latter view the more probable. I now, however, there give that series greater dimensions than I did in my last paper (see Pl. VIII. vol. xi. p. 241). We are now at the conclusion of an important section of the Eocene period. ‘The changes we have traced thus far have been essentially under marine conditions. We already begin to perceive * The occurrence in the middle beds of the Sables moyens of blocks of sac- charoid sandstones traversed with rootlet-shaped casts and impressions has its counterpart in the blocks of sandstone lying on the top of the Upper Bagshot Sands in the Bagshot district. PRESTWICH—BRITISH AND FOREIGN TERTIARIES. 133 indications of the withdrawal of the sea, and of the presence of bodies of fresh water in the upper part of the Calcaire grossier. These, however, are displaced for a time, and the sea of the Sables moyens covers the whole of the French, English, and probably the Belgian areas ; but at the point where we now leave off, the sea begins to shift its bed from over the greater part * of this more extended area and for a much longer and more settled period. Fresh and brackish water conditions of singular variety and interest set in, and are continued with few breaks (sufficient, however, to show the prox- imity of the sea and of a marine fauna but little changed) up to an- other and more general change, and the introduction of a fauna, both marine and freshwater, in greater part new and distinct. Of these changes, and of the correlations prevailing in the three areas under review, during the further continuance of this Eocene period, I hope to treat on a future occasion, having confined the in- quiry at present to that part of the Barton series represented by the clay-beds at Barton and forming its lower division. Table of Synchronous Strata of that portion of the Paris Tertiary Group treated of in this Paper. English Area. Belgian Area. French Area. Barton Clay. Systéme Laekenien.? | Sables Moyens—lower zone. Reeren Calcaire Freshwater marls, Bracklesham Maddie Seton Brneelli grossier & } Upper flags. Sands ree “| Systeme Druxemien. | Glauconie ) Freestone. grossicre. { Greenish sands. Systeme Ypresien Lits Coquilliers and Glauconie Lower Bagshot Sands. Zot supérieur. Moyenne. The subdivisions of the Bracklesham Sands here introduced are merely no- Minal, as they present no marked or permanent limits ; the middle of the series is, however, distinguished by the greater abundance of fossils at White Cliff Bay (see p. 99). To the sands underlying the Bracklesham series, and forming pos- sibly a lower division thereof, I think it more convenient to restrict the term of Lower Bagshot Sands, although both in the Isle of Wight and on the Hamp- shire coast they seem, in structure, to form part of one like series of strata. The Glauconie grossiére includes the Glauconie supérieure of M. Graves. With the Lits coquilliers of D’Archiac, I include the Glaises + and Sables divers, i. e. I take his upper three divisions of his group of Sables Inférieurs together. The Glauconie Moyenne I take as defined by M. Graves. * Partially only from off the Belgian area. + This with a doubt. 134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Range and Distribution of the Mollusca of the Bracklesham Sands and Barton Clay in the English and French Eocene marine series, with the comparative range of species in each series separately. French area. | oH =! ouloxlosdlo# 3S & — : ae pate ole : e@la-5/a 0 B |) 8 Ee |2 518 S182 /e5 wn | = =~} ae) @ Be \as 6 mE SES sOo| & H | o|=.o _ 2 | awvilS 9)/S f1/280 Ora aes ES v Flos oe are Ore g 2 2 o's os o 5 gs to) heal 5 —_ —_ || 15 | iw | 8 | ew |S RQ a|N wD | ~ ~ Banton WlAY ~ascid sees yan cooeeoneuaeeeearee 252 |140|112 | 77 | 82 | 47 | 10 Bracklesham Sands ....... Saastvecdateduns 368*| 221| 56 || 94 | 142) 75 | 15 English area. 25 o al eo he Pe we ° a. 4 (2) _ ni ~ — Bs Sea en =| Flo fet = ess (5) ee Zalgarsele je gee B22 /8 Me siecle s 5B S160 2/6.8 ols Fe pepe co BloS|fs £4 [2889/8 s/s5 e |5s |@s/s |sAise Z a5 a gy aa Ro Neg ln wee BADICS MUSE, . J con si cetbademdcnnsee vac 377 (150?) 226 || 77 | 94 | 18 Calcaire Grossier . axuhesensdabioccedseuteaces 651 3602] 182 || 82 | 142] 17 * This and the two following numbers will have to be slightly increased and modified by the addition of the species recently described by Mr. Edwards in the Monographs of the Palzeontographical Society. The Bracklesham figures under the French area have been corrected to that extent. + With reference only to the strata on this and lower levels. In the two French series [ cannot pretend to much accuracy, as the data are not yet sufficient, and the French geologists are not agreed upon many identifications. [Note § to p. 128.—Or I can suppose thé slow small rise of a tract between the French and English areas, in the direction of the coasts of Normandy and Brittany, partly isolating the French area, gradually shutting out the sea, and giving, on a large scale, a partly lenticular form to the upper divisions of the Calcaire grossier ; the centre of the French area, in the mean time, remaining at rest, and the English area subsiding. | 135 DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY From July 1st, 1856, to October 31st, 1856. I. TRANSACTIONS AND JOURNALS. Presented by the respective Societies and Editors. AMERICAN Journal of Science and Arts. 2nd Ser. Vol. xxii. No. 64. July 1856. From Prof. Silliman, For. Mem. G.S. J. Henry.—Testing building-materials, marbles, &c., 30. J. D. Witney.—Occurrence of the ores of iron in the Azoic Sys- tem, 38. Explorations and Surveys for the Pacific Railroad, 67. C. N. Shepard.— New minerals, 96. J. B. Trask.—Earthquakes in California from 1812 to 1855, 110. J. Leidy.—Fossil Reptiles and Fishes from Nebraska, 118. B. F. Shumard and L. P. Yandell.—Eleutherocrinus from the Devonian limestone of Kentucky, 120. I, Lea—Reptilian remains in the New Red Sandstone of Penn- sylvania, 122. H. Wurtz.— Analysis of the water of the Delaware River, 124. C. Lyell.—Successive changes of the Temple of Serapis, 126. J. Safford.—Geological survey of Tennessee, 129. No. 65. September 1856. From Prof. Silliman, For. Mem. G.S. J. W. Mallet.—A Zeolitic Mineral (allied to Stilbite) from the Isle of Skye, 129. R. I. Murchison.—Letter on the Museum of Practical Geology of Great Britain, 232. J. M. Safford.—The genus Tetradium (a Silurian coral), 236. E. Hitchcock, Jun.—A fossil shell from the Connecticut Sand- stone, 239, T. Coan.—The Eruption at Hawaii, , 240. J. D. Dana.—Third Supplement to Dana’s Mineralogy, 246. Mitscherlich.—Selenium and Iodine, 271. W. Eberhard.—Meteoric Iron of Thuringia, 271. Uricoechea and Bécking.—Meteoric Iron of the Cape of Good Hope, 272. 136 DONATIONS. American Journal of Science and Arts. No. 65 (continued). F. Wohler.—Meteoric Stone of Mezo-Madaras in Siebenburg, 272. C. St. C. Deville-—The Volcanos of Southern Italy, 272. Renaud.—The Isthmus of Suez, 273. E. de Rivero.—The Mines of Coal in Pern, 274. H. Witt.—Analysis of the waters of Lake Urumia, 276. N.S. Maskelyne.—The Koh-i-noor Diamond, 278. J. W. Bailey.—The origin of greensand, and its formation in the . present oceans, 280. Eckfeldt and Dubois.—Specific gravity apparatus : Californian gold-quartz, 294. W.B. Rogers.—Paleozoie fossils in Eastern Massachusetts, 296. A.S. Piggott.—Monks Island guano-rock, 299. A. A. Hayes.—Monks Island guano-rock, 300. F. Moldenhauer.— Waters of the Dead Sea, 301. A. Moritz.— Waters of the Caspian, 301. J. P. Lesley’s Manual of Coal, noticed, 302. Annuaire des Marées des Cotes de France pour l’An 1855, par A.M. R. Chazallon. 12mo. Paris. 1855. Atheneum Journal for July, August, September and October, 1856. From W. Dilke, Esq., F.G.S. Notices of Meetings of Societies, and Obituary Notices. Bengal Asiatic Society, Journal. New Series, No. 78. 1856. No.1. H. Schlagintweit.— Magnetic Survey im Sikkim, the Khasia Hills, and Assam, | (plates). ——. No.79. 1856. No. 2. A: and R. Schlagintweit. —Magnetic Survey in the Himalayas, 105. H. Piddington.—Silt held in suspension in the Hooghly, 151. No. 80. 1856. No. 3. Hl. Piddington. —Examination of three specimens of Bengal mineral waters, 190. eS. No. 81. 1856. No. 4. S. F. Hannay.—Iron-ore Statistics and Economic Geology of Upper Assam, 330. Bent’s Monthly Literary Advertiser. Nos. 627, 628, 629. Berlin. Abhandlungen der Konigl. Akad. d. Wiss. zu Berlin. Aus dem Jahre 1854. Erster Supplement-Band. 1856. . Monatsbericht der Konigl. Preuss. Akad. der Wissensch. zu Berlin. Juli-December 1855. C. G. Ehrenberg.—Nachricht iiber die gelungene Darstellung ganzer Stemkerne von Nummuliten, 487. Ueber die gelungene durschsheinende Farbung far- bloser organischer Kieseltheile fiir mikroskopische Zwecke, 552. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Flusstribung und der vulkanischen Auswurfstoffe, 561. Ueber das Fortriicken des Supplementes zur Mikro- geologie, 779. DONATIONS. 137 Berlin. Monatsbericht der Konig]. Preuss. Akad. der Wissensch. zu Berlin (continued). H. Rose.—Ueber das Quecksilber-haltende Fahlerz von Poratsch oder Kotterbach in Ungarn, 547. Ueber die Zusammensetzung der Beryllerde, 581. F. Schulze.—Ueher das Vorkommen wohlerhaltener Cellulose in Braunkoble und Steinkohle, 676. G. Rose.—Ueher den Schaumkalk als Pseudomorphose von Aragonit, 707. Zeitschrift der Deutschen geologischen Gesellschaft. Vol. viii. No. 1. Nov. 1855-Jan. 1856. Proceedings of the Society, 1 ; Letters, 18. Beyrich.—Die Conchylien des norddeutschen Tertiargebirges (4th part), 21 (10 plates). Bornemann.—Ueber die Diluvial- und Alluvial-Bildungen der Umgegend von Mihlhausen im Gebiete des oberen Un- strutthales, 89. H. Rose.—Ueber den Carnallit, eine neue Mineralspecies, 117. L. Meyn.—Riffsteinbildung im Klemen an der deutschen Nord- seekiiste, 119. E. Suess.—Ueber Catantostoma clathratum G. Sandb., 127 (figs.). W. von der Marek.—Chemische Untersuchung von Gestemen der oberen westfalischen Kreidebildungen, 132. —_———-. ———.. Part 2. Feb.—April 1856. Proceedings and Letters, 151, 162. Jenzsch.—Beitrage zur Kenntniss einige Phonolithe des bohmis- chen Mittelgebirges. Mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung des Baues dieses Gebirges, 167. Von Schauroth.—Ein neuer Beitrag zur Palaontologie des deuts- chen Zechsteingebirges, 211 (plate). Ferd. Roemer.—Notiz tiber em eigenthiimliches Vorkommen von Alaunstein in der Steinkohle bei Zabrze in Oberschlesien, 246, KE. I’. Koch.—Die anstehenden Formationen der Gegend von Domitz, 249 (map). R. Hensel.—Beitrage zur Kenntniss fossiler Saugethiere, 279 (plate). G. vom Rath.—Ueber die Chemische Zusammensetzung zweier Phonolithe, 291. Bombay Geographical Society, Transactions, vol. xii. 1856. Buist.—Principal depressions on the Surface of the Globe, vii. Survey of the Shores off Bombay, by Capt. Selby, xx. —— Colour of the Red Sea; Earthquakes in Bengal, &c., Appendix, 5. Woodburn.—Former Climate of Sinde, App. 7. — Sambur Salt-lake, Rajpootana, App. 15. Breslau und Bonn. Nova Acta Acad. Cees. Leop.-Carol. Nat. Cur. vol. xxv. part 2. 1856. E. F. Glocker.—Neue Beitrage zur Kenntniss der nordischen Geschiebe und ihres Vorkommens in der Oderebene um Breslau, 767. G. Jager.—Ueber eine neue Species von Ichthyosauren (Ichth. longirostris, Owen et Jaeger), 937 (plate). 138 DONATIONS. British Association for the Advancement of Science, Report for 1855. 1856. T. Dobson.—Relation between Explosions in Coal-mines and revolving Storms, |. J. F. Bateman.—Supply of Water to Towns, 62. B. Powell.—Lumimous Meteors, 79. Report on Typical Objects in Natural History, 108. A. 8S. Farrar.—Eruption of Vesuvius of 1855, 55. J.B. Edwards.—Titaniferous iron-sand of the Mersey Shore, 61. E. Frémy.—Extraction of metals from the ore of Platinum, 63. J. H. Gladstone.—Crystalline Gypsum from the Reservoir of the Highgate Waterworks, 63. A. Matthiessen.—Metals of the Alkaline Earths, 66. T. H. Rowney.—Composition of three mineral pigments (Vandyke-brown, Indian red, Raw Sienna), 70. R. Allan.—Haukedale Geysers of Iceland, 75. E. Belcher.—Fossils (Ichthyosaurian and others) found by the Arctic Expedition in 1852-54, 79. J. Bryce.—Glacial phenomena of the Lake District of England, 80. J. Buchanan.—Ancient canoes found at Glasgow, 80. J. A. Campbell.—Auriferous Quartz of Australia, 81. W. Darling.—Probable maximum depth of the Ocean, 81. J. W. Dawson.—Fossils of the Coal-formation of Nova Scotia, 81. D. Forbes.—Silurian and Metamorphic rocks of the South of Norway, 82. R. Harkness and J. Blyth.—Cleavage of the Devonians of the South of Ireland, 82. R. Harkness.—Lowest Sedimentary rocks of Scotland, 82. Geology of Dingle Promontory, Ireland, 83. E. Hopkins.—Gold-bearing districts of the World, 83. _H. Miller.—Fossil Floras of Scotland, 83. R. I. Murchison.—Crystalline fossiliferous rocks of the North Highlands, 85. J. Nicol.—Striated rocks and other evidences of ice-action in the North of Scotland, 88. D. Page.—Pterygotus and Pterygotus-beds of Britain, 89. Burdiehouse Limestone, 91. —- Paleozoic and Metamorphic rocks of Scolar 92. J. Phillips.—Trap-dykes in Arran, 94. H. Poole.—Search for Coal m Asia Minor, 94. J. W. Salter.— Fossils from the Longmynd, 95. H. C. Sorby.—Structure and relations of the older rocks of the Highland Border, 96. oe Mechanical Structure of Limestones, 97. — Effects of currents on deposits, 97. W. 8S. Symonds.—Fossil Crustacea from Ludlow, 98. S. V. Wood, Jun.—Probable maximum depth of the Ocean, 99. E. Belcher.—Great fossil tree in the Arctic regions, 101. A. and R. Schlagintweit.— Himalayas of Kumaon, 152. W. Sim.—Blasting and quarrying of rocks, 209. J. W. Salter.—Geology of the Arctic regions, 211. Canadian Institute. Canadian Journal. New Series. No. 3. May 1856. D. Wilson.—The ancient miners of Lake Superior, 225. DONATIONS. 139 Canadian Institute. Canadian Journal. New Series (continued). S. Fleming.—The Canadian Geological Survey and its Director Sir W. Logan, 238. E. J. Chapman.—Trilobites, part 1, 271. W. B. Rogers.—Origin of the Carbonate of Iron of the Coal- measures, 307. R. Owen.—Fossil Musk-buffalo, 307. Weehler and Atkinson.—Graphite in Meteorie Stones, 308. E. J. Chapman.— Wolfram, 308. Wohler.—Silicium, 310. Peligot.— Uranium. : : No. 5. September 1856. E. A. Meredith.—Influence of recent gold-discoveries on prices, 430. > De Rottermund.—Exploration of Lakes Superior and Huron, 446. Salter and Huxley.— Himantopterus from Lanarkshire, 482. E. J. Chapman.—Asaphus Canadensis, 482. Dufrenoysite ; Binnite ; Hyalophane; Rhodonite, 483. Voigtite; Volknerite ; Boronatfocalcite ; Schaumkalk ; Torbane- hill mineral, 484. . Chemical Society, Quarterly Journal. Vol. ix. No. 2. July 1856. F, Field—Analysis of a Meteoric Stone from the Desert of Ata- cama, 143. (ee No. 35." Vol. ix. Part 3. Oct. 1856. F.A.Abel.—Composition of some varieties of foreign iron, 202. Civil Engineer and Architect’s Journal. Vol. xix. No. 268. July 1856. J. Wilson.—Tidal rivers, 235. ——. No.269. August 1856. T. Hopkins.—Oceanie currents, 269. . R. W. Mylne’s Geological Map of London, noticed, 284, —--—. No. 270. September 1856. C. Daubeny.—Presidential Address, British Association, 289. H. C. Sorby.—Magnesiaa limestone, drift-bedding, and mica- schist, 295. H. Hennessy.—Inundations of rivers, 295. H. C. Page.—Indurating stone, 314. a= NG 271. October 1856. Decay and preservation of stone-work, 330. H. Hennessy.—Physical structure of the Earth, 335. H. Bessemer.—Manufacture of Steel and Iron, 348 (plate). Copenhagen. Dect kongelige danske Videnskabernes Selskabs Skrif- ter. Femte Rekke. Nat. og. Math. Afdeling. Vol. iv. Part 1. Oversigt over det Kong. danske Videnskab. Selskabs Forhandlinger og dets Medlemmers Arbeider i Aaret 1855. I. G. Forchhammer.—Iagttagelser over Metallerne i Kalkstenen, og 1 Havets kalkassondrende Dyr, 223. Undersdgelser over Metallerne i Havets Dyr og Planter, 389. J. Steenstrup.—Bidrag til Danmarks forhistoriske Fauna, 1, 52, 140 DONATIONS. Copenhagen. Oversigt over det Kong. danske Videnskab. Selskabs Forhandlinger og dets Medlemmers Arbeider i Aaret (continued). J. Steenstrup.—Om Udbyttet af hans 1854 i Jylland foretagne Geologiske Antiquariske Undersogelser, 131. Om Beverens, Kjderskildpaddens og Geirfuglens tidlizere Forekomst 1 Danmark, 381. Cornwall Royal Institution, Thirty-seventh Annual Report, for 1855. 1856. W. J. Henwood.—The rock-basins at Deo Dhovra in Upper India, 19. Critic. Nos. 366-374. July—October 1856. Notices of Meetings of Societies. Dublin. Royal Irish Academy, Proceedings. Vol. vi. Part 3. 1855-56. J. Hl. Jellett.—The effect of the internal fluidity of the Earth on the length of the day, 372. H. Hennessy.—The influence of the Earth’s imternal structure on the length of the day, 388. a, , Transactions. Vol. xxii. Part 1 (Science). 1856. ———. Royal Dublin Society, Journal. No.2. July 1856. : . No.3. October 1856. R. Griffith.—The Moving Bog of Kilmaleady in King’s County, 141 (map). Edinburgh Royal Society, Proceedings. Vol. iii. No. 46. A. A. Hayes.—Native Iron in Liberia, Africa, 327. R. Chambers.—Geology of Banffshire, 332. H. C. Sorby.—Physical Geography of the Old Red Sandstone Sea of the central district of Scotland, 334. J. Forbes.—Geological relations of the Secondary and Primary Rocks of the Chain of Mont Blane, 348. W. Gregory.—Diatomaceous sand of Glenshira, part 2, 358. H. James.— Deflection of the Plumb-line at Arthur’s Seat, and the mean density of the Earth, 364. H. D. Rogers.—Laws of structure of the more disturbed zones of the Earth’s Crust, 378. T. Bloxam and G. Wilson.—Analysis of Craigleith Sandstone, 390. , Transactions. Vol. xxi. Part 3. 1855-1856. H. D. Rogers.—On the Laws of Structure of the more disturbed zones of the Earth’s Crust, 431. France, Congrés Scientifique de, xxxiii™° Session (Programme). 1856. eae ee e France. Société Géologique, Bulletin. Deux. Sér. Tome xii. Feuill. 61-65. De Tchihatchef.—Lettre sur ?éruption de Vesuve en mai 1855, 962: Ch. S.-C. Deville.—Lettre sur le méme sujet, 963. De Verneuil et Barrande.—Description des fossiles trouvés dans les terrains silurien et devonien d’Almaden, d’une partie de la Sierra Morena et des montagnes de Toléde (Pl. xxiii. a xxix.), 964, France. DONATIONS. 141 Société Géologique, Bulletin. Deux. Sér. (continued). Benoit.—Note sur le terrain sidérolithique des environs de Montbéliard (Pl. xxx.), 1025. Sterry Hunt.—Observations sur les roches magnésiennes du groupe de la riviére Hudson, 1029. Th. Ebray.—Note sur les Spongiaires des environs de Vierzon, 1032. J. Fournet.—Sur des gites d’oxyde d’antimoine du pays des Haractas (Algérie), 1039. Marie Rouault.— Notice sur quelques espéces du terrain dévonien du nord du département de la Manche, 1040. ._ oO. SC. Tome xi. Feuill. 8-14. Marcel de Serres.—Sur les silex taillés trouvés dans les dépdts diluviens, 113. Th. Ebray.—Etude comparative des Ammonites anceps et pustu- latus, 115. Triger.—Observations sur les sables des environs de Nogent-le- Rotrou (Eure-et-Loir) (Pl. vu.), 118. Francois Lanza.—Essai sur les formations géognostiques de la Dalmatie et sur quelques nouvelles especes de Radiolites et d’Hippurites (Pl. viu.), 127. E. Bayle.-—Observations sur le Radiolites cornu-pastoris, Des- moulin, sp. (Pl.ix.), 139. B. Studer.—Notice sur le terrain anthracifére dans les Alpes de la Suisse, 146. A. Langel.—Présentation d’un globe terrestre avee le réseau pentagonal de M. Elie de Beaumont, 163. Griffith.—Lettre accompagnant l’envoi de sa carte géologique de VIrlande, 164. Marcel de Serres.—Des ossements humains des cavernes et de V’épooue de leur dépét (Résumé), 169. V. Raulin.—Observations sur le Résumé d’un essai sur la géologie des Corbiéres par M. d’Archiac, 170. D’Archiac.—Remarques sur les observations précédentes, 173. J. Desnoyers.—Réponse aux observations de M.Triger sur les sables des environs de Nogent-le-Rotrou (p. 118), 177. Argéliez.—Lettre sur une collection de fossiles du département de Aveyron, 187. Ed. Piette.—Notice sur les grés d’Aiglemont et de Rimogne (Pi =) 189: Ed. Hébert.—Note sur le lias inférieur des Ardennes, suivie de remarques sur les Gryphées du lias, 207. Michelin.—Sur deux échinides des couches supracrétacées de la Jamaique, 222, G. Jenzsch.—Note supplémentaire sur l’amygdalophyre, 222. - ——. Tome xiii. Feuill. 15-19. G. jena oe supplémentaire sur l’amygdalophyre (fin.), 225. L. Cocchi.—Description des roches ignées et sédimentaires de la Toscane (Pl. x1.), 226. Shumard.—Sur la paléontologie du Missouri, 302. Feuardent.—Sur quelques fossiles de la montagne du Roule (Manche), 302. . Liste des Membres au 1°’ Mai 1856. 142 DONATIONS. Franklin Institute of Pennsylvania, Journal. 3rd Series. Vol. xxxi. No. 6. June 1856. H. Clarke.—Slag-bricks, 410. Vol. xxxii. “No.1. July 1856. No. 2. August 1856. No. 3. September 1856. —— C. Stickel.—Basaltie glass, 183. W. H. Pile.—Specifie gravity of sea-water. Geological Survey of Great Britain, Annual Report of the Director- general. 1856. » Memoirs: The Iron-ores of Great Britain; Part 1. The Iron-ores of the North and North-Midland Counties of England, by W. W. Smyth, A. Dick, and J. Spiller. With preface by J. Percy. 1856. Halle. Bericht iiber die bisherige Thiatigkeit und den gegenwartigen Stand des Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereines fiir die Provinz Sachsen und Thiringen in Halle. 1855. Zeitschrift fir die gesammten Naturwissenschaften. Herausgeg. von dem Naturw. Vereine fiir Sachsen und Thirin- gen in Halle, redigirt von C. Giebel und W. Heintz. Jahrgang 1855. Vol. v. Berlin, 1855. C.J. Andrae.—Fossile Pflanzen der Tertiarformation der Szakadat und Thalheim in Siebenbiirgen und der Liasformation von Stemdorf im Banat, 201. C. Giebel.—Crimoideen im Kreidemergel bei Quedlinburg, 25 (plate). C. J. aici Zwei Fruchtarten aus der Steinkohlenformation Saarbriicken, 43. C. Giebel.— Ueber der Myophorien des Muschelkalkes, 34. E. Sochting.—Mineralogisch-palaontologische Notizen, 370. Literature: General, Mineralogy, Geology, Paleontology. . 1855. Vol..yi, .Berlm. 1855; C. Giebel.— Erdbeben in Wallis vom 25 Juli bis 7 August 1855, 1. E. Sochting.—Mimeralogische Notizen, 361. G, Suckow.—Zur Geologie und Mineralogie [Central heat: minerals, genetic and metamorphic: Chlorite in Bunter], 261. C. Giebel.—Ausflug in die Walliser Alpen, 39. — Wirbelthierreste in der Thiiringer Braunkohle, 204. A. Schmit.—Asterien 1m Lias bei Halberstadt, 203. E. Sochting.—Reise in England und Schottland, 378. Literature: General, Mineralogy, Geology, Paleontology. eS . Harlem. Extrait du programme de la Société Hollandaise des Sciences a, pour Pannée 1856. Institute of Actuaries, Assurance Magazine. No. 25. Vol. vi. Part 5. October 1856. Institution of Civil Engineers, Subject for Premiums for 1855-56. DONATIONS. 143 Jahrbiicher der Berg- und Huttenkunde, herausgegeben von K. E. Moll. Vol. iv. Part 1. 1799. Salzburg. 8°. From J. Morris, Esq., F.G.S. Journal of the Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia. Vol. ix Nos. 10-12 (in one). Oct. to Dec. 1855. From J. R. Logan, Esq., F.G.S. Lancashire and Cheshire Historic Society. Vol. vii. 1855-56. Lausanne. Bulletins des Séances de la Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Tome i., années 1842-45. 1846. Béranger.— Un fossile végétal, 92. Blanchet. —Les houilléres d’Oron, 186. Altitudes dans le Canton, 200. La distribution des dépéts erratiques dans le bassin du Léman, 258. Une machoire de rhinocéros, 278. — Unos du Mylodon robustus, 337. — Les variétés de poli des roches, 358. La mine de houille de Pully, 358. Colomb.—La Dent de Jaman, 358. De la Harpe.—Un bloc de gypse erratique, 208, 337. Desor.—Les phénoménes erratiques, 270. Lardy.—La géologie du Jura Vaudois, 345. Wartmann.— L’application de deux théoremes de géométrie élé- mentaire a l’explication de certains phénoménes géolo- giques, 395. Nos. 10 and 11. 1846. No. 34. 1854. R. Blanchet.—Sur les modifications du relief de la terre dans le vallée du Rhone et du Léman, 157. S. Chavannes.—Sur un ancien lit de la Morge, 161. Nicaty.—Sur un bloc erratique d’une grande dimension, existant dans le ravin de l’Aubonne, 174. Dlo.:3a.2 1855. E, Renevier.—Notice sur Youvrage intitulé Description Cae, gique des Environs de Montpellier, par P. G, de Ronville, 181. Sur la classification des Terrains Crétacés, 191. Ph. Delaharpe.—Ossemens appartenant a Il Anthracotherium magnum, recueillis dans les lignites des environs de Lau- sanne, 175. E. Renevier.—Secondenotesurla géologiedes Alpes Vaudoises, 204. R. Blanchet et Lecoultre.—Sur les effets du gel au lac de Joux, 224 (map). Burnier, C. Dufour, et Yertin.—Sur la temperature de quelques sources d’eau, 226. Ph. Delaharpe-—De la formation sidérolitique dans les Alpes, 232. ———. No. 36. 1855. Ph. Delaharpe et E. Renevier.— Excursion géologique a la Dent- du-Midi (Bas- Valais), 261 (plate). E. Renevier.—Sur le terrain rhodanien situé prés de Montal- ban, 280. 144 DONATIONS. Lausanne. Bulletins des Séances de la Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles (continued). Ph. Delaharpe.—Sur des os de Castor ancien, 301. Houille Kimmeridgienne du Bas-Valas, 304. S. Chavannes.—Sur le terrain sidérolitique de la Colline Néoco- mienne de Chamblon prés Yverdon, 310. Bischoff.—Analyse d’un Jayet provenant de la Molasse, prés ad’ Yverdon, 317. E. Renevier.—Dates de la publication des espéces contenues dans les planches de la Conchyliologie minéralogique de la Grande- Bretagne, par Mr. James Sowerby, continuée par James de Carle Sowerby, 318. R. Blanchet.—Sur la flore fossile du terrain anthracifére des Alpes, 322. S. Chavannes.—Sur la coupe d’un dépdt d’alluvion, prés Renens, Environs de Lausanne, 324. " » INow37." 18007 Ph. Delaharpe et C. T. Gaudin.—Flore fossile des Environs de Lausanne, 347, 422. E. Renevier.—Résumé des travaux de Mr. D. Sharpe sur le clivage et la foliation des roches, 379. C. T. Gaudin et Ph. Delaharpe.—Sur les bréches 4 ossements éocenes du terrain sidérolitique du Maurement, 402. C. Nicartz.—Sur le desséchement du lac de Harlem en Hol- lande, 404. A. Yertin.—Sur les seiches du lac Léman, 411 (plate). Leeds Philosophical and Literary Society. 36th Report, for 1855-56. Linnean Society, Journal. Vol.i. No.3. June 1856. Literarium. Vol. ii. No. 49. July 16, 1856. The Mines of Wicklow, 776. Vol. ui. Nos. 3 and 10. Literary Gazette, July, August, September, and October. From L. Reeve, Esq., F.G.S. Notices of Meetings of Societies; and Obituary Notices. Liverpool Literary and Philosophical Society, Proceedings. No. 10. 1855-56. G. H. Morton.—Subdivisions of the New Red Sandstone of part of Cheshire, 68 (2 plates). KE. Bretherton.—Geological ramble, 148. London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine. 4th Series. No. 75. Supplement, July 1856. From R. Taylor, Esq., F.G.S. J. W. Tayler.—Cryolite of Greenland, 551. D. T. Ansted.—Copper-lodes in Cuba, 552. . —.. No. 76. July 1856. H. M. Witt.—Separation of mineral salts from water by filtra- tion, 23. J. Tyndall. Cleavage of crystals and slates, 35. DONATIONS. 145 London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine. No. 76 (continued). S. Haughton.—Density of the Earth, deduced from the experi- ments in Harton Coal-pit, 50. J. C. Moore.—Silurian rocks of Wigtonshire, 68. C. Babbage.—Action of ocean-currents in the formation of the strata of the Earth, 69. J. Plant.—Keuper sandstone of Leicester, 71. P. B. Brodie.—Keuper sandstone of Warwickshire, 71. J. W. Salter.—Diploceras, 72. S. P. Woodward.—Orthoceras from China, 72. W. S. Symonds.—Trap-dykes in the Malverns, 73. J. G. Sawkins.— Movement of land in the South Sea Islands, 73. L. B. Ibbetson.—Origin of gold-veins, 73. ——. No.77. August 1856. i. Hennessy.—Influence of the Earth’s internal structure on the length of the day, 99. H. M. Witt.—Chemical composition of the Thames water, 114. H. J. Brooke.—Bleiniere, 126. H. C. Sorby, and J. Tyndall.—Slaty cleavage, 127, 129. S. Charters.—Mont Lacha, 150. W. Miller.—Mauna Loa, 150. T. Spratt.—Geology of Varna, 150. H. G. Bowen.—Geology of Trinidad, 151. J. W. Salter and W. Bailey.—Cretaceous fossils from Aberdeen- shire, 152. J. Prestwich.—Correlation of the Middle Tertiaries of England, France, and Belgium, 153. ———. No. 78. September 1856. J. F. W. Herschel.—Slaty cleavage and contortions of rocks, 197. G. B. Airy.—Experiments in the Harton Colliery shaft for deter- mining the mean density of the Earth, 228. Hautefeuille—Mercury in the native argentiferous copper of Lake Superior, 238. ——. No.79. October 1856. H. James.—Mean specific gravity of the Earth, 314. Longman’s Monthly List of New Books. N.S. Nos. 163 and 166. Madrid. Annales de Minas. 4 vols., 8vo. 1838-46. From HI. Sharpe, Esq. Microscopical Society, Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science. No. 17. October 1856. W. Gregory.—Post-tertiary Diatomaceous Sands of Glenshira, Part 2, 67 (plate). Middle Rhine Geological Society. Geologische specialkarte des Grossherzogthums Hessen. Section Giesen. Section Friedburg. Mit einem Hohenverzeichniss und einer Profilkarte. Die Entstehung und seitherige Wirksamkeit des mittel- rheinischen geologischen Vereins. VOL, XIII.—PART I. L 146 Paris. DONATIONS. Académie des Sciences. Comptes Rendus. Tomexli. Parts 13-27. M. de Serres.—Des caractéres et de l’ancienneté de la période quaternaire, 488. R. Greg et Dr. Heddle.—Sur une masse de fer météorique ren- fermant des globules de plomb métallique, 490. A. Bineau.—Etudes chimiques sur une partie des eaux du bassin du Rhéne, 511. F, Pisani.—Analyse de l’eau du Bosphore, prise 4 Bujuk-Déré, pres Pembouchure de la mer Noire, 532. A. Poey.—Sur la force ascensionelle qu’exercent les ouragans a la surface du sol, comme pouvant donner lieu a la production des tremblements de terre, 585. C. Sainte-Claire Deville—Quatriéme Lettre sur l’éruption du Vésuve du 1° mai, 1855, 593. H. Soleil—Note sur un moyen nouveau de reconnaitre si les faces paralléles entre elles d’une plaque de cristal de roche sont aussi paralléles 4 l’axe du cristal ou inclinées sur cet axe, 669. E. Filhol.—Nouvelles recherches sur les eaux minérales des Py- rénées, 693. — Ville.—Notice sur les gites d’émeraudes de la haute vallée de lV Harrach, 698. A. Poey.—Tableau chronologique des ouragans cycloniques qui ont eu lieu aux Indes occidentales et dans le nord de l’At- lantique, dans une période de 372 années, de 1493 41855, 701. A. Valenciennes.—Observations sur des Oursins perforants dans le granite de Bretagne, 755. C. Prévost.—Etude des phénoménes volcaniques du Vésuve et de Etna, 794. — Considérations générales et questions sur les éruptions voleaniques, 866. Sur la théorie des cénes et des cratéres de souléve- ment, 919. E. Collomb.—Sur les tremblements de terre du Valais, 952. D’Hombres Firmas.—Description de deux coquilles fossiles nou- velles ou nouvellement observeés, 1083. A. Damour.—Sur un péridot titanifére de Pfunders, en Tyrol, 1151. Fontan.—Sur le tremblement du terre du 5 décembre, 1855, 1158 J. Bouis.—Recherches sur les produits azotées des eaux thermales sulfureuses, 1161. J. Niklés.—Présence de la vivianite dans les ossements hu- mains, 1169, . ——. Vol. xli. Parts 1-26. P. Verollot.—Tableaux des tremblements de terre qui ont eu lieu dans ’Empire Ottoman en 1855, 93. E, de Beaumont.—Sur une carte géologique de la province Rhénane et de la province de Westphalie, parvon Dechen, 100. A. Perrey.—Sur des volcans et solfatares de Vile de Java, 115. A. Gaudry.—Sur l’exploitation du gite fossilifére de Pikermi, 291, Verollot.—Tableau des tremblements de terre éprouvés 4 Cons stantinople pendant 15 ans (1841-55), 293. De Senarmont.—Sur la forme cristalline du silicium, 313. DONATIONS. 147 Paris. Académie des Sciences. Comptes Rendus. Vol. xliu. Parts 1-26 (continued). I. Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire.—Sur un ceuf d’Epyornis, 315. Alphand.—Sur le puits artésien de Passy, 332. F, de Francq.—De la formation et de la répartition des reliefs terrestres, p. 378. A. Pissis.—Etudes sur lorographie et sur la constitution géo- logique du Chili, 391. Recherches sur les systémes de soulévement de l’ Amé- rique du Sud, 392. Ville.—Notice minéralogique sur le cercle de Laghonat, 396. M. de Serres.—Sur la présence des zircons dans les sables marins tertiaires (pliocéne) de Soret, dans les environs de Mont- pelier, 434. Rotureau.—Sur les eaux thermales de Nauheim, 438. Bertrand.—Sur un gisement de puozzolane dans la Haute- Loire, 550. D’ Hombres Firmas.—Observations sur le Pecten glaber, 612. Meugy.—Sur le gisement, l’age, et le mode de formation des terrains 4 meuliéres du bassin de Paris, 628. A. Leymerie. — Du terrain jurassique dans les Pyrénées fran- caises, 730. M. de Serres.—De l’époque géologique a laquelle on doit rap- porter le dépot des spmelles et des zircons dans les sables marins de Sauret, 827. J. Durocher.—Etudes sur la production artificielle des minéraux et sur les conséquences qui en résultent pour la géologie, 850. Boussingault.—Sur un gisement de platine signalé dans un filon de la province d’Antioquia, 917. E. de Billey.—Note sur la carte géologique du département des Vosges, 963. Rozet.—Moyens de forcer les torrents des montagnes a rendre a Vagriculture une partie du sol qu’ils ravagent, 991. F. Fournet.—Apercus relatifs a la théorie des gites métal- liféres, 1097. L. L. Vallée.—Sur le lac de Genéve a l’oceasion des inondations de la vallée du Rhone, 1140. Renaud.—Sur la constitution géologique de l’isthme de Suez, 1163. C. Sainte-Claire Deville.—Sur les produits des volcans de l’Italie méridionale, 1167. L. L. Vallée.—Sur la réserve du lac de Genéve, 1181. Vigat.—Sur action saline de eau de mer sur les composés hydrauliques en général, 1200. Rozet.—Sur la grande inondation de Ja Loire, 1204. see eage hydrographique souterraine de la ville de Paris, 1207. Boussingault.—Sur les variations que eau de la mer Morte semble subir dans sa composition, 1230. Dausse.—Note relative aux imondations, 1241. J. Durocher.—Sur les gites métalliféres, et sur la disposition relative des cristaux de quartz et de feldspath dans les roches granitiques, 1251. Rozet.—Sur le puits foré de Tamerna, 1258. J. Bouis.—Sur la présence de ’ammoniaque dans certaines eaux minérales, 1269. L2 148 DONATIONS. Paris. Archives du Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle. Vol. i. ii. Part 3. 1855. Vol. vii. Part 4. 1856. Philadelphia. Academy of Natural Sciences, Journal, N.S. Vol. ii. Part 4. 1854. J. Leidy.—Bathygnathus borealis, 327 (plate). L Proceedings. Vol.vi. No.-7. C. M. Wetherill. Melan-asphalte from Hillsborough, New Brunswick, 225. Leidy.—Fossil mammalian teeth, 241. F. V. Greene.—Chemical imvestigation of fossil mammalian remains, 292. I’. A. Genth.—New variety of grey copper, 296. -——— Owenite, 297. —_——.. ———. ——. No.8. Leidy.— Ursus fal Megalonyx at Natchez, Mississippi, 303. T. A. Conrad.—Monograph of genus Fulgur, 316. —— Dreissena, Artemis, Acanthina, &c., 320. No. 9. —————. ——-. No. 10. Lady, —Fossil Couce, from the Greensand of New Jersey, 377. D. D. Owen and F. A. Genth.—Saponite, 379. Leidy.—Fossil Mammals and Chelonians from Nebraska, 392. NoMa. No. 12. Title-pageand Index. C. M. Wethecil. —Iron and titanium, 434. T. A. Conrad.—Cassidula and Athleta, 448, ee) ee ee Vol nee oan A. T. King.—Ancient alluvium of the Ohio and its tributaries, 4. Photographic Society, Journal. Nos. 44, 45, 46, 47. Ray Society, Report of the Council. 1856. Royal College of Surgeons of England, List of Fellows, &c. July 10, 1856 Royal reoeraihiica Society, Proceedings. No. 4. —————. No.5 F. W. Beechey. nea sary Address, and Obituary Notices. Royal Institution of Great Britain, List of Members, &c., for 1855- 1856. ———. Notices of Meetings. Part vi. 1855-56. J. Barlow.—Aluminium, 213. C. Lyell.—Successive changes of the Temple of Serapis, 207. RB. Owen.—Ruminants and the aboriginal cattle of Britain, 256. H. D. Rogers.—Geology and Physical Geography of North Meira: TG7; J. Tyndall.—Cleavage of crystals and of slate-rocks, 295. ee . DONATIONS. 149 Royal Society, List of Fellows. 1855. , Proceedings. Vol. viii. No. 21. H. James and others.—Figure, dimensions, and mean specific gravity of the Earth, as derived from the Trigonometrical Survey of Great Britain and Ireland, 111. : = = NO. oe H. J. Brooke.—Geometrical isomorphism of crystals, 187. W. B. Carpenter.—Foraminifera, part 2, 205. , Transactions. Vol. exlv. 1855. Pratt, J. H.—On the attraction of the Himalaya Mountains, and of the elevated regions beyond them upon the plumb- line in India, 53. Airy, G. B.—On the computation of the effect of the attraction of mountain-masses as disturbing the apparent astronomical latitude of stations in geodetie surveys, 101. Horner, L.—An account of some recent researches near Cairo, undertaken with the view of throwing light upon the geologi- eal history of the alluvial land of Egypt, 109. Hooker, J. D., and E. W. Binney.—On the structure of certain limestone-nodules enclosed in seams of bituminous coal, with a description of some Trigonocarpons contained in them, 149. Owen, R.—On the Megatherium. . Vol. icxlvi.; Part I. 1856. J. H. Pratt.—On the effect of local attraction upon the plumb- line at stations on the English are of the meridian, between Dunnose and Burleigh Moor, 31. W. B. Carpenter.—Researches on the Foraminifera, 181. W. J. Rankine.—On axes of elasticity and crystalline forms, 261. G. B. Airy.—Account of pendulum experiments undertaken in the Harton Colliery, for the purpose of determining the mean density of the Earth, 297. Society of Arts, Journal. Nos. 191-207. Exports and imports in the United Kingdom of Copper, Zinc, Tin, and Lead, 602. J. B. Daines.— Decay and preservation of stone-work, 604, 629. A. E. Bruckmann.—Absorbent bored wells, 609, 621, 634, 645. D. Mushet.—Iron-ores of Great Britain, 617. Induration of stone, 630. D. T. Ansted.—Absorbing wells, 643. H. Clarke.—Absorbing wells, 655. J. B. Denton.—Absorbing wells, 668. KE. C. Lewis.—Lithographic stone in Jamaica, 684. Bessemer’s manufacture of iron, 695, 708, 714. H. H. Burnell.— Decay and preservation of stone-work, 713. Bessemer’s manufacture of iron, 758. A. E. Bruckmann.—Absorbent bored wells, 764. Booth.—Address, What to learn, 768. H. W. Reveley.—Inundation and natural river-drainage, 786. -- Hydraulic cement, 788. Statistical Society, Journal. Vol. xix. Part 3. September 1856. . R. Hunt.—Present state of the mining industries of the United Kingdom, 201, 150 DONATIONS. Stockholm. Ars-berattelse om botaniska arbeten och upptackter for ar 1851 till kongl. Vetensk.-Akad. afgifven den 31 Mars 1852. Af J. E. Wikstrom. 1855. Kongl. Vetensk.-Akad. Handlingar, for ar 1853. Sednare afdelningen (No. 2). eel ———. , for ar 1854. Forra afdelningen. 1856 CNowL): Oefversigt af kongl. Vetensk.-Akad. Forhandl. Tolfte argangen 1855. 1856. Erdmann.—Ut6 jernmalmsfalts geologiska betkaffenhet, 141. Om de gamla vattenmarkena vid Sddra Staket, 329 (plate). Stuttgart. Wiirttembergische naturwissenschaftliche Jahreshefte. Erster Jahrgang. 1845. Parts 1 & 2. Quenstedt.—Ueber Hoffnung auf Kohlen m Wiirttemburg, 145. Sigwart.—Ueber die Canstatter und Be Mineralquellen, 150. Mandeleslohe.—Ueber Paleomeryx Scheuchzert und Gyrodus umbilicus, 152 (plate). G. Lewbe.—Ueber die Bedeutung der Chemie fiir die Geognosie, 153. Zenneck.—Ueber die Gaze, 154. Kurr.—Ueber einige weniger bekannte Gebirgsarten des Schwarz- waldes, 155 (pl. 2, figs. 3, 4). Plieninger.—Ueber den englischen hydraulischen Cement und das Vorkommen des Gesteins in Wiirttemberg, 157. Ueber Tubifex antiquus, 159 (pl. 2, fig. 5). Von Seyffer.—Beschreibung des Diluviums im Thale von Stutt- gart und Canstatt, 183 (map). Kurr.— Ueber emige Belemniten Wiirttembergs, 233. F. Krauss.—Backenzahne von Paleeomeryx, 255. : Zweiter Jahrg. 1846. Parts 1-3.. Von Klein.—Conchylien der Siisswasserkalkformationen Wiirtt- emberg’s, 60 (2 plates). Plieninger.— Ueber em neues Sauriergenus und die Eimreihung der Saurier mit flachen, schneidenden Zahnen im eine Familie, 148, 247 (plate). Quenstedt.—Ueber die Mineralien in den Luftkammern der Cephalopoden, 154. G. Leube.—Ueber die Bildung des Grundeises, 165. Sigwart.—Ueber hydraulischen Kalk, 168. Kurr und Quenstedt.—Ueber Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorkom- mens von Steinkohlen in Wiirttemberg, 170. Rampold.-—Ueber den See der einst das Neckarthal bei Canstatt bedeckte, und tiber das Verhalten der Canstatten Mineral- quellen zu eimander, 188. Ch. Paulus.—Ueber ein Vorkommen von Mergelkrystallen in der Keuperformation, 196. Fraas.—Die Thone des unteren Lias, 202 (pl. 3, fig. 3). Fehling.—Ueber das Vorkommen des Titans in Eisenschlacken, 255. Rogg.—Hypsometrische Tafel, fiir die orographischen und geo- graphischen Verhaltnisse Schwabens emgerichtet, 368. DONATIONS. 151 Stuttgart. Wiurttembergische naturwissenschaftliche Jahreshefte. Zweiter Jahrg. (continued). Ch. L. Landbeck.—Ueber das niederfallen eines Meteorsteines, 383 (plate). : —. Dritten Jahrg. 1847. Parts 1-3. Fehling.—Analyse einiger Ofenbriiche aus dem Hochofen zu Ludwigsthal bei Tuttlingen, 133. Schlossberger.— Arsenik im Canstatter Mineral-wasser-schlamm, 151. Sigwart.— Brom im Wasser von Friedrichshall und Canstatt, 152. Plieninger.—Cyprinoiden-Zahne im Siisswasserkalk von Stein- heim, 162 (pl. 1, figs. 1, 2). Microlestes antiquus und Sargodon tomicus in der Grenzbreccie von Degerloch, 164 (pl. 1, figs. 3-10). H. v. Meyer.—Paleochelys bussenensis im altern Siisswasserkalk, 167 (pl. 1, fig. 11). Fraas.—Die Loben der Ammoniten, 169 (pl. 2). Jager.—Ueber Gerdllebildung, 172. Ueber Bos Bison und Bos urus, 176. Weissman.—Crailsheimer Petrefactenverzeichniss, 191. Th. Fraas.—Orthoceratiten und Lituiten im mittleren schwarzen Jura, 218 (pl. 1, figs. 12-14), ; A. Ducke.—Beschreibung des Mineralwassers des Krumbach- Miihle-Bades zwischen Wolfegg und Kisslegg, 223. Th. Plieninger—Die Wirbelthierreste im Korallenkalk von Schnaitheim, 226 (pl. 1, fig. 15). Nekrolog Major v. Zieten’s, 249. Th. Pheninger.—Anoplotherium commune im iltern Siisswasser- kalk, 261. Knochenfiihrender Diluvium im Gebiete der Molasse, 261. — Ein nicht fossiles Nagethier im Muschelkalk, 262 (pl. 1, fig. 20). —_——. ———. Vierter Jahrg. 1848. Parts 1-3. Kurr.—Zur Geologie der Triasformation im Wiirttemberg und des Steinsalzes im Besonderen, |. H. Fehling.—Chemische Untersuchung der Soolen, des Koch- ~ und Stem-salzes und der Siedeabfalle der K. Wiirttemberg- ischen Salinen, 18. Quenstedt.—Ueber die Granzen der Muschelkalkformation, 57. Schlossberger.—Kiipfergehalt einiger im Handel vorkommenden Oelkuchensorten, 90. Hehl.—Anzeige der Palzozoologie von Dr. C. G. Giebel, 111. Eser.—Das Petrefaktenlager bei Ober- und Unter-Kirchberg an der Iller im Oberamt-Laupheim, 258. Sigwart.—Vorkommen des Brom’s und Jod’s in den Mineral- wassern und Heilquellen Wiirttembergs, 269. Hehl.—Anzeige der Mineralogie von E. Fr. Glocker, 279. : Fiinfter Jahrg. 1849. Parts 1-3. Fraas.—Vergleichung des Schwabischen Jura mit dem Franzi- sischen und Englischen, 1. Th. Schraam und H. Fehling.—Untersuchung der Kalksteine Wiirttemberg’s auf Alkalien und Phosphorsiure, 58. 152 DONATIONS. Stuttgart. Wiirttembergische naturwissenschaftliche Jahreshefte. Finfter Jahrg. (continued). G. Jager.—Ueber eimige aus Griechenland erhaltene fossile Knochen, 124. Ueber die Ausfiillung der fossilen Knochen durch erdige oder krystallinische Substanzen, 126. ih: Plieninger. —Ueber Amphicyon, 216 (pl. 1, figs. 8, 9). “Ueber Geosaurus maximus, 252 (pl. 1, fig. ai Mandelsloh und Fraas.—Ueber Stylolithen, 147 & 259 (pl. 1, figs. 1-6). Ph. Roman. —Rhyncholithen im Wiirttembergischen Jura, 260. . Sechster Jahrg. 1850. Parts 1-3. Th. Plieninger.— Ueber hydraulischen Cement, 124. Quenstedt.— Ueber Hippotherium der Bohnenerze, 165. Ueber Mecochirus im braunen Jura, bei Gammels- hausen, und emige andere Krebze, 186. Bruckmann.—Flora ceningensis fossilis, 215. Kd. Breuninger.— Die Zusammensetzung verschiedener Torfarten, 245. ———-. Siebenter Jahrg. 1851. Parts 1-3. Fehling und Kurr.— Untersuchung verschiedener Wirttemberg- ischer Kalksteine, 95. G. Jager.— Ueber die Ruhe und Bewegung des Wassers auf der Oberflache der Erde in semem verschiedenen Cohasionzu- standen und die Folgen, welche sich daraus fiir die Oeko- nomie deratur ergeben, 139. Ueber die Fundorte fossiler Ueberreste von Saugethieren, insbe- sondere in Stuttgart und semer Umgebung, 169. F, R. Furch.—Analyse der Mineralquelle oberhalb Bemstem im Oberamt-Waiblingen, 181. Teg a ae des Kiesel-Aluminits von Kornwestheim, Kurr.—Ueber die Enstehung des Flotzgebirges, 247. ———.. Achter Jahrg. 1852. Parts 1 & 2. O. Fraas.—Tertiare Ablagerungen auf den Hohen der Wiirttemb. Alpen, 56. Faber.—Ueber den mittleren schwarzen Jura in der Gegend von Gmiind, 59. Roman.—Schichtenfolgen im Juragebirge Schwabens, 61. Miller. Share oan Ae des Vanadiums in der Wiirttemb. Bohner- zen, Von Diirrich und E. Schwarz.—Geognostiche Terrain-Profile durch Wiirttemberg, 69 (plate). Weismann. Pe et Reste aus dem Crailsheimer Muschel- kalk, 7 Plieninger.— Ueber Stylolithen, Fahrten und Rutschflachen, 78. Von Jager.—Dinornis-Knochen, 116. Plieninger.—Belodon Plieningeri, 116. F. Krauss.—Die Mollusken der Tertiir-Formation von Kirchberg an der Iller, 136 (plate). Klein.—Conchylien der Siisswasserkalkformation Wirttembergs, 157 (plate). O. Fraas.—Beitrage zu Palaotherium-Formation, 218 (2 plates). A. E. Bruckmann,—Flora cenimgensis fossilis, 252. DONATIONS. 153 Stuttgart. Wiirttembergische naturwissenschaftliche Jahreshefte. Neunter Jahrg. 1853. Parts 1-3. O. Fraas.—Nachtrage zu den Fronstetter Paleotherien, 63. Quenstedt.—Ueber die Fronstetter Fossilien, iber Menschen- zahne und iiber Stylolithen, 64. F, von Albertii—Die Bohnerze des Jura, ihre Beziehung zur Pe und zu Gypsen von Paris, Aix und Hohenhoewen, G. Viger —Ueber Dinornis, 91. O. Fraas.—Der Ber ‘gschlipf von Rathshausen, 112. G. Jager.—Ueber einige fossile Knochen und Zahne des Donau- thals, 129 (2 plates). Bruckmann.—Negative artesische Brunnen, 173 (plate). Klein.—Conchylien des Siisswasserkalkformation W iirttembergs, 203 (plate). Quenstedt.—Ueber emen Schnaitheimer Lepidotuskiefer, 361 (plate). . Zehnter Jahrg. 1854. Parts 1 & 2 Kurr.—Ueber das natiirliche Vorkommen eimiger schweren Metalle, 24. Fleischer.— Ueber emige réhrenformige Brauneisensteine, 24. Eser.— Ueber Pflanzen- und Thier-iiberreste aus den platten- formigen Jurakalk von Nusplingen im Bernerthal, 29. A. Oppel.—Der mittlere Lias Schwabens, 39 (4 plates). Enulfter Jahrg. 1855. Parts 1 & 2. Nekrologe von Bergrath Dr. Hehl und Inspector von Fleischmann, 57. O. Fraas.—Beitrige zum obersten weissen Jura in Schwaben, 77 (plate.) Von Fehling.—Bestimmung der Menge an festen Bestandtheilen in emem Brunnen Stuttgarts, 126. — Specifisches Gewicht und Zusammensetzung der Soole von Hall, 127. ———. Zwolfter Jahrg. 1856. Parts 1 & 2. O. Fraas.— Ueber die Ablagerung ' von Petrefakten im Jura, 43. Von Buhler.—UVeber die Beziehungen der Stromgebiete und Wasserscheiden zu den Gebirgen, 47. Fleischer.— Ueber Kalksinterbildung, 61. Eser.—Petrefakten, 63. A. Oppel.—Ueber einige Cephalopoden der Juraformation Wiurttembergs, 104. Quenstedt.—Ueber Pentacrinites colligatus, 108 (plate). Von Fehling und Von Kurr.— Untersuchung fossiler Fischzihne von unbekannter Abstammung, 118. A. Oppel.—Die Juraformation Englands, Frankreichs und des sldwestlichen Deutschlands, 121. Van Diemen’s Land Royal Society, Papers and Proceedings. Vol. iii. Part 1. January 1855. R. C. Gunn.—Encroachments of the Sea along the North Coast of Tasmania, 54. Penny.—Combustible schist of the Mersey River, Tasmania, 108. A. R. C. Selwyn.—Coal of Van Diemen’s Land, 116 (plates). 154 DONATIONS. Vienna. Almanach der kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sechster Jahrgang. 1856. F. X. W. Zippe.—Gold, Kupfer, Eisen, 135. Denkschriften der k. Akad. der Wissenschaften. Math.- Nat. Cl. Vol. x. 1855. A. E. Reuss.—Palaontologische Miscellen {[ Dodo, Chelone Bens- tedi, Lepidoderma (Eurypterus) Imhofi, and Reptilian teeth], 71 (7 plates). M. Hornes.—UVeber emige neue Gastropoden aus den ostlichen Alpen, 173 (3 plates). _“-“_ s. Vol. Ri: TSSbi F. R. v. Hauer.—Ueber die Cephalopoden aus dem Lias der nordostlichen Alpen, | (25 plates). R. Richter.—Beitrag zur Palaontologie des Thirimger Waldes, 87 (3 plates). F. Unger.—Schiefer- und Sandstein-Flora, 139 (13 plates). . Die Geographische Gesellschaft in Wien. (Opening Meeting.) Jahrbiicher der K. K. Central-Anstalt fur Meteorologie und Erdmagnetismus: von K. Kriel. Vol. iv. Jahrgang 1852. 1856. . Sitzungsberichte der k. Akad. der Wissensch. Math.- Nat. Cl. Vol. xvii. Part 1. Unger.—Ueber einige Pflanzenreste im Thonmergel des Kohlen- flotzes von Prevali, 28 (plate). Zeuschner.—Rhynchonella pachytheca, 48 (2 plates). Siiss.—Ueber Meganteris, 51 (3 plates). Sandberger.—Ueber den inneren Bau eimiger rheinischen Bra- chiopoden, 102 (2 plates). Haidinger.— Ein optisch-mineralogischer Aufschraube-Gonio- meter, 110. Reuss.— Ueber Koprolithen im Rothliegenden Bohmens, 124: Hlasiwetz.—Analyse des Sauerbrunnens und der Schwefelquelle zu Obladis in Tirol, 133. —$—. ————.. ———. Vol. xviii. Part 2. Reuss.—Beitrag zur Charakteristik der Tertiarschisten des nord- lichen und mittleren Deutschlands, 197 (12 plates). Richter und Unger.—Die organischen Eimschliisse des Cypridinen- schiefers des Thiirmger Waldes, 392. — —. Vol. xix. Part 1. Leydolt.— Ueber die Structur und Zusammensetzung der Krystalle des prismatischen Kalkhaloides, nebst eiem Anhange iiber die Structur der Kalkigen Theile einiger wirbellosen Thiere, 10 (9 plates). Zeuschner.—Geognostische Beschreibung des Liaskalkes in der Tatra und in den angrenzenden Gebirgen, 135 (2 plates). —<<—, _———. ——.. Vol. xix. Part 2. Strasky.— Analyse der Anthrazit-Kohle aus der Nahe von Ru- dolfstadt bei Budweis in Bohmen, 325. DONATIONS, 155 Vienna. Sitzungsberichte der k. Akad. der Wissensch. Math.-Nat. Cl. (continued). Neugeboren.—Ueber die Foraminiferen aus der Ordnung der Stichostegier von Ober-Lapugy, 333. Haidinger.—Ueber Herrn von Dechen’s neue geologische Karte vom Rheinland-Westphalen, 336. Zepharovich.—Die Halbinsel Tihany im Plattensee und die nachste Umgebung von Fiired, 339 (2 plates). _———., Vol. xx. Part 1. Moser.— Ueber die Zusammensetzung des Nilschlammes, 9. Hochstetter.—Ueber die Lage der Karlsbader Thermen in zwei parallelen Quellenziigen auf zwei parallelen Gebirgsspalten, 13 (plate). Hauer.—Ueber die Gewinnung von Vanadin aus den Joachims- thaler Uranerzen, 37. Ueber einige neue Verbindungen des Cadmiums, 40. Hornes.—Ueber Gastropoden aus der Trias der Alpen, 68. Stur.—Ueber den Einfluss des Bodens auf die Vertheilung der Pflanzen, 71. Wohler.—Ueber das Meteoreisen von Toluca in Mexico, 217. Stur.—Ueber die geologische Uebersichtskarte der Neogen- tertiiren, Diluvial- und Alluvial-Ablagerungen im Gebiete der nordéstlichen Alpen, 274. Wiesbaden. Jahrbiicher des Vereins fiir Naturkunde im Herzogthum Nassau. Zehnter Heft. 1855. R. Fresenius.—Die Mineralquellen zu Langenschwalbach, 1. A. Dollfuss und C. Neubauer. Chemische Untersuchung einiger Schalsteine des Herzog. Nassau, 49. G. Sandberger.—Das Leptometer, 83. Kurze notiz tiber das Werk “ Versteinerungen des Rheinischen Schichtensystems in Nassau,” 85. G. Sandberger.—Clymenia subnautilina, 127 (plate). Portrait of Von Buch (frontispiece). Yorkshire (West Riding). Geological and Polytechnic Society. Report of Proceedings for 1855. W. Thorp.—Ironstones of the oolitic district of Yorkshire, 394. H. Denny.—Contemporaneity of the Megaceros with Man, 400. R. C. Carter.—New Boring-machine, 449. Zoological Society of London, Proceedings. Nos. 299-309. R. Owen.—Dinornis (part vii.), 54. II. GEOLOGICAL CONTENTS OF PERIODICALS PURCHASED FOR THE LIBRARY. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 2nd Ser. Vol. xviii. No. 103. July 1856. T. H. Huxley.—On the method of Paleontology, 43, R. Owen.—The Ruminantia and the aboriginal cattleof Britain, 61. ; - No. 104. August 1856. J. Phillips’s Manual of Geology, noticed, 159. O. Heer.—On the probable origin of the organized beings now living in the Azores, Madeira, and the Canaries, 183. 156 DONATIONS. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 2nd Ser. Vol. xviii. No. 105. September 1856. ——. No. 106. Oct. 1856. Ww. B. Carpenter.—Foraminifera, 334. Dunker und von Meyer’s Paleeontographica. Vol. iv. Part 6. 1856. W. Dunker.—Ueber mehrere Pflanzreste aus dem Quadersand- steme von Blankenburg, 179 (4 plates). G. Sandberger.—Beitrag zur vergleichenden Naturgeschichte ie und vorweltlicher polythalamer Cephalopoden, 184 late) C. i G. von Heyden.—Reste von Insekten aus der Braun- kohle von Salzhausen und Westerburg, 198 (2 plates). G. Fresenius und H. von Meyer.—Spheria areolata aus der Braunkohle der Wetterau, 202 (plates). Volk. vas juPart ds 856. H. von Meyer.—Paleontographische Studien :—Saurier aus der Kreide-gruppe im Deutschland und der Schweiz, 3; Thau- matosaurus ooliticus aus dem Oolith von Neuffen, 14; Neuer Beitrag zur Kenntniss der fossilen Fische aus dem Tertiarthon von Unter-Kirchberg, 22; Arionius servatus, em Meersiu- gethier der Molasse, 31; Delphinus cunaliculatus aus der Molasse, 44 ; Schildkréten und Saugethiere aus der Braun- kohle von Turnau in Steyermark, 50; Trachyastris Lardyt aus der Molasse der Schweiz, 56 (8 plates). Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal. New Series. Vol. iv. No. 1. July 1856. R. Harkness.—Scalariform Poke in the Devonian strata of Ire- land, 65 (plate). A. Aytoun.—Geology of the Southern Concan, 67 (map). —. Vol.iv. No. 2, Oct. 1856. J. Martin.—The Northern drift, 209. W.S. Symonds.—The transition beds from the Upper Silurian into the Old Red, and from the Old Red into the Carboni- ferous rocks, 239. W. B. Rogers.—Discovery of Paradoxides in the altered rocks of Massachusetts, 301. R. Harkness and J. Blyth.—The Lignites of the Giant’s Cause- way, the Isle of Mull, and Bovey-Tracey, 304. H. C. Sorby.—The terraces mm the Valley of the Tay, north of Dunkeld, 317. R. Owen.— Stereognathus ooliticus from the Stonesfield slate, 337. Dichodon cuspidatus from the Isle of Wight and Hordwell, 338. H. C. Sorby.—Magnesian limestone, 338. W.S. Symonds.—Origin of the Haffield conglomerate, 339. H. C. Sorby.—Microscopical structure of Mica-schist, 339. J. S. Bowerbank.—Siliceous bodies in the Chalk, 339. W. H. Bailey.—Fossils from the Crimea, 340. C. Moore.—Skin and food of Ichthyosauri and Teleosauri, 343. W. Bessemer.—Manufacture of iron and steel, 357. Fontan.—Fossil Apes, 371. J. D. Hooker.—Progressive development (fossil botany), 372. DONATIONS. 157 Leonhard und Bronn’s Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geognosie, Geologie und Petrefakten-Kunde. Jahrgang 1856. Drittes Heft. . H. J. Burkart.—Ueber die Fundorte der bis jetzt bekannten Mexikanischen Meteoreisen-Massen, nebst Bemerkungen iiber den Ursprung und die Zusammensetzung der Aerolithe, 257 (plate). J. Barrande.—Die Unterscheidungs-Merkmale der Nautiliden, Goniatitiden und Ammonitiden und die neue Sippe Notho- ceras, 308 (plate). Letters; Notices of Books, Mineralogy, Geology, and Fossils. : . —. Viertes Heft. QO. Dieffenbach.—Bemerkungen iiber den Mineral-Reichthum der Vereinten Staaten von Nord Amerika, 385. F. Stifft—Chemisch-analytische Untersuchung des Orthits yon Weinheim in Baden, 395. K. C. v. Leonhard.—Kiinstlichen Graphit (ein Bruchstiick aus “‘ Hutten-erzeugnisse als Stiitzpunkte geologischer Hypo- thesen”’), 398. Letters; Notices of Books, Mineralogy, Geology, and Fossils. III. GEOLOGICAL AND MISCELLANEOUS BOOKS. Names of Donors in Italics. Annales Hydrographiques: recueil d’avis, instructions, documents et mémoires relatifs a Vhydrographie et a la navigation; par Darondeau. Janvier a Juin 1854. From the Dépét de la Marine. Becher, J. P. Mineralogische Beschreibung der Oranien-Nassau- ischen Lande, nebst einer Geschichte des Liegenschen Hitten- und Hammer-wesens. 8yvo. Marburg, 1789. From J. Morris, Esq., F.G.S. Blainville, H. M. D.de. Manuel d’Actinologie ou de Zoophytologie. Text and Plates, in 2 vols. Paris, Svo. 1834. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Brocchi, G. Dello stato fisico del suolo di Roma. 8vo. Rome, 1820. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Bronn, H.G. Lethzea Geognostica. 3rd edit. Text, parts 1-10. 8vo. Stuttgart, 1851-55. Plates (fol.) 1-47 and 6 Supplem. Parts. From H. Sharpe, Esq. ‘Brunner, C. Sur les phénoménes de soulévement dans les Alpes Suisses. 8vo. Geneva, 1852. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Catalogue chronologique des Cartes, Plans, Vues de cétes, Mémoires, Instructions nautiques, etc., qui composent IT hydrographie francaise. 1856. From the Dépét de la Marine. 158 DONATIONS. Catullo, T. 4. Dei Terreni di Sedimento superiore delle Venezie e dei fossili Bryozoari, Antozoari e Spongiari ai quali danno ricetto Memoria. Intorno ad una nuova Classificazione delle Calcarie Rosse Ammonitice delle Alpi Venete Memoria. Considerazioni imtorno ad alcune recenti Memorie di Geognosia Paleozoica. Cunningham, R. J. H. On the Geology of the Lothians. 1838. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Davidson, T., and E. Deslongchamps. Introduction a Vhistoire naturelle des Brachiopodes vivants et fossiles, par Thomas David- son; traduit de l Anglais, par E. Deslongchamps. Caen, 4to. 1856. Description des cétes de l’Esthonie, de la Livonie, de la Courlande (Russie), de la Prusse et de la Poméranie, jusqu’au Cap Dar- serort, d’aprés les instructions nautiques de J. Hjorth. Paris, 1855. From the Dépét de la Marine. Description du Golfe de Finlande et de l’entrée du Golfe de Bothnie, d’aprés les instructions nautiques de J. Hjorth. Paris, 1854. From the Dépét de la Marine. Deslongchamps, E. E. Notes pour servir ala Géologie du Calvados. Supplément a la notice sur des Empreintes ou Traces d’animaux existant 4 la surface d’une roche de grés. D’Orbigny, Alcide. Paléontologie Francaise: Terr. Jurass, Livr. 85-101. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Terr. Crétac. Livr. 209-244. From HA. Sharpe, Esq. Edwards, H. M., et J. Haime. Recherches sur la structure et la classification des Polypiers récents et fossiles. Prem. partie. 8vo. Paris, 1848-49. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Engelhardt, Ch. M. Das Monte-Rosa- und Matterhorn- (Mont- Cervin) Gebirge. 8vo. Strasburg, 1852. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Exposé du Régime des Courants observés, depuis le xvi* siécle jusqu’a nos jours, dans la Manche, et la mer d’Allemagne, et de leur supputation dans la navigation générale a l’aide du routier compteur, par F. A, Keller. 1855. From the Dépét de la Marine. Favre, A. Notice sur la Géologie de la Vallée du Reposoir en Savoie. Svo. Geneva, 1849. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Notice sur la Géologie du Tyrol Allemand, et sur l’ori- gine de la Dolomie. 8vo. Geneva, 1849. From H, Sharpe, Eisq. . DONATIONS, 159 Favre, A. Notice sur les Systémes des Montagnes, par M. L. E, de Beaumont. 8vo. Geneva, 1853. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Observations sur la position relative des terrains des Alpes Suisses occidentales et les Alpes de la Savoie. 8vo, Paris, 1847. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Recherches géologiques faites dans les Environs de Chamounix en Savoie. Svo. Geneva, 1848. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Sur la présence de la Craie blanche dans les Alpes de la Savoie. Svo. Geneva, 1852. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Fleming, J. A History of British Animals. 8vo. Edinburgh, 1828. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Geinitz, H. B. Geognostische Darstellung der Steinkohlenforma- tion in Sachsen mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung des Roth- liegenden. Girard, H. Geologische Wanderungen ; I. Wallis, Viverais, Velay. 8vo. Halle, 1855. From H, Sharpe, Esq. Goebel, A. Untersuchung eines Meteorsteins. Gray, M.E. Figures of Molluscous Animals selected from various authors, etched for the use of students by Maria Emma Gray. 8vo. 4 vols. 1842-1850. London. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Guiscardi, G. Fauna Fossile Vesuviana. Hagenow, F. yon. Die Bryozoen der Maastrichter Kreidebildung. 4to. Cassel, 1851. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Halloy, J. J. dOmalius d’. Mémoires pour servir 4 la description géologique des Pays-bas, de la France, et de quelques Contrées voisines. 8vo. Namur, 1828. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Harkness, R. On the oceurrence of Scalariform Tissue in the De- vonian Strata of the South of Ireland. ‘Hausmann, J. F. L. Ueber die durch Molekularbewegungen in starren leblosen Korpern bewirkten Formyeriinderungen. 4to. Gottingen, 1856. Hawile, I., and A. J.C. Corda. Prodrom einer Monographie der odhmischen Trilobiten, 4to, Prague, 1847. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Heer, O. Lettre a Sir C. Lyell, traduite par C. T. Gaudin. From M, C. T. Gaudin. Uebersicht der Tertiarflora der Schweiz. Svo. Zurich. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Helmersen, G. von. Ueber das langsame Emporsteigen der Ufer des Baltischen Meeres und die Wirkung der Wellen und deg Eises auf dieselben. 160 DONATIONS. Hennessy, H. On the Influence of the Earth’s Internal Structure on the Length of the Day. Henwood, W.J. Notice of the Rock-Basins at Deo (Devi) Dhoora. Holmes, J. I. The Inspiration of Moses proved by the Perfect Agreement of his Accounts of the Creation and Deluge. Hopkins, EZ. On the Vertical Structure of the Primary Rocks, &e. King, W. Notes on the Permian Fossils (Palliobranchiata). Kirschbaum, C. L. Ueber Hoplisus punctuosus, Eversm. Le Pilote Danois, traduit de la derniére édition du Danske-Lods, du Dépot Hydrographique de Copenhague. 1855. From the Dépét de la Marine. Link, H. F. Geologische und Mineralogische Bermerkungen auf einer Reise durch das Siidwestliche Europa, besonders Portugal. 8vo. Leipsic, 1801. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Mackenzie, F. The Architectural Antiquities of the collegiate chapel of St. Stephen. From the Commissioners of H.M. Works and Public Buildings. Manuel de la Navigation dans la mer Adriatique, d’aprés Marieni, Beautemps-Beaupré, etc., et les documents les plus récents, par A. le Gras. 1855. From the Dépét de la Marine. Noschel, A. Bemerkungen uber die natur-historischen, insbesondere die geognostisch hydrographischen verhaltnisse der Steppe zwischen den Flussen Or und Turgai, Kumark und Syr-Darja. Mit einem Vorwort und Bemerkungen von G. v. Helmersen. From Col. G. v. Helmersen. Observations Chronométriques faites pendant la campagne de circum- navigation de la corvette ‘ la Capricieuse,’’ par E. Mouchez. 1855. From the Dépét de la Marine. Oppel, A. Die Jura-formation Englands, Frankreichs und des siid- westlichen Deutschlands. Erstes Heft. S8vo. Stuttgart, 1856. ————.. Ueber einige Cephalopoden der Jura-formation Wir- tembergs. Owen, R. Ou Dinornis. Part IV. Parliamentary Report. On the progress of the Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ireland. From the Geolog. Surv. Gt. Brit. Pilote de la mer Baltique de l’Amiral Suédois G. Klint, augmenté des documents hydrographiques les plus récents, traduit et publié par A. le Gras. 1856. From the Dépét de la Marine. Portulan des cdtes de la Manche, du canal de Bristol et de la cédte sud d’Irelande, traduit des instructions Anglaises de M. le Capitame Martin White et de Phydrographe John Purdy, par V. A. Moulac. 1855. From the Dépdt de la Marine. DONATIONS. 161 Renevier, E. Note sur la Synonymie de la Natica rotundata. et P. Delaharpe. Excursions Géologiques dans les Alpes Valaisannes et Vaudoises. Nos. 1 & 2. Renseignements Hydrographiques sur la mer d’Azof, recueillis et redigés par G. C. Cloud. 1856. From the Dépét de la Marine. Roquan, O. R. du. Description des Coquilles fossiles de la famille des Rudistes qui se trouvent dans le terrain crétacé des Corbiéres (Aude). 4to. 1841. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Routier de |’ Australie, traduit de Anglais et annoté d’aprés les travaux hydrographiques les plus récents, par A. le Gras. 1855. From the Dépét de la Marine. Sandberger, F. Untersuchungen tber den inneren Bau einiger Rheinischen Brachiopoden. Sandberger, G., und F. Sandberger. Die Verstemerungen des Rheinischen Schichten-Systems in Nassau. Text (Schluss). Ato. Wiesbaden, 1856. . ———. Die Verstemerungen des Rheinischen Schichten-Systems in Nassau. Text and Plates in 2 vols. 4to. Wiesbaden, 1850-56. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Scheuzer, J. J. Herbarium Diluvianum. Edit. Nov. 1723. From J. Morris, Esq., F.GS. Schlagintweit, A. Ueber die Temperatur des Bodens und der Quellen inden Alpen. 8vo. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Bericht tiber die Besteigung des Monte-Rosa im Jahre 1851, und tiber die Hohenmessung seiner Gipfel. 8vo. Berlin. From H. Sharpe, Esq. Sedgwick, A., and F. M‘Coy. British Palzeozoic Fossils. 4to. From HI. Sharpe, Esq. Sharpe, D., various Papers by. From H. Sharpe, Esq. ————. On the Bala Limestone. 1842. On the Silurian Rocks of the South of Westmoreland and North of Lancashire. 1843. and J. Morris. Description of eight species of Brachio- podous Shells from the Paleeozoic Rocks of the Falkland Islands. 1846. -—— - Contributions to the Geology of North Wales. 1846. ———. On Slaty Cleavage. 1847. . On Trematis, a new genus belonging to the family of Brachiopodous Mollusca. 1847. On the Fossil Remains of Mollusca from the Paleozoic Formations of the United States. 1848. VOL. XIII.—PART I. M —— 162 DONATIONS. Sharpe, D. On the Geology of the neighbourhood of Oporto. 1848. —. On Slaty Cleavage. 1849. . On Tylostoma, a proposed genus of Gasteropodous Mollusks. 1849. Remarks on the genus Nerimeea, with an account of the species found in Portugal. 1850. On the Secondary district of Portugal which hes on the north of the Tagus. 1850. On the Quartz Rock ot MacCulloch s Map of Scotland. —_ 1852, On the Southern Border of the Highlands of Scotland. —_—_ 1852, Review of the Classification of the Paleeozoic Formations adopted by M. Dumont for the Geological Map of Belgium, with reference to its applicability to this. country. 1852. —_——— On the Carboniferous and Silurian Formations of the neighbourhood of Bussaco in Portugal; by Senhor Carlos Ribeiro. With Notes and a Description of the Animal Remains, by D. Sharpe, J. W. Salter, and T. R. Jones: and an Account of the Vegetable Remains, by Charles J. F. Bunbury. 1853. Note appended to R. A. C. Austen’s paper “On the Series of Upper Paleozoic Groups in the Boulonnais.” 1853. On the Age of the Fossiliferous Sands and Gravels of Farringdon and its neighbourhood. 1854. On the Structure of Mont Blanc and its environs. 1854. On the Last Elevation of the Alps; with Notices of ‘the Heights at which the Sea has left traces of its action on their sides. 1856. — . On the arrangement of the Foliation and Cleavage of the Rocks of the North of Scotland. 1852. Description of the Fossil Remains of Mollusca found in the Chalk of England (Cephalopoda). Palzeontographical Society. 1853, 1854, 1856. Tchihatcheff, P.de. Asie Mineure: description Physique, Statistique, et Archéologique de cette contrée. Tyndall, J. Comparative View of the Cleavage of Crystals and Slate-rocks. a — ee THE QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. DECEMBER 3, 1856. J. G. Croker, M.D., the Rev. E. F. Witts, the Rev. E. Duke, H. Bevan, M.D., the Rev. J. B. P. Dennis, and P. D. Margesson, Capt. R.A., were elected Fellows. The following communications were read :— 1. On the Voucanic Eruption at Hawaii in 1855-56. By F. A. Wexp, Esq. Ina Letter to Sir C. Lye, V.P.G.S. You have done me the honour to say that any notes I could furnish concerning my visit to the Hawaiian volcanos, during the great erup- tion of 1855-56, would be of interest ; unfortunately they can be only the reminiscences of an observer, not the researches of a scientific man ; but, such as they are, I place them at your service. I landed in the Sandwich Islands in October 1855, with the Hon. J. F. Stuart Wortley, in the island of Maui; and, hearing of the great eruption of Mauna Loa on the Island of Hawaii, we lost no time in proceeding thither by the earliest opportunity that offered elt, ***** On the north-eastern coast, gradually rising from the clumps of cocoa-nut palms on the beach, slopmg tracts of light-red volcanic soil and scoriz, intersected by ravines, and partially covered with VOL. XIII,—PART I. N 164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL socieTy. [| Dec. 3, grass and wild indigo, led the eye up to the forests that clothe the mountain-sides. Three principal summits, Mauna Kea (13,800 ft.), Mauna Loa (the ‘Great Mountain,” 13,700 ft.), and Mauna Hua- lalei (10,000 ft.), rose above the forests and upland-valleys, not, however, with that sharp-cut rugged angularity of form usual in vol- canic regions, but rather rounded and swelling in their outline. Mauna Loa, almost in the centre of the island, appeared, from its size and distance, perfectly smooth and gently rounded. A little below its summit, two jets of smoke marked the craters of the recent eruption. The whole view was imposing, calm, and grand. We crossed the island by the open upland-valley of the Waimea, where many of the products of the temperate zone flourish, and, passing over the shoulder of Mauna Kea amid forests and belts of timber, thence descended into the Hamakua district, and pursued our way towards the little town of Hilo, following a tract above the eastern sea-coast through a most beautiful country. Numerous ravines, filled with banana, bread-fruit, and candlenut trees, cut deeply through the grassy slopes, which, dotted with clumps of pandanus and bamboo, and varied by occasional small coffee and sugar plantations, rose from the sea-cliffs to the forests. As we approached Hilo, clear bright rivulets dashed down the rocky channels of the ravines and fell in cascades into the sea. _ Hilo, a small town of cottages scattered among cocoa-nut, bread- fruit, and other trees along the shore of Byron’s Bay, is a place of some importance as a resort of whalers, who frequent it for supplies. It may be said to stand at the foot of Mauna Loa, though the sum- mit of the mountain is about forty miles inland, with a gradual ascent the whole way. The three great mountains of Hawaii are all recent volcanos. Mauna Kea, the most northerly of the three, is somewhat the high- est. Its summit bears evident traces of volcanic activity at no remote period; but of late years it has not been in eruption. Mauna Hualalei, on the west coast, was in eruption a few years ago. By far the most active is Mauna Loa. Kilauea, the largest active voleanic crater in the world, is situated on its acclivity, and is con- stantly active ; whilst, above it, Mauna Loa proper presents an im- fhense bare area, perhaps forty miles in diameter, which is entirely composed of volcanic debris and lavas of different ages; and few years pass by without its bursting forth in one direction or another. On the 11th of August 1855, the present eruption burst forth at about 12,000 feet above the sea-level on the northern side of the mountain. It was rather remarkable for the enormous and unprecedented flow of lava than for any projection of inflamed substances into the air, though its light illumined the horizon for many miles, and the column of fire, or its reflexion, was said by some to have been at first apparently 500 feet high. At the commencement, the lava ran with great rapidity into the upland-valley that divides the summit of Mauna Loa from that of Mauna Kea; then, taking an easterly direction, it flowed down towards Hilo. The main branch was in many parts about three miles wide ; but, as it reached comparatively 1856. | WELD—MAUNA LOA. 165 level country, with forests, jungles, swamps, and streams, it spread to a width of five or six miles, and flowed more slowly. At the time we left Hawaii (Nov. 23, 1855) it had been gaining about a mile a week ; but during the last week it had made yet more sensible pro- gress. The whole length of the course of the lava was, including sinuosities, then computed at considerably more than fifty miles from the craters, and it was then only eight miles in a direct line from the town, which it threatened with destruction. Our first good view from Hilo of the eruption was at night, from the deck of a ship in the harbour, as trees obstructed the view from the shore. The distant craters were scarcely visible; but the burn- ing forests above Hilo showed the front of the advancing lava, light- ing up the night with a mighty glare, with sometimes a column of red light shooting up, occasioned probably by an explosion of the half-cooled upper crust of lava, or by dried trees falling into the devouring element. Having spent some days at Hilo, and completed the necessary arrangements, we started with natives and horses to Kilauea, intending to proceed thence on foot. The ascent, though very gradual, may be said to commence immediately on leaving Hilo. The weather was unpropitious, and, where the path was not old lava, it was deep mud ; so that it was not until the second afternoon that we reached Kilauea, as we could hardly get our horses along. The country varied be- tween woods and jungles* and open tracts of Fern, “ Ti” (Dracena terminalis), and other bushes. A little before we reached Kilauea, we entered the region of the “ Koa,’’—a tree resembling the Austra- lian gums or Lucalypti, but which is, I believe, classed by Douglas as an Acacia. We also remarked a very handsome yellow Acacia, the Wild Strawberry and Raspberry, and some Tree-ferns. The soil, of a red colour, was covered with masses of scoriz, and in many places entirely hidden by streams of old lava. Our course from Hilo had been about thirty or thirty-five miles, its direction being nearly south by west, and latterly more westerly, when, on the afternoon of Nov. 14, we stood above the great crater of Kilauea, 4104 feet above the sea. We found a grass-built hut on the verge of the upper rim of the crater, and here we took up our quarters. The mountain of Kilauea may be described as the base of a broad, low, truncated cone, standing on a high level plateau on the side of Mauna Loa. It appears asif the apex had subsided, leaving in the centre of the mountain a flat sunken crater, the upper rim of which is about seven miles in circumference. Indeed, even now the level of the bottom of the erater is often lowered by eruptions. In the year 1840 an underground eruption of Kilauea reduced the level of its crater 60 feet. The subterranean course of the lava was marked by steam-jets, until some miles below Kilauea it burst forth and ran with great rapidity, reaching the sea more than thirty miles off, in the Puna district, to the southward of Hilo, where it formed * Chiefly of a tree of the Myrtle species, often covered with parasites, and bearing red and sometimes yellow flowers. N 2 166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Dee. 3, two or three islands. The sea was heated for many miles, and im- mense numbers of fish were killed. From our hut we looked down upon two partially sunken ledges (covered with grass, fern, and bushes), which, as well as the spot where our hut stood, were in many places steaming. In one spot especially we remarked a large bank or mound composed appareutly of a chalky substance, probably a deposit of some chemical salts, with a great deal of sulphur, from which issued a considerable body of steam. Below these ledges lay the great crater, like a round basin, about seven miles in circumference at the upper rim. The depth from the top of the highest of the surrounding cliffs to the bottom of the crater has been calculated at 1500 feet, though in many parts” it is considerably less. These cliffs form a kind of wall of yellowish gravelly clay and dark basaltic rock, and are nearly perpendicular. The bottom of the crater is constantly changing. I was assured that there is often a lake of molten lava, a mile in length by half a mile im breadth. When we saw it, however, the crater was not in a very active state, and no such lake of fire was visible. Looking down into the crater, it had the appearance of a flat plain of dull lead-coloured lava, more or less broken and rugged in places, and containing an infinity of small mounds and craters, whence issued clouds of smoke, especially towards evening. As night came on, the action of the volcano appeared to increase, and the light of subterraneous fires was seen at many places; for Mr. Stuart Wortley, who was prevented by indisposition from proceeding with me to Mauna Loa, and remained at Kilauea until my return, observed some of the small craters within the great crater occasionally ejecting hot stones and melted lava ; and on the night of my return from Mauna Loa I noticed the same thing on a small scale. I may here mention that, after my return from Mauna Loa, we descended into the crater of Kilauea, and spent some time in it. Its floor is evidently the cooled upper crust of fused lava. The numerous small mounds, or miniature craters, have orifices like the mouth of a limekiln, often double, in the side and ‘on the summit, through which you may look into the red-hot depths below and caverns of subterraneous fire. We also remarked, in places, long ridges of smoking masses and fragments of rock that had evidently been upheaved through the lava-pavement, and piled con- fusedly on one another. The lava itself, on which we walked, was sometimes very hot, especially near the steam-vents and open abysses. The exhalations of sulphuric acid and other noxious gases were also in places an impediment to our explorations. The lava is generally of a dull glossy lead-colour, when quite cool; but of a brighter green or blue, when more recent. It cools into every variety of form and consistency ; the most curious is the capillary lava, called by the natives “ Pelé’s hair.”’ It strongly resembles hair of reddish, brown- ish, or golden hues; and is supposed by the Sandwich Islanders to be the hair of the goddess Pelé, who luxuriates in the bath of fire of her volcanos, as they do in the cool waves that break over their coral-reefs, Having spent a night in the grass-hut above the crater of Kilauea, . 1856. ] WELD—MAUNA LOA. | 167 I started early in the morning of Nov. 15, with three natives, to the new craters on Mauna Loa. After walking a couple of miles over grass-country, we entered a wood, and commenced the ascent. In about two hours we began to emerge from the wood, and by 9 a.m. we were fairly upon thelava. It was an old lava-stream, with various species of Hpacris, a red whortle-berry, and similar plants growing in its crevices. Our course this morning had diverged a little to the north and then to the south of west, but now we made right for the upper crater on the rounded back of Mauna Loa, bearing about west. Betore us lay a vast wilderness. On either hand belts of wood that had escaped comparatively recent eruptions struggled yet a little higher up the mountain-side. We passed several large caverns, once the ducts of molten lava, and formed of the cooled upper crust of the lava-current,—and heaps of stones, erected to mark a place where a horse and, if I understood rightly, some natives had perished. About fifty years ago, indeed, half a native army were smothered by an eruption of ashes from Kilauea. Proceeding onwards over lava and loose porous stones, like pumice, only harder and somewhat heavier, we arrived at about 11 a.m. at a few bushes and koa-trees, a little oasis of coarse grass, an old hut, and a deep pool of delicious water in a cave. Here the old track to the north-west side of the island turns northward, passing between Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea. ‘We halted here to refresh ourselves for a few moments, and then pursued our upward course over the bare lava. At about 3 P.M., however, the guide, disappointed in his expectations of finding water in a cavern, altered his plan, and, instead of keeping his westerly course for the upper crater, turned to the right (north-west) to find water at a spot some miles below the lower one. The consequence was that we left a comparatively smooth tract of old lava and toiled mile after mile over loose sharp stones and scorie, of every size and shape, and piled in the wildest confusion. Shortly before sun- set we found a little water amongst a few solitary stunted bushes, and then, turning westward, shaped our course directly for the lower crater of the two which were sending out dense volumes of smoke above us. We lay down for the night on a little patch of half-vitrified ashes: I estimated that we were now about 9000 feet above the sea. The next morning we started before sunrise. Having found a few dry sticks, I endeavoured to make some tea, but the water boiled away without attaining sufficient heat to effect my object, owing, I suppose, to the height. Our way lay mile after mile over loose, light scoria- " boulders, yeasty-looking basins and tortuous folds and waves of solid- ified lava, caverns whence the hot lava had flowed away, hillocks generally of small stones burnt to a deep orange-red, and here and there little smooth spaces covered with ashes : altogether, dark and dreary in colour, without a living thing or a green blade to vivify its deathfulness. That morning we passed the site of the eruption of 1852. The view thence of the opposite mountain of Mauna Kea was most glorious. The old conical craters on its summit covered with newly fallen snow,—its huge outline shadowy and dim,—the clouds of smoke that rose round its base from the valley down which the 168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL sociETy. [Dec. 3, present flood of lava is flowing,—the wild dreariness of the fore- ground,—and the tropical sky above—formed a scene almost inde- scribably grand and wonderful. About midday I had arrived at the lava of the present eruption, at a spot about a mile and a half below the lower crater and about three miles below the upper one; whilst, as far as the eye could reach, I could trace its devastating course in the valley and forests below. The stream of fresh lava at this pomt was about two miles in breadth, of a dark dull-greenish colour, with a metallic lustre. Its surface presented every variety of form and distortion ;—here wreathed about like rolls of shrivelled parchment,—there burst in cooling into slabs and fragments,—sometimes with a smooth surface, only broken by cracks and fissures,—in other places twisted like strands of coiled rope, or rolled out into huge waves and serpentine convolutions. In many places smoke or steam was still rismg; and, in walking upon it, it was often hot to the feet, especially when, as frequently occurred, the upper coating broke through beneath the tread, causing a fall amongst hot lava and sulphurous steam, suggestive at first of no pleasant ideas, for below the hardened surface flowed down the liquid fire. After walking some distance across the recent lava, I obtained a good view of the fiery flood below, through a broken part of the surface. The huge arch and roof of the cavern glowed red-hot, and, as with some difficulty I obtained a point directly overhanging it, the glare was perfectly scorching. The lava, at almost a white heat, flowed slowly down at the rate of about three or four miles an hour. I dropped a fragment of rock into it, which it carried floating on. There was something very impressive in its steady smooth onward course. Passing several similar abysses and fissures, I arrived at the lower crater. The upper crust of the lava having cooled, the discharge was there entirely subterranean. Some dark fantastically shaped rocks, volumes of smoke, and some heaps of small stones, one of which containing a great proportion of sulphur was burning most furiously,—the whole surrounded by an ocean of partially cooled lava,—such was the lower crater. I walked on as well as I could until I reached one of the mounds or heaps of rocks forming a side of the crater. Lying down on the hot stones, I attempted to look over, as it were, down a gigantic chimney, to see the boiling lava which I heard seething and bubbling. I got my head over the edge, and had just time to see a long broad fissure full of smoke, when I was almost suffocated with smoke and sulphuric acid gas, and thought myself fortunate to be able to retreat in safety. After leaving this, © I was joined by my “guide,” whom I had not seen for some time before ; indeed the smoke and darkness were so great that I had had some misgivings of his finding me again. He informed me that the other natives, who had been much tired yesterday, were thoroughly exhausted and unable to reach the summit, and that they must await our return where they were. The upper crater is about a mile above the lower one. The inter- mediate space presents the same chaotic confusion of loose scoriaceous rocks, torn and burst asunder, and lava, warm and steaming, some of 1856. | WELD—MAUNA LOA. 169 it lying in loose flakes, as if it had been thrown into the air and fallen with a splash. The upper crater seemed to be composed of an infinity of steam- and smoke-vents at the foot and on the sides of two large mounds or hills of small loose stones, which no doubt they had thrown up. It sent up volumes of red smoke and partially ignited gases. No doubt at night it would have appeared as actual flame to a considerable height. In one place, above a small mound or crater- mouth, this was most apparent, rising like the panting puffs of a steam-engine. * * * * * The height of this crater is about 12,000 feet above the sea-level, being about 1500 feet below the summit of the mountain, which is, I should think, at least six or eight miles distant, the rise from the craters to the summit being extremely gradual. Our sleeping-place was about 500 feet below the level of the craters: the night was fine with us; but, whilst above us the craters rolled up dark columns of smoke, below, over Hilo and Kilauea, raged a magnificent thunderstorm. The level of the top of the clouds was somewhat below us, and along it played flashes of the most vivid lightning, whilst the thunder-peals seemed to roll up from the valley below. Later in the night it rained, and in the morning, though in the tropics, the exterior of the fur-rug in which I slept was white with hoar-frost. I will not trouble you with the particulars of our descent from the mountain ; it would be little more than a recapitulation, though we pursued a somewhat different route. To give some idea of the nature of the walking, I may state that a pair of the stoutest English shoot- ing-boots literally fell to pieces before I had been twenty-four hours -on the lava, and were in fact cut through in many places in the first half-hour of our traverse over loose scoriz. Fortunately I had a second pair, which, though lighter, held together about ten hours, just long enough to get me back to Kilauea. The distance from Kilauea to the craters is about thirty miles. * * * * * Before laying down my pen, I may mention that during our stay in the Sandwich group we felt one very slight shock of earthquake when in the Island of Maui ; but were informed that earthquakes of any consequence are quite unknown there. Recent volcanic erup- tions have been, I believe, entirely confined to the Island of Hawaii, though all the group is voleanic. On Maui there is an enormous extinct crater, said to be twenty-four miles in circumference, and containing cones themselves of mountain-like dimensions. I will only add, that the heights of mountains given are taken on the authority of Wilkes, Douglas, or other sources. Chideock House, July 12th, 1856. 170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Dec. 3 2. On the Voucanic Eruptions in Hawart. By the Rev. Titus Coan. Ina Letter to W. Miuier, Esq., H.M. Consul-General for the Sandwich Islands. {Forwarded from the Foreign Office by order of Lord Clarendon. ] (Abridged.) [This communication is a letter addressed to and transmitted by Mr. Miller*, H.M. Consul-General at Woahoo. It describes some remarkable volcanic eruptions in the Island of Hawaii (Owhyhee), of which Mr. Coan was an eye-witness, during the last sixteen years ; and includes an account of the great eruption of 1855-56. Mr. Coan has been the Resident Protestant Missionary at Hilo for twenty- one years ; and was attending at the Annual Meeting in Honolulu when he wrote his letter. In a despatch from Mr. Miller}, dated July 30, 1856, the erup- tion in Hawaii is stated to be still active; and a copy of ‘The Pa- cific Commercial Advertiser’ newspaper, accompanying this despatch, contains a further notice of the eruption, which will be quoted in the sequel.—Epir. | (1840.)—At the time of the great eruption from Kilauea, in 1840, an immense flood of molten rock forced itself under the mural sides of the great crater, at the depth of 1000 feet, pursuing its way towards the sea in subterranean galleries for ten miles,—cracking the superincumbent strata, and throwing up occasional jets of smoke, steam, gases, and lava, until the fiery flood broke ground, and rolled down in a burning deluge, from one to four miles wide, sweeping away forest and hamlet, and filling the heavens with its murky clouds and its lurid glare. In three days it reached the sea, having travelled thirty miles ; and for two weeks it plunged in a vast fiery cataract, a mile wide, over a precipice some 50 feet high. The com- motion, the detonations, the rolling and gyrating clouds of ascend- ing vapour were awfully sublime. The ocean was heated for twenty miles along the coast, and thousands of marine animals were killed. (1843.)—In 1843 a great eruption burst from the summit of Mauna Loa. The lava rushed with terrific force down the northern slope of the Mount to the base of Mauna Kea, where it divided into two broad streams ; one turning N.E. towards Hilo, and the other N.W. towards Waimea. This flood was about thirty miles long, and from one to three miles wide. I visited it when in intense action, and traced the stream from its terminus to its crater on the summit of the Mount, sometimes walking over the incandescent stream on its hardened arches, and sometimes skirting along its verge. (1852.)—In 1852 a crater suddenly opened on the top of the Mauna Loa, from which a fiery column shot up several hundred feet, * For previous notices, by Mr. Miller, of the Eruption of Mauna Loa, see Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. pp. 171 & 386. tT Also read at this Evening Meeting. 1856. | COAN—VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS IN HAWAII. 171 illuminating the whole summit of the Mount, and flashing with in- tense glare down to the shores of Hilo and far off at sea. In two days this valve closed, and in two more another opened on the side of the Mount, some fifteen miles below its summit; and from this awful furnace a fiery column, about 1000 feet in diameter, shot up- wards to the height of from 500 to 1000 feet. This roaring fire- fountain was thus sustained for about twenty days,—fillmg the atmo- sphere with cinders, lava-filaments, gaseous vapours, and smoke. By night our houses and fields were lighted up so that men might labour, or travel, or read without other light ; and by day the sun’s rays scarcely struggled through the dense atmosphere. This crater I visited when it was in most vehement action; and I spent one sleepless night in close proximity to its dazzling fires. The molten stream from this fountain swept through the forests to within ten or twelve miles of Hilo. (May 1855.)—In May and June 1855, the action in the great crater of Kilauea became fearfully intense. This crater is about eight miles in circuit, and three miles in its longest diameter. Its depth varies from 700 to 1200 feet, the immense floor rising by up- heaving forces, or subsiding by the subterranean escape of the molten flood below. During the period referred to, the melted lavas forced themselves to the surface of the floor, or hardened bottom of the crater, at more than a hundred points; and the ample area was thickly spangled with lakes, pools, cones, jets, streams, fountains, and lines of red-hot lava, boiling, raging, and glaring like countless furnaces in blast. So intense was the heat that visitors were unable to descend into the crater; and even spectators upon the banks, 700 feet above the fires, were compelled to retire from the verge of the precipice, unable to look directly down upon the burning abyss below. I visited the scene on the 4th of July, and, though the fiery tumult had much abated, I could count readily one hundred boiling lakes of fire. (Aug. 1855.)—I come now to the present eruption of Hawaii, the grandest in the memory of the now existing generation. On the evening of the 11th of August 1855 a small point of light was noticed, resembling a brilliant star, on the apex of Mauna Loa (“‘long mount’’), and in full view from Hilo, Byron’s Bay. This bright poimt soon rose and expanded, filling the beavens with a dazzling glare. The eruption progressed with amazing force and rapidity, rolling its wide fiery floods over the mountain’s summit down to its base with appalling fury. Day after day the action increased, fillimg the air with smoke, which darkened our entire horizon, and desolating immense tracts, once clothed with waving forests and adorned with tropical verdure. This eruption has now been in progress nearly ten months, and still the awful furnace is in blast. The amount of matter disgorged is enormous. The main stream is nearly seventy miles long (including its windings), from one to five miles wide, and varying from ten to several hundred feet in depth. It approached within five miles of Byron’s Bay, heading directly for our town and harbour, and threat- 172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Dec. 3, ened to bury all in fiery ruin. But on the morning of the 13th of February, whilst coming with relentless energy down the rocky chan- nel of a river, evaporating the waters, filling the basins, leaping the precipices, and kindling the thickets along its banks, it suddenly ceased to flow,—the whole terminus refrigerated, the fusion retreat- ing towards the mountain, first one, then two, three, and four miles, where the lava gushes up vertically, forming hills, caves, ridges, towers, battlements, and innumerable tunnels, or spreads laterally, consuming the thicket along its margin. From that time to the pre- sent the lava-current has made no progress seaward. Visit to the Summit-crater of Mauna Loa*.—Our party consisted of an American gentleman, four natives, and myself. We left Hilo on the morning of the 2nd of Oct. 1855; and, as there was no path through the dense forest, some thirty miles wide, interposed be- tween us and the mountain, we took the channel of a wild stream called Wailuku (‘river of destruction”) as our clue by which to thread our way up to the burning Mount. We advanced about twelve miles the first day, wading in the water, leaping from rock to rock in the stream, crossing and recrossing uncounted times, beating through the jungle along the banks to avoid a cataract, an impassable rapid, or a deep reach, and encamping at night at the roots of a large tree by the side of the stream.—Oct. 3rd. We pro- ceeded about twelve miles more along the rocky bed of this wild romantic stream. During both of these days the forest was filled with volcanic smoke, which gave a solemn aspect to every object around. At night we made our bed of ferns under the trunk of a prostrate tree, and here we saw the gleaming of the fires as they lighted up the forest some five miles distant on our left. We had passed the end of the lava-stream as it swerved on through the thicket towards Hilo; but, as the jungle was almost impenetrable, we determined to ascend the stream until fairly out of the woods, when we would lay our course direct for the lava-flow. At 14 p.m. on the third day we were fairly out of the forest and in an open rolling country of about twenty miles wide, lying between the woods and the bases of the mountains. After emerging from the forest, we skirted along its upper borders at right angles with the channel we had left, and at night found our- selves near the borders of the lava-current. We encamped in acave, watching during most of the night the fantastic and ever-varying play of the fires as they gleamed in the burning forest below us, and as they glowed in points and lines over the high plains and up the cleft mountain to the crater above, where the incandescent bowels of the earth were being poured out with a force which seemed to transcend all our ideas of terrestrial dynamics. The next morning (Friday) we walked up the left bank of the lava-stream until 10 o'clock. * A detailed account of this visit has appeared in the ‘ New York Tribune,’ the ‘Pacific Commercial Advertiser,’ and in Silliman’s ‘American Journal,’ 1856, p. 139. 1856. | COAN—VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS IN HAWAII. 173 We judged it to be five or six miles wide at this point. Finding a narrower place, and wishing to shorten the distance by cutting off the windings of the stream, we crossed over to its right bank, the passage occupying one hour and fifteen minutes. At this point the whole surface of the lava was solidified, while the molten flood moved on below like water under ice in a river. The superficial crust of the lava was crackling with heat and emitting mineral-gases at in- numerable points. Along the margin numerous trees lay crushed, half-charred, and smouldering upon the hardened lava. All this day we passed up the lava-stream, sometimes on its surface, and sometimes along its smoking banks, which often rose in frown- ing battlements and ragged precipices to the height of 50 or 100 feet above us. At night we slept on the cooled lava, above the line of vegetation. From this elevation we had an impressive view of these devouring fires, as they rushed in dazzling brilliancy down their burning duct, covered for the most part by a solidified crust, but revealed at many points along the line of flow by openings in the roof, which served as valves for the escaping gases. Early on Saturday we were ascending our rugged pathway amidst steam, smoke, and heat. The ascent was rough and toilsome in the extreme. The atmosphere was rare, and what added much to our sufferings was the want of water. Early on the morning of Friday we had unwittingly passed the last pool of water; and, having only one pint in our flask, this was our whole supply for six men, from Friday morning until Monday, a.m. Upward and upward we urged our weary way upon the heated roof of the lava, passing, as we ascended, opening after opening, through which we looked upon the igneous river as it rushed down its vitrified duct at the rate of forty miles an hour. The lava-current at this high point on the Mount was fearful, the heat incandescent, and the dynamic force wonderful. The fire-duct was laid from 25 to 100 feet deep down the sides of the Mount ; and the occasional openings through the arches or superincumbent strata were from 1 to40 fathoms in diameter. Into these orifices we cast large stones, which, as soon as they struck the surface of the hurrying flood, passed down the stream in an indistinct and instantaneous blaze. Through openings in the mountain we could also see subterranean cataracts of molten rock leaping precipices of 25 or 50 feet. The whole scene was awful, defying description. Struggling upwards amidst hills, cones, ridges, pits, and ravines of jagged and smoking lava, we came at 1 p.m. to the terminal or summit crater, and, mounting to the highest crest of its banks, we looked down as into the very throat of hell. Instead of a well-defined circular crater, we found the summit of the Mount rent into yawning fissures, on each bank of which immense masses of scorie, lava, pumice, tuff, and cinders were piled in the form of elongated cones, rent longitudinally, while the inner walls were hung with burning stalactites, and festooned with a capillary or filamentous lava, called Pele’s hair, and much resembling the hair 174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Dec. 3, of a human being. These elongated cones, overlooking the yawning fissures, were vertical, retreating, or overhanging, on their inner sides: and immense avalanches were often precipitated from their faces and toppling crests into the yawning gulf below. In this way the fissures were much choked, and the lava, which now went off by a lateral subterranean chamber, probably 1000 feet below the sur- face, could not be seen at this pomt. It first makes its appearance through the openings several miles down the slope of the Mount, as before described. But the fearful rush of white smoke and gases from these fissures on the summit fills one with awe, and the spec- tator must use his utmost care lest the fierce whirlwinds which gyrate and sweep over these heated regions throw him over, or strangle him with sulphurous gases. These high realms are covered with recent deposits from the eruption, scattered widely and wildly on every hand. The whole summit of the mountain was covered with smoke, which darkened the sun and obscured every object a few rods distant. We encamped on the Mount from Saturday until Monday, when we descended, and by forced marches reached Hilo on Thursday, having been absent ten days. Visits to the Lava-current.—About the 1st of November I made my first visit* to the terminus of the lava-current, as it was burning its way through the forest and within about fifteen miles of Hilo. My companion on this occasion was Mr. Ritson. Penetrating a few miles into the jungle, we came into the bed of a considerable stream of water, up which we waded among slippery stones and in a drench- ing rain with considerable difficulty. On the evening of the second day, weary, soaked, and nearly discouraged with the prospect of a dark, dreary, and drenching night in the jungle without fire or shelter, we came suddenly upon the burning lava, some three miles wide, consuming the thicket, prostrating lofty trees, and glowing with innumerable fires. Night was upon us, and we halted under a tree within 6 feet of the lava-stream, which served to boil our tea, roast our ham, dry our clothes, and keep us warm through the long and stormy, but intensely interesting night. The pyrotechnical scene was indescribable: standing under our tree we could survey an area of some fifteen square miles, over which countless fires were gleaming with extreme brilliancy. The jungle was burning and trees were falling; the rending of the rocks, the detonation of gases, clouds of steam from boiling water, and scintil- lations from burning leaves filled the atmosphere ; and the red glare above resembled a firmament on fire. During the night we were nearly surrounded by the advancing lava ; and, when we decamped in the morning, we left our sheltering tree in flames. We retraced our steps, but the rains had swollen the stream up which we waded, so that our way back was more toilsome and peril- * An account of this visit is given also in Silliman’s ‘ American Journal,’ 1856,. p. 237. 1856. ] COAN—VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS IN HAWAII. 175 ous than when we ascended. We reached home on the fourth day, gratified to oppression with the wonders we had seen. Shortly after this visit the lava fell into the water-course above referred to, evaporating the water, and filling and obliterating the channel for about ten miles. I have since made five visits to the lava-current ; each visit marked with some new phase of peculiar interest. I have seen the igneous stream pour all night long over a precipice of 60 feet; and I have also seen it fall over another of 32 feet into a basin of water deep and large enough to float a frigate; whilst all night long, clouds of steam rolled up in fleecy wreaths towards heaven. Honolulu, 31st May, 1856. [The volcanic phenomena of Hawaii are noticed in the ‘ American Journal of Science,’ new series, 1856, vol. xxi. pp.100, 139, 237, 241 ; also in the Bullet. Soc. Géol. France, vol. xii. p. 306.—Enbrr.] [We learn from ‘The Pacific Commercial Advertiser’ of July 24, 1856 (enclosed in Mr. Miller’s despatch above alluded to), that at that date fresh or molten lava was not met with until about three miles above the lowest point which it reached in November 1855, or at about eight miles from Hilo. The flow from the mountain still continued, however, though with diminished force ; and the lava- stream appeared to be bursting laterally through its crust, and flow- ing off to the right and left. The same informant describes the seat of this eruption as being in the old traditional crater of Mokuaweoweo, on the north or north- westerly side of Mauna Loa, some 12,000 feet above the sea, and 2000 feet below the summit of the mountain. Kilauea, the old open crater, is on the opposite side of the mountain, about 7500 feet lower, and about thirty miles distant. The latter crater has re- mained in its usual condition, without overflowing, during the late eruption from the new vent. The progress of the lava-current from the new crater appears to have been very rapid down the side of the mountain to the valley between Mauna Loa and Mauna Kea; thence it soon reached the almost impenetrable forests, which form a belt round the mountains, commencing at about three miles from the sea, and usually extend- ing up the mountain-sides for twenty or thirty miles. These offered a temporary check ; but the lava burnt a passage into them to the distance of nearly twelve miles at the rate of about half a mile a week. During the first three months there did not appear to be any change in the force of the eruption. The lava-current, in all its windings, must be about sixty-five miles long ; the lower part coming nearly within five or six miles of Hilo. It varies from three to ten miles in width, sometimes branching off, and then running together, forming islands. The lava-stream varies, according to the surface 176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Dec. 3, of the ground, from 20 to 300 feet in depth. The area overflowed by lava has been estimated to be at least 200,000 acres.—Epir. | 3. Further Notice of the Eruption of Mauna Loa. By W. Mrtter, Esq., H.M. Consul-General for the Sandwich Islands. [Forwarded from the Foreign Office by order of Lord Clarendon. ] (See the preceding communication, page 170.) 4. On the Occurrence of an EARTHQUAKE at RHODES. By R. Campse tt, Esq., H.M. Consul at Rhodes. [Forwarded from the Foreign Office by order of Lord Clarendon. ] (Abstract.) THIs communication referred to the severe shock of earthquake which was felt at the Island of Rhodes on the 12th October at about 3 o°clock a.m. It lasted for nearly two minutes, and was accom- panied with great destruction of life and property. Its first motion was vertical, the second horizontal, and the third vertical. The shock was severe in the adjacent islands of Halki, Scarpantos, and Cassos ; and was slightly felt in the island of Symi; it caused much damage also at Marmarizza on the coast opposite. 5. Additional Observations on the GeoLocy of BuLGARIA. By Capt. T. A. B. Spratt, R.N., F.R.S., F.G.S. [Having again visited the Bulgarian coast, Captain Spratt was enabled to confirm his observations on the freshwater deposits of the Dobrudcha, which were read before the Society in June last. These additional notices have been printed in the last number of the Journal (No. 49, p. 75, &c.), in connexion with the communication to which they have reference. ] | 1856.] SPRATT—FRESHWATER DEPOSITS OF EUB@A, ETC. 177 DECEMBER 17, 1856. R. E. Arden, Esq., and W. B. Webster, Esq., were elected Fellows. The following communications were read :— 1. On the FresHwater Deposits of Eusaa, the Coast of Greece, and Satonika. By Capt. T. A. B. Sprart, R.N., F.R.S., F.G.S. In a paper recently sent to the Society, containing geological notes, collected during the war, on the Bulgarian coast of the Black Sea, and on the coast of the Sea of Marmora and the Dardanelles, I have re- ferred to some extensive freshwater formations in Eubcea and on the western coast of the Archipelago *, which I examined some years ago, but the results of which examination were not communicated to the Society. I have now put together my notes made when ex- amining these several localities ; but not having the fossils before me, this communication is necessarily imperfect. The fossils were deposited with my lamented friend EK. Forbes, at the Museum of Economic Geology, soon after they were collected ; but as he had in view their publication in connexion with some con- templated work of his own on the Aigean, the localities have re- mained undescribed ; and, this object being now lost by the prema- ture death of my deeply lamented companion and friend, the notes are now drawn up, especially on account of their connexion with the specimens from the eastern point of the Archipelago, and the accompanying memoir, recently communicated to the Society. They are also connected with the notes on the freshwater de- posits of the shores of the Smyrna Gulf, and the islands of Samos and Eubcea, already published in the Society’s Journal +. In the Samian and also in the Eubcean and Beeotian deposits, there were shown to be two distinct groups, unconformable. The upper was described as a group of reddish marls, sands, and gravels, overlying the white marls and compact white limestones, of un- doubted freshwater origin, and supposed, from the type of the fossils, to be of the Eocene age. With regard to the upper group, I never had any decided fossil evidence to indicate its origin until 1846 and 1847, when I extended my examinations into the northern channel of Eubcea and coasts adjacent. Eubeean and Locrian Coasts.—My remarks on the geology of the northern shores of the Eubcean channel were published in the paper * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. No. 49. p. 80. tT “Observations on the Geology of the Southern part of the Gulf of Smyrna,” &c., Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. i. p. 156; ‘Remarks on the Geology of the Island of Samos,” ibid. vol. iii. p. 65; and ‘‘ On the Geology of a part of Eubcoea and Beeotia, ” ibid. p. 67. 178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. | Dec. 17, above referred to; and I now continue the observations from the town of Chalcis, at the central portion of the western coast of Eubcea. This town stands upon a protrusion of serpentine; and on either side extend masses of Hippurite-limestone and associated schists and shales, rising into elevated ridges 2000 and 3000 feet high. In the broad valleys and bays formed by the curvature of these ridges and mountains are everywhere to be found one or other of the two groups of tertiary deposits which are so well developed at Oropo and in the hills north of it *. The first of these basins to the north of Chalcis is the Steni Valley, lying at the foot of Mount Delphi, but open to the sea at Politika. This is about eight miles square, and seemed to be composed of both of the freshwater groups; the beds lying nearly horizontal. They were identified as being of freshwater origin in crossing this basin, on a journey from Chalcis to Mount Delphi; and a few fossils were procured, including a rather large-sized Ampullaria, near the vil- lage of Gides, at about 700 feet above the sea. But the examina- tion was too hasty to enable me to give sections or details. The overlying red sands and gravels did not appear to be more than 50 or 60 feet thick at any place where met with ; and they were often wanting. At the foot of the mountains, rising from the margin of the valley under Steni, a serpentine protrudes beneath disturbed and altered schists and limestones, which dip to the N.E. at angles from 50° to 70°. The next group of deposits of freshwater origin forms the entire promontory of Melasina in the Eparkeia of Atalanta on the Locrian coast. This is almost wholly composed of white compact strata of the lower lacustrine series ; but it is capped by some fragments of red marls, gravels, and sands, which seem to be of subsequent date to either freshwater group, unless they form an upper fragment of the latter. The thickness of these deposits is nearly 1000 feet. Masses of the Hippurite-limestone, however, rise through them, and were no doubt islets or rocks in the ancient lake. This Melasina group dips to the S.E. at an angle of about 10°.. The Atalanta valley or basin is composed of low ridges of red- dish marls, sands, and gravel ; these, being soft and subject to rapid waste, are channeled into deep ravines, in which the deposits are well exposed, and exhibit a great abundance of fossils. By means of the fossils this softer group is clearly identified as of freshwater origin; and apparently it was contemporary with the newer fresh- water deposits before described as occurring in the southern division of the Archipelago, viz. Xanthus +, Rhodes t, Kos, and Cerigo ; and I may say, from my more recent discoveries, in Crete also, where similar freshwater deposits exist at several localities. The Atalanta deposits are most fossiliferous near the village of * See Map, pl. 4, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe. vol. iii. t Travels in Lycia, vol. ii. p. 164, &c.; Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe. vol. ii, p. 10. t Proceed. Geol. Soc. vol. iii. p. 774. 1856.) SpPRATT—FRESHWATER DEPOSITS OF EUB@A, ETC. 179 Livonati, and near Skander Aga. They consist of reddish, yellow, grey, and white sandy marls, and brown sands and gravels ; having altogether a thickness of more than 200 feet. (See fig. p. 180.) The following is the ascending order of the deposits in the Livo- nati hills :— A. 30 feet of reddish-yellow loose sands, with an occasional layer of sandstone, in which are Paludina, Neritina, and Melania. B. 12 feet of grey and yellow sands and sandstones, with the same fossils more numerous, but with the Xanthian and Italian fos- sil, the Limnea Adelina* ; which I found here in great abun- dance, and in an excellent state of preservation. C. 3 feet of gravels and white marls, and 2 feet of indurated and laminated marls. No fossils. D. 6 inches of a grey sandy marl and ferruginous sandy loam ; in which several Planorbes and Paludine are compressed : this passes into 4 ft. 6 in. of greenish sandy marls. EK. 1 foot of a purple peaty marl, containing two or three species of Planorbis. The peat is overlaid by 4 feet of alternating sands and gravels, in the lowest of which the fossils are very nume- rous, particularly Limnea Adelina, a large Cyclas, a large Palu- dina, and a Dreissena. These shells appear to have been sud- denly swept together during some disturbance, by which the shells then living on the weedy bottom of the lake (as shown by the peat below) were swept along and deposited in the turbid waters that scattered the gravels. The latter are composed of fragments of the secondary limestones and schists, and vary from the size of a pea to that of a walnut. F. 12 feet of stratified sands and sandstones of a grey colour. These pass into an oolitic sandstone, full of impressions of a striated Melania. The sandstone is overlaid by 10 feet of gravels, white marls, and sandstone, without fossils. G. 30 feet of sands, sandstones, and marls succeed, in the upper series of which Limnea, Helix, and Paludina, and a carinated Planorbis are very abundant. H. 100 feet of unfossiliferous sands, marls, and gravels succeed ; which are in some of the highest positions capped by 50 to 60 feet of reddish loamy earth and gravels. The latter seem to have been deposited during a troubled and highly turbid condi- tion of the waters of the lake ; most probably at its final rup- ture, and on the admission of the sea into the lower parts of this old lake ; for there is evidence of a higher sea-level than the present near the coast to the N.E. of Livonati, where, at about 40 feet above the present shore-line, on the flanks of a low ridge, I found a thin bed of sand containing Cardium and drifted fragments of freshwater shells. * Travels in Lycia, vol. i. p. 24, and vol. ii. p. 177. VOL. XIIT.— PART I. Oo 180 Section of the Freshwater De- posits at the Livonati Hills on the Locrian Coast (see p. 179). “TI . Loam and gravel. . Sands, marls, and gravels. . Sands, sandstones, and marls. Pla- norbis, Limnea, Helix, and Palu- dina. . Gravel, marls, and sandstone. . Oolitic sandstone (with Melania), sands, and sandstone. . Sands and gravels. Paludina, Lim- nea (L. Adelina), Cyclas,and Dreis- sena. . Purple peaty mud. Planorbis. . Sandy marls. . Sandy marl and loam. Planorbis and Paludina. . Marls. . Gravels and marls. . Sands and sandstone. WNeritina, Melania, Paludina, and Limnea (L. Adelina). . Sandsand sandstone. Nerilina, Me- lania, and Paludina. Ss a oo FS OO (a ee PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [ Dee. 17, oD “« Sase (il =i) 1856.] SPRATT—FRESHWATER DEPOSITS OF EUB@A, ETC. 181 [Ina letter to the Assistant-Secretary, dated March 11, 1857, the author expresses his belief that the ossiferous gravels of Pikerni, on the flank of Pentelicus, not far from Athens, are of the same age as the Eubcean and Locrian gravels that overlie the freshwater marls and limestones ; although at Pikerni the latter appear to be absent. These ossiferous gravels of Attica and their interesting fossils have been described by Wagner and Roth in the Munich Transactions, and by Duvernoy and Gaudry in the ‘ Comptes Rendus.’ They are regarded as being of Miocene age.—Ep1r. | To the west and south-west the Atalanta freshwater deposits are bounded by the Hippurite-limestone and the associated a shales and schists. At the foot of the Acropolis of Opus there is a protrusion of ser- pentine, by which the colour of the schists has changed into a blackish-brown, and that of the shales into a deep purple. The schists and shales dip to the 8.W., at an angle of 60°. The hill immediately over Atalanta is a mass of red trachyte, of more recent date ; and which was probably an outpouring of igneous matter at the breaking up of the lake. On the opposite side of the channel of Egripo, the Hippurite-lime- stones and the schist are also highly disturbed by volcanic rocks, dipping generally to the N.K. at from 30° to 60°; but they are almost vertical near several trap and serpentine protrusions. Mount Kandili (in Eubcea), opposite the Melasina promontory, is an uplifted mass of limestone, with serpentine and disturbed schists flanking it to the north. At Mount Balanti over Lipso Bay, the limestone also dips to the N.E. at 55°; but over Lipso a porphyritic trap throws off the schists and shales in contact with it, at high angles; and a vent to the subterranean heat still exists at the pomt of the Bay immediately under Mount Balanti, in a hot-spring of the high temperature of L70°, Between Mounts Kandili and Balanti on the Eubcean coast is a district bordering the shore, in which the limestone-deposits are again largely developed: from Limnz northwards they are chiefly the white compact calcareous strata of the lower group. But they are overlaid (and unconformably, as I thought, from a difference of the dip) by some remnants of a soft and wasting group of marls and sands corresponding to the Livonati series, which towards the N.E. part of the district (the direction of their dip in general) are better developed ; each formation preserving its characteristic fossils, as will be seen by the specimens at the Museum of Practical Geology. The Planorbis of the lower group is apparently Planorbis rotun- datus * of the Smyrna and Samos deposits. In the vicinity of Limneze are thick gravel-beds, lying on the flanks of the freshwater strata, and also capping the upper, as at Livonati. Containing fragments of the older freshwater rocks, as well as of the * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. i. p. 163. 02 182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Dec. 17, secondary rocks, the gravels are evidently subsequent in date to both, and seem to have attained a considerable thickness on the higher part of the ridges towards Kerokovi. Lignite, similar to that of Oropo *, occurs ina valley to the N.E. of Limnze, but has not been worked. Interior of Eubca.—The next localities to be noticed are those within the interior of Eubcea, viz. the Mandondi valley, lying on the east of Mount Kandili, and opening into the Aigean Sea; next the Xero Khori valley, opening into the north channel of Eubcea. In the former both formations are evident; the older or lower being that in the neighbourhood of Agia Anna, and the more recent being the softer series of marls, sands, and gravels lying in the lower part of the basin towards Akmet Aga. Hills of serpentine almost enclose them on the east. The Xero Khori hills seem to be exclusively of red marls, sands, and gravels, closely resembling the Atalanta deposits. And, although I examined several good sections in the ravines and water-courses, I found only a few fragments of some fragile shell which appeared to be a Helix. These deposits have a slight dip to the north. Gulf of Stylida.—The lesser ridges bordering the Gulf of Stylida (Gulf of Zeitoum) were found to be composed of the same deposits, particularly in the district of Molo, to the east of Thermopyle, where they extend for several miles. I examined them as far as Boudou- nitza, finding many freshwater fossils scattered through the deposits, similar to those procured at Livonati. These beds attain a thick- ness of 400 and 500 feet, and dip to the S.W. at an angle of 18° from the shores of the Gulf and towards the higher mountains en- closing them. On the opposite side of the Gulf (of Zeitoum) these deposits seem to have been for the most part swept away, except at Ekinos, the acropolis of which stands upon a tilted fragment of white calcareous strata, that resembles the deposits of the lower lacustrine formation, and of which it may be a nie formerly thrown up by some local movement. Gulf of Salonika.—The Gulf of Salonika now requires a few ob- servations, as its two shores present iow hills which, extending from the base of the lofty Olympus on one side and from the Cassan- drian mountains on the other, are also of freshwater origin and correspond with the latest lacustrine series, wherever I had the means of examining. They consist of the soft grey marls, sands, and gravels so characteristic of the deposits of the later period of the great ancient Levantine lake. Near Leftero Khori, about twelve miles to the south of the Var- dar river, I found the deposits to contain impressions or casts of Limnea and Paludina in great abundance. * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. iii. p. 70. 1856.] SPRATT—FRESHWATER DEPOSITS OF EUBG@A, ETC. 183 Also over the “‘ Scale ”? or Custom-house of Leftero Khori I found similar deposits capping a ridge about 100 feet above the sea: in these there was a Cardium intermixed. Further down the coast, in a cliff on the shore, I found several specimens of Helix similar to the one procured at Livonati. Here also I found, on the flank of a ridge of undoubted freshwater beds, about 30 feet of a very recent or post-tertiary deposit of marine origin, with several existing shells in it, viz. Cerithium, Cardium, Spondylus, &c. The promontory of Karabournou which juts out from the eastern coast, opposite to the mouth of the Vardar, shows in its cliff about 100 feet of reddish-grey marls and sands, similar to the Leftero Khori deposits. They lie horizontally, are capped by a bed of gravels and white sands, filling the hollows in the surface of the lower group, from 10 to 12 feet in thickness, and are of a late and probably marine origin. The cliffs surrounding the promontory present good sections of the deposits; but, although I examined them through a distance of three or four miles, not a fossil shell was found to indicate positively that the lower were of freshwater origin. But I was fortunate in finding some fossil bones of a large animal, though much scattered and broken. These were sent to Professor Forbes at the Museum in Jermyn Street, with numerous vertebree of a snake, found in the marls at about one mile N.E. of the Cape. The vertebrz were given to Professor Owen soon after they reached the Museum, and were, I believe, considered to be rare and interesting*. In concluding this account of the freshwater deposits on the western side of the Archipelago, I shall draw attention to the fact that no marine deposits but such as are evidently of a very recent date (post-Tertiary apparently) have been mentioned. No marine formation of the earlier Tertiary ages, in fact, anywhere existing, to my knowledge, in the northern division of the Archipelago, viz. that which includes a line from the south end of Eubcea to the coast of Asia Minor at the Meander. I know of no marine strata of the Miocene age in this division ; nor indeed any Eocene deposits, unless they are represented by the older limestones and the usually associated shales and schists ; but I have not been able to identify any of these as beng Nummulitic ; this group of rocks having Hippurites as the general characteristic fossil in this division of the Archipelago, as far as I have examined. Thus it evidently appears, that, if not from the commencement, at least from the early part of the Tertiary epoch down to a very late period, a freshwater lake occupied the basin. The lake no doubt had its margin extended up the valley of the Vardar, as ap- pears from the freshwater deposits known to exist many miles up * Prof. Owen found that the portion of mammalian bone, from Salonika, which was submitted to him, was not determinable. The Ophidian vertebrz above re- ferred to were described by Prof. Owen in a paper read before the Society on Jan. 7, 1857 (see further on, p. 196).—Enrr. 184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GECLOGICAL society. [ Dec. 17, this valley; and probably also it was continued by the Maritza valley (in Thrace) up to the foot of the Balkan. It probably co- vered also the basin now formed by the Sea of Marmora ; for an un- broken series of these freshwater deposits extends from the entrance of the Dardanelles to St. Stephano, as will be seen by the fossils which have been recently sent to the Society from several localities on this line. The whole of this region was, in my opinion, covered by a fresh- water lake of Miocene and Pliocene age. I shall at another opportunity touch upon the freshwater deposits on the Asiatic side of the Archipelago, in Mitylene and Tenedos, and at the Dardanelles and the Sea of Marmora: these comprise additional fragments of the great ancient Oriental lake, which I have lately had the opportunity of examining. 2. On the AnAtysis of Waters from the TurKo-PERSIAN FRON- TIER*. By Dr. Toomas Ricuarpson and E. J. J. BRowe 11, Esq. In a letter from Dr. Richardson to W. K. Loftus, Esq., E.G.S. 7 [ The following is a report on six samples of water from the Lake of Van7+, the small Lake of Ardchek, situated to the east of the former, and their vicinity, not far south-west of Ararat. They were brought home by Mr. W. Kennett Loftus.—Epir. | Tue water marked No. 11 has a very remarkable composition, con- taining only traces of the ordinary saline matter and a large pro- portion of the two alkaline earths, lime and magnesia. It is diffi- cult to surmise whence it has obtained these constituents, unless by assuming that it was originally a water coming off dolomite and subsequently passing through a bed of gypsum, under which cir- cumstances a change of its constituents would take place, by a re- combination among the acids and bases. No. 10 is not unlike some of the waters which we have met with in collieries in the Newcastle district, where a large quantity of com- mon salt is accompanied with oxide of iron. The sources of lime are very numerous. Nos. 6 to 9 belong to a very limited class of waters found in Hun- gary, Egypt, &c., all more or less rich in carbonate of soda. The lake near Debretzin in Hungary contains so much of this salt, that, during the evaporation in summer, it is regularly collected and sold as an article of trade. The waters of the natron-lakes in the desert on the west bank of the Nile have a similar character, where the salt * For the analyses of other samples of water from lakes and springs on the Turko-Persian Frontier, see Mr. Witt’s paper in the Philos. Magaz. 4th ser. vol. xi. p. 257. + See Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. p. 317, &c. 1856.] RICHARDSON AND BROWELL—MINERAL WATERS. 185 has been depositing for hundreds of years. Abich has also furnished some particulars of similar waters of some lakes near Ararat. The mineral springs which supply the Laacher-See and the mineral water of Roisdorf, near Bonn, have all a similar composition, although, of course, not so rich in saline matter as the waters of these lakes, which approach, in fact, the character of mother-liquors: having no outlet, with a constant evaporation under a powerful sun, the saline matter accumulates, until the water can no longer hold it in solution, and then the usual deposits on the bottom and sides are formed to a depth of several inches. The only analysis of the water of Lake Van with which we are acquainted is that of De Chancourtois, who found a potash-salt ; and this is not unlikely to be present, as potash and soda so often ac- company each other. The detection of potash is difficult when pre- sent in small quantities, and in our experiments on a limited supply no trace could be found. We add a Table giving the composition of some of the above- mentioned waters in 10,000 parts. Constituents. i. 2; 3: Se eRe = 6. Carbonate of soda......... 86:1 9°8 | 37:0 | 171259 | 9°0150 | 9°453 Sulphate of soda ......... 33°3 6°9 | 55-7 70959 | 3°1767 | 4:481 Chloride of sodium ...... 93°8 | 49°9 | 213°6 1791 | 5-0241 | 17-896 Sulphate of potash ...... SY oeeee Pr cetoeel! foot SAO Risa he OO Bi een i ea ee 5398 | 2°6885 | 3°169 Carbonate of magnesia...) 5°5 | ...... | seeeee 2112 | 2°9269 | 2°804 See Of ION .......6.-<0052 REMEES [sccs-c' |) cage (carb.) | °*1917 105 OS eee ee a ee ee 70295 | 4968 ‘207 Datel. ak: 226°9 | 66°6 | 306°3 | 2°1814 |, 23°5197 38°115 1. Water from the Lake of Van, analysed by De Chancourtois. 2. Water from a lake near Taschburun, analysed by Abich. 3. Water from a lake to the S.E. of the smaller Ararat, analysed by Abich. 4. Water from the Laacher-See, analysed by Bischof. 5. Mineral water from Hepping, analysed by Bischof. 6. Mineral water from Roisdorf, analysed by Bischof. The inference is therefore very direct, that the source of the con- stituents of your waters, Nos. 6 to 9, must be similar to those which, like the above, take their origin in volcanic districts. The decompo- sition of the different felspars, especially such as labradorite, which contain more soda than potash, by the action of water containing carbonic acid in solution, at once explains the composition of the waters from the Lakes Van and Ardchek. The difference in the composition of the water from the same lake probably arises from the action of the osmotic force, which was the subject of the Bakerian lecture by Graham in 1854. 186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Dec. 17, Chemical Examination of the Waters. “‘ No. 6. Water from the Lake of Ardchek, east of Van (at Ardchek village).”’ The reaction was slightly alkaline, and the water contained a minute quantity of solid matter in suspension. The solid residue left on evaporation evolved carbonic acid and traces of sulphuretted hydro- gen, on the addition of muriatic acid. The specific gravity was 1:0212. “No. 7. Water from the Lake of Ardchek (from west extremity of Lake).”’ The specific gravity was 1°0214. «No. 8. Water from Lake of Van at Mérek.”’ Reaction strongly alkaline, and the water contained traces of suspended matter. It had no smell, and the specific gravity was 1:0187. “No. 9. Water from Lake of Van at Tad Van.’’ Specific gravity 10154. “No. 10. Chalybeate and saline water from a hot-spring, two miles above Mershiut village, up the Ardish Chai, north of Lake Van. Supposed temperature 165° Fahr.” Specific gravity 1:0028. The reaction was neutral, or very slightly alkaline. The water evolved a smell of putrefying organic matter, which was so persistent that it remained after evaporation to dryness and remoistening with water. ““No. 11. Acidulated Saline Spring, two miles south of Bitlis. Cold.” Specific gravity 10019. Had a strong odour of sulphuretted hydrogen, impregnated with decaying organic matter. Contained a considerable quantity of gas, and reacted feebly acid. The whole of the waters were clear, except where we have men- tioned having found traces of matter in suspension. The organic matter appeared to contain no nitrogen, and no nitrates were present. The proportion of gas was small, except in No. 11. The small quantity of water at our disposal led us to boil each sample and separate the precipitate by filtration. This precipitate and the filtrate were then analysed in the usual manner. This mode of analysis will explain why we have arranged the results of our ana- lyses in the form which follows. This limited supply of water prevented us gomg more into detail in the analyses, and determining with absolute certainty the absence of iodine, &c. 1856.] RICHARDSON AND BROWELL—MINERAL WATERS. 187 Table of Analyses. Constituents per imperial! y. 6 | No.7. | No.8. | No.9. | No-10. | No.11. gallon. Carbonate of lime .........| qeaces “| trages {{ ...<2. 5°79 19°30 67°56 Carbonate of magnesia...) 12°77 5°16 10°68 17°26 | traces | traces Peroxide of iron ......... : L d ee *60 | traces : 55 24 36 Saar eee Sa Gael at enters Secs Pesce det cdanan scl’ deanan Cif dasden! py ‘waste "92 1°40 3°00 Organic matter ............ traces traces |sml.qnty.| ...... traces jsome qty. Sulphate of soda ......... | 320°13 | 266°91 | 270°25 | 224°84 \ 216-60 eae es Carbonate of soda......... GIG57 70) (958-350 45185") 40260 i PR ac Chloride of sodium ...... 627-63 | 575°78 | 643°81 | 500°57 | 4 "Nn" | traces NE RG: feo cca5 3c) | stavs\)) |) “aes 2 tiates |) 2.2.2. isml. qnty.| ...... a OSEAN RS ORE (Gay icereeren Ue kee mie 20°76 La | 1577°85 | 1599°59 | 1377-05 | 1153-98 | 237790 91°32 APPENDIX. The authors have much pleasure in appending the following note, which has been kindly supplied by Dr. Percy, F.R.S., F.G.S. Special attention is called by the authors of the paper to analysis No. 11, in which carbonate of lime (dissolved by excess of carbonic acid) co-exists with sulphate of magnesia, both salts being present in considerable quantity. This is explained by supposing that the water first percolates through the dolomite and then through gypsum ; the carbonate of magnesia derived from the former being decom- posed by the gypsum, with the formation of carbonate of lime and sulphate of magnesia. Between twenty and thirty years ago a pa- tent was taken out by a Mr. Grisenthwaite for the manufacture of sulphate of magnesia on a similar principle. Few persons have ever heard of the process, but I saw it in operation in Nottingham, and saw tons of Epsom salts produced by it. Gypsum and calcined dolo- mite were put into large tanks filled with water, and carbonic acid, generated from the combustion of coke, was.blown through, when sulphate of magnesia was produced. I thought it might be inter- esting to mention this fact, which may have a geological bearing. The carbonate of lead not unfrequently occurrmg on decomposing galena may arise in a similar way. Sulphate of lead must neces- sarily be first formed ; and, when that salt is brought in contact with water containing carbonate of lime dissolved by carbonic acid, de- composition takes place, carbonate of lead and sulphate of lime being generated. I know this by direct experiments made in my labo- ratory.—[J. P.] 188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL socirety. [| Dec. 17, 3. Additional Notice of the occurrence of Voucanic Bomss in AUSTRALASIA. By the Rev. W. B. Cuarke, A.M., F.G.S. [ Abstract. ] Tue author sent in 1855 a notice of the occurrence of Volcanic Bombs in the gold-bearing alluvium of New South Wales *; and in this communication adds Victoria and Tasmania as countries in which these obsidian-bombs have been found in the alluvial drift. One specimen was found by Mr. Milligan, Secretary of the Royal Society of Van Diemen’s Land, on the Supply Rivulet, Spring Bay, River Tamar, in Tasmania, about twenty miles from Bass’s Strait ; the other specimen (like a bung in shape, an inch high and 1,2; inch thick at the upper part) was found near the River Wannon in the district of Portland Bay. 4. Notice of the occurrence of METALLIFEROUS OrEs and of CoAL in Siam. By H. J. Moyze, Esq., and C. B. Hiturer, Esq., H.M. Consul at Bangkok. [Forwarded from the Foreign Office by order of Lord Clarendon. | (Abstract.) Mr. Movyte states that in the hilly districts extending north and south, in lat. 15° 25’, near the River Chaw-Phya (Meinam) in Siam, he has discovered several apparently valuable veins of copper-ore, principally in grauwacke, and that he has applied for and obtained from the Siamese government authority to work them. He also refers to his discovery of ores of lead and silver, with enormous beds of magnetic and specular iron-ores in the same district ; and de- scribes the country to the north as consisting of carboniferous lime- stone, with indications of coal. Mr. Moyle states that the numerous rivers and canals afford great facilities for the transport of the minerals from the hills; and he believes that Siam will rival any country in the East in the richness of its mineral productions. Mr. Hillier mentions a report that beds of coal have been disco- vered near the sea in the district of Chantabun on the eastern coast of the Gulf of Siam. Note.—A small box of ores, chiefly cupriferous, with a specimen of corundum, accompanied this communication from the Foreign Office ; but these were not sufficient to decide the question of the value of the ores.—Enir. * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. p. 405. 1856. ] WOLLEY—BOULDERS. 189 5. Notice of an Ick-caARRIED BouLpER at BorGHoLM. By Joun Wo. ey, Esq. [Communicated by Sir C. Lyell, V.P.G.S. ] At Borgholm, several weeks ago, there was shown to me a large boulder, with several smaller ones by its side, which had been brought to the place where they lay by the ice this year (1856). It was just to the north of the town, which is on the western coast of the island of Oland. This stone, like most of the large boulders in that country, was of red granite, of an oblong form, with all irregularities rounded off. Between perpendiculars it was in length about 10 feet, and in breadth about 7 feet, and it was 6 feet deep. It lay 2 or 3 feet above the present water-line, and was supported by several smaller stones, so that its under side could be seen. This under side pre- sented indications of recent grinding, but no continuous scratches or furrows. The upper part of the stone had yellow lichens growing sparingly upon it, proving that it had been for some time above water ; whilst below the yellow lichens at some distance was a belt of black colour, probably of a vegetable nature, like what is to be seen on other stones in the islets of which I am about to speak. From the spot where the stone lay, which was some paces from the water’s edge, the shore sloped gradually to some distance below the water-line, and the rock was-covered with shingle. In this shingle deep furrows were ploughed, leading in one direction to the — several boulders, and in the other pointing out the quarter frem whence they had come. The line thus indicated seemed to touch the north-east end of an islet lying at about half an English mile distance to the N.N.W. From this island my informants believed that the stone had been carried. They were sure that there had been no such stone previously visible in that direction nearer than the islet. Rowing out, I found that there was deep water for a considerable part of the way ; and, landing at the place from which the boulders were supposed to have come, I saw that the other stones there re- sembled them in the vegetable growth upon them and in other re- spects. The ground sloped gradually round the islet, which was for the most part a heap of boulders, many of which also lay scattered round it, rising above the surface of the water. The account given was, that in the month of February the ice was drifted by a storm from a direction between north and west,—that it was heaped up on the shore,—and that shortly afterwards a mass of stones was seen supported at a considerable height upon it. As the ice melted the stones sunk down, and were deposited in the spot where I saw them. Such occurrences are said to be not uncommon, and an intelligent, but unread man explained them in the following manner :—Stones, standing with a considerable part under water, are in the winter frozen fast. When a storm from the north comes, the level of the water is raised round Oland, and the ice lifts from the ground the stones which are attached to it. At the same time it may be partly broken up, and masses of it drifted to a considerable distance and subsequently stranded with the stones attached to them, 190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Jan. 7, or even driven up the shore by the field of ice pressing upon them, and heaped upon ice which had reached there previously. I do not think that this explanation differs from that given by Sir Charles Lyell for similar phenomena. In the Lapland river Muonio I have myself seen stones of several hundredweight perched at the top of ice-heaps between 20 and 30 feet above the level of the water, where the spring-flood has been opposed by islands lying in its way. The largest travelled block I saw upon Oland was also near Borg- holm ; it was 28 feet long by 22 broad, and stood about 8 feet above the soil. It was flat and somewhat quadrangular at the top. Stockholm, 30th June, 1856. JANUARY 7, 1857. J. D. Rigby, Esq., W. Peace, Esq., and W. H. Baily, Esq., were elected Fellows. The following communications were read :— 1. On the DicHovon CusPIDATUS, Owen. By Professor Owen, F.R.S., F.G.S. &c. [Pxiate III.) In June 1847 I communicated to the Geological Society of London a description of certain teeth and portions of jaws of an extinct Artio- dactyle Mammal, from the Upper Eocene sand of Hordwell, Hants, from which were deduced the dental characters of the genus Dichodon and of the species cuspidatus*. The parts described were of an immature individual, retaining, probably, the deciduous molars ; and having, certainly, acquired, in the upper jaw, only the first and second true molars, and in the lower jaw only the first true molar. The second true molar in that jaw was just beginning to appear above the alveolar border ; the crown of the third true molar was calcified in the upper jaw, but not in the lower one,—not sufficiently, at least, to give the true form of its crown. I have since been favoured, by the experienced and indefatigable paleontologist, Dr. Wright, of Cheltenham, with the opportunity of examining and describing an instructive portion of the right ramus of the lower jaw of the Dichodon cuspidatus containing the three per- manent molar teeth, in situ, and thus supplying the tooth, m 3, which was wanting to complete that part of the mature dentition of the enus. a This specimen was found by Dr. Wright near Alum Point, Isle of Wight, in a bed of greenish tough tenacious clay, No. 35 of his * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. iv., 1847, p. 36, pl. 4. f. 2-6. 1857. ] OWEN—DICHODON CUSPIDATUS. 191 Section*, which he regards as the equivalent of the Hordwell beds from which Mr. Pytts Falconer obtained the original fossils described by me. The present additional fossil, figs. 1, 2, & 3, Pl. III., is noticed by Dr. Wright in his excellent “Contributions to the Palzeontology of the Isle of Wight+;’’ but, with his accustomed liberality, the discoverer of this rare specimen remitted the full description and illustration of it to me. The first and second molars correspond precisely, in both size and shape, with those of the lower jaw from Hordwell described and figured in Geol. Quart. Journ. vol. iv. p. 36. pl. 4. fig. 2, m 1, m 2. The crown of each consists of four three-sided cones, in two trans- verse pairs, the inner cones being rather higher, more compressed, and sharper than the outer ones, and almost lanceolate in form. The inner side of the outer cones is smooth and nearly flat ; that of the inner cones, fig. 2, is sinuous, convex in the middle, concave before and behind, with each angle of the base produced into a small ear- like cusp: the ridge from the hind angle of the base of the hinder and outer lobe terminates by expanding into a small cusp behind the base of the hinder and inner lobe, so that there are five basal cusps, besides the two lanceolate lobes, on the inner side of the crown of both the first and the second true molars. The other two sides of the cones meet at an open angle in the two inner cones, and at an acute angle in the two outer ones: the angles are rounded off where they meet, so that the outer part of each lobe, fig. 1, is convex, smooth, and polished. Were the summits of the four cones to be ground down to a flat surface, there would result, from the form above described, two pairs of crescentic tracts of enamel, with their convexity turned outwards, as in the Ruminants. And this abrasion has indeed in some degree affected the first molar, m 1, Pl. III. fig. 3; the resulting crescentic islands, however, instead of being on a flat surface, are bowed, rising in the middle to the apex of each cone, which is hardly more worn than the part which slopes away from it on each side, along the line where the flat, or sinuous, inner side meets the other two sides of the three-sided cone. The crown of the second molar, m 2, is less abraded : that of the third molar, m 3, has lost only a strip of enamel from the ridges of the anterior pair of cones. This tooth, agreeably with the artiodactyle type of m 3, has an additional pair of lobes, fig. 3, m 3, g. They are smaller than the normal ones: the inner surface of the inner lobe has an accessory cusp at the back part of its base, but not at the fore part. The fore- and-aft diameter of this tooth is 9 lines ; that of the three molar teeth being | inch 9 lines. The specimens described in the ‘Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society,’ vol.iv. 1847, demonstrated the typical character of the dental * “ Geology of the North-west coast of the Isle of Wight,” Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 2. vol. vii. p. 433. tT Jb. (August 1852). 192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. _—_[Jan. 7, Q . . °3—3 formula of the Dichodon: viz. 1-—, c_—, por d—, m— =—44; and that the three incisors, the canine, the four premolars, and three molars formed, as in the Anoplotherium, one continuous unbroken series on each side of both jaws. The only important matter which those specimens, owing. to their having belonged to an immature individual, left undecided was as to the nature of the teeth occupying the position of the premolars. The absence of any calcified germ beneath those teeth, in the lower jaw, coupled with the advanced development of the second true molar in the lower, and of the third true molar in the upper, jaws, inclined me at first to regard them as permanent teeth. A subsequent recon- sideration of their characters led me to interpret the pheenomena as related to a modification of the order of appearance and succession of the permanent teeth in the extinct genus*. I accordingly looked for additional specimens to obtain a knowledge of the characters of the premolar teeth, and of the permanent incisors and canines. A portion of the upper jaw of the Dichodon cuspidatus, from the Hordwell sand, in the collection lately purchased of Lady Hastings by the British Museum, exhibits the three incisors, a canine, and the three anterior premolars of an adult individual, and, to judge by the degree in which the crowns of the teeth have been worn, of an aged one. The first incisor, fig. 4, 2 1, has a crown 43 lines in breadth: its summit is worn flat, as far down as nearly to the level of the posterior ridge circumscribing the cavity which still remains at the outer and back part of the crown. The pointed, narrower, outer extremity of the crown overlaps the anterior facet of the outer side of the second incisor, 2 2: the crown of this tooth is less worn; it is 4 lines in breadth ; the posterior basal groove extends the whole breadth of the crown. The third incisor, 7 3, has been partly displaced: the whole simple subcompressed root, and a part of the crown, areexposed. The canine has been entirely displaced, but the crown is fortunately pre- served, adherent to the matrix outside the incisors: on the right side of the upper jaw the bottom of the simple socket for the root of the canine is shown. ‘The crown has a breadth of 5 lines: its exterior is rather smuous with a double convexity, as in the deciduous canine with a crown of 4 lines in breadth, in the first-described specimen. On the opposite side of the tooth the crown shows a polished surface of abrasion, as if that side had been obliquely and cleanly cut off, leaving a trace of the depression and basal ridge at the back part of the inner surface. The form of the worn surface shows that this extended but short canine must have been worked upon by the lower canine, like a car- nassial tooth or scissor-blade ; but the flattened grinding surface of the succeeding premolars indicates that the cutting power of the canines was exercised upon vegetable substances. The first premolar (Pl. IIT. fig. 4, p 1) has a breadth, or fore-and- * “ Forms and Structure of the Teeth ” in “ Circle of the Sciences,’”’ 8vo, 1854, p- 296. 1857. ] OWEN—DICHODON CUSPIDATUS. 193 aft extent, of crown of 7 lines, but is not thicker than 2 lines; it has been worn down almost to the roots, which are two in number; the groove between the ridge along the inner side of the base and the rest of the crown remains: the smooth abraded horizontal surface, a line or more in breadth, slopes away from the produced mid-part of the crown, the general shape of which evidently corresponded with that of the first deciduous molar of the lower jaw (op. cit. pl. 4. fig. 2, p 1). The second premolar, fig. 4, p 2, with a fore-and-aft extent of 8 lines, is 3 lines thick : the smooth abraded surface slopes away from the most prominent middle lobe of the crown, but rises so as to indi- cate the summit of a fore and a hind accessory lobe: the groove bounded by the inner basal ridge remains. This tooth has two fangs, the hinder one being the strongest, where the crown is thickest. The third premolar, figs. 4 & 4 a, p 3, has been displaced, but lies attached to the matrix not far from its socket. Its crown is less worn than that of the preceding tooth, and the trilobed character is consequently better shown : its fore-and-aft extent is 8 lines, the same almost as that of the deciduous tooth (loc. cit. fig. 2, p 3) which preceded it ; but the three principal lobes are thicker; and the acces- sory inner lobe, marked 7 in fig. 3, p 3, loc. cit., of the deciduous tooth is more developed, the greatest thickness of the crown being 4 lines in the present premolar: the accessory tubercle at the back part of the outer side of the crown is better developed. The inner basal ridge continued from each end of the base of the inner tubercle, 2, is well marked. ‘The line of abrasion which follows the undulations of the tricuspid outer and inner part of the crown diminishes in breadth from the fore to the back part of the crown. The height of the middle lobe of the crown is not more than 3 lines. The thick hinder root is longitudinally grooved, as if preparatory for the bifurcation which the same root would probably present in the next tooth. Unfortunately no other tooth is preserved in this specimen, and the form and proportions of the fourth premolar of the upper jaw have still to be determined. Sufficient, however, of the characters of the premolar series of the adult Dichodon are now known to confirm the deductions from the first-described evidences as to its generic distinction from Dichobune, Cuy.: the unusual antero-posterior extent of the low crowns of the first three premolars establishes that distinction, if even the fourth premolag should prove, as is most probable, to have a form and pro- portions more resembling those of the first true molar tooth. The precise form and proportions of the last true molar of the lower jaw, exhibited in Dr. Wright’s specimen, afford likewise a valuable accession to the characters of this interesting Anoplotherioid extinct British quadruped. The collection of the Marchioness of Hastings, now in the British Museum, also includes a portion of the right ramus of the lower jaw, with the last molar tooth. This tooth, fig. 5, corresponds in size and shape with that in Dr. Wright’s specimen, but it is more worn, having belonged to a more aged animal. The two enamel-bounded crescents of the anterior division of the crown have been ground down into a 194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Jan. 7, continuous tract of dentine; they remain distinct in the middle and third divisions of the crown, fig. 5 a. The fore-and-aft extent of the crown is 9 lines: the depth of the jaw beneath the middle of the tooth is 11 lines. Thus, of the genus Dichodon, the deciduous dentition, and the permanent dentition, save as respects the last premolar, are now known. The formula of the deciduous dentition is— i=, c_, dm=— =S0 45 that of the permanent dentition is— 5 Se) ET = ue i, Cae ae m — =44. The deciduous formula is the same as that of the Hog: the per- manent one differs from that of the Hog only in the displacement of d 1 by the development beneath it of p 1, and in the functional character and size of that tooth: this fact, interesting because of its closer conformity to the typical diphyodont dentition, is demonstrated by the difference of size of p 1 in Pl. III. fig. 4, and the first lower de- ciduous molar marked p 1 im my former memoir, loc. cit. pl. 4. fig. 4. The Hog is the only existing hoofed genus that manifests, as regards number, the typical dentition displayed by the Dichodon i common with many other Eocene ungulate and unguiculate Mammalia. The deviation in the Hog from this type is slight, being confined to the non-development of p 1, and the early reduction of the numerical formula by the loss of the small tooth, d 1, at the beginning of the molar series. That the Dichodon belongs to the Artiodactyle series is inferred, notwithstanding the want of any direct evidence of the structure of its limbs, from the more simple form and structure of p 1, p 2, and p 3, as compared with the true molars, and from the symmetrical rumina- ting pattern of the grinding surface of the crown of the true molars. From the true Ruminants the Dichodon differs in the development of the upper incisors and ofp | in both jaws, which teeth are wanting in all the known existing species. Such feeble traces of embryotic rudiments of these teeth as have been observed by Professor Goodsir and others, in the Cow and Sheep, and the more conspicuous germs of upper incisors, of which one pair is functionally developed, in the Camelide, are pheenomena that derive increased significance and interest from the fact of the func- tional development of the same teeth in Artiodactyle Ungulates of the Eocene period. In the configuration of the true molars the Dichodon would seem to be more nearly allied to the Ruminant section of the Artiodactyla : in the number and kinds of its teeth it more resembles the Hog-tribe amongst the non-Ruminant section. The known facts of the deci- duous dentition of the Dichodon supply an additional test of its affi- nities, owing to the marked differences in the times and order of succession of the permanent teeth between the Hog-tribe and the Ruminants, at least of the Ox and Sheep. 1857. | OWEN—DICHODON CUSPIDATUS. 195 In these the last true molar cuts the gum before any of the pre- molars appear, and the canine teeth (‘corner-nippers’ of the Vete- rinarians) are the last of the permanent teeth to come into place, their appearance marking the completion of the third year in the Sheep, and a somewhat later period in the Ox. In the Hog the canines appear before the premolars, and these are in place and use before the last molar is on a level with the rest of the grinders. In the Dichodon cuspidatus the second true molar, in the upper jaw, is in place before any of the deciduous series of teeth have been shed ; and it is coming into place, with the crown complete, before the pulps of the premolars have even begun to be calcified. The lower jaw of the Sheep at from nine to twelve months would afford the nearest parallel amongst existing Artiodactyles to that of the immature Dichodon figured in pl. 4. fig. 2. vol. iv. of the ‘Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society.’ But by the time the second true molar in the Sheep is as far advanced in development as in the Dicho- don (fig. 2, loc. cit., p 2, wpper jaw), the first permanent incisor is in place, and the germs of the premolars in the cavities of reserve have calcified crowns. I append the subjoined Table, indicating the several teeth by the symbols explained in my Paper on the Homologies of the Teeth*, and in the Article TreTH of the ‘Cyclopedia of Anatomy and Physio- logy,’ vol. iv. The necessity of exactness in the records of the age of the valuable breeds of domesticated cattle, exhibited in competition at Agricul- tural Meetings, has led to a greater accuracy in the statements of the periods of development of the different teeth in the Ox, Sheep, and Hog, and I have combined the results of my own observations with those recorded by Bojanus, the learned Veterinary Professor at Wilna, and by Mr. Simonds, the Professor of Cattle Pathology in the Royal Veterinary College of London¢, in the following TABLE OF THE TIMES OF APPEARANCE OF THE PERMANENT TEETH IN THE | Ox. SHEEP. Hoe. Early. Late. Early. Late. Symbols.,; Year. Month. Year. Month.| Year. Month. Year. Month. | Year. Month. il ft 9 BD in3 3 A0 10 4a 6-1» 1 « 0 i2 eas Be 319 die (6 2 @to4 pole 6 Hao tita sO tn 5.78 os 3 9tol2Zi 0 9 Tin wee a ee Sie) US 6 0 9 itd: he Ana Miokh Al ci0 53 0-6 0 6 mee od <8 LiGa fiiod Te 0 10 oe ee ae owe 1 6 2 0 bili dorp1, 0 0 Or @ 0 0 0 0 Bt) Qviak 2 348 aR | 20 6 1 vHi@ ie ee ee ate BicD DG Ki ee 3°56 es 2 6 ky * Philosophical Transactions, 1859, p. 481. Tt “The Age of the Ox, Sheep, and Pig,” 8vo, 1854. VOL. XIII.—PART I. Us 196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. __[Jan. 7, EXPLANATION OF PLATE III. (All the figures are of the natural size.) Fig. 1. Portion of lower jaw with the three true molars, m1, m2, m3, from the outside. Fig. 2. Crowns of the same teeth, from the inside. Fig. 3. Grinding surface of the same teeth: f, outer cusp or division of the lobes of the first true molar; a, 3, c, d, e, the five internal accessory basal cusps of the internal divisions of the same tooth ; /’, f/”, the outer divi- sions of the two anterior lobes of the last molar; g, the outer division of the third lobe of the same tooth. This specimen is from the Upper Eocene clay of the Isle of Wight, in the col- lection of Dr. Wright of Cheltenham. Fig. 4. Part of the upper jaw, showing the working surface of the right incisors, canine, and three anterior premolars, as in their natural position. 4 a. Outside view of the third premolar of the same specimen. Fig. 5. Portion of lower jaw, with the last true molar. 5 a. Grinding surface of the same molar. These specimens are from the Upper Eocene sands of Hordwell, Hants, and are in the British Museum. 2. On the Fossin VERTEBR# of a SERPENT (Laophis crotaloides, Ow.) discovered by Capt. Spratt, R.N., 7x a’‘TeRTIARY ForMA- TION at Satonica*. By Prof. Owen, F.R.S., F.G.S. &c. [Puate IV.] Tue characters for distinguishing and determining the fossil remains of Serpents are deemed, I believe, by most palzeontologists to be less salient and satisfactory than in those of other reptiles. I have found, however, in the course of comparisons called for by the discovery of Ophidiolites in our own tertiary strata, more differentiating characters in Ophidian vertebree than the works on comparative anatomy gave promise of; and no paleontologist would find a difficulty in distin- guishing the vertebra of an eocene Palgophis (Pl. IV. fig. 1), e.g. from that of any known existing Ophidian, provided the neural arch (n, 2) were entire. For the nomenclature of the parts and processes of an Ophidian vertebra, and for their chief modifications in existing Serpents, I must refer to my “History of British Fossil Reptilest,” pp. 135-139, Ophidia, plates 2 and 3. It will there be seen that in the genera Python (figs. 5 and 6), Boa, Eryx, Coluber (fig. 7), Deirodon, and Hydrus, the hypapophysis (4) subsides into a ridge, or a short sub- compressed tubercle, in the vertebre situated behind the anterior third or fourth part of the trunk; but that in Crotalus (fig. 4), Vi- pera, and Natriz the hypapophysis, /, is continued, with more or less diminution of relative length, from all the vertebree supporting free ribs. In all the fossil vertebrze of the Serpent from Salonica, thirteen in number, submitted to my examination, the hypapophysis (figs. 2 and 3, 4), where entire, is developed, of equal length and similar form, * See above, p. 183. + See also Monograph of the Eocene Reptiles, Palzont. Soc. 1850, plates 13 and 14. Yichodon + USPlLadtius ie x ine } 1857.] OWEN—LAOPHIS CROTALOIDES. 197 from the back part of the under surface of the centrum, and a ridge is continued from the fore-part of its base, gradually expanding as it subsides, to the lower rim of the anterior articular cup of the cen- trum, below which it makes no projection. With the small number of vertebree of this fossil Serpent trans- mitted for comparison, this character alone will not warrant a con- clusion in favour of its affinities to the Crotalus, since they may all have come from the anterior region of the trunk, where a similar hypapo- physis is developed in the other genera of Serpents above mentioned. In point of size, the vertebrze from Salonica agree with the middle trunk-vertebree of a Python tigris of 11 feet in length; but they are manifestly of a different genus and family of Serpents. Independently of the ridge continued forwards from the hypapo- physis, there is a process, figs. 2 and 3, d', flattened behind, produced downwards and forwards below and beyond the articular cup, from the under part of the diapophysis, d, as in Crotalus, fig. 4. A small and well-defined articular tubercle, d, projects from near the upper part of the diapophysial surface, also as in Crotalus; and the upper part of the diapophysis is produced and bent outwards at d", beneath the anterior zygapophysis, z, with which it is blended, and which it seems to sustain, like a cantilever in roof-architecture ; the obtuse point of the process extending outwards (fig. 3, d''), about a line beyond the flat articular surface of the zygapophysis, z. A minute tubercle beneath the outer end of that articular surface indicates the homologous point in Python ; but the production of the pointed pro- cess is not found in any of the vertebrze of the constricting Serpents. It characterizes the vertebre of the genera Coluber (fig. 7), Naja, Crotalus, and Hydrus; and the degree to which the process in question is produced in the fossil Serpent is intermediate between Coluber, where it is longest, and Crotalus, where it is less developed. The zygosphene, zs, is relatively broader in proportion to its depth in the fossil Serpent (fig. 3) than in Python (fig. 6), and is slightly excavated anteriorly, and without a median tubercle; it more resem- bles the form and proportions of that part in Coluber and Crotalus. The posterior border of the neural arch, 7, describes a gentle curve convex backwards as it descends from the base of the neural spine to the posterior zygapopbysis, 2’. The similarly-sized fossil vertebra of the Paleophis toliapicus offer a striking contrast with the Salonica Ophidiolite in the configuration of this part, which is produced into an angle (fig. 1, ~) ; the posterior zygapophyses are more produced outwards than in the anterior trunk-vertebree of Python, resem- bling those of the middle trunk-vertebree of Python, which are without the long hypapophysis. The base of the neural spine is coextensive with the neural arch ; no well-defined part of the zygo- sphene projects beyond it, as in Python, Naja, and Hydrus. In this respect the Salonica Ophidiolite resembles Crotalus; the neural spine is more compressed than in Python, and its posterior border slopes more backward ; but it is not sufficiently entire in any of' the specimens to permit this comparison to be pursued with advantage. The process from above the concave part of the expanded articular P2 198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Jan. 7, end of the rib is relatively longer than in Python, resembling in its proportions that in Coluber ; and the articular concavity itself is better defined. Of the 253 trunk-vertebree of the Python tigris, the 74 anterior ones have long hypapophyses ; the remaining 179 have mere tubercles in the place of those processes. If 13 scattered vertebre of a dis- articulated skeleton of such a Serpent were picked up, it is three to one but that they would be of the 179 without the hypapophyses. In the Coluber Histrio, the 58 anterior vertebrae have hypapo- physes ; the succeeding 157 vertebree, which support moveable ribs, have no hypapophyses. In the Deirodon (Anodon) scaber, hyp- apophyses are developed from 32 anterior vertebree ; in the remain- ing 58 vertebree with moveable ribs the process subsides to a mere tubercle. In the same proportion of the trunk-vertebrz of an African species of Hryx, the hinder end of the hypapophysial ridge is slightly produced. In Naja, as in Viperus, the hypapophysis is continued, but of relatively smaller size than in Crotalus, from the posterior part of the lower ridge of the vertebra throughout the trunk. The diapo- physis presents the same well-marked tubercle upon its upper part as in the Rattlesnake, but the lower end is less produced; the process underpropping the zygapophysis projects proportionally further be- yond the articular surface. The probability is in favour of the fossil Serpent from Salonica resembling those genera in which the hypapophysis is well developed from all the trunk-vertebree ; the breadth of the base of the neural arch indicates that they have been from about the middle, not from the fore-part of the trunk. The vertebrze offer so many points of resemblance with those of the Rattlesnake and Viper, that they may have belonged to a venomous species; they are, however, at least, specifically distinct from the vertebree of known species of Crotalus and Vipera, and they by no means afford certain grounds for a con- clusion as to the poisonous character of the Salonica Serpent. The known existing Serpents of Southern Europe and Asia Minor include a species of Eryx (Anguis jaculus of Hasselquist), several subgenera of Colubrine harmless Snakes, e. g. Ailurophis vivaz, Fitzinger, Ccelopeltis monspessulana, Ranz., Periops hippocrepis, Wagler, Zacholus austriacus, Wagler, Zamenis Riccioli, Bonaparte, Callopeltis flavescens and Cal. leopardinus, Fitz., Rhinechis scalaris, Bonap., Elaphis quadrilineatus, Bonap., Hemorrhois trabalis, Boie, also from four to six species of Natriz and of Coluber proper ; but none of these species now present a size comparable with that of the fossil Serpent from Salonica. Some individuals of the Natria viperina of Dalmatia have been said to reach the length of 6 feet. The poisonous Serpents of the South of Europe and Western Asia are exclusively viperine (Pelias berus, Merrem, Vipera aspis, and Vip. ammodytes, Latr.), but are still smaller in comparison with the fossil. The classical myth embalmed in the verse of Virgil, and embodied in the marble of the Laocoon, would indicate a familiarity with the idea at least of Serpents as large as the Laophis in the minds of the Saeed — 4 A é ej r, 4 c oe if : } Cg } Ae AO h Paleophis . 1857. SALTER—LONGMYND FOSSILS. 199 ancient colonists of Greece. But according to actual knowledge, and any positive records of zoology, the Serpent, between 10 and 12 feet in length, from the tertiary deposits of Salonica, must be deemed an extinct species. The fossil may be provisionally indicated as Laophis crotaloides*. EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV. Fig. 1. Middle trunk-vertebra of Paleophis typheus, Ow., from the Eocene of Bracklesham, Sussex. 2. Trunk-vertebra of Laophis crotaloides, Ow., from near the Promontory of Karabournou, on the eastern coast of the Gulf of Salonica. 3. Front view of the same vertebra. 4. Two middle trunk-vertebre of Crotalus durissus. 5. Middle trunk-vertebra of a Python tigris 17 feet long. 6. Front view of the same vertebra. 7. Middle trunk-vertebra of the Coluber Histrio. (All the figures are of the natural size.) e. Anterior articular cup. d’”. Upper diapophysial process. o. Posterior articular ball. z. Anterior zygapophysis. h. Hypapophysis. z’. Posterior zygapophysis. d. Diapophysis with articular con- zs. Zygosphene. vexity for the rib. m. Hinder border of neural arch. d’. Lower diapophysial process. ns. Neural spine. 3. On ANNELIDE-BURROWS and SURFACE-MARKINGS from the CamBriaN Rocks of the Lonemynpt. No.2. By J. W. Satter, Esq., F.G.S., and of the Geological Survey. [Puate V.] In a former communication (March 1856) I described a few obscure traces of animals from these old rocks in the Longmynd, and have now to add some further information, gathered during the last summer in the same locality. The markings which were in that paper referred to the burrows of Annelides have been found in the greatest profusion, and through a much greater thickness of strata than before, not less than a mile in vertical measure ; and they have been detected too in places con- siderably to the south and west of the localities before given. I am glad of the opportunity of again drawing attention to the subject, partly because the woodcut-section in the former paper, at page 247, Journ. No. 47, was accidentally made so as to exclude the most important beds, and partly because these annelide-markings have, during the present year, been sedulously searched for, and similar ones found, by my friend, Dr. J. R. Kinahan, of Dublin, in the undoubted Cambrian beds of Bray Head, Wicklow. His paper * Gr. Adas, a stone, dds, a serpent. + For the former communication on Fossil Remains in the Cambrian rocks of the Longmynd, see Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 246. 200 appeared in the January Num- ber for 1857 of the Proceed- ings of the Dublin Geological Society. The section here given has numbers corresponding to the beds enumerated in the former paper ; and the overlying Silu- rian strata (10, 11, 12) are in- troduced to show their relations to the highly inclined Cam- brian beds under notice. No. 1. The dark-olive shales have not yielded any trace of fossils ; but in one place the harder beds of the same series, which are designated No. 2, have traces of the drenicolites didymus. ,No. 3. The same fossil (4. didymus) was found in the lower part of the Oakham Dingle, considerably below the beds in the Carding-mill Brook, from whence it was figured be- fore. Of their existence at this place there can be no doubt. The higher parts of No. 3 were carefully searched by my- self and an assistant (Mr. John W. Rhind), and yielded an unexpected dbundance of the worm-burrows, both large and small. The best localities ap- pear to be at the head of Oak- ham Dingle, where the brook* flows N.E.-S.W. on the strike of the beds, and also along the same line in the next valley, viz. on the west side of Year- ling Hill, on the brook that flows down to the ‘ Ashes.” The latter locality was very prolific, and nearly all our best * This brook (of clear sparkling water, like all the “ gutters”’ of the Longmynd) is intended to yield a water-supply to the town of Church Stretton. Section of the Longmynd. W. by N. PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. Church Stretton..... Waterfall, KS Ratlinghope. — Stiper Stones (quartz-rock). [Jan. 7, Grey rippled flags, at Light-spout Waterfall. Purple shales and sandstones, alternating. Red shales. Hard olive-coloured shales; some beds ashy. Fine-grained greenish sandstone. Dark-olive shales. 6 5 4 3 2 1 (let down 2000 feet by the great fault). -grey slates, with bands of igneous rocks). sandstone and shales. gs (dark shales). Tits. tone and shale. Ss Lowest Llandeilo rocks (dark Wenlock shale, limestone, &c. Lingula Fla Coarse red Hard grey Coarse san 10 9 8 7 «. Greenstones, &c, 1857.] SALTER—LONGMYND FOSSILS. 201 specimens came from thence. There are evidences of the burrows of Arenicola (Arenicolites), of a different species from that formerly described, and it occurs both of large and small size. They are found on the wave-marked surfaces in the greatest profusion, hundreds of burrows being often crowded in the space of a square inch; or they are more widely set and of a larger size, when they frequently are placed most distinctly in pairs, indicating the exit- and entrance- holes to the burrows. We have evidence in these beds too of the action of the waves in obliterating the burrows; and in fig. 1, Pl. V., may be seen a not un- frequent case, where the rasping action of the surf has only spared those burrows which lay in the shelter of the ripple-hollows. That the strand was a level shore left dry at low tides, and that the surface was dried by the sun, is abundantly shown by the innu- merable sun-cracks (figs. 9 & 10) which traverse the surfaces. These cracks when broad, as they often are, reveal the lighter-coloured sand beneath the filmy coating of dark mud on which the Annelide holes show themselves. There are, besides, rain-prints in abundance on some of these surfaces. No. 4. The same pheenomena, at least the wave-marks and the annelide-holes, are observable in the bands of red slate which overlie the beds No. 3; scarcely a fragment could be broken in the rocky knolls a little above the Carding-mill without showing them im pro- fusion. It is the same further north in the Batch valley, and south- wards in several localities, even as far as Choulton bridge, on the Onny River. No. 6. Again, in the hard, grey, and rippled beds of Light-Spout Waterfall, mentioned in the former paper, Mr. Rhind found the annelides. In a journey across the eastern portion of the Longmynd, in company with my friends, Messrs. Lightbody and Cocking, of Lud- low, we found them at intervals all the way, until they ended with the sandstones of the Portway itself. The total thickness, there- fore, of the fossiliferous beds cannot be less than a mile, as above stated. In one particular we have been unfortunate. No further traces of the crustacean called Paleopyge (vol. xii. pl. 4. f. 3) have been met with, though they were diligently sought for in the locality which produced them last year. I do not on that account consider there is any reasonable doubt as to the nature of the fossil. I have shown it to many scientific observers, and all agreed that it was organic : the evidence therefore remains as before. Wave-marks and (Wind?) Ripples. Pl. V. figs. 5-8. The marks of tidal flows or currents are very numerous and per- fect, generally in broad hollows and elevations, but occasionally in quite regular transverse ridges which alternate or imosculate, as they do now on the sea-shore (fig. 5). _ Besides these larger undulations, the surface is frequently rippled by smaller and finer ridges, which either represent the quiet action 202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. |[Jan. 7, of the surf on a level strand, or possibly the agitation of the water by wind: both causes may have operated (figs. 6, 7). I prefer the first explanation, because there are so many instances in which the direction of the lines of surf can be easily traced ; and the inter- ference of one small current with another is often apparent in the intersection of these sets of lines (fig. 8). They appear generally to have been slight ridges, and the subsequent compression of the rock has changed them into sharp-edged tabule, and the furrows into narrow depressed lines. It is to these wave-ripples, or surf- tmes, as they may be called, that I would now refer some of the markings which before I thought were drainage-lines or runnels* (Joc. cit. pl. 4. f.5). The specimens at command then were far less perfect than those since obtained, and much more altered by pres- sure. To any one familiar with the mode in which the tide creeps in or out among the ripple-hollows on avery level strand, this expla- nation will not be deemed unsatisfactory. Many specimens show the direct action of the water producing straight, close, transverse ridges, and fig. 8 shows the contending currents, caused probably by slight obstructions, which were poured into the hollow in various directions during the advance or retreat of the tide. In some cases the holes of the burrowing annelides have modified. ne shape of the surf-ripples, in others they have been modified by them. Sun-cracks. Pl. V. figs. 9 & 10. These were most unexpectedly found in great plenty on the west side of Yearling Hill. The rock there is closely laminated, a hard green flagstone of exceedingly fine grain (almost flinty), and the rippled surfaces are covered with a filmy coating of dark-brown oxide of iron. The sun-cracks do not differ to any great extent from those ordi- narily met with in newer rocks (the Permian of Coventry, for instance). They divide the surface into areolee of various sizes and shapes (fig. 9) ; and when, as is most common, the superficial layer of mud is darker than the stone, show themselves well in relief by exposing the lower stratum. The edges of the areole are most generally curved up- wards, the heat of the sun having caused shrinkage. Sometimes this is so much the case, that casts of them in relief, having a semi- cylindrical form, and cut across by other smaller cracks, look very like jointed portions of Crustacea ; and the resemblance is heightened by frequent tubercles, which are the projecting casts of the annelide- holes above noted. Rain-prints. Pl. V. figs. 1 & 10. If the ripple-marks and the marks of shrinkage from sun-drying be preserved upon these old surfaces, it is not unlikely that rain-prints should be also present ; and aecordingly numerous traces of the action * Not, however, those with branched or dichotomous furrows ; they must still be considered as drainage-lines. 1857. ] SALTER—LONGMYND FOSSILS. 203 of rain have been observed, which appear to be quite the same as those we meet with at the present day, or in strata newer than those under consideration. The traces consist,—Ist, of numerous scattered impressions of drops of large and small size (fig. 10), intermingled upon the rippled and sun-dried surfaces of half-a-dozen specimens from a particular bed; 2ndly, of a close set of prints, more uniform in size, upon another surface ; 3rdly, of numerous marks of drops occurring upon a ripple-marked slab, which shows too the annelide-holes in part abraded by the surf, or sheltered in the hollows (fig. 1). In the first series we have round, or slightly oval, well-marked hollows, with a raised border, more conspicuous on one and the same side in all the prints than on the other. They indicate a somewhat slanting direction for the rain, an inference strengthened by the elongated form of the prints in that direction. In fact, the phzeno- mena so well explained by Sir C. Lyell in his Manual (5th ed. p. 384) are here repeated. The drops were of irregular size ; some, much larger than the rest, having apparently fallen after the smaller ones had impressed the surface, and having nearly obliterated their im- pressions. In other cases, two or three drops of more equal size have fallen nearly on the same spot, and made a compound im- pression. These rain-prints are at first sight not easy to distinguish from the larger annelide-holes. But, besides that they are not in pairs (a very important point, since all the annelide-burrows show this character distinctly), there is a marked difference in the regular even outline and clean hemispheric impression of the rain-print, and the less regular shape and uneven bottom of the half-filled burrow. In rare instances the two occur on the same slab. The prints upon the abraded surface (fig. 3) are somewhat dif- ferent, much shallower, and closer together, and frequently impressed the one over the other. In this case the rain appears to have fallen vertically and on a harder surface than in the other case; and the bottom of the hollows is flat or occasionally slightly raised in the middle, a character usually considered decisive of rain-prints. Organic Remains. The new species of Arenicolites above mentioned I propose to designate ARENICOLITES SPARSUS, sp. nov. PI. V. figs. 1-4. Sp. char. A. gregarius, fodinarum oribus circularibus binis, sese remotiusculis. Junior (figs. 1 & 4), fodinis minutis, aggregatis. Major (fig. 2), fodinis 3-lineam latis, sparsis. These burrows of annelides, once recognized, are to be found in great profusion, chiefly on the surface of the finer sandstones or shales. The larger ones are more scattered, nearly a line broad, and with the edges of the holes a little raised. They are most distinctly in pairs, 204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. _[Jan. 7, often not more than a line apart, but sometimes a quarter of an inch from one another. The smaller ones (fig. 4) are in myriads close together, but still plainly mm pairs. They occur on the same surfaces with the larger ones, but still oftener are met with in groups ; all of the same size, or nearly so (about the size of a pin’s head), and particularly on the red shales before mentioned. On the upper surfaces of the beds they are, of course, depressions (fig. 1); on the lower surfaces casts of them project (fig. 4) as tubercles. It is a very common thing to meet with them only in the hollows of rippled surfaces, the wave having erased them on the more elevated portions. Sometimes this occurs in the most distinct and marked manner (fig. 1). This species appears to be distinct from the so-called 4. didymus of the former paper, by the holes being remote, not close together nor parallel to each other. They occur rather higher up in the series too; but it is, of course, possible that all may be one species. Localities.—The small variety has a very wide distribution, as before stated. The larger ones are found in tolerable plenty in Oak- ham Dingle, at Yearling Hill, the Packet Stone, Minton, and at the Light-Spout Waterfall above Church-Stretton. It does not appear necessary to insist on the value of such numerous though imperfect vestiges of the oldest fauna known. I am perfectly convinced that the Cambrian rocks contain treasures yet to be dis- covered, and that a holiday spent at the rismg town of Church Stretton would be well rewarded, and might produce new facts for science. I lately found that burrows similar to the above-described, but of a much larger size, were common in the Stiper Stones of Shropshire ; and these bear the strongest resemblance to the long vertical tubes described by Hall under the name of Scolithus linearis. It is almost certain that these are identical ; but, as the name Sco- lithus does not convey any definite meaning, there can be no objec- tion to the term Arenicola, as used by Binney, who first explained the nature of these double holes. Perhaps the termination -ctes would make the name more symmetrical with other terms of general import, and Arenicolites might stand for all worm-burrows with double openings, while Scolithus or Scolites might be retained for those which appear to be single tubes or burrows, vertical or hori- zontal *. Cololites has long been in use for worm-casts on the surface, and perhaps Helminthites would answer best for those long sinuous tracks upon the surface, usually considered as referable to Annelides. Ver- miculites has been applied to shorter forms+. Some of these, how-” ever, are unquestionably trails of small Crustacea, and others of spiral shell-fish. * Foralites has been used by M. Rouault for this kind of burrow. See Bull. Soc. Géol. Fr. vol. vii. 1850, p. 742. t Ibid. 2c. p. 744. 1857.} SALTER—LONGMYND FOSSILS. 205 In connexion with the facts above mentioned, which go to show the great prevalence of Annelides having the same habits as those of the Lob-worm (Arenicola) of our coasts, it is worth while to remark on the extraordinary abundance of animals of this class in Paleeozoic times. In the Cambrian rocks of Ireland they are in almost as great plenty as in Britain, and are there associated, as I have seen in com- pany with Dr. J. R. Kinahan, who discovered them, with the matted layers of Oldhamia. In the Lingula-flags of North Wales, e.g. near Maentwrog and Ffestiniog, they abound wherever sandy sediment has been thrown down; but I have only yet seen them in the form of Scolites or Helminthites, and have not yet found the double burrows in this formation. In the Stiper Stones, as above noted, the Arenicolites (Scolithus) linearis of Hall is the common fossil, occurring as long vertical tubes with trumpet-shaped openings in the quartz-rock. And in the Tre- madoc slates, the Llandeilo flags, and indeed all the Silurian series, worm-tracks and burrows are frequent in strata which were once sabulous mud. In the Upper Silurian rocks of Dingle, County Kerry, I found the Arenicolites in flaggy sandstone. More lately these double burrows have been found in company with fragments of land-plants in the Devonian fish-beds of Caithness, and in those beds, of somewhat doubtful age, which Prof. Nicol has described as carboniferous, on the borders of Loch Assynt in Suther- landshire*, while they have now been long known as most plentiful in the sandstones of the coal-measures. It is in the Carboniferous system, indeed, that they appear to have attamed their maximum in size and number. Throughout all the lower beds of that system, as exhibited in Pembrokeshire, North Devon, or the South of Ireland, the burrows of marine worms are conspicuous, chiefly in the form of cylindrical masses, upon the sur- faces of the beds or permeating them in all directions. They are of various sizes, from the thickness of a crow-quill up to 2 or 3 inches in diameter! and often of great length; and they frequently consti- tute of themselves massive beds, the sabulous matter left behind as ejected from the worm penetrating the more argillaceous beds in a way that produces an exceedingly tough mass—not easily acted upon by the waves—in shore-sections. The large annelide-tubes or casts in the carboniferous strata of Cumberland, and the tracks upon the coal-measure flags at Kilkee, County Clare}, are well known, and are of a size greatly larger than would be produced by the majority of living species. There is much yet to be done in the study of marine worms, with a view to ascertain the kind of impressions they leave in both sandy and argillaceous sea-beds. * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. No. 49. p. 32. The arrangement of these burrows appears to have led Prof. Nicol into the belief that he had found fragments of Stigmaria, and may have influenced him in determining the age of the beds. _} Edinb. New Phil. Journ. new ser. vol. i. p. 278. 206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Jan. 7, EXPLANATION OF PLATE V. (The specimens are reversed in the lithograph.) Fig. 1. Rain-prints on rippled surface, with Annelide-burrows (4reni-) From colites sparsus; young) in the hollows of the ripple. Yearling 2. Arenicolites sparsus (adult) ; on the upper surface of the slab. Hill, 3. Arenicolites sparsus (adult) ; | raised casts of the burrows, on | Church 4, Arenicolites sparsus (young); { the lower surfaceofthe slabs.) Stretton. 5. Rippled surface. 6. Rippled surface. f Wate above Church Stretton. 7. Rippled surface. 8. Surf-ripple on current-marks. 9. Sun-cracked surface. pes Hill. 10. Rain-prints and sun-cracks. — 4. On some species of Actpaspis from the Lower SiLuRiAN Beps of the SoutH oF ScoTLanp. By Wyvitite Tuomson, LL.D., F.R.S.E., Prof. Geol. Queen’s Coll. Belfast, &c. [Communicated by Sir R. I. Murchison, F.G.S.] [Pxiare VI.] Havine occupied part of my leisure for the last year or two in examining the fossils of the Silurian beds of the south of Ayrshire, described by Sir Roderick Murchison in 1851, I have met with many species and not a few generic types additional to those included in Mr. Salter’s list accompanymg Sir R. Murchison’s paper on the Silurian Rocks of the South of Scotland*. As most of the known British species of the genus Acidaspis have either been already de- scribed or are now in process of description, I take an opportunity of adding the few new forms which have hitherto occurred during the course of my investigations. The specimens are few, and in many cases fragmentary. The first two species are an addition to a little group already represented among our Lower Silurians by Acidaspis Jamesu and A. bispinosa. The group is formed of minute species, usually rather meagrely or- nameuted, and having a tendency to the fusion of the various pro- minent parts of the head ; a tendency which reaches its maximum in the subgenus Trapelocera, between which subgenus and Acidaspis proper (represented by A. mira, Barrande, and A. Brightii, Murch.) this group may be considered a link. AcIpAsPiIs LauaGE, sp.nov. Pl. VI. figs. 1-5. A. lata, ovata; capite brevi, transverso; glabellé triangulari, utrinque duobus lobis lateralibus ovatis, a lobo mediano cerviceque alto, et a * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. vii. p.137. I shall not enter into a consideration of the detailed section of the district at present. Following Sir R. Murchison, I regard the whole of the fossiliferous Girvan beds as belonging to the very top of the Lower Silurians. The Pinwhapple flags, however, I consider to be the lowest of the series, equivalent to the Upper Bala, and passing through the Mullock Hill sand- stone and the Craighead limestone into the Saugh Hill sandstone = Upper Caradoc. Luar. JOUrN.UOL COC. VOL AL TL ¥. es PERE O SD CNG CURR a ernest io omy ancenensi canbedis teks Pb f Dien Foe aes West Imp Ww * : is ad a i 7 4 ad a a 5 : A= 3 » 7 - > 5 4 7 a. Pa. i - , Pas _ a 7 7 ¢ i - aa a <_o. j » : , = * ea _ g iia a a | a *: ‘tr ae - pa Th : He : aay _, & ie 2 - wa ae ; 7 - . © ° : — : we i _ 7 ‘ 7 a 2 -~ . —-. i ~ 4 : 7 S 7 * ef = * eee 7 bie : Pom ay - 7 7 7 : 2 ’ ~" Pes j _ _ _ : @ _» : ; pat . ’ r P 7 = & ian “ | : 7 aa aS j 1 S = » owe a é 7 a - A = ’ 7 7 . ’ ry Mas Vv £ Me re a SLA Be | of ry . 2S otek 7 iF we ¢ aa] *: 7 : Oia a 7: rao : 7 | i : é : " a *) a J Fe a aa ' g - ’ — ri i . 7 ' > 7. eB 4 ce - i re : = - , (ar oe —s 7 a. J a . —_ | mm ? , ‘cP 7 7 a wall : ou “4 . ‘. : yy 7 id U : 7 joo x ey Sy Core. .. 7 q 7 ayt 5 a : 7 as M 7 a" ——- Ww om few (ee 7 ' i | : 7 - 7 i. a 7 6 a : -_ ae 9 ” Lie i Vie _- , is 1 va oan ‘Vou a ad nh : = : : DY aie a" ¢ = . = f a * ‘ - | - : ty ioe _ a ay ‘ Pte 7 | a : : y f : ’ - ‘ : . =h.6 - =a : Z 7 a : , . “— +? i 7 oo a : Ae 2 in 5 mtd a : ; - ' ; 7 - AE 7 unre 7 : i) : ; iF i 1 & 4 : we ri wl 7 ‘> - 7 ae . 9 ee . a? r ? > ali Vk o a m "7 * ee . 7 oe a ae 3 iy) . 7 : 7 : a e ae si 1 ae Pao 4% 7 La a : 2S =.) : : i . y ; : a pee ts Poy eo 7 = Sia ; 7 , : - _ ae a a Pa © __" i la re ' J Vas. - , Le ra A » ont /€ - - 7 - 7 : of mye. 1) a - z : y / 7 : ; : yt ~) Ge 6 7 > i” n : ae ie ¥ » « | ‘ : = 7 - mo — 7 | AW ~~ Le = od ; 7 7 a Ls 7 oe : 7 ee Pe an no 7 - 1) aA el ‘7a ae ay, : ae 4 > > in , rye 5 A eee - as ee ig e aha — 7 ” - = 7 J 7 aS ~ 7 . "Ue, ; 7 7 7 : “ > pnd a a a ' ee ; - = 7 = - _ a a =p 7 7 7 > fe be p : Me re oe : —— : 2] @ he : re a > = - 3" , er, i 7 : 7 - ee - \ i - q — : : oc Ys e 4 ve a Pam an ‘pak : —_ 7 is : -. —2 = a , CoF 7 = - ‘S 4 e 7 _ ay = a ?. 7 ne _ _ : : 7 > _— 4 er De Fa : x Li ’ : | i, oe = > ‘Uo ia 7 : 7 a Pan q\.. 2 ) Rees - we 7 ; ° 7 tf Tp . are ‘—- . oak - ' a bi Su — = _ - 7 a i * : - 7 . - a a oP « _ 7 ae wl i ‘ - a y ton i : f 7 7 re) i> iy an : » =a ee Je) 7 ee - 7 gr - a © 7 _ ip 7 |

> peray ee oe : ad - - a a 7 Les iv : - - pray’ _— - ; , i 7 i ae ; ate ~ : : . ; = 4 Go ne a r ~ ;* é = s . 7 “4 rn 7 ; — <é : ¥ ina = oe “7 YT wy ; 7 = 7 7 oe re ro oe a 7 . ; 3 = - > " : wha 7 7 - : A ey is a oa 7 - : y 7 7 fe f= ee a a ft. - a ll : } : : 7 : a. — *¥. ise a ‘ > ctw : 7 : r : ; @ 4 | hey Pee | i i -~ - 7 @ J ’ fe - = 7 - 7 iy ° ae ee hse” ‘oe : 7 ' a 7 7 _ : Le . ere ist A ‘ & 7 aa > ee ; : _ 7 : a irate ty a a7 2 . ee Bets? Ue ae a + 9 j Le : 2 4 ies oa 7 | an 7, P F: 7 af ma ca 7 ih - mo q 1 a4 un oll - 7 : a _ Te 2? as a ~ ~~ 7 PR 7 : - ft; 7 = a>, - - Th ee A age — ~~. » 4) i 7 7 we ne : a 7 : es : _ ¢s I : ~~ eae = Per) a se . ‘3 Thad ad is : - i 7 7 “4 “he a a ao oat \ = 7a ’ ¥ eee be ee ae ae Te a Ko my 2 > ia - 7 as. a) ~~. ’ YY a S ~. 7 ! 4 7 7 * on - : 7 1 ee < e iz : ae ‘iba T a 7 : : 9 > s i ¢ re ; -< - Sed ae a i Oe - 3 4 UP i oie? < - n'a a i _ -,: F 4 i. 4 7 po ap na a y = _ 7 Sy) i “Rs ast? » | Us pet ear 7. o 'b - a " a : aye tle * a ee i Wald _ —_—s rn & roy F oF . ee : ww yi My 7 7 ay os a * sin tt oo. ae i ¥ ‘ CR Bone dl Gec West bib ANNELIDE-BURROWS & SURFACE-MARKINGS from the Longmynd Rocks Quart. Journ Geel. Soc. Val XII Pl: ie W Weet hinp 4 t iA ron tie eel 4% a 1857.] THOMSON—ACIDASPIS. 207 genis parum profundo sulco sejunctis; cervice gibbo, retrorsum elon- gato, bispmoso; thorace segmentis novem, unispinosis ; capite pleu- risque leviter granulosis, adspersis hic et illic tuberculis minutis ; cauda brevi, transversa, semilunari; testa reticulata, margme quatuordecim spinis radiantibus, ezequalibus, ornata. Not above half an inch long. General form broad, rather square. Head broad and short. Glabella triangular; median lobe broad, not very prominent. Two oval side-lobes entirely circumscribed, separated from the median lobe by distinct furrows. Portion of the cheek within the facial suture very gibbous. Ocu- lar ridge distinct. Eyes somewhat remote. Neck-segment separated from the median lobe of the glabella by a shallow groove; gibbous, and continued backwards into two long, diverging, straight or curved spines. Axis of thorax and abdomen narrow, prominent. Body-rings nine; lateral portions horizontal, convex ; a longitu- dinal furrow separates the convexity into two ridges, which coalesce at the distal extremity, and end in a long, slightly recurved spine. Tail short, semicircular, of two short segments, fringed with from twelve to fourteen long, radiating, equal spines; a ridge from the anterior axis-segment is continuous with the antepenultimate spine on either side. General surface of the head and body-rings slightly tubercular ; surface of tail reticulated. The form of the tail of this species at once distinguishes it from all its British congeners, as indeed from all species hitherto described, with the exception of 4. radiata, Goldf., which it closely resembles. The tail-spines of the present species are longer than in A. radiata and slightly curved. The reticulation on the surface of the tail is not brought out in the figures of 4. radiata. If Barrande’s identification be correct, 4. radiata must extend upwards into the Devonians. A very slight distinction would, I saa authorize us in denying so wide a range to a Lower Silurian orm. Locality.—Rather common in schists at the base of the “ Graptolite and Orthoceratite flags,” Pinwhapple Glen, Ayrshire, = Upper Bala. ACIDASPIS HYSTRIX, sp. nov. PI. VI. figs. 6-10. A. angusta, ovata, testa tuberculis minutis perornata ; capite brevi, trans- verso, glabella triangulari, lobo mediano longitudinali, utrmque duobus lobis lateralibus, ovatis, a gena loboque mediano sejunctis; poste- riori lobo laterali cervice gibbo coalescente; thorace pleuris novem bispmosis; cauda lata, brevi, spinis duodecim zqualibus, parallelis, reflexis, fimbniata. Less than half an inch long. Glabella broadly triangular, not very highly arched; middle lobe rather narrow ; lateral lobes two, oval, separated by distinct grooves from the central lobe and from the cheek; basal lateral lobe fused with the neck-segment. Portion of cheek within the facial suture very gibbous, likewise confluent with the neck-segment. Neck- 208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Jan. 7, segment very prominent, separated from the middle lobe of the gla- bella by a shallow groove. We have only one specimen of this species, showing the head. The anterior portion is imperfect, so that the position of the eyes and the development of the ocular ridge cannot be determined. The free part of the cheek is also absent. As in its near neighbours, the neck-segment was probably prolonged and spinous; but this portion is likewise injured. The head is densely ornamented with tubercles. Axis of thorax and abdomen narrow and prominent. Body-rings nine ; lateral portion of body-ring horizontal, convex, with a groove running along it, somewhat nearer the anterior than the posterior margin, and dividing the surface into a narrower anterior and a broader posterior ridge, the posterior ridge terminating m an abruptly reflexed, slightly ciirved spine, nearly one-third the length of the body, and the anterior in a smaller spine, less abruptly reflexed, and so placed as to pass below the posterior spine of the segment before it. Tail minute, short, and as wide as the body-rings; axis of two very convex segments, margin fringed with twelve parallel or slightly approximate equal spines. A ridge runs from the first axis-segment on either side continuous with the antepenultimate spine, indicating the primary spine, the posterior spine of the anterior tail-segment. The surface of the body-rings and tail is richly granular. This is a pretty, little, distinct species; the head, body-rings, and tail are nearly equal in breadth, so that the contour of the animal is more regularly a parallelogram than usual. The granulation is pecu- liarly rich, and the long, curved, nearly adpressed spines are graceful. A. hystrix does not very closely approach any described species. It somewhat resembles 4. Prevosti, Barr. The structure of the head and the number and arrangement of the tail-spines distinguish it. Locality and Geological Position.—Tolerably common in schists forming the base of the ‘‘ Graptolite and Orthoceratite flags,” Pin- whapple Glen, Ayrshire, = Upper Bala. ACIDASPIS CALLIPAREOS, sp.nov. Pl. VI. figs. 11, 12. A. capite magno, transverso, semilunari; scuto centrali fere quadrato, sed antice aliquanto angustiori; glabella magna, tumida, utrinque lobis lateralibus binis, postico majori, oblongo, antico ovato, sulcis circumseptis; gena convexa, declivi, margine duodecim circiter stylis parallelis pectinata, postice in spimam fortem producta; cervice lato, gibbo, (bispinoso?). Thorace —? Cauda —? We are only acquainted with the head of this beautiful species, which is semicircular and very highly arched. It is ;4,ths of an inch wide, and belonged to a larger species than either of the foregoing. Glabella nearly square, the square defined by the distinct ocular ridge. Side-lobes two, oval, the posterior pair much larger and wider than the anterior; middle lobe wide and fully arched. Eyes far back in the head, and rather approximate. Portion of cheek without the facial suture, passing nearly perpendicularly downwards from the ocular ridge, ornamented with a beautiful frmge of long parallel spines, and prolonged into a long, curved, genal spine. 1857.] THOMSON—ACIDASPIS. 209 From our specimen, it appears that the neck-segment is evidently prolonged, but it is unfortunately broken off before reaching its spinous armature. Head richly granular. Locality.—Mullock Hill sandstone, Girvan, Ayrshire. I believe this sandstone to be an equivalent of a portion of the Upper Bala group still higher than the ‘‘ Graptolite and Orthoceratite flags.” In mineral, and to a certain extent in paleeontological, character it seems to pass into the Saugh Hill sandstone, which is rich in the typical Caradoc forms, Encrinurus punctatus, Brin. sp., Cyphaspis megalops, M‘Coy, sp., Pentamerus oblongus, Sow., Atrypa hemi- spherica, Sow., Tentaculites annulatus, Schloth., Beyrichie, &c. This species is evidently closely allied to 4. pectinata of Angelin ; indeed we must put great faith in the correctness of the figure in the ‘ Paleeontologia Scandinavica,’ to draw a distinction between them. The general form of the glabella is the same in each. In 2. calli- pareos the posterior lateral glabellar lobe is much larger than the anterior ; in 4. pectinata the lobes are represented as nearly equal. This is unusual, and might prove a fallacy arising from some imper- fection in the specimen figured. Both species are closely allied to A. Dama, Fletcher and Salter, MS.*; but in 4. Dama the eyes are much more remote than in A. callipareos, and the head is altogether broader and shorter, more allied in general form to 4. Brightii and the A. bispinosa group. The outline of the head of the present species is more like that of A. Dormitzeri, Barr., than of any described British form. The eyes in A. callipareos were pedicellate. A. callipareos closely resembles Ceraurus (4.) crenatus, Emme- rich, especially Lovén’s figure in the Stockholm ‘ Ofversigt.’ It is distinguished from it by the narrowness of the anterior triangular space within the ocular ridge. ACIDASPIS UNICA, sp. nov. Pl. VI. figs. 13, 14. A. segmentis duodecim, tuberculosis, unispinosis, antice latis, postice angustioribus ; cauda minuta, bisegmentaté. Capite —? Head wanting. The entire form, including the tail-spines, must have been ? inch long. Body-rings twelve; lateral portions hori- zontal; a double ridge runs along the lateral portion of each seg- ment, the two ridges coalescing at the distal extremity, and ending in a strong, long, reflexed spine ; the spines nearly uniform in length. Axis of body-rings very convex. Axis and lateral portions orna- mented with a double row of minute granules. Tail short, consisting of two minute segments. Lateral append- ages of first segment slightly expanded, twisted backwards at a right angle about ith of their length from the axis. A shallow groove passes through the centre of the slightly granulated expanded portion. The appendages of the second tail-segment are lost; they probably supported a fringe of short equal spines. | * Morris, Catal, Brit. Foss. 2nd edit. p. 99. 210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. |[Jan. 7, Locality.—Schists at the base of the “ Orthoceratite and Grapto- lite flags,’ Pinwhapple Glen, Ayrshire, = Upper Bala. There can be no doubt, from the style of armature and ornament, and from the general appearance of this form, even without the assistance of the head, that it belongs to the genus Acidaspis. The structure of the tail is that of 4. Keyserlingi; only the ridge, which usually traverses the pygidium, and joins or forms the primary spine, is still farther expanded at the expense of all the flat portion of the appendages of the first joint of the tail-axis. Only ten body-rings have hitherto been noted in any species of Acidaspis, and nine is the more usual number; the number twelve, therefore, in this species, is a singular characteristic. 4. unica forms a very welcome link between Acidaspis and the Cheiruride, already in many respects closely allied. None of the species of Acidaspis described in former works have hitherto occurred in the Silurian rocks of the South of Scotland. EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI. (The specimens are reversed in the lithograph.) Figs. 1-5. Acidaspis Lalage. 1-4. Twice the natural size. 5. Much enlarged. From specimens in my own collection. Figs. 6-10. Acidaspis hystrix. 6. Much enlarged, from a small specimen. 7, 8. Twice the natural size. 9. Much enlarged. 10. Represents the supposed arrangement of the double row of spines. The specimen fig. 8 is from the Survey Collection; the others are from my own. Figs. 11, 12. Acidaspis callipareos. 11. Partially restored, and twice the natural size. Figs. 13, 14. Acidaspis unica. 13. Twice nat. size. 14. Much enlarged. Figs. 15-17. Acidaspis Caractaci, 15,16. Natural size. 17. Much enlarged. 5. On two Sinur1AN Species of Actpaspis, from SHROPSHIRE. By J. W. Satrer, F.G.S. [Piate VI. figs. 15-17.] I rake the opportunity afforded by my friend Dr. Thomson’s paper, to add a figure to his plate, and a notice of two species, which will help to complete the account of the genus. They have been pre- viously quoted in the second edition of Morris’s Catalogue; but one has not been figured, and the other not described. 1. ACIDASPIS CORONATA, Sp. nov. A. Brightii, Salter, Mem. Geol. Surv. vol. ii. pt. 1. p. 348. pl. 9. figs. 8&9 only ; A. coronatus, Salter, Morris’s Catal. 2nd ed. p. 99. A. lata, feré uncialis, capite angulis latis productis, nec a genis abrupté di- stinctis : glabella angusta ; lobis sejunctis,—basalibus medianum equanti- bus: cervice mutico?: oculis parvis retrorsum tractis: cauda transversa brevissima, spinis 8,—primariis modicis, terminalibus 4, externis utrinque ] ; omnibus parallelis. G-West lith. ACIBABL ES, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. Vol. XII. PLVI. WWest Imp. * sy ’ * *, BY iy L. i] ‘ “P- ; .. we ty 4 7 (KSLA ote ae 1 a oe : ees iS $5] aa ; ome ‘ 1857. | SALTER—ACIDASPIS. 211 The head is semilunar, an inch wide, the front margin much arched, its outer angles scarcely at all quadrate, and with about eleven or twelve notches or short spines. The glabella is an equila- teral triangle, very prominent, narrowly obovate, and not at all fused with the cheeks ; the basal lobes large and circumscribed, the second pair rounded, the uppermost (as in all this section of the genus) wanting. The ocular ridges are narrow and distinct, diverging at an angle of about 90°, and the intermediate lobe (between these and the gla- bella) narrow, very prominent below, but not quite so broad as the basal glabella-lobe. Eye small, placed far back, as in 4. Brightit. The posterior angles of the head are narrowed gradually into the spine, which is oblique and continuous in direction with them, not abruptly turned outwards. The tail much resembles that of 4. Brightiz and other species, in which the primary spines do not differ greatly in size from the rest. They are directed exactly backwards, or even converge a little ; there are four terminal equidistant spmes between them, and one outside each. The axis is short, and the general shape of the tail shorter and wider than in any of the other British Upper Silurian species. This character, taken with the produced and gradually pointed head angles, will enable observers easily to recognize the species. The head also is easily separable at the facial sutures, and this cha- racter is worthy of notice. Locality.—Lower Ludlow Rock, Vinnal Hill, Ludlow. 2. Acipaspis Caracract, Salter. Pl. VI. figs. 15-17. dA. Caractaci, Salter, Mem. Geol. Surv. Decade 7. p. 7 of text attached to plate 6. A. semiuncialis, capite semilunari convexo, glabella late triangulata tubercu- lata, a genis convexis bene distincta, utrinque bilobata ; lobo basali centralem zquante rotundo circumscripto, quam secundo duplo latiore, hoe distine- tissimo obovato ; superiore obsoleto: [cervice —?] thorace axi convexo, pleuris ad apices deflexis bispinosis ; cauda 12- (vel 14-?) dentata, spinis pri- mariis fortibus paullum divaricatis, terminalibus minutis 6, externis 2 (vel 3), axi convexo. The foregoing description of this species, but no figure, is given in the Decade above referred to. Locality.—It is a common fossil in the fine yellow Caradoc (or , Bala) sandstone of Gretton, Shropshire ; a locality rich in trilobites and shells. (OF erase eto > VOL. XIII.—PART I. Q 212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL socieTy. {[Jan. 2], JANUARY 2], 1857. C. Greaves, Esq., C.E., G. A. Ibbetson, Esq., M.R.C.S., and C. F. A. Courtney, Esq., M.R.C.S., were elected Fellows; and M. E. Lartet was elected a Foreign Member. The following communications were read :— 1. On some FosstLireRous IRONSTONE occurring on the Nortu Downs. By Joseru Prestwicu, Ksq., F.R.S., F.G.S. (The publication of this paper is postponed.) [ Abstract. j BesipEs a drift of red loam with flints, and the few local outliers of lower tertiary sands and pebble-beds, there are scattered on the sum- mit of the North Downs from Folkestone to Dorking a few masses of sand, gravel, and ironstone, which present a certain regularity of structure and uniformity among themselves, and are clearly different from and of a later age than the outliers of eocene tertiaries on the same hills. Mr. Prestwich had long been acquainted with these ferruginous sands near Vigo Hill, where they are about 20 feet thick ; and at Paddlesworth and other places near Folkestone, where they are even better developed; but though the ironstone fragments de- rived from these beds are frequently found dispersed about the Downs, it was long before he met with any fossils in these beds, with the exception of a piece of fossil wood pierced by Teredo, and an obscure cast of a bivalve shell, near Paddlesworth. In December 1854, however, some blocks of gritty ferruginous sandstone, full of casts of shells, were communicated to the author by Messrs. W. Harris and Rupert Jones, who had met with the speci- mens in some sandpipes in the Chalk at Lenham, eight miles east of Maidstone, and regarded them as belonging to the Basement Bed of the London Clay. This fossiliferous ironsand on close examination yielded casts of bivalve and univalve shells belonging to nearly thirty genera, besides indications of Lunulites, Diadema, &c. The pre- sence of a Terebratula very like T. grandis, with several species of Astarte, and afterwards his finding a large Lutraria-like shell, led Mr. Prestwich to conclude that these sandy beds belonged to the Lower Crag. Mr. Searles Wood, to whom the fossils have been submitted, states that, as far as the evidence goes, he thinks they may be referred to the Upper Tertiaries, and in all probability to the Lower Crag period ; the occurrence of a Pyrula and an Emarginula more especially strengthening this view. Mr. Prestwich assigns without any doubt this shelly ironstone to the ferruginous sands above referred to, and points to the peculiar concentric arrangement of the contents of the sandpipes of .the locality in question as definitely indicating (in accordance with the observations he formerly published in the Society’s Journal*) the * Vol. xi. p. 64. 1857.) KIRKBY—PERMIAN FOSSILS. 213 former existence of horizontal strata of—1. (lowermost) loam with flints,—2. greenish sands with ironstone nodules,—3. yellow and reddish sands,—superposed on the bare chalk, after the eocene beds were for the most part denuded, and before the sandpipes were formed, into which these overlying beds were here and there let down and thereby preserved when further denuding agencies removed the later tertiary beds. Regarding then the outliers of ferruginous sands and sandstones above referred to as of the age of the Lower Crag, Mr. Prestwich pointed out the relative position of beds of similar structure on the Downs between Calais and Boulogne, and on the top of Cassel Hill near Dunkirk ; and of others at Louvain, and at Diest in Belgium, mentioned by M. Dumont and Sir C. Lyell. This extensive range of Crag-beds to the south of the typical Suffolk area, and their con- siderable elevation above the sea, are of course matters of great in- terest, not only as pointing out the relative age of some of the drifts, but especially as giving us a still nearer date to limit the denudation of the Weald, and indicating marginal sea-beds now stretching far inland and ranging once probably over the Wealden area,—possibly connected too with the Carentan beds of Normandy. With regard to the denudation of the Weald, Mr. Prestwich sug- gests that, the anticlinal axis of the Weald having been somewhat raised during the cretaceous period, and the lower tertiaries partly constructed from its débris and gradually distributed over its area, it was again denuded to a further extent in the later tertiary period, some island or islands of the lower cretaceous rocks remaining in its area from which for the most part these sandy ferruginous Crag-beds were derived. The great or final elevation and denudation of the Wealden area was necessarily subsequent to the deposition of these pliocene beds, for their outliers, resting on an old flint-drift, occur on the very edge of the upraised chalk-escarpments of the Weald. This elevation being also subsequent in time to the first or Lower Crag period, Mr. Prestwich suggests, that we have here evidence of the physical cause of the distinction of the two Crag periods. The first Crag sea was open to the south, and of considerable extent ; but the last Wealden elevation, cutting off the southern portion, so altered the hydrographical conditions of the period, that a sea open only to the north remained, in which the Red or Upper Crag, with its par- tially boreal fauna, was then deposited. 2. On some PerMiAN Fossiis from DuRHAM. By J. W. Kirxsy, Esq. [Communicated by T. Davidson, Esq., F.G.S.] [Pxuate VII.] Tus communication comprises a notice of the occurrence of a malacostracous Crustacean and of a new species of Chiton in the Q2 214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. ([Jan. 21, Magnesian Limestone of Durham, together with remarks on some other Permian fossils. 1. PrRosoroniscus PROBLEMATICUS, Schlotheim, sp. -Pl. VII. figs. 1-7. Trilobites problematicus, Schlotheim, Petrefact. 1820, p. 41. Paleocrangon problematica, Schauroth, Zeitschr. deut. geol. Ge- sell. 1854, vol. vi. p. 560. pl. 22. figs. 2 a-e. In the summer of 1853 I found two imperfect specimens of one of the higher (malacostracan) Crustaceans in the limestone at Hum- bleton Quarry. At the time I thought that the species belonged to the Macrura; but I now find this was an error. A short notice of this interesting discovery appeared in the Address of the President of the Tyneside Naturalists’ Field Club, March 15, 1854 *. At that time I believed that none but the lower forms of Crusta- ceans had been previously found in the Permian rocks. I have since learned, however, that in Schlotheim’s ‘ Petrefactenkunde,’ 1820, p- 41, mention is made of the discovery (in the Zechstein-dolomite of Gliicksbrunn) of a peculiar fossil, named by Schlotheim Trilobites problematicus, which is probably the same species as mine. In 1854 Baron Schauroth+ authenticated Schlotheim’s discovery, and figured and described a specimen of this species as belonging to one of the higher groups of Crustacea, naming it Paleocrangon problematica. On comparing my specimens with the figures given bySchauroth, I have a little hesitation in regarding them as belonging to the same species ; but as “ Paleeocrangon”’ does not express the affinities of the fossil animal, I propose, as a more correct generic term, the name Prosoponiscus }, as suggested by a paleontological friend. Though my original specimens are in no respect inferior to those of Schauroth’s, I did not venture to name and describe them when they were first noticed, but postponed doing so in the expectation of procuring more examples, and obtaining a more definite knowledge of the affinities of the species. It was not, however, until the sum- mer of the present year that any further traces of it were found, when one or two other fragments from a different locality were met with. In all, six specimens have been obtained: two from Humble- ton Quarry, three from Field House, Ryhope, and one from 'Tun- stall Hall. Drawings of the most perfect of these have been submitted to Mr. C. S. Bates, and I am indebted to that gentleman for the following interesting remarks :— “There is but one Order among recent Crustacea with which figs. 1 and 2 can be identified, and that is the Isopoda. But the relation of the fossil to the recent species is peculiar. In all recent forms (as far as I know) where the eyes project upon the surface of * Transactions of the Tyneside Nat. Field Club, vol. ii. p. 333. + Zeitschrift der deutsch. geolog. Gesell. vol. vi. p. 560. pl. 22. fig. 2. ~ From zpocwzroy, a face or mask, and dvickos, oniscus. 1857. ] KIRKBY—PERMIAN FOSSILS. 215 the integument the cephalic region is small, being less than the next succeeding segment; but this fact, which is very constant in the adult animals, is not permanent in the larval condition of the same; the head or cephalic segment being more important in rela- tion to the succeeding rings. But from all the larval or adult forms of prominent-eyed Isopods this fossil specimen differs in the anterior position of the eye. This may be a specific distinction only. «The fact that this Isopod, found in so early a geological period, assumes rather the larval than the adult form of the recent type, is consonant with all we know of the relation which animals generally of so early a date hold to existing species.”’ We must therefore, it appears, look upon our fossil Crustacean as belonging to the family Isopoda, though somewhat of an ab- normal character in reference to the recent forms. Baron Schauroth’s specimen from the Zechstein-dolomite of Péss- neck appears to consist of four body-rmgs and the two posterior segments *. I have been fortunate, however, in procuring one speci- men showing the cephalic segment or carapace, with two body-seg- ments attached (Pl. VII. figs. 1, 2, 3). The carapace is about as long as four of the succeeding body- rings, somewhat less in depth, and slightly compressed laterally ; it is carinated along the back and wedge-shaped in front ; the eyes are large, round, and prominent, and are placed far forward ; from the lower part of each eye runs an indented line, at a short distance from the margin, up to the dorsal region, where it curves forward. The other five specimens consist of body-rings (2 to 6 in number) and the two great posterior or caudal segments}; and are very similar to the figures given by Schauroth. In one of the Durham specimens (fig. 7) there are six body-rings, and two posterior seg- ments; the others (figs. 4, 5, 6) have likewise the two latter seg- ments, but not so many of the former. The body-segments are narrow, almost uniform in size, but varying a little in depth, the central ones appearing to be the most produced; they overlap each other and the penultimate segment posteriorly; they are slightly compressed, and have traces of a median dorsal ridge ; those in front have their extremities turned a little forward, while the posterior ones are bent in the contrary direction. The large penultimate seg- ment is greatly developed laterally ; it is strongly carinated dorsally ; its ventral margins are slightly convex, as is also the posterior border, which has a deep notch not far from the dorsal ridge ; the ridge or keel of this segment is very prominent except anteriorly, where at each side of the dorsal line is a transverse swelling; it is com- pressed also posteriorly. The next segment, which is the hinder- most known, is more compressed than the preceding one, and con- siderably smaller. None of the English specimens show the true external surface, nor have any traces of feet or of antenne been found. * The latter are regarded as the cephalic and thoracic segments by this author. t It is probable that we have all the hinder segments in these specimens ; but there may possibly be a small terminal one besides. 216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SociETYy. ([Jan. 21, The specimen with the carapace (figs. 1-3) is one-eighth of an inch long. The largest of those with the body-segments only (fig. 4) is nearly half an inch in length. 2. Cuemnitzia Roess_ert, Geinitz, sp. Pl. VII. fig. 8. Loxonema Roessleri, Geinitz, Jahresbericht Wetterauisch. Gesell. 1850-51; Schauroth, Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesell. 1854, vol. vi. p- 538. pl. 21. fig. 9. In 1853 I obtained a very fine specimen of a ribbed Chem- nitzta at Humbleton Quarry, which agrees very well with the Lozo- nema Roessleri, Geinitz, as figured by Baron Schauroth in the ‘ Zeitschrift d. deutsch. geol. Ges.’ 1854, vol. vi. p. 538. pl. 21. fig. 9. A notice of the occurrence of this interesting fossil was given, to- gether with that of the above-described Crustacean, in the Transac- tions of the Tyneside Naturalists’ Field Club, vol. 1. p. 333. The first account of a ribbed Chemnitzia from the Permian rocks is found in Mr. Howse’s ‘ Catalogue of Permian Fossils *.’ This is probably the same as the one now before us; and is undoubtedly distinct from Loronema Swedenborgiana, King (Monograph Perm. Foss. p. 210), though Baron Schauroth is disposed to consider the two identical. The size, however, is sufficient to distinguish them. I have given a figure of this specimen (fig. 8), as Schauroth’s figure is from a very imperfect individual. My specimen is perfect with the exception of two or three of the apical whorls; the six whorls that remain give a very good idea of the species. This shell is long and slender, tapering gently to an apparently very fine point ; the whorls (which, when entire, probably numbered eight or nine) are somewhat convex, rather tumid behind, with the suture deep ; they are covered with thick, close-set, transverse ribs, giving to the shell a fluted appearance ; the large whorls have about eighteen ribs each, and are finely striated on the under surface. The pillar-lip, as far as can be observed, is straight, but the greater portion of the aperture is hidden in the matrix. There is little doubt that this is a true Chemnitzia: the form of the shell, the character of the whorls with their ribs, the deep suture, and straight columella, pronounce it to belong to this genus. The whole habit of the shell, too, is very similar to that of Chemnitzia. 3. Curton Howstanus, sp. nov. Pl. VII. figs. 9-13. Three plates of a Chiton have occurred at Tunstall Hill, which, on a careful examination, appear to be distinct from Chiton Loftusianus, King (Monog. Perm. Foss. p. 202. pl. 16. figs. 9-14), of which I have a full series. Of the new species two of the plates are intermediate (figs. 10, 11, 12), and one anterior (fig. 15). The former plates are not much compressed ; they are wide and obtusely angulated, not much pointed * Transact. Tyneside Nat. Field Club, vol. i. p. 241. 1857. KIRKBY—PERMIAN FOSSILS. 217 posteriorly, and they have a surface finely granulated; the lateral areas, which are rather wide, are not strongly marked, and the lines of growth are indistinct ; one or two wide grooved lines, commencing at the posterior margin, run parallel to the lower margin, and are continued faintly to the anterior dorsal region. The anterior plate (fig. 13) is marked in a similar manner. The processes for insertion are more prominent, narrower, and not so regularly arched as the apophyses of C. Loftusianus (fig. 9). C. Howseanus may be readily distinguished from the last-named species, which is the only other Chiton found in the Permian rocks, by the flatness and greater width of the plates, by the obscurity of the lateral areas, and smoothness (want of strong lines of growth) of the plates. The one or two grooved lines which follow the margin are also characteristic. I have great pleasure in dedicating this species to Mr. R. Howse, the author of an excellent ‘ Catalogue of the Fossils of the Permian System of the counties of Northumberland and Durham,’ and ‘ Notes on the Permian System of Durham,’ &c. 4. Lima PerMIANA. Lima Permiana, King, Monogr. Perm. Foss. p. 154. pl. 13. fig. 4. It may be interesting to mention that this species, which Professor King founded upon the knowledge of a single valve from Humbleton Quarry, is not of rare occurrence at Tunstall Hill, and at Field House, Ryhope; from which localities I have obtained a very fine series of specimens, completely illustrating and establishing the species*. This species, in common with all Lime, is characterized by a hinge-area, by its being devoid of a notch under the front ear of the right valve, and by the obliquity of its valves ; also by its hinge-area being narrow, its ears small, and its valves smooth, which latter slope gradually and shut close. 5. Hrerornoa VoreTiana, King, sp. Pl. VII. figs. 14, 15. Aulopora Voigtiana, King, Monog. Perm. Foss. p. 31. pl. 3. fig. 13. Prof. King, in his ‘ Monograph of Permian Fossils,’ gives a short account of this fossil under the generic appellation of Aulopora. His description and figures were from casts, no testiferous specimens having been procured at that period, and were necessarily incomplete. As I have been so fortunate as to find a perfect example of this fossil, I have deemed it desirable to give a new figure, and to describe the species afresh. The cells are oval, widest in front, produced or slender behind ; they are placed rather near to each other, the connecting threads being short and thicker than usual; the aperture, which is situated at the distal extremity of the cell, is rather large, circular, and pro- tected by a smooth raised lip. * In the paper already referred to, Baron Schauroth describes and figures a variety (subradiata) of this species. 218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Jan. 21. My specimen is not much branched; and the branches always arise from the anterior portion of the cell at an obtuse angle. This fossil is undoubtedly a Bryozoon; and, as the genus Aulo- pora is stated by MM. Edwards and J. Haime to be only the young stoloniferous base of a Syringopora, I have, after an attentive ex- amination of its affinities to existing genera, placed it in the species Hippothoa, to which it bears a strong resemblance and an evidently close relation. The specimen figured is from Tunstall Hill, and is attached to the external surface of a Terebratula elongata. EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII. Figs. 1,2. Prosoponiscus problematicus, Schloth. sp. ee. views of anterior portion. From Hum- Magnified ten times. bleton Hill. Fig. 3. The same. Dorsal view. Figs. 4,5. The same. Lateral views of posterior portion. From Humbleton Quarry. Magnified six times. Fig. 6. The same. Lateral viéw of posterior portion. | From Field House, Ryhope. Fig. 7. The same. Dorsal view of posterior portion. Magnified seven times. Fig. 8. Chemnitzia Roessleri, Geinitz, sp. From Humbleton Hill. Magnified four times. Fig. 9. Chiton Loftusianus, King. Lateral view of an inter- } mediate plate; enlarged. (For comparison with fig. 10.) Fig. 10. Chiton Howseanus, Kirkby. Lateral view of an inter- mediate plate. (Enlarged.) ; Figs. 11,12. The same. Intermediate plate. (Enlarged.) r SE SS Fig. 13. The same. Anterior plate. (Enlarged.) Fig. 14. Hippothoa Voigtiana, King, sp. | Magnified sixteen Fig. 15. The same. Side-view. times. Quart. Journ. Geal.Soc. Vol. XII.P1. Vil G.West lth . del. from Durham. PERMIAN FOSSILS am 7 fr Hal tl 2 oe wee 20) , oaks. Te cea [ ‘ i” Awe o > git fa G renee *¢ U | « a ue Ps = x j ‘ . « ay ae - - vse = / . y aie z 7 \ ‘ (7: : A S/ G ; “f re I : ' j a? = ‘ xe 1 i Le y ‘ * ? ‘ yi a4 my , ia’ F , rT »'¢ vd PA ‘ uy i | ni , aM a ! ’ ¥ ¥ : EP eR Pt Pail S on A , / ' at ’ - 232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Feb. 4, mountain, perhaps on the col, or summit of a pass through a chain of mountains, we see a circular pit of 3, 6, 10, or more feet in depth, and 3, 6, or even 8 feet in diameter, with sides and bottom worn quite as smooth as the parts of the surface near by ;’’—and the author imputes their origin to the action of ice. At Wick we have a *‘Giant’s Pot”’ very like those of Sweden; and, as I was very sure it did not owe its origin to ice, I communicated to Mr. Chambers my views on the subject so far back as June 23, 1853, as follows :— “In my rambles along our sea-margin, between high- and low-water mark, I observed long ago that stones, when resting on a pivot, or on two points, were kept in constant motion when under the action of the sea, and the effect of this motion was a corresponding hollow on the rock on which they were oscillating and rotating. All here with whom I have talked on the subject are conversant with the fact, and have never had a doubt on the subject. «To-day I was shown a hole in a rock thus formed, about 5 feet in diameter at the mouth, and 4 feet deep, very smooth, and as circular as if formed by the turner. This pot is on a platform of very hard clay-slate, having on the north a projecting shelf about 10 feet above it; and on the south the rock is 6 or 8 feet higher than the margin of the pot; and there is a narrow entrance sea-ward. ‘There were no stones in the pot when I saw it; but between it and the land there are several that must have been in the pot, for their form and that of the pot corresponded. The interior of the pot is incrusted with balani, limpets, and algee; but sometimes it is perfectly free from such. “T half filled the pot with stones of all sizes, from an ounce in weight to that of twenty-eight pounds weight or more, and from the force with which the sea dashed on the overhanging cliff, and then into the pot, the stones must have been kept in perpetual motion, just as sand in a tumbler of water is agitated when an addi- tional quantity of water is poured into the tumbler. The sea was so boisterous when I was there, that I could not ascertain the effect of the stones on the pot or on themselves; but I have no doubt, when I examine it with a calm sea the molluscs and algze will be found to have been rubbed off, and the stones rounded, if not knocked out of the pot. The Giant’s pots or tubs, described at page 37 of the paper, on ‘Glacial Phenomena,” appear exactly to correspond with this pot; and I have no doubt that they were formed by the same agents, and are additional evidence that the sea has receded or that the Swedish coast has risen.”’ The Dartmoor “ Rock-Basins,” the “‘ Kettle and Pans” at St. Mary’s, Scilly, the “‘Giant’s Pots”’.of Sweden, and our rock-pots in Caithness have, to my view, the same origin; the process being that I have described, or a modification of it. I may mention that I frequently visited the pot above alluded to during the summer of 1853, and found that the molluscs and alge were rubbed off its sides ; the stones which I had put in were chafed and rounded; but during the winter that followed, they were all knocked out of the pot. Had I been able to put a large enough 1857. | RUBIDGE—NAMAQUALAND. 233 stone in it, it appears to me that it would have remained until it had further widened and deepened the pot; and in the process worn it- self small, and been in its turn ejected. Such a process repeated, even at long intervals, in geological periods, is sufficient to account for the formation of “‘ Rock-Basins,”’ “‘ Kettle and Pans,”’ ‘‘ Giant’s Pots,” and similar phenomena. The sea round our shores is now receding just as in Sweden, by slow degrees, and has done so, at the same rate, in long past ages. Although Dartmoor be now far from the sea, and the Rock-Basins 1417 feet above the sea-level, yet this surely is nothing against my view of their origin, but tends only to give us an inkling of what is meant by the “long periods”’ of geology. The contents of the Rock-Basin, lately discovered on Dartmoor, are such as my views of their origin would have led me to expect, and therefore I conclude it had never been disturbed since it was filled. [Nore.—For notices of Rock-basins, &c., see Geol. Proceed. vol. iii. p. 704; Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. x. p. 240; Neues Jahrb. 1854, p. 148; Gibbon’s Exploration of the Amazon, pp. 283, 291; Mactaggart’s Canada, vol. i. p. 77.— Epir. } 2. On the CoppER-MINES of NAMAQUALAND. By Dr. RB. N. RusipGe. [Ina Letter to Sir R. I. Murchison, F.G.S.] [Ar the instance of a Mining Company, in 1854, Dr. Rubidge went to Namaqualand to report upon its metal-producing capabilities. He found that the conditions under which the metalliferous rocks occurred there differed from any which he had previously known or read of, and that they did not take the character of “lodes,”’ as usually understood. On the contrary, he found that all the ‘ runs of ore” in the southern portion of the district visited had the fol- lowing characters in common, as described in his letter. | Characters of the “runs” and of the metalliferous axes.—1st. The *‘runs of ore’? presented externally a brown, iron-stained surface, continuous to a greater or less distance; the rock being different from the gneiss on either side of the “run,” and has on the under surface stains of silicate of copper (green); small masses of red oxide also were often found on the surface. 2ndly. On closer examination, I found that the dip of the rocks changed in the centre of the “‘run”’ to the opposite direction, and then resumed the same direction as the former. Thus at Springbok Fontein the main dip of the country is south. It is changed to a northerly dip on the “run,” and the south dip is restored on the northern side, and continues for half a mile, where it changes with- out the occurrence of metalliferous deposits. This northern dip con- tinues for perhaps twelve miles, and at Windhoek gives place to a southerly dip, of about equal extent, which reaches to within about four miles of Steinkopf, the Missionary Station; these main changes s2 234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. ([Feb. 4, not being marked by any metallic appearance. Indeed, the only peculiarity I have observed in any of them is the presence of rose- quartz in considerable quantities near Steinkopf. The dip is not, however, continuously north or south in these tracts of country; numerous axes, often coinciding with the strike of the country, or nearly so, but occasionally at angles to it, interrupt the main dip for from 5 to 50 or even 100 paces, and in these axes the metalliferous deposits oceur. Springbok and Copperberg are in southerly dip, the latter with a N.W. axis, 6 yards broad, meeting it; Concordia, Kelduner, No. 6 Hooklip, Rietberg, and many others in northern dip ; Windhoek and many others in southern dip ; and most of these axes concur with the strike of the country. Een Riet and Spectakel are N.W. axes, cutting the main strike; the former at a small angle, the latter at a considerable one. Nabobeeb has a structure which I suspect to be more common than I have had opportunities of observing. The main dip of the country is northerly, and a metalliferous axis occurs which appears to divide into three as it runs up the hill; but I have not made the whole structure out very clearly, never having had more than an hour or two to examine it. About 400 yards to the south-east of this division (a consider- able metallic deposit occurs close to the division, which has been worked, and has produced a ton or so of good oxide of copper), a good-sized hill occurs,*which presents extensive brown and green stains ‘“indication.”? The hill is perhaps 600 feet above the level of the spot just mentioned, and may be 300 yards across. Standing on its northern point, near the summit, I found myself on the junction of two axes, the one taking a direction about 60° east of north, the other about 30° west of north, and therefore coinciding with the present magnetic meridian, and also nearly cutting the spot where the threefold division already mentioned occurs. The place has not been worked yet; we can therefore say nothing as to its productive- ness. I have said that I believe this meeting of two axes to be more common than I have the means of marking decidedly. I have found it at Copperberg, at No. 12 at Concordia, and, I believe, at Springbok Fontein; but the surface-rock has here undergone so much change, that it is difficult to make out the exact structure. Previous to writing the above, I had been led to believe that the ‘“‘run’’ on which the mine of the Enterprise Company (about twelve miles nearly east of Springbok) was situated was a continuation of the Springbok “run ;” but since then I find by examination that the main dip of the country was there northward, and the changed one south. So that, if this be really the continuation of the Springbok “axis of disturbance,”’ it must cross the main axis of change, and cannot be, as I have hitherto regarded it, coincident with the strike of the rocks. The distance is nearly ten miles on the line of strike. Springbok Mine lies about half a mile south of the axis of change, and the Enterprise half a mile north of it. In- deed I begin to doubt whether any of these axes really quite coimcide with the strike of the country; but, if they do not, the angle they make is so small as only to be measured by a theodolite. 1857. RUBIDGE—NAMAQUALAND. 235 Rock-structure of the district.—In this part of the country the rocks are chiefly gneiss, with here and there small patches of mica- schist. Some granite occurs; but not, as far as I am able to judge, in the form of dykes; indeed its relation to the gneiss is obscure. Hornblende and actinolite in many varieties occur about the mines, and steatite abounds in some parts. The hypogene rocks are over- laid by clays, shales, and a mass of sandstone, which appears to be continuous with that which caps Table Mountain. The granite and gneiss.—I cannot perceive that the gneiss under- goes any change in the vicinity of the mines. Specimens 92 and 93 of the collection * sent to illustrate these observations will, I believe, be found to differ from 95 only in having undergone decomposi- tion, which latter is a fair sample of the rock of the country; and these two were taken from within a few yards of each other on either side of the axis of Concordia Mine (Hesther Maria). The centres of the axes are very frequently composed of granite, but this is not always the case; and I do not know that I have seen any mine where granite is not to be found in the works, though the gneiss may meet in well-defined character and with opposite dip over it. In this country I have stood on granite, with gneiss forming the sides of a ravine on either hand, with continuous dip. I have also seen hornblende-schist (felspar and hornblende) passing insensibly, as it were, into syenite and greenstone of perfectly well- marked characters, near Pella. The ravine just noticed is between Pella Missionary Station and a detached station called Klein Pella. Metalliferous “ runs’ and axes.—The surface of the metalliferous “runs,” whether formed in the centre of granite or not, is much fissured in the direction of the magnetic meridian—nearly, as well as in others ; and these fissures, together with the lamination-planes of the gneiss (indicating dip and strike), give the only appearance of regularity to the deposits of ore which they present. The surface, thus cross-fissured, is softened to a considerable degree, and generally presents a dark-brown, iron-stained aspect, which is often visible at a distance of a mile or two. The rocks, in fact, over these axes have undergone great decomposition, and some of their surfaces often present a bright-green stain of silicate of copper. Lumps of oxide, of a rounded form, are often found on the surface; probably half a ton has been picked up on the hill on the declivity of which the works of this mine (Springbok) are carried on. Some fine specimens of the same ore, of a still more compact nature, and containing as much as 60 per cent. of copper, are found in the fissures or on the surface. When these are followed downwards, they often widen at first into good-sized veins, which give promise of a rich return of ore; but when a depth varying from 4 or 5 to 25 feet is reached, they are generally found to contract, and sometimes they terminate abruptly. _In either case, they are rarely traced beyond that depth, though occasionally the dip of the rock carries them somewhat further. At a greater depth, purple sulphurets are found ; and these * In the Society’s Museum.—Epir. 236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Feb. 4, give way to pyrites, which are contained either in fissures between masses of slightly decomposed felspathic granite (see specimen No. 78), or diffused in grains in the substance of the granite (specimens 83 to 85). In fact, the formation of all these ores seems to be the result of a process of infiltration, by which the original constituents of the rock are gradually removed, and their place occupied by silicates, oxides, or purple and yellow sulphurets, as the case may be; the silicates and oxides generally occurring on the surface, the sulphurets below*. Masses of oxide of iron in a state to be acted on by the magnet are often found on the surface of these metallic axes. Sulphuret of molybdenum is found accumulated with copper-pyrites at Concordia and at Kildunern ; and tungstate of lime, in a lump of about a pound weight, was found enclosed in a mass of red oxide of copper, in Springbok Mine. Manganese, too, has been found in various parts of the country. And near Gams I found green oxide of chrome accumulated in small quantities between the layers of gneiss in an ‘axis of disturbance’’y. In some few cases the ‘‘axes of disturbance”’ are traceable for but a very short distance. At Nababeeb, for instance, one of the axes is seen on one wall of a ravine, but I could find no trace of it on the opposite side; the gneiss, however, there assumes so granite-like an appearance, that the dip and strike are scarcely distinguishable ; and this is often the case in this country. Indeed I find it a matter of great practical difficulty often, to say whether a rock is granite or gneiss ; therefore I call these rocks “ gneiss-like granite’’ or “ granite- like gneiss,”” according to their appearance. Hypothesis of origin of the metallifercus condition of the rocks.— As to the nature of the process by which the deposition of metal in these axes has taken place, I must leave the solution of the question to abler and more experienced heads than mine. I can only offer * The formation of a vein of the sulphuret may be illustrated by specimen No. 80; the gradual infiltration of small masses of the same material, by speci- mens 79, 82-85, and the completion of the process by the removal of the granite entirely, and its displacement by pyrites. (See specimens 86 and 81.) -Other specimens will illustrate the same process with the oxides and silicates, where the felspar will in some be seen just tinged with the contact of the mineral, but only slightly, if at all decomposed. Next, the felspar has lost its hardness, but still retains its crystalline form. Again, the constituents of the original rock have almost disappeared, but the change is known by the felspathic portion now decomposed into clay, coloured by oxide or silicate, adheriug to the tongue. Nos. 51, 57, and 88-91 will, I think, show these changes. + Perhaps I ought to apologize for the use of this expression; but I apply it to those axes which do not permanently change the dip of the gneiss, in contra- distinction to the three I have mentioned above, on either side of which the dip continues nearly the same for miles. These last I would call “axes of change.” Some of the former kind of axes present very little metallic appearance in parts of their course, but, I think, are traced for a great distance (which they often may be, from the two sides formed by the almost vertical rock being infiltrated by quartz, which renders them conspicuous). Most of them will be found to contain iron, copper, or chrome in some parts. A mine was worked in one place in a green stain of chrome which was mistaken for copper. 1857. | RUBIDGE—NAMAQUALAND. 237 such facts and suggestions as an extensive Journey among these de- posits, and those of a different class (in the northern district) which I shall presently describe, has presented to me,—premising that in this part of the country, as far as my observation goes, it is only in the axes of disturbance that deposits of metal have taken place. A spot of granite, about the size of my hand, surrounded by silicate of copper in quartz, on the road to Kok Fontein, is the only exception I am acquainted with; and even here the change of country may be said to have commenced, though one metallic axis at least does occur beyond it. That the deposit of metals is in some way connected with the passage of water through the rocks is shown by several facts. Ist. At Van-der-Stell Mine, which is a shaft sunk by a Governor of the Cape (of that name) in 1680, a deposit of dendriform silica coloured with silicate of copper lines the inner wall of the shaft (see specimen 97). 2ndly. My friend Dr. Atherstone found the jaw of a Dasje (Hyrax Capensis) stained green with silicate of copper; and at Spectakel Mine a frog was found, in a dried state, coloured by the same mineral. The waters of this country are generally brack, containing chloride of sodium in considerable quantities (all the felspar is soda-felspar). Then the decomposition of the felspar, its colouring by oxides and silicates, and its conversion into clay, are, I think, evidently the results of water-action. As to the question, which of the mimeral constituents of the rocks first gives way, I hope the specimens here- with sent for illustration will put geologists at home in as good a position for judgment as myself. The water seems to me sometimes to penetrate between the layers of mica, conveying with it the copper; and, from the position so taken up, to have attacked the felspar in some cases; but in others the felspar seems to have undergone con- siderable change while the mica is tact. Again, the quartz appears to be the first to suffer in some instances, and to be the last in others. Relative elevation of mines.—The different degrees of elevation of the several deposits of ore do not appear to me to exert any marked influence on them. At Springbok the mine is about 3000 feet above the sea, and, perhaps, 600 above the adjacent plain; at Concordia the elevation is about the same, but the “run’’ is on a plain, and in a hill of slight elevation. At Henkries it is on a plain, and these are all productive places. At Rietberg the runis near the summit of a mountain 4500 feet high ; at Spectakel the elevation is, I think, 800 feet above the sea- level, at the foot of a high hill. Other agencies besides water.—What effect terrestrial thermo- electricity and its consequent magnetic phenomena may have on these deposits, I know not. These metalliferous rocks generally run nearly in an east and west direction, that is with the strike of the country ; but Spectakel is, I believe, a N.W. “run,” though there is some obscurity about it. I should not wonder if it turns out, like Nababeeb, to be a meeting of two axes. I found the walls of two of the cuttings on the Concordia property affect 238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Feb. 4, the magnetic needle. At the spot where the experiments were tried, the rock was granite or gneiss, with very little appearance of iron ; but still a detached piece of it at one spot affected the needle. I will further examine this point *. The yield of the mines.—As to the prognosis of these mines, I cannot at present regard it as favourable. ‘This mine (Springbok) continues, at the greatest depth yet worked, to yield abundant nests and small veins of good oxide and sulphurets; but the depth does not exceed 40 feet at the most. At Concordia the proportion of stone to the pyrites is very great at the same depth; and the rock seems likely to be a hard non- metallic felspathic granite at a few fathoms deeper. At Schaap River Mine, about four miles E. of Spectakel, a level, driven through the base of the hill at right angles to the course of the ore, cuts through hard and unstaimed granite-rock. Indeed, from the evident connexion of these deposits with the action of water, and the slight depth to which the hardness of the rock enables us to penetrate, I think it would be unreasonable to look for rich deposits at any great depth. Northern district.—Very different from those which I have de- scribed are the deposits of ore in the vicinity of Henkries, and thence ascending the Orange River to Pella. The rocks of this part of the country are principally mica-schist, hornblendic schist, and chloritic and felspathic rocks, with occasional large beds of gneiss. ‘These are penetrated by granite-dykes in every direction ; many taking the line of strike, others cutting the strata at all angles. I cannot help thinking that the close study of the rocks of this country will greatly modify the opinions of geologists as to the relation between granite and ‘gneiss and other metamorphic rocks. I have seen a granite-vein of a serpentine form, not 14 inch wide, and less than 2 feet in length; the gneiss through which it passed was not at all disturbed. Again, I have seen in gneiss apparently isolated masses of granite, from the size of one’s hand to that of a mass of many tons weight. Many such things as these seem to me to throw doubt on the question, whether granite always pene- trated the strata from below. Occurrence of ore in the northern district.—I1 have said that the Orange River country is composed of hornblendic, micaceous, and other rocks, and is penetrated by granitic dykes and masses. Oxides, sulphurets, silicates, and carbonates of copper occur in small masses, disseminated through the crystalline veins ; and sometimes in the rocks or their margins. The veins which contain the most * Since I finished this letter, I have made experiments on the magnetic phe- nomena of Springbok Mine, and I have satisfied myself that there was a consi- derable effect exerted on the needle. Indeed it was nearly deflected to an angle of 90° from its proper direction in a recent cutting in the drift-work of the upper part of the mine. Mr. Green assisted me in these experiments, which I endea- voured to free as much as possible from all source of error by trying parts of the wall, detached, on the needle. It was not affected by either the rock or the ores of the wall. 1857. ] RUBIDGE—NAMAQUALAND. 239 ore are generally, I think, those which are interposed between layers of felspathic rock, with more or less of hornblende, and its varieties. They are composed chiefly of quartz, but felspar and mica may generally be found. The copper appears to be chiefly superficial, as the removal of a few feet of the rock usually suffices to get md of all stain. These masses of crystalline rock are often spindle- shaped, interposed between the strata; capable of being entirely removed by digging a few feet deep, yet often bending the strata on either side. In veins thus formed, and in masses of quartz, I have found, besides the infinite varieties of hornblende and actinolite, the following minerals: schorl, octohedral iron-ore, garnets, a white mineral very soft, but fusing with bubbling, resembling tremolite, but harder, and phosphate of lime in hexagonal prisms, 4 inches long : the last I thought an interesting discovery ; I believe that some cry- stals of much smaller size have been found at Bonte Koe. The overlying quartzite and other beds.— Resting on these meta- morphic rocks are a series of beds, the lowest of which are of a hard quartzose nature ; indeed the silica infiltrating the gneiss, and supplying the place of the felspar and mica removed, often gives the beds the appearance of quartzite, conformable with the meta- morphic rocks. I was convinced that this was the case at Springbok ; but, when I saw the whole side of a mountain, as T’ Quaib, formed of this quartzite-rock, I hesitated in assigning to it this origin. Subse- quent observation, however, has quite convinced me that I was right. The upper beds are much softer; some of them are composed of clay, and contain fossil vegetable impressions. A more hard and compact sandstone presents a well-defined ripple-mark. These beds are generally horizontally disposed, and appear to have undergone but little change since their deposition; though some, which rest against the hills near Byzonder Meed, seem, however, to take an inclination from the position in which they were deposited. But I hope to make a collection of fossils from these, and to write another letter about them. [Norre.—Observations of the Copper-districts of Namaqualand will be found in the ‘ Reports of the Surveyor-General, Charles D. Bell, Esq., on the Copper- fields of Little Namaqualand, &c.,’ Cape Town, 1855. M. Delesse’s ‘ Notice sur les Mines de Cuivre du Cap de Bonne-Espérance,’ Annales des Mines, 1855, vol. viii. p- 186; the ‘ Provisional Report upon the Nature and General Character of the Copper Districts of South Namaqualand, by A. Wyley, Esq., Geol.-Surveyor to the Colony of the Cape of Good Hope,’ Cape Town, 1856.—Epir.] Fesrvuary 20, 1857. ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING. [For Reports and Address see the beginning of this volume. ] 240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Feb. 25, Fesruary 25, 1857. John Calvert, Esq., C.E., Rosbrin Castle, Co. Cork, was elected a Fellow. The following communications were read :— 1. Notice of the late KARTHQUAKE at CrETE. By H.S. OnGtey, Esq., H.M. Consul in Crete. [Forwarded from the Foreign Office, by order of Lord Clarendon. | THs notice was communicated in three despatches relating to the occurrence of the earthquake in Crete, in October 1856, which was accompanied with much destruction of property and loss of life at Canea, Retimo, and the neighbouring villages. 2. On some REMARKABLE MINERAL VEINS. By Professor D. T. Anstep, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. In a previous memoir (Quarterly Geological Journal, vol. xii. p. 144), I have described the conditions of the great copper lode of Cobre in the island of Cuba. I have now to offer remarks on three lodes, or rather groups of lodes; one in the central part of the same island (Cuba), and the others situated m the United States of North America. 1. On the San Fernando Copper Lodes, near Cienfuegos in Cuba. The central part of the island of Cuba is not unknown as a mineral district, although up to the present time no great development of any lodes has been recorded. This district may be described, geologically, as consisting of granites and syenites (passing into other crystalline rocks of a porphyritic nature), partly covered with a brecciated and highly calcareous conglomerate. The crystalline rocks form the mountain-chain of Trinidad on the south coast of Cuba, and occupy a valley beyond this range towards the north, where the bed of a river lays bare a fine surface of syenite, crossed by systems of veins of felspar, spotted occasionally with silver-ore *. Beyond this valley towards the north is the range of hills contain- ing the San Fernando lodes. The hills are of moderate elevation (not generally reaching 1000 feet above the sea), somewhat scarped towards the south, and having moderate slopes towards the north. They are composed of a rock not unlike that described in my previous memoir on the Cobre mines, and widely distributed in some form or other throughout Cuba. Here also, as elsewhere, the passage from a true porphyry into a calcareous conglomerate of angular stones, 1s * J observed in one place a striking instance of the intersections and heaving of a vein of felspar, and some cross-veins laid bare on the bed of a river for an area of several acres. I have not seen a more perfect example of its kind in any part of the world. 1857.] ANSTED—MINERAL VEINS. 241 in many places so gradual as to render it almost impossible to draw the line between them. The large per-centage of calcareous matter is very characteristic, and the rock often decomposes into a rich and valuable soil. Still further to the north the conglomerate character is better de- fined ; and at a distance both towards the north and west a compact limestone appears to overlie it. The general range of the rocks and lodes may be stated as approximately east and west with a northerly dip. There are, however, local exceptions. In the mineral field, as at present known, there are two principal groups of lodes, of which the northern has been most examined. Both are in the same kind of rock, and they are parallel to each other, and at no great distance apart. They are very easily recog- nized at the surface by a strong outcrop of quartz and oxide of iron, the latter often colouring the former of a bright vermilion tint. The quartz is often spongy and cellular, but sometimes compact. The width varies, occasionally reaching fifty feet ; and, although obscured by a rich tropical vegetation, there is no difficulty in tracing one of the lodes for upwards of a mile continuously, and at intervals towards the east for a further distance. The total breadth of mineralized ground occupied by the two groups of lodes is about 1200 yards... There are two well-marked lodes in the northern, and three in the southern group, and all appear to be cut off towards the west by a change of ground on the other side of a gorge, along which runs the stream called the Arroyo de la Bermeja. The lodes are all nearly vertical ; but, while the two northernmost dip a little towards the north, the others seem to underlie south. The northern lode is that on which mining operations have been chiefly carried on, and here ten pits were sunk at intervals along a distance of about 800 yards. Most of these pits went down at once at very shallow depths into deposits of rich decomposed ores of copper, through gossan consisting of iron-oxide and quartz, with occasionally a good deal of blende. The ores included blue car- bonates of copper, red and black oxides and purple and yellow sul- phurets*, besides decomposed carbonates, oxides, and sulphurets. Of these ores, not less than ten thousand tons were extracted and ex- ported from Cienfuegos. It may safely be assumed that these could not have averaged less than 15 per cent., and they were probably much richer. The deepest pit was 32 fathoms, but the principal workings are very much shallower than this+. At the time of my visit the lode exposed in the bottom at one point was 35 feet wide, including about 5 feet of “ horse” or barren ground. The hanging-wall was soft and loaded with mundic, which penetrated * The sulphurets seen were for the most part pale-coloured and hard, and looked poor. A sample of this kind, however, yielded on analysis 17-80 per cent. of copper and 7 ounces of silver to the ton of ore. + From a statement made by the late owner of the mine, I learn, that during the year ending Ist July, 1856, and therefore since my visit, about 480 tons of ore, averaging 17 per cent., were shipped for Swansea; and about 300 tons, supposed to be at least equally good, were sold to the United States, the total value being £12,000. During that time the average number of hands is stated to be ten men. 242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Feb. 25, and impoverished the upper side of the lode. Nearer the foot-wall, the ore consisted of rich yellow sulphuret of great purity. The country and horse of ground were of the usual conglomerate, but of very ery- stalline nature. The other lode of the northern group has also been sunk upon, and ore was found under similar conditions. The lodes of the southern group are similar in outcrop, but the operations hitherto carried on are too inconsiderable to justify any conclusions. The San Fernando lodes possess considerable interest in reference to scientific miming. Their dimensions and the nature of their out- crop, the associated minerals, the calcareous nature of the enclosing country, the existence of horses of barren country within the lodes, and the extraordinary richness of the bunches of ore near the surface, are all pheenomena worthy of notice, not only in themselves, but when considered by the side of the great mineral deposit of Cobre in so many respects analogous. ‘The distance from Cobre (as much as 350 miles) does not lessen the interest thus excited, as the relations are much more geological than topographical. As there undoubtedly exist other copper-districts in the island still further west, not hitherto worked, and onlv known by their rich outcrops under somewhat similar circumstances, the island of Cuba, already remarkable for its mineral wealth, may be expected to preserve for some time to come its extraordinary reputation in this respect. The distance of the San Fernando mining-district from the harbour and town of Cienfuegos is about twenty-eight English miles, and a line of railway from the town to Villa Clara crosses the country about fourteen miles to the north. 2. On some Copper Lodes near Sykesville, in Maryland. The eastern flanks of the great mountain-chain of eastern North America, and the comparatively low ground near the mountains to- wards the east, are remarkable as exhibiting in abundance metamor- phic, and even igneous, rocks in belts highly inclined and of the most varied character, while the chief axis of the mountain-chain often con- sists of stratified fossiliferous rocks but little altered. Amongst the metamorphic belts numerous metalliferous veins have been already discovered and partially worked in Pennsylvania, Maryland, Virginia, and North Carolina, and as they possess certain peculiarities in com- mon, an account of the most characteristic of them will not be with- out value. In the winter of 1854 I had occasion to visit some mines not far from the Sykesville station on the Baltimore and Ohio railroad, about twelve miles east of the Blue Ridge, and thirty-two miles west of the city of Baltimore. The country here consists of metamorphosed rocks ranging N.N.E. and 8.8.W., parallel to the mountain-chain, and dipping at a high angle to the E.S.E. The rocks include syenite, a band of limestone, and a mass of steatite, all seen before reaching Sykesville from the west. In the immediate neighbourhood they include decomposing granitic and syenitic gneiss, mica-schist, hard schists alternating with 1857.] ANSTED—MINERAL VEINS. 243 talcose and chloritic bands and steatite, and micaceous slate. In the hard schist with magnesian rocks are occasional bands of hard grit- stone, and here also occur the mineral veins, the outcrop of which is parallel to the stratification, and which not unfrequently project above the general level of the country, owing either to the hardness of the veinstone being greater than that of the enclosing rocks, or to the latter decomposing more readily than the former. The diagram, fig. 1, p. 244, is an eye-sketch of the surface, showing the relative position of the lodes and the various rocks. The veins are nearly vertical; but the one best known (aa) appears to dip slightly to the W. or W.N.W., as indicated in the transverse section, fig. 2. This vein, which is of some importance, and which may here be called the Springfield lode, crops out as a projecting ridge several feet wide, composed of hard ferruginous quartz, with very numerous disseminated crystals of magnetic iron-ore. At Mr. Tyson’s mine (see plan, fig. 1), a string of this ore was found, varying in thickness from 10 inches to as much as 10 feet, going down towards the south in a kind of irregular pipe, always on the course of the lode, as shown in the diagram, fig. 3. A shaft bemg put down about 10 fathoms, considerable supplies of iron-ore of excellent quality were raised, consisting of protoxide and peroxide of iron in crystals. On con- tinuing the shaft downwards a change took place; the course of ore and the condition of the veinstone presented an altered character, and the fine pure and crystalline oxide of iron became spotted and mixed with iron-pyrites, while horses of dead ground split the vein and altered its character. On the upper side of these horses also, considerable deposits of copper-pyrites were found, and I saw about 80 tons of such ore on the dressing-floor of Mr. Tyson’s mine, esti- mated to yield 14 to 18 per cent. The depth of the shaft at the date of my visit was 50 fathoms, and no troublesome quantity of water had been met with. In the hottoms the lode was described as consisting of a good course of copper-pyrites on the foot-wall, associated with magnetic iron-ore, some silicate and carbonate of copper, and some mundic; the copper-pyrites being readily separable by hand-picking. The lode had not become settled, and the ore still occurred chiefly on the fork of the horses of dead ground, and in a comparatively narrow belt going down south on the vein. The same band of quartzose rock in schist that contains the course or pipe of ore worked in the Springfield mine is again seen at the surface, and has been sunk upon in an adjoining property to the north. Two other similar bands parallel to it and at a distance of only a few fathoms are characterized by the same peculiar kind of gossan, and others have been observed between this tract of country and the mountains of the Blue Ridge. In all these cases the outcropping veins are harder and less decomposed than the intervening country, while parallel quartz-ledges alternating with bands of talcose schist are common. At Carrol Mine, about two miles north of the Springfield Mine above described, mining operations have been carried on to some ex- tent on what is probably a continuation of the same lode. Shafts 244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Feb. 25, Fig. 1.—Plan of the Country near Sykesville. (About four miles square.) 7 6e 5 b 2 7 Wy , / ff ) Y jj Uf; Dg | ; iy, | AK 4) i Ys Vy; { YY} | My Yi} MW, | HAN 1 OU Ye bt a dhs jp} Uy a x - 7 Lf I ptf, Li fs Yi / 4 aa, bb, ce, The three parallel lodes. A.B. Line of section (fig. 3) on the course of the Springfield lode (a). C. D. Line of section (fig. 2) across the three lodes a, 4, e. Fig. 2.—Transverse Section across the Lodes in the Sykesville District. (C.D. on the plan, fig. 1.) Springfield Lode. E.S.E. ec ) IVES c 8 7 4 3 1. Syenite. 5. Mica-slate. 2. Granitic gneiss. 6. Schist with steatite. 3. Hard micaceous schist. 7. Mica-slate. 4. Steatitic schist. 8. Schists. Fig. 3.—Section on the Course of the Springfield Lode. (A. B. on the plan, fig. 1.) Mount Mineral S.S.W. Tyson. Carrol. Hill. N.N.E. dd. Courses or pipes of ore in the lode. ee. Barren veinstone. 1857. | ANSTED—MINERAL VEINS. 245 have here been sunk, one to 12 and another to 25 fathoms, and adits driven in from the hill-side to cut the lode at convenient places. From an adit-level driven into the hill about 35 fathoms, blocks of hard compact steatite, deeply tinged with copper-stains, and portions of the lode with good stones of copper-ore, have been brought. Ex- cellent stones of ore have also been taken from the shafts, and the in- dications of a good copper-lode were very strong. Two miles still further to the north, at a place called ‘‘ Mineral Hill,” a course of ore is indicated under precisely similar conditions, and some simple surface-operations have been commenced which show that the copper-pyrites is here nearer the surface than either at Spring- field or Carrol. At Fenceburg, six miles beyond, and always in the same direction, copper-ore has been obtained to profit under similar circumstances. It appears, therefore, that in this district there are several pipe- like courses of copper-ore occurring in veins parallel to the stratifi- cation, proved for a length of at least ten miles and at least three in number ; that the courses of ore are individually of no great mag- nitude near the surface; that they are surmounted by a gossan of crystalline protoxide and peroxide of iron in a highly magnetic state ; that the ore-deposits underlie to the south within the vein; that the enclosing rock is highly mineralized ; that steatitic rocks and talcose schists prevail near the orey parts of the veins; and that the vein- stone in the intervals between the orey portions contains little or no magnetic ore. Near a remarkable and exceedingly picturesque spot called the Point of Rocks, where the Potomac River emerges from a narrow gorge on coming out from the Blue Ridge, an enormous mass of limonite or hydrous oxide of iron crops out and has been quarried to a considerable extent. This ore occurs in a soft slaty rock dipping east, and appears to be the gossany top belonging to several lodes, between each adjacent two of which a soft blue shale intervenes. The masses of ore occur in the form of geodes or concretions, with a cavity in the interior often partially filled with clayey matter. These geodes are from 20 to 100 feet in length, and are sometimes round, but more frequently much flattened. A partial attempt has been made to cut across the ferruginous mass, but the width was unproved at the time of my visit. The mass appears to extend for some distance parallel to the Blue Ridge, but the ground is covered up. There is no proof of copper existing beneath this mass of iron- oxide, but it has every appearance of being the top of a lode which may probably be cupriferous. It is evidently the gossan of an import- ant group, as blocks of quartz and masses of veinstone are distinctly traceable along the line of the crop to some’ distance. 3. On the Copper Lodes of Ducktown in East Tennessee. In the eastern corner of the State of Tennessee, near the point where that State meets North Carolina and Georgia, and not far from Virginia, is a small depressed mountain-tract in the Central Alle- 246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Feb. 25, ghanies, crossed nearly at right angles by the Ocooee river*. This district and the corresponding rocks in the State of Virginia, about 100 miles to the north, are remarkable for the presence of several large lodes, all indicated by a strongly marked gossan, underneath which has been found a quantity of rich copper-ore of peculiar quality. These ledes have attracted great attention in America, and the ore lying under the gossan has been rather extensively worked in four mines, and partly opened in others, but hitherto without much profit, owing to the enormous cost of conveyance from the mines to amarket. Notices of the mines will be found in Whitney’s ‘ Metallic Wealth of the United States,’ and reports on the district have been published by some American geologists ; but little attention has been paid to what seems to me a most essential feature, and I propose here to describe the lodes and the mineral field from notes made during a careful investigation in the winter of 1854-1855. The country consists of altered talcose and chloritic schists, pro- bably of Silurian date, alternating with hard micaceous grits and with other rocks distinctly crystalline and of a porphyritic character. All these have the same general strike as the mountain-range, which bears N. 30° E. by 8S. 30° W., and all show a great uniformity in the direction and amount of their dip, which may be described as uni- formly S.E. at a high pitch. The talcose schists occasionally pass into garnet-schists, and sometimes become steatitic. The schists and other rocks are traversed by, or alternate with, numerous bands, veins, or strings of quartz, hard and crystalline, irregular in extension and thickness, but on the whole corresponding in bearing with the schists. These quartz-strings are neither regu- larly stratified with the other metamorphic rocks, nor do they cross the stratified rocks after the manner of true metalliferous veins. They rather suggest a different origin, reminding one of the segre- gated strings of cale-spar in certain lime-rocks, or of strings of sul- phate of baryta and gypsum in clays. Inthe Ducktown district, as indicated in the map (diagram, fig. 4), they occasionally diverge from or converge towards each other; they unite in one place to form a large quartz-knot, and they are sometimes seen crossing the schists nearly at right angles to the direction of their strike. The width of these veins varies from a few inches to 10 or 15 feet ; and either at or near the surface the quartz often has a strong ferru- ginous stain, or contains, disseminated through it, a quantity of iron- oxide, forming a gossan, as already alluded to in the case of the cupriferous lodes. The iron-oxide is generally a brown hematite ; but magnetic iron-ore is not unfrequent, and in the spot marked on the map as a quartz-knot, I observed the compass to be strongly affected, although there was no surface-indication whatever of a lode. Stains of iron-oxide are not uncommon in the schists, even at some distance from the quartz-outcrops, so that the soil is in many places either of a deep ochraceous yellow, dark reddish-brown, or ver- milion tint, from the large quantity of decomposed iron-oxide close to * This river afterwards runs through a narrow gorge in the mountains, and ultimately enters the Hiwassee, an important tributary to the Ohio. 1857. ANSTED—MINERAL VEINS. 247 Fig. 4.—Map of the Ducktown Mineral District, Tennessee, U.S., showing the principal Gossan-lodes and Quartz-veins. Dimensions of the Gossan-lodes. Average Length. width. Hiwassee T . 2600 yards. 30 feet. Tennessee . - 900 ,, Lhe Isabella, }a-9s) x,» 600) 5 250 ,, ‘Polk County. . 900 ,, ae. Reference to the nature of the Rocks. 1. Blue slates. 2. Talcose schists. 3. Ferruginous schists. 4. Hard schists. 5. Talcose, steatitic, and garnetiferous schists. At 1* is a small development of horn- blendic rock; and at 3*, of diorite: 2* marks the position of a remarkable kno of quartz-rock referred to in the text. tn ant oe es mal QUATEZ-VEIns. ~---~—--~~ | Approximate boundaries of the different schists. The gossan-lodes are indicated by shaded lines. AB and C D, lines of sections, figs. 5 and 6, p. 248. + The main portion of the Hiwassee lode having the average width above stated does not extend for more than 1600 yards. There are, however, proofs of its extension beyond the point marked a, though with a much less width. — 248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Feb. 29, the surface. There are also cases in which the blocks of quartz, forming the outcrops of large veins, are replaced or accompanied by Figs. 5 & 6.—Sections across the Metamorphic Rocks, showing the Gossan-lodes in the Ducktown Mineral District. Fig. 5.—Section from A to B on the Map, fig.4. Isabella Lode. S.E, Hiwassee N.W. Lode. Potato Creek ZE AN A\ \ “ \ ) \\ \\\ : 1 \W \ \ \\ \ \\ \ VA A N tre \ \\ \ \Y \a SANA ah ¥ \\ \ 4 3 \\ \ \ NR VEX KRa ORE \\ WAC BB Fig. 6.—Section from C to D on the Map, fig. 4. ~ | oO 5 Tennessee R Polk County 3 Lode. e Lode. §.E. a > 3S N.W. & 5 e 2 RN ITITLTLTAINTA TIT ANY \ \\ oN NII I\\\\ As A AY AAS S\N ANAS ANG D 2 i cue 1. Blue slates. 4. Hard schists. 2. Talcose schists. 5. Talcose, steatitic, and garnetiferous 3. Dark ferruginous schists. schists. blocks of spongy iron-oxide and hard lumps of magnetic iron-ore. In most cases these veins are nearly vertical, or dip slightly to the south-east. Within the narrow belt represented in the map (occupying about four miles in length by one-and-a-half in breadth, or six square miles), there are four very remarkable outcroppings of porous iron- oxide, which together form the subject of the present memoir. Two of them are approximately parallel in the northern, and two others in the southern part of the district. They are of very unequal extension in length of outcrop, and of very unequal width. They are connected more or less distinctly by quartz-strings, of which there are many in addition to those marked in the map. They are occa- sionally accompanied by solid ribs of quartz, forming a foot- or a hanging-wall. They all dip to the south-east, the angle varying in different parts of the same lode. In all of them the surface appear- _ ance presented by the gossan is that of a mass of cellular iron-oxide, with more or less quartz, forming the walls of the cells, and the pro- portion of peroxide of iron is so large, that under ordinary exposure the mass of outcropping mineral presents a rusty appearance of naked rock with little or no soil, so that its dimensions can be easily and accurately measured. In other cases, where soil is formed upon it, the colour is so deep a vermilion as to mark at once the nature of the underlying rock. The exact condition of the rocks enclosing the veins and lodes is 1857.] ANSTED—MINEBAL VEINS. 249 by no means easy to determine, as they are covered by vegetable soil and a growth of forest-trees. On the banks of the Ocooee towards the north-west, the rocks seen cousist of felspathie porphyries with quartz-veins, alternating with numerous varieties of schist and blue slate. Overlying these are magnesian rocks, consisting of talcose and steatitic schists, which seem to abound especially in the metalliferous portions of the country. Micaceous schists are also common, and garnet-schists are characteristic of some particular localities. Among the minerals common in the veins may be mentioned cyanite, of which I saw large quantities,—epidote, not so abundant,—and common gar- nets, often extremely plentiful. Some idea of the country will be obtained by referring to the two sections, figs. 5 & 6, and the accompanying map, fig. 4, p. 247, but much detailed observation would be needed to insert accurately the limits of the various metamorphic rocks, and determine the mode in which they pass from one to another variety of schist and porphyry. It will be seen by reference to the map that of the four gossan- lodes the length varies from 600 yards to upwards of a mile. The width is still more variable, ranging from 6 or 7 to 40 or 50 feet in three of the number, and in the fourth averaging as much as 250 feet. These dimensions have been actually proved either by the out- cropping gossan or by workings on the lodes at a small depth. Wherever throughout the district any portion of these gossans has been sunk through to sufficient depth, they have been found to ter- minate downwards in a variable thickness of black soft copper-ore, which analysis shows to be derived from the decomposition of copper- pyrites. The distance of this deposit from the surface varies from 3 or 4 up to about 90 feet, and often seems to have some imperfect correspondence with the form of the ground, being usually smallest in the valleys and greatest on the crests of the hills. The outcrops are also narrowest in the valleys, at least in a majority of cases. The black ore reposes on a very irregular floor of hard dense quartzose veinstone sparingly spotted with copper-ore, and largely impregnated with black and yellow copper-ore. In various parts of the mineral field this veinstone has been sunk through to different depths, but nowhere more than 18 fathoms. No very important change has been recognized thus far, but fair indications of copper- lodes of the ordinary kind are not wanting, and in one place beyond and to the south of the Tennessee gossan-lode there was a distinct change of ground noticed, and the veinstone became calcareous at a depth of about 17 fathoms from grass*. The thickness of the black ore between the gossan and the floor of * In this sinking the lode underlies from 15 to 18 inches in the fathom, its width appears to be between 30 and 40 feet, and the foot-wall appears to become softer on going down. The veinstone itself, however, remains extremely hard, and the stones of copper-ore obtained were too few to be of importance, even as indications. A thin seam of poor ore was found under the gossan, but where no quantity of iron-oxide was seen at the surface there was nothing worth removing below. In the Culchote mine the surface-indieations were poor and small; but the underground appearances were more satisfactory. No :profitable result has, -however, been obtained as yet (June 1857). x 2 250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Feb. 25, hard rock varies from a few inches up to 18 feet, but when above 4 or 5 feet must be regarded as exceptional and local. In some of the lodes generally, and in some parts of all of them, pockets or bunchy deposits of ore either replace the bed of ore (the intervening portions being barren) or are only connected by a few inches of valuable mineral. Where bunches are common, horses of ground occur in the gossan, masses of schists or portions of the quartzy vein- stone projecting upwards into the gossan. Very rich deposits have been found where the seam of ore is interrupted by these barren portions of ground, both at the top of the horse and in holes in the hard mundic-rock. The thickness of the ore is often uniform or nearly so for a considerable distance, and in that case varies from 23 to 4 feet. Not unfrequently the bed of ore thins out and at the same time rises towards one wall of the vein. It is almost impossible to determine the quality of the ore from its aspect. It is usually of a dirty black or deep velvet-black colour, moderately hard, but spongy and apparently a good deal decomposed. It is very readily got with the pick, and must ail be brought out, as, while underground, there are no means of separating ore from rubbish. Some idea of the varied nature of different parts may be obtained from the following assays of six samples carefully taken by me from different heaps which presented but little difference to the eye. The assays were made by Mr. T. H. Henry, and show a mean of 26°2 per cent. of copper. No. | contained 14°9 per cent.; No. 2, 18°6; No. 3, 20°9; No. 4, 21:1; No. 5, 28°2; and No. 6, 53°4. In the latter there were, no doubt, lumps of black oxide. An analysis having been made by Mr. Henry of an average of these six samples, the re- sult shows: sulphur, 29°47 ; copper, 26°73; iron 26°04; quartz, 8°60 ; oxygen and loss, 9°16. The mineral is therefore a sulphuret of copper and iron with a slight excess of oxide of copper. A certain loss of copper is the result of exposure to the weather or in any way to the action of water. The four gossan-lodes I have named respectively Hiwassee, Ten- nessee, Polk County, and Isabella, these bemg the names of the pro- perties on which they were first opened. The Tennessee is perhaps more properly regarded as a branch of the Hiwassee, but may be described separately. The relative position of the lodes will be seen by reference to the map, fig. 4, p. 247, and the sections, figs. 5 & 6, a, 6, c, d. The Hiwassee lode ranges nearly N.E. and S.W., dipping S.E. about 15 inches in the fathom. Its gossan is traceable for a mile and a half, commencing on the crest of a hill, and crossing two hills and three valleys. In each valley the width is greatly narrowed and the vein almost lost. The width for about half the length of gossan- outcrop is at least 30 feet. The ore is irregularly distributed, the thickness averaging about three feet, and it lies generally at a moderate depth (ten to twelve fathums) on the hills, and close to the surface in the valleys. The south-western part of the lode has been much worked from two shafts, and at least 4000 tons of rich ore had been extracted at the date of my visit (1854). 1857. | ANSTED—MINERAL VEINS. 251 Towards the south-west the vein is continued beyond the gossan- outcrop by strings of quartz, one in the direction of the lode and another making an angle of 25° to the south. The former is at first very large, but dies away at the surface. The latter is inconsiderable and hardly traceable for about three-quarters of a mile, but then presents another gossany crop, and forms the Tennessee lode. At several points where it has been proved by costeanings between the two gossans, it is seen as a thin string of quartz with no orey indi- cations. Towards the north-east the Hiwassee vein branches at a point on a hill-side, and from the bottom of the next valley (at the point marked a@ in the map, fig. 4, p. 247), it shows but an inconsider- able gossan. It has been opened on by shafts at two or three points beyond this; but, though containing black ore, the quantity is not large and the quality is inferior. A few hundred yards beyond, it passes off into thin quartz-strings, and is lost. The south-western extremity of this gossan-lode adjoins a re- markable garnet-schist of great beauty. The north-eastern part shows an equally striking development of eurite and fine crystals of cyanite. The Tennessee lode or branch ranges N. 20° E. and 8S. 20° W.; dipping very variably to the S.E., sometimes being nearly vertical, and sometimes inclined at an angle of 45°. It commences as a gossan- lode near the crest of a hill, and crosses three valleys, generally appearing to diminish in value in the valley. It passes southwards into a quartz-vein of no importance. It is extremely irregular and bunchy, but has yielded some very rich ore, and in hollow cavities in the gossan very fine specimens of crystalline and arborescent native copper and crystalline red oxide of copper have been found. The bunches of rich ore in this lode have sometimes been found descend- ing 12 to 18 feet into the comparatively barren veinstone below, or penetrating upwards to the same extent into the gossan. The Polk County lode is nearly parallel to the Tennessee, and is one of a group of three or four veins near together, but with no other gossan than that which belongs to the lode itself. It has been traced for three-quarters of a mile, terminating abruptly to the north- east, and passing off into strings of quartz towards the south-west, one of which has traces of gossan. At some distance from the point where the large outcrop ceases, there is a cross-course of quartzy vein- stone, making an angle of 60°. In the Polk County mine, whence a good deal of ore has been removed, the breadth is from 20 to 40 feet, and the thickness of black ore very irregular, but estimated to average 3 feet. In many places it has been observed, that the floor of black ore is not only not parallel to the slope of the hill, but rises towards the surface as the hill slopes down to the valley. There is evidently no accordance of the floor of ore with the form of the surface. The Isabella lode is nearly parallel to the Hiwassee, but is the most remarkable of all in the district for its enormous width, which is estimated to average 250 feet. Its length, as marked by gossan, is 252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [Feb. 25, about 600 yards, the whole ef it being on the crest or eastern slope of one hill. The black ore is reached by adit-levels from the foot of the hill on the east side, and, judging from what has hitherto been extracted, is of inferior quality to the average from the other lodes. The gossan is also harder, and interspersed with magnetic oxide of iron in considerable quantities. The floor below the black ore is the usual mundicy veinstone, and the deposit less irregular than in the Tennessee and Polk County lodes; but the average thickness does not appear so great as in the Hiwassee vein. As a gossan-lode this remarkable vein terminates abruptly at both extremities. To the north-east, at the point where the gossan ter- minates, there proceed three principal quartz-veins, nearly parallel, but slightly divergent, and of small size. The furthest to the west is the largest, and extends for some distance; the others seem to die away. ‘To the south-west, one main branch of large size, bearing gossan, turns due south for a short distance, but soon passes into a quartz-string, alters its direction, and disappears. Another principal branch, also of large size and having a good outcrop of gossan, takes a south-west direction, and presently turns more towards the west. Immediately it has passed the crest of the hill the gossan ceases, and it becomes a quartz-vein, in which form it is traceable for fully half a mile in a perfectly straight line. A third quartz-vein, between these two, extends for some distance, and connects by a remarkable quartz-knot with the quartzy strings from the Tennessee lode. I have been minute in the description of these lodes.and quartz- veins or strings on account of the exceptional character of the phe- nomena, which will be at once manifest to those familiar with metal- liferous lodes in Europe. It may be well, however, to pomt out some of the important resemblances and differences. These veins agree with ordinary metalliferous lodes,—Ilst, in having distinct walls approximately parallel, clearly separating the contents of the vein from the enclosing country. Thus enclosed, they range parallel to each other for some distance, not changing with the country, and not much affected by changes of the country ; 2ndly, in. having a defined crystalline veinstone, ‘usually of quartz, but including sometimes calc-spar, passing towards the surface into more cellular quartz loaded with oxide of iron, such as is. often found in other countries at the outcrop of the most important. copper-lodes ; Srdly, in the limited extension of such veins in length and width, and their apparently unlimited depth ; 4thly, m the fact that the prin- cipal lodes are accompanied by parallel lodes and branches; and 5thly, that the lodes are inclined to the horizon at a high angle, which in most cases is tolerably regular in the same lode, and often nearly vertical. On the other hand, we find the following differences :—1. Instead of crossing and intersecting at a considerable angle the general range of stratified rocks in which they occur, these lodes are always ap- proximately, and sometimes truly, parallel to the strike of the schists. 2. They not only agree with the stratified rocks in strike, but also in the direction, and even in the amount of the dip. 3. Agreeing 1857. ] ANSTED—MINERAL VEINS. 253 with the stratified rocks in strike and dip, they not unfrequently contain within their defined walls portions of schist in their normal and unaltered condition, thus showing a true interstratification to that extent. 4. Between the gossany outcrop of the lodes and the hard solid mundicy veinstone below, is found a mass of black cupri- ferous ore, as already described, entirely distinct from either, and separable mechanically from both with the greatest facility. This deposit reposes on the floor of mundicy veinstone, filling its hollows, and apparently adapted to its irregularities of surface. 5. The width of the lodes in the majority of cases, and the depth of the black ore from the grass, are very distinctly affected by the present form of the surface, the lode being much narrowed in the valleys, and the _ thickness and width as well as quality of the black ore reduced, while the greatest depth at which this ore has yet been seen is very little indeed below the ordinary level of the valleys. In the three first-mentioned points of difference, and sometimes in the fifth, the Ducktown veins are analogous to the auriferous quartz- veins (sometimes also cupriferous) of Virginia and North Carolina, and even those of California. In the first and third points they agree with the Maryland veins described in the previous notice, p- 242; but the fourth condition is altogether peculiar, and has not, so far as I am aware, been hitherto recorded. Analogy would point to the existence of similar black ores beneath the Maryland gossans. These Ducktown lodes must not be considered without special reference to the physical conditions of the adjacent country. They are amongst the old rocks of the main Alleghany Chain, but not very near any large masses of igneous rock. The general form of the ground, as far as regards the ranges parallel to the main axis, is un- questionably due to elevatory causes, and not to denudation ; but it would be difficult to decide, without very minute investigation, whether the transverse cuts through which the natural drainage is carried are partially or entirely the result of weathermg and aqueous action or are due to transverse elevations. No faults or heaves have as yet been observed in the district, and no cross-courses are known that intersect the gossan-lodes. No very satisfactory account has yet been given of these singular deposits. Mr. Whitney and some American geologists have attri- buted the existence of this band of decomposed copper-ore (which has been erroneously regarded as black oxide of copper) beneath the gossan and above the veinstone as an effect of the decomposition of the veinstone near the surface, and have seen in the curious arrange- ment of this bed near the present water-level a confirmation of their views. But, independently of the fact that the present veins could never by any possibility decompose into the present gossans and beds of ore, there is really no water-level to which they can be referred, as the floor of ore merely approximates in a general way to that of the natural drainage, and is often totally opposed to that direction. Whatever may have been the original condition and subsequent action, it appears to me certain that the filling of the part of the vein above 254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL sociETy. [Mar. 11, the hard mundicy veinstone was a different and subsequent operation to that of segregating the veinstone itself. The Ducktown ores seem, in fact, to be contained in a kind of stock-works produced as gaping fissures in stratified or partially metamorphosed rocks during metamorphism and elevation, and sub- sequently filled up by segregation from the enclosing country or from below during the completion of metamorphic action. These large lodes are connected with numerous smaller fissures filled only with quartz, the metallic sulphurets and oxides appearing to occupy the upper and less compact portions of the larger fissures. That the fissures were filled up by chemical forces and independently of direct aqueous action, is, I think, quite clear, and no modification of the theory of sublimation would account for the pheenomena of the district. As, however, some of the quartz-lodes in which there is no surface- gossan have been proved to contain gossan at a moderate depth (a few fathoms from the surface), and as in one case an effort has been made to reach copper-ores of the ordinary kind (yellow sulphurets) by sinking in quartz-lodes within the district, there may be an op- portunity of judging of the nature of these lodes and their contents at greater depth. It seems to me by no means unlikely that large bunches of rich copper-ore may exist either in the gossan-veins beneath the hard floor, or in the quartz-veins where no gossan is presented to view at the surface; but, until experience has shown some result of importance, it would be unsafe to assume the presence of courses of ore in Ducktown such as are found in other known mining districts. Very analogous cases of outcropping gossan of large dimensions have been discovered in Virginia about a hundred miles to the north, and specimens both of the gossan and of the underlying black ore were shown me by persons interested in these mines. I was unable to visit them, and therefore can do no more than direct attention to the fact. Marcu 11, 1857. Charles Napier, Esq., C.E., and John Brown, Esq., York, were elected Fellows. The following communications were read :— 1. Description of the Lower Jaw and Teeth of an ANOPLOTHERIOID QUADRUPED (Dichobune ovina, Ow.) of the size of the Xiphodon gracilis, Cuv., from the Upper Eocene Mart, ISLE oF WIGHT. By Prof. Owen, F.R.S., F.G.S. [Piate VIII. ] THE subject of the present description (Pl. VIII.) is an almost entire lower jaw with the permanent dental series, wanting only the four middle incisors. The specimen is from the collection of the Mar- 1857. | OWEN—DICHOBUNE OVINA. 255 chioness of Hastings, and now forms part of the Palzeontological collection in the British Museum. The dental formula, as shown by the mandibular teeth, and by the evidence on their crowns of the presence of the teeth of the upper jaw, is the typical one in diphyo- dont* Mammalia; viz., 7 —> c = p — m —= 44, The canine, ¢, with a crown like that of the first premolar, p 1, and not longer, is separated from it by an interval of half the breadth of the crown and by a narrower interval from the outer incisor, 73. The first pre- molar, p 1, is divided by an interval of scarce a line’s breadth from the second, p 2. The rest of the molar series are in contact. The total length of the lower jaw is 5 inches 11 lines (0™:148) ; that of the molar series is 2 inches 11 lines (0™-075); that of the three true molars is 1 inch 44 lines (0™:035). The near equality in height of the crowns of all the teeth, and their general character, show that the animal belonged to that group of the Anoplotherioid family which includes the genera Dichobune and Xiphodon of Cuvier. The dentition of the present species dif- fers from that of Dichodon in the absence of the accessory cusps on the inner side of the base of the true molars, fig. 3, m1, 2,3, and both from Dichodon cuspidatus + and Xiphodon gracilist-in the minor antero-posterior extent of the premolars : it corresponds with Dichobune (as represented by the Dich. leporina, Cuv.§) in the proportions of the premolars and in the separation of the canine from the adjoining teeth: to this genus, therefore, the fossil is referable, provisionally, in the absence of knowledge of the molars of the upper jaw, which are the most characteristic ; and I propose to call the species, from the size of the animal represented by the fossil, Dicho- bune ovina. The lower jaw differs in the broader or deeper hori- zontal ramus, and in the less oblique ascending ramus, from that of the Dichobune leporina figured by Cuvier ||. The outer incisor, 7 3, has a short and broad crown reduced by the attrition of the summit to a semioval shape, with the external con- vexity interrupted by a feeble concavity near the hind border, the inner side having the middle convexity passing into a slight concavity on each side; but it has no basal ridge and fossa, as in Dichodon. The crown is covered by a moderately thick enamel, well-defined from the fang. The canine, c, has a similar, but larger and more pointed crown, with a very feeble indication of a hinder lobe, and deeper concavities before and behind the median convexity of the inner surface. The crown is worn at the summit and along the anterior slope, exposing a linear tract of dentine ; it expands abruptly, before and behind, above the fang. The first premolar, p 1, is smaller than the canine, but resembles it in shape, save in a less feeble indication of the hind basal lobe, the * Philosophical Transactions, 1850, p. 493. + Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, vol. iv. June 1847, p. 36, pl. 4. ~ Ossemens Fossiles, ed. 1836, tom. v. p. 105, pl. 133. § Ib. tom. v. p. 110, pl. 90. fig. 1. | Ib. 256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Mar. 11, summit of which has been worn by an upper tooth; the chief cone is worn only along its anterior slope, as in the canine. The second premolar, p 2, shows a marked increase of size, and chiefly of antero-posterior extent, which is 53 lines (0™-011), the height of the crown being 3 lines (0™:007). The hind basal lobe is well-marked : any trace of a front basal lobe has been worn off by the abrasion along the anterior slope of the main cone, which shows a linear tract of dentine: both the anterior and posterior depressions of the inner surface are well-marked. The second premolar of the Dichobune leporina* differs from that of the present species in its well-marked anterior lobe. In both species this tooth is supported by two fangs. _ The third premolar, p 3, of the Dichobune ovina is chiefly distin- guished from the second by an increase of thickness and an indica- tion of an anterior lobe: the crown of this tooth is abraded along its anterior slope and at the summit of the hind lobe. In the fourth premolar, p 4, a second cone is developed on the inner side of the chief cone; this has also an anterior and posterior accessory tubercle, the anterior of which has a basal ridge. The summits of both principal cones and of both accessory cones are abraded in this tooth: its antero-posterior extent is less than that of the third or second premolar ; but its transverse thickness is greater. The first, m1, and second, m2, true molars consist each of two transverse pairs of cones; a third pair, the inner cone of which is minute, is added to the back of the third molar, m 3. In the first molar, m 1, the two outer cones are worn down to near the base of the inner cones, which have only their summits touched. The outer cones have an almost equilateral triangular section with the outer angle rounded off and the inner side or base slightly con- cave. The inner cones are more compressed, with their outer side more convex than the inner one, which shows a feeble narrow de- pression near the anterior and posterior border, and a rudiment of an accessory lobule at the back part of the base of the anterior cone; fig. 3, 71. The second molar, m2, resembles the first, but is rather larger ; the summits of its outer cones are more worn than those of the sub- lanceolate inner cones. The chief part of the third molar, m 3, closely resembles the second molar : its accessory division plainly consists of a pair of cones; the inner one being rudimentary, the outer one of the same antero-poste- rior extent as the normal outer cone, but lower and thinner, and oblique in its position. The unequal wear of the true molars gives their grinding surface an aspect turned a little outwards ; that of the premolars and canines shows that those compressed, conical, antero-posteriorly extended teeth are interlocked with similarly-shaped teeth of the upper jaw. From the Dichobune cervina (which M. Gervais thinks, and I con- cur with him, may belong to the genus Dichodon +) described and * Ossemens Fossiles, ed. 1836, pl. 90. fig. 2. ft “ L’examen que nous avons fait de cette piece dans les collections de la So- 1857. OWEN—DICHOBUNE OVINA. 257 figured in my ‘ British Fossil Mammals,*’ the Dichodune ovina differs in the absence of the basal cusps of the imner cones of the true molars, and by the greater antero-posterior extent of the third molar, due chiefly to the greater proportional size of the hinder supple- mental division of that tooth. The antero-posterior extent of the three true molars is 1 inch 23 lines (0™:031) in Dich. cervina ; it is 1 inch 41 lines (0™°035) in Dich. ovina. The first and second true molars of the lower jaw are so nearly similar in size in the above two species, that the upper molar from the Eocene limestone of Binstead, Isle of Wight, of a true Dichobune, figured and described by me in the ‘ Proceedings of the Geological Society,’ May 20th, 1846 (Quarterly Journal, vol. iil. p. 420), may belong to the present species (Dichobune ovina). And this will be the more probable, should upper molars of the generic type of Di- chodon, answering in size to the lower molars of the Dich. cervina, be hereafter discovered in the freshwater marl at Binstead. I proceed next to offer a few remarks on the genera Xiphodon and Dichobune, Cuv., and on the first appearance of true Ruminants in the fossil world, which have been suggested in the course of the comparisons instituted for the determination of the above-described lower jaw and teeth of Dichobune ovina. Genus XIPHODON. The genus Xiphodon was indicated, and its name proposed, by Cuvier, for a small and delicate, long- and slender-limbed Anoplo- therian animal, which, in his first Memoir, ‘ Annales du Muséum’ (t. ui. p. 55, 1803), he had called Anoplotherium medium; but he altered the name, in the second 4to edition of the ‘Ossemens Fossiles’ (tom. ui. pp. 69 & 251, 1822), to that of Anoplotherium gracile +. The distinction indicated by Cuvier is now accepted by Paleeonto- logists as a generic one, and a second species (Xiphodon Geylensis) has been added by M. Gervais (Paléontographie Frangaise, 4to, 18435, p- 90) to the type-species, Xzphodon gracilis, of which he figures an instructive portion of the dental series of both jaws, obtained from the lignites of Débruge, near Apt. The dental formula of XYiphodon : : eS ae Se 2 ee ' is the typical one, viz. 5—, ¢;—> Pz—p m sg 44. The teeth are arranged in a continuous series in both jaws. The canines and first three premolars have the crowns more extended ciété Géologique de Londres nous a conduit a penser qu’elle appartient au genre Dichodon, que M. R. Owen a établi pour une autre espéce du méme: dépot, le D. cuspidatus.”— Zoologie et Paléontologie Francaise, 4to, pl.35. Descript. p. 5. * Page 440, fig. 181. + “Elle différe assez des deux premiers Anoplotheriums par les molaires, les antérieures toutes tranchantes, les postérieures d’en bas a croissans redoublés et paralléles, pour former un sous-genre dans ce genre; et suivant un usage que j’ai introduit dans mes écrits zoologiques et dont je reconnais chaque jour davantage Vutilité, j’imposerai a ce sous-genre un nom particulier, Xiphodon, que je tire de la forme tranchante d’une partie de ses dents, de E:pos et d’odovs.”—Ossemens Fossiles, ed. cit., tom. iii. p. 62. 258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SocieTyY. [ Mar. 11, antero-posteriorly, lower, thinner transversely, and more trenchant, than in the type-dunoplotheria (whence the name Xiphedon, or Sword- tooth). The feet are didactyle, with metacarpals and metatarsals distinct. The tail is short. The lower true molars have two pairs of crescentic lobes with the convexity turned outwards. But per- haps the most important proof of generic distinction from Dzcho- bune and Dichodon, e. g., would be afforded by the modifications of the crown of the true molars of the upper jaw. With these I am acquainted only by the figures and descriptions given by Cuvier and M. Gervais. An oblique view of the grinding surface of the true molars of one side of the upper jaw of Xiphodon gracilis is given by Cuvier in the pl. 14, Supplement, of the Original Memoir above quoted (pl. 52. ed. 1822); in which the inner cone of the front half of the tooth appears, in the second molar, to be separated from the outer cone by an intermediate ridge or cone of equal size with the outer one, and not of half that size, as in Anoplotherium proper. The same tooth, m 2, in the figure of the five last grinders of the upper jaw of the Xiphodon gracilis, from Débruge (Paléontologie Francaise, pl. 34, fig. 2), shows also three cones on the anterior moiety of the crown, and M. Gervais, in his description of that figure, expressly says, it is given “pour montre les trois pointes ou pyra- mides de la collie antérieure et les deux pyramides de la colline postérieure.”” (Pl. 34. p. 1.) But in his characters of the genus Xiphodon (op. cit. p. 90) he cites ‘les arriéres molaires a deux col- lines, formées supérieurement de deux pointes chacune, subarques et rappelant celles des ruminants.” Now, this character would apply to Dichodon, but it does not ac- cord with the published figures of the upper true molars, or with his own description of one of those figures, of the Xiphodon gracilis. The first and second lower molars have two pairs of lobes, the third having an additional hinder lobe; but that lobe appears to be simple, and the internal lobes of the normal pairs have not the accessory basal cusps, as in Dichodon. M. Gervais adds the fol- lowing remark with reference to the affinities of Xzphodon :— “Ces dents (de ? Hyopotamus porcinus) sont 4 deux collines trans- verses, dont l’antérieure a trois pointes ou pyramides, et la seconde deux seulement. Elles indiquent une espéce intermédiaire a l_An- thracotherium magnum et a Y Hyopotamus velaunus, et montrent aussi que les Xiphodons sont des animaux trés-voisms des Hyopo- tames.” (Paléontologie Francaise, Description of pl. 31. p. 1.) But the genera dnthracotherium and Hyopotamus differ, in the insulation of p 1 from both the canine and from p 2, from the genera Anoplotherium, Xiphodon, and Dichodon, in which the dental series is continuous. Genus DicHOBUNE. The genus Dichobune (from dixa, bipartito ; Bovvds, collis) was proposed by Cuvier, in the second edition of his ‘Ossemens Fossiles,’ 1857.| OWEN—DICHOBUNE OVINA. 259 Ato, tom. ili. 1822, p.64, for the Anoplotherium minus of the original Memoir, in the ‘ Annales du Muséum,’ tom. ii. (1803), and for the Anopl. leporinum of the 4to edition, 1822, tom. 1. pl. 2. fig. 3, and tom. iii. pp. 70 and 251 *. It is closely allied to the Anoplotherioid genus Xiphodon; the dental formula is the same, only there is a slight interval between the canine and the first premolar in both jaws: the first three premolars are subcompressed, subtrenchant, but less elongated from behind forwards than in Xiphodon. Besides the two normally developed and functional digits on each foot, there be one, sometimes two, supplemental digits. The best illustration of the structure of the upper true molars’ 1S, perhaps, afforded by the figure of one of these teeth in the ‘ Proceed- ings of the Geological Society,’ May 20th, 1846, published in the ~* Quarterly Journal,’ vol. 11. p.420. ‘‘The Anoplotherian charac- ter of the tooth is shown by the large size of the lobe, p, a, fig. 1, and the subgeneric peculiarity by the continuation of its dentinal base with that of the inner and anterior lobe, zd, at the early stage of attrition presented by the crown of the tooth in question. In the large and typical Anoplotheria, the lobe, p, preserves its insular form and uninterrupted contour of enamel until the crown is much more worn down (than in the present tooth, fig. 1). In this respect, as in the modifications of the lower molar teeth, the genus Dichobune shows its closer affinity to the true Ruminants ; but the little fold of enamel dividing the lobe zd from p distinguishes the upper molar tooth in question from that of any Ruminant.” (p. 421.) Two upper molars, originally referred by M. Gervais to the genus Hyracotherium*, have since been figured by him, and referred, ana- logically, to his Dichobune Robertianat. They unquestionably cor- respond more closely with the upper molar referred by me to the genus Dichobune than to the upper molars of Hyracotherium. They show, as M. Gervais describes, “cing pointes tuberculeuses placées sur deux rangs, trois au premier rang et deux au second.” (p. 6.) In the characters of the genus Dichobune given by M. Gervais in the text, he describes the upper true molars as formed “de deux rangs de pyramides obtuses ; deux pyramides en avant ou au premier rang et trois en arricre, c ’est-A-dire au second rang.” Whether this ascription of the three cones or points to the hinder, instead of the fore, division of the molar tooth be based upon an ob- servation of those teeth im situ in the upper jaw, or upon the analogy of the Microtherium (Cainotherium, Lartet) is not stated. The teeth of the Dichobune Robertiana were found detached in the marl of the “ calcaire grossier”’ : the upper molar from the Binstead Eocene, referred by me to the genus Dichobune, was also a detached speci- men. Entire crania of Microtherium, from the lacustrine calcareous marls of the Puy-de-Dome, are in the British Museum, and these * «Elle formera aussi pour moi le type d’un sous-genre que je nommerai Di- chobune, a cause de ces pointes ou collines disposées par paires sur les quatre derniéres molaires,”’—Ed. cit. p. 64. + Compte Rendu de |’Académie des Sciences, t. xxxi. p. 552. t Paléontologie Frangaise, pl. 35. fig. 12. 260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL socigeTy. [Mar. 11, clearly show that the Aznder division of the upper true molars was complicated by the additional (third) cusp. So far as I have any knowledge of the specimens, or recorded specimens, of Dichobune, there are no better grounds than analogy for determining which is the fore and which the back part of the detached upper molar teeth. According to the Anoplotherium and Xiphodon, the three-cusped division would be the front one; according to the Microtherium, it would be the hind one. The modification of the molar described and figured in the ‘ Quarterly Geological Journal,’ vol. ii. p. 420, is such, as, from subsequent knowledge of the teeth of extinct Artio- dactyles, to confirm me in the choice of the analogy of the Anoplo- therium, in determining the fore and back parts of the crown of that upper molar. With regard to Microtherium, the unusually perfect fossil skulls of that small Herbivore, which did not exceed in size the delicate Chevrotains of Java and other Indo-Archipelagic Islands, e. g. Tra- galus Kanchil, are of importance in regard to the question of the first appearance of the Ruminantia, on account of the demonstration they give of the persistent and functional upper incisor teeth. The little Eocene even-toed Herbivores, like the larger Anoplotherioids, thus departed from the characters of the true Ruminants of the present day, in the same degree in which they adhered to the more general type of the Artiodactyles. Had M. de Blainville possessed no other evidence of the Microtherium than of the Dichobune murina and Dichobune obliqua, Cuv., he would have had the same grounds for referring the Microtheria, as the Dichobunes, to the genus Tragulus or Moschus (les Chevrotains) : but the entire dentition of the upper jaw of the species Anoplotherium murinum and A. obliquum, referred by Cuvier to his genus Dichobune, must be known, before the existence of Ruminants in the Upper Eocene gypsum of Paris can be ferred. No doubt the affinity of these small Anoplotherioids to the Chevro- tains was very close. Let the formative force be transferred from the small upper incisors to the contiguous canines, and the transition would be effected. We know that the Ruminant stomach of the species of 7’ragulus is simplified by the suppression of the psalterium or third bag: the stomach of the small Anoplotherioids, whilst pre- serving a certain degree of complexity, might have been. somewhat more simplified. The certain information which the gradations of dentition displayed by the above-cited extinct species impart testifies to the artificial character of the Order Ruminantia of the modern systems, and to the natural character of that wider group of even- toed hoofed animals for which I have proposed the term ArTio- DACTYLA. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VIII. Lower jaw and teeth of Dichobune ovina, nat. size. Fig. 1. Upper view, showing the grinding and cutting surfaces of the teeth ; ideal outlines of the four anterior incisors are added. Fig. 2. Outside view of the lower jaw and teeth. Fig. 3. Inside view of the teeth. SZ f ee ek oe Dichobune ovina 1857. ] FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 261 2. Description of Two Srectes of the Fosst. MAMMALIAN GENUS PiaGiaAuLax from Purpeck. By H. Fatconer, M.D., BE.S., F:G:S. Untit very lately, the only fossil mammifer known to science from the Upper Oolite beds (Purbeck series) was the Spalacotherium tri- cuspidens of Professor Owen, a small insectivorous form referred by him, with some reserve, to the placental series*. It was discovered by Mr. W. R. Brodie in one of the so-called ‘‘ Dirt-beds”’ of Durdlestone Bay, Purbeck. That meritorious collector continued his researches during the years 1855-56, and had the good fortune to discover some other mammalian remains, which were transmitted to London about the end of last December for description by Professor Owen. They were all found in what is called the “ Dirt-bed”’ No. 93, of Austen’s “ Guide.’ Before these remains had reached London, Mr. Samuel H. Beckles, so favourably known from his researches in Sussex and the Isle of Wight, after free communication with Sir Charles Lyell about the importance of a close and sustained search for mam- malian remains at Purbeck, proceeded to Swanage for the express pur- pose of carrying it out. Before a fortnight had elapsed, Mr. Beckles, by a series of well-directed excavations, had discovered several mam- malian jaws besides numerous reptilian remains, in the ‘ Dirt- bed” No. 93. When the first line of section ceased to be pro- ductive, or could no longer be worked, he opened new ground, under difficulties which would have damped the ardour of a less earnest inquirer. The labours of Mr. Beckles have been crowned with the success which they deserved. He has discovered a large number of mammal remains, many of which are new, and in very fine pre- servation. The united acquisitions of Messrs. Brodie and Beckles have already attained the important figure of about thirty mamma- lian jaws, more or less complete, the majority of them lower, but two, at least, upper jaws, with one well-pronounced cranium. The most important portion of these are the discovery of Mr. Beckles. The explorations have been conducted under a conjunction of un- usually favourable circumstances. Sir Charles Lyell gave his sage and long-experienced advice with the deep interest in the case which befits the author of the ‘ Principles of Geology ;’ Professor Owen aided the good cause by keeping Mr. Beckles advised of the importance of the additions which he was making to Paleeontology ; and, having had the leisure, from confinement to my rooms by indisposition, to examine the objects as they were successively discovered and forwarded to me, I was enabled to communicate to Mr. Beckles, constantly, an approximative opinion as to the nature of each fresh acquisition, and thus encourage him to persevere. From his correspondence, apart from the results, I can bear testimony to the rare zeal, minute care, and admirable vigour with which Mr. Beckles has followed up the inquiry. So productive have his labours been latterly, that hardly a week passes without its regular instalment of a couple of dispatches of mammalian jaws from Purbeck. * Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, vol. x. pp. 431 & 432, 1854. 262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. | Mar. 11, It is intended that, when the collection is completed, the Purbeck Fossils shall be made over to Professor Owen for description and publication ; and, from what is already manifest, it may safely be stated, that they will furnish materials for one of the most interest- ing and important of the many chapters which our distinguished countryman has contributed to the record of Mammalian Pale- ontology. Without forestalling Professor Owen’s detailed results, I may be permitted to state that I have satisfied myself of there being among the Purbeck fossils at least seven or eight genera of Mammalia, some of them unquestionably Marsupialia, both pre- daceous and herbivorous ; and others of them conveying to my mind the impression, so far as the evidence goes, that they belong to the Placental Insectivora, having affinities more or less remote to exist- ing types. Having undertaken a description of one of the most remarkable of these Purbeck mammal genera, in compliance with the expressed wishes of Mr. Beckles, to accompany some illustrations which will appear in Sir Charles Lyell’s forthcoming Supplement to the 5th edition of the ‘Manual of Elementary Geology,’ I have thought it desirable to place the anatomical evidence for the results more in detail than could be admitted in a brief abridgement in that work. The genus “ Plagiaulax*,’’ which is inferred to have been her- bivorous and marsupial, comprises two well-marked species, Pl. Becklesti and Pl. minor.- It has been determined upon two di- stinct specimens, which were among the earliest of Mr. Beckles’ acquisitions, each a right ramus of the lower jaw. Latterly, two additional specimens + have been received of the larger form, Pl. Becklesii, supplementing important poimts of evidence which were wanting in the first instance. The illustrations and descriptions now submitted, are derived chiefly from the two original specimens. Of these, the one of Plagiaulax Becklesii, (figs. 1 & 4, a, 6, and, d@), in two pieces on reversed slabs, consists of the lower jaw, right side, perfect from the tip of the incisor to the proximal surface of the condyle, including the ascending ramus and coronoid, with the ex- ception only of the raised posterior lower margin and inflected angle; it shows three premolars (p,m) in situ, with the empty sockets of the two back molars. Another specimen (fig. 7), for- tunately supplies these two back molars zm situ. The lower jaw (also of the right side) of the other species Plagiaulax minor, fig. 15, is less perfect. It contains all the teeth in situ, beautifully pre- served, but it is mutilated vertically behind the alveolar border; the ascending ramus, with all the proximal portion, being wanting. Be- sides the two true molars, it contains four premolars instead of three, as in the other species. Teeth.—Together, these specimens furnish nearly complete evi- * An abbreviation for ‘‘ Plagiaulacodon,” from aAdyos, oblique, and av\aé, groove, having reference to the diagonal grooving of the premolars. + A fifth specimen, subsequently acquired, is described in the sequel (See fig. 14). 1857.] FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 263 dence as to the characters of the lower jaw of the genus. And, first, in regard of the teeth, the dental formula is,— incis. 1—1 ; can. O—0; prem. 3—3 ; mol. 2—2=12in P. Becklesiz. 4—4 =14in P. minor. To save unnecessary technical details, by reference to a well- known existing genus, which will constitute in other respects an important term of comparison, it may be stated at once, that the incisor of Plagiaulax Becklesii (fig. 1, a, & fig. 14), in every parti- cular of form, namely, edge, point, and section, and in relative amount of projection, bears a very close general resemblance to the incisor of the marsupial Hypsiprymnus, or Kangaroo-rats, of Australia; it differs chiefly in being, for the relative size, more rebust in the fossil animal, and curved more abruptly upwards. Its line of implantation in the socket is more vertical, and the alveolar sheath shorter and thicker. The diasteme is exceedingly abbreviated, not exceeding a line in length. The three premolars, in Pl. Becklesi (fig. 1, p,m), are in the finest state of preservation, showing the details of every minute cha- racter. They are limited to three in all the specimens (see figs. 4, 11, 12, & 14). This is a point of some importance to establish di- stinctly, as there are four of these teeth in the other species. They form a closely adpressed and compact series of very unequal size, diminish- ing rapidly in succession from the last to the most anterior. The last premolar (4) presents a square oblong side, convex from back to front, and sloping upwards and inwards to the edge, which is finely serru- lated, as in Hypsiprymnus, the serratures being caused by the ter- minations of about seven well-marked parallel grooves, which descend upon the side, not vertically as in Hypsiprymnus (fig. 6, 2), but diagonally downwards and forwards, disappearing about the middle of the crown-side, upon a smooth and discoidal surface. The enamel below the four last grooves is equal and raised into a well-marked erenated step (fig. 1, 4), which is exhibited on all the specimens. The interior surface being adherent to the matrix, the characters of the inner side of the last premolar are not shown by this spe- cimen. But in two of the other specimens the inner surface of all the premolars is free and seen to be furrowed by diagonal grooves, exactly like the outer, the principal difference being that the inner side is more flattened, and the enamel smoother than on the outer. The two sides, therefore, slope from the base upwards to a sharp or thin edge, which is serrulated, agreeing in every respect, except the inclination of the grooves, with the corresponding tooth of Hypsi- prymnus. The tooth is implanted by two distinct fangs. The penultimate premolar is somewhat spathulate in outline, the lateral surface of the crown is convex in the longitudinal direction, and slopes inwards to the apex, which is diagoually grooved like the last premolar, the grooves being fewer in number. It is inserted by two inequal fangs, the posterior of which is barely visible; in size it cor- responds with one fang division of the last premolar. The antepen- ultimate or anterior premolar is greatly reduced in all its dimensions, VOL. XIII.—PART I. U 264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [ Mar. 11, being hardly one-fourth the size of the tooth immediately behind it ; in form it exhibits more the ordinary appearance of an incisor. In the other species, Plagiaulax minor (fig. 15), which is very considerably smaller, the incisor (a) presents a corresponding general form, but it is more elongated, less robust, and is not so much curved upwards. A portion of the point has been broken off in the specimen, and it is seen by the impression (a’) that the imner side near the apex was hollowed out in a longitudinal depression. The premolars, in number four, are higher in proportion to the depth of the jaw than in the other species. The last one is similar in form and grooving to the corresponding tooth in Plagiaulax Becklesiz, but exhibits a slight difference in the inequality of the enamel-surface below the basal terminations of the grooves. In front of it there are two spathulate premolars, 7. e. the antepenultimate and penulti-. mate, both diagonally grooved near the apex ; and at the base of the antepenultimate, but pressed somewhat inwards, there is a very mi- nute anterior or first premolar. The basal enamel-surface bulges out over the fangs in these teeth in a rounded angle which points downwards. Regarded as a series, they decrease in size very rapidly from the last to the foremost. The sharp edge of the crowns of the three anterior teeth slopes down towards the diasteme from the an- terior margin of the last premolar ; while that of the latter slopes in a Teverse manner downwards and backwards towards the true molars, the anticlinal planes meeting at an obtuse angle. The true molars in both species were limited to two, the sockets of which alone remain in the more perfect jaw (figs. 1 & 4, m and). But they are shown in situ, im the most perfect preservation, in the jaw of Plagiaulax minor (fig. 15, m). It is clearly apparent from the relation of the second tooth to the mutilated base of the anterior margin of the ascending ramus (6) in the latter, and from the empty sockets of the fallen teeth in the alveolar rim of the perfect specimen (fig. 4,2) of Pl. Becklesii, that the true molars in the lower jaws of both species did not exceed two, a very unexpected and reduced number, to occur in forms otherwise inferred to be marsupial, and therefore demanding rigorous determination, there being no other corresponding instance known within the whole range of this sub- class, fossil or recent. Fortunately the specimen represented by figs. 1 & 4 shows the whole of the teeth of Pl. Becklesii in nearly as perfect preservation as they are in the specimen of Pl. minor (fig. 15). It consists of a right lower jaw in two continuous fragments, presenting the two last molars of an adult animal, well worn and iz situ. The anterior edge of the ascending ramus is entire, forming a well-defined boundary to the alveolar border, and so closely contiguous to the second and last true molar, which it partly overlaps, that it is manifest, there could not have been more than two of these teeth in the jaw. The true molars are not only reduced in number in Plagiaulax minor, but they are also dwarfed in size, and comparatively insignificant in contrast with the last premolar, the united length of the two being less than that of the latter, while the vertical height of their 1857. | FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 265 crown is little more than one-third of that of it. They are situated both horizontally and vertically in different planes from the premo- lars; a perpendicular from the acute serrated edge of the latter would coincide with the line of the inner row of the crown-lobes of the true molars, to be described in the sequel, as occurs in the recent Hypsiprymnus ; and the outline of the coronal surface of the whole molar series would be included within a curve, of which the last premolar formed the most salient part, with a considerable descent on either side of it. The crown of the first true molar in Plagiaulax minor (fig. 15, c), which I take first as the more perfect, is of a broad oblong form. Its inner or axial margin supports two well-raised and bluntly conical points or tubercles, separated by a wide cleft, which is partly conti- nued down upon the body of the tooth, vertically in a sinus, forming an obsolete mesial constriction. The points are isolated and start up in considerable relief. The outer edge of the crown is not divided correspondingly : it supports mesially but a single prominent conical tubercle, which is intruded upon the plateau of the crown, and opposed to the sinus between the two inner points. It alternates therefore with the latter. The base of the outer point is continued on either side, backwards and forwards, in a well-marked lunate bevelled rim, which is convex outwards, and rises at either end into a low terminal lobule. The posterior lobule may be considered as the homologue of the posterior inner point, although it forms but an insignificant tubercle. The anterior lobule is still less developed, but opposed to the anterior inner point. The middle of the crown is occupied by a sinuous hollow surface, intervening between the outer and inner rows. ‘This hollow, from the intrusion of the outer mesial point and the constriction of the inner side, is divided into an anterior and posterior discoidal depression. The two rows are separated at both ends of the tooth by a longitudinal chasm. There is no indi- cation of any low transverse concave ridge connecting the opposed tubercles. From the above description it will be seen that the two sides are unsymmetrical, whether the outer row is considered as con- sisting of a single point with an accessory tubercle on either side, or of three unequal tubercles. The second or last true molar (fig. 15, d), viewed in profile, is smaller than the first, and the crown-surface, although of nearly equal extent, is less complex in its subdivision. It is of a broad oval, with the base applied to the contiguous anterior tooth. The coronal emi- nences consist of an outer and inner raised marginal and more or less lobulated edge, separated by a broad central depression. The outer edge is very narrow and nearly horizontal, rounded off at either end, and presenting no marks of composition beyond four or five obscure indications of crenulation, like one of the rows in the tooth of Miero- lestes (see fig. 16). Itis incurved so as to overarch slightly the central depression. The inner edge presents at its anterior end a well-elevated and isolated conical tubercle, resembling in size and form the outer mesial point of the first true molar. It is bounded posteriorly by a deep wide cleft, from which a convex edge is continued backwards, u2 266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [ Mar. 11, which is raised, but not sufficiently to attain the importance of a cusp, although homologous to the rear cusp of the anterior tooth. The centre of the crown is occupied by a hollow—smooth, and, as it were, scooped out, and depressed considerably below the raised margins. A well-marked chasm intervenes between the marginal edges, both in front and behind, the latter being narrower and less pronounced, so than when the tooth is viewed endwise, the opposite rows are seen apart somewhat as in the tooth of Microlestes. The crenation of the outer margin into a row of tubercles is more decided in Microlestes* (fig. 16), the crown is narrower and more elongated in proportion, and the opposed rows are more approximated. None of the raised points of these teeth in Plagiaulax minor show any considerable marks of abrasion, nor exposure of the ivory: the white spots in the figures represent adherent specks of matrix, and not depressed discs of wear; the apices of the outer crenations alone are a little worn in the last molar. The animal from which the fossil was derived is inferred, from the intact condition of the molar teeth, to have been a young adult, as these teeth have been found well worn in one specimen of the other species. ‘ In the jaw of Plagiaulax Becklesu (figs. 1 & 4), there are three small pits on the alveolar border of the hind fragment (c, d), be- hind the last premolar. The anterior two, seen upon the fragment fig. 1, a, 6, are closely approximated, with a thin plate intervening, indicating that they are the sockets of the two-fanged first molar. One of them is shown in the niche at the apex of the vertical sections, figs. 2 & 3, f, g. The last pit, fig. 4,2, is larger, square, and undi- vided, but showing obsolete marks of a mesial constriction, and indi- cating that the second or last molar had fangs converging in a common socket. The rim of this socket is distinctly defined, and the inner wall raised into a prominent gibbosity which leaves a deep impression on the matrix. This gibbous point corresponds with what occurs in the lower jaw of the recent Hypsiprymnus Gaimardi, with which it was compared, and is commonly seen on the alveolar wall of the last molar of other animals. In the second specimen of Plag. Becklesi, figs. 7-10, already re- ferred to, the two true molars of an adult and, judging by their wear, well-aged animal, are seen in situ. They present the same general characters as the corresponding teeth of Plag. minor (fig. 15), but appear to be proportionally larger, in comparison with the premolars. The crown of the first molar bore, as in the other species, three prin- cipal points, two to the inner row ; and to the outer a single tubercle, which is situated more anteriorly than in Plag. minor. The outer point is worn down and indistinctly defined, the wear involving what appears to have been the bevelled lunate rim at the posterior end, as described in the other species. It is not determinable whether it * IT am indebted to Sir Charles Lyell for the only available means of instituting a comparison of these mammalian teeth from Purbeck with those of the Micro- lestes of Plieninger. Besides several duplicate casts, he had very careful and highly finished drawings made of the teeth during his last visit to Stuttgart, the whole of which have been placed at my disposal. 1857.| FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 267 attained the magnitude of a separate tubercle. The two inner points form obtusely conical tubercles, which are in greater relief, and less affected by wear; so that the worn disc of the outer row shows like a step at their base. Of these tubercles the anterior bears an acces- sory lobe which is continued across in a front talon, giving a bilobed character to the point, which is but slightly abraded at the apex ; while the posterior point shows a well-marked depressed disc, which is continued some way down upon the inner side of the enamel, as if caused by the grinding play of an overlapping cusp of an upper tooth in use against it. The longitudinal furrow between the two rows is distinctly visible. There is a well-defined basal cingulum to the last molar in this species. The inside elevation of the last true molar agrees very closely with a corresponding view of the larger tooth of Microlestes antiquus, as represented in one of the drawings belonging to Sir Charles Lyell (fig. 17, ¢). The second and last true molar presents a nearly square crown with rounded angles. It is fully equal in size to the penultimate, if not alittle larger. The crown bears two marginal edges, as in the other species, with a well-marked depression between them. The inner edge is broken off and seen imbedded in the matrix of the opposite slab. The outer edge is entire, but ground down by wear, so that it shows a marginal band with no remains of crenation. The detrition of the crown, as a whole, bears some resem- blance to that seen upon the last molar of an aged Bear; the com- parison, be it understood, not being intended to imply the slightest idea of affinity. The angle formed by the anticlinal planes of the crowns of the true molars and premolars is more acute in the jaw of Plag. Becklesii than in that of Plag. minor. Character of the Lower Jaws.—Although the teeth are seen in greater perfection in the latter species, the other characters of the Jaw are best shown by the specimen of Play. Becklesi, figs. 1 & 4, a,b,& c,d. The jaw, right ramus, is broken vertically through one of the sockets of the first true molar; the anterior fragment (a,b) presents the outer surface of all in front, from the last pre- molar, while the posterior fragment (c, d) exhibits the inner sur- face of all behind, on to the condyle. A very distinct impres- sion of the premolars attached to the anterior piece, is left on the matrix of the slab which contains the hind fragment, so that it has been easy, by combining the figures, to produce a restored outline of the general contour, which is shown by the aid of dotted lines, in both figures, magnified twice the linear dimensions*. The most striking characters are: Ist, the shortness of the jaw from the pos- terior edge of the ascending ramus to the border of the alveolar sheath of the incisor (a); 2nd, the great vertical height of the horizontal ramus in relation to the last dimensions; 3rd, the de- pressed position of the condyle (d), and its great horizontal pro- jection behind the coronoid process. The lower border of the body deviates little from the sabe ty for about four-fifths of its length, * See also fig. 14, p. 280, illustrating a perfect right ramus of a younger indi- vidual magnified four times. 268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [ Mar. lI, being but slightly convex. The upper margin slopes a little down- wards from behind the premolars on to the incisive alveolus, so that, if the two margins were produced, they would meet at an acute angle. The diasteme is very short. The incisor (a) is comparatively large and directed suddenly upwards, the point being elevated above the level of the premolars, with a short bluff sheath-border. The base of the incisor is impressed with a shallow longitudinal fossa, and the upper edge is bevelled. The point shows no mark of abrasion. The mentary foramen is small, indistinct, and situated mesially in a line nearly with the middle of the diasteme. The alveolar border rises in large serrate processes between the fangs. The dark-shaded de- pression behind the vertical fracture (4, ¢) upon the matrix (0', d', e’), marks the position of the pointed gibbosity on the inner side of the alveolus of the last true molar (2). It is considerably below the line of implantation of the premolars, indicating that the true molars were placed correspondingly low, as is seen in the jaw of the other species. The longitudinal medial shade shows a deeply impressed broad channel upon the outer surface of the ramus, which is most pronounced under and behind the last premolar. The amount of this depression is well exhibited by the vertical sections (figs. 2 & 3, f &g), where (x) represents the inner surface, and (y) the outer. It is seen that the inner surface is slightly concave in the vertical direction, between the upper and lower margins; and that the general con- vexity of the outer surface is interrupted by a wide and deep fossa, causing a mesial constriction (y). Although there is as yet no direct evidence to the point available, in consequence of the outer surface of the posterior portion being adherent to the matrix, still it would appear that this channel runs back towards the depressed disk of the outer surface of the ascending ramus, although it may not have been continuous with it. The posterior fragment (c,d, fig. 4) shows in very perfect pre- servation, the whole of the inner surface of the ascending ramus and condyle, with the exception of the fragile edge of the inflected lower margin and angle, which are broken off and left in part imbedded in the matrix-cast of the opposite slab containing the anterior fragment ; it comprises also the posterior portion of the dody, im which the last molar is implanted. The coronoid process (e) is triangular. Its anterior border slopes upwards and backwards to the apex in a gentle curve, at an angle of about 45° with the alveolar border. The pos- terior margin descends in a curve with little deviation from the vertical into the broad sigmoid notch (d, e), which is but slightly over- arched by the apex*. Its height and width at the base are nearly ‘alike, and about equal to the depth of the Jody of the jaw, in a line with the last molar. The apex of the process is sharp. In general form the coronoid process in Plagiaulaxw resembles more that of the predaceous marsupials, and of the Ursine Dasyurus especially, than that of the herbivorous families. It differs very markedly from the * The artist has represented the posterior margin of the coronoid with too crescentic a curve, and the point projecting too much backward over the sig- moid notch. 1857.] FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 269 elevated strap-shaped coronoid of Hypstprymnus and the other herbi- vorous marsupials. It is to be remarked, however, that it is less elevated, and that its surface is of less area, than in the predaceous genera, whether marsupial or placental. Fortunately the condyle (d, fig. 4) is, in every respect, as perfect as that of a recent bone. The matrix has been removed, so that it stands out in bold relief, showing the convex articular surface entire. In no part of the specimen are the peculiar characters of the fossil more strongly marked than in this process, the remarkable points being: Ist, its very depressed position, the upper edge being below the line of the alveolar border, and the lower extending nearly to the inferior margin of the jaw; 2nd, its prominent convex surface, great depth in proportion to the width, and vertical direction ; 3rd, the breadth of the sigmoid notch (d, e), involving a long neck to the condyle, and its projection much behind the coronoid process. The articular surface is convex and protuberant, narrow in comparison to the height ; when viewed endwise, the out- line is pyriform, the broad end being uppermost. The general direction of the articular surface is vertical; a chord through the upper and lower edges of the curve would form a very acute angle with a perpendicular immediately behind it. The neck-portion of the sigmoid notch (d, e) is as long as the breadth of the coronoid, so that the articular surface is not only depressed below the apex of the coronoid, but projected a long way behind it. A lme drawn from the condyle to the gibbous prominence on the wall of the last molar (2) considerably exceeds the length of the horizontal ramus from the latter point on to the border of the incisive alveolus. The inner surface of the ascending ramus behind the orifice of the dentary canal (z) is smooth, and near its inferior border traversed by a longi- tudinal channel which bends back to the under edge of the condyle. The orifice of the canal (7) is low and directly in a vertical line with the posterior wall of the last molar, being relatively situated exactly as in Hypsiprymnus. The anterior margin of the canal forms a raised step, the edge of which is continued upward in a low crescentic ridge to join on with the base of the gibbous prominence of the last alveolus. The mylo-hyoid groove traverses the ridge about the middle, but the adhesion of the inner surface of the front piece (a, 6) to the matrix does not at present admit of its being determined how far the groove advances upon the horizontal ramus. The inner surface of the coronoid is convex, which is partly obscured by the plate of the process being traversed by numerous fissures, with partial displacement of the pieces. The inferior margin of the hind part of the ramus is nearly hori- zontal ; it terminates suddenly in the lower edge of the condyle. A narrow fractured surface (fig. 4, 0), the continuation of which was evidently directed inwards (2. e. presented to the observer), is seen on the side of the lower edge, stretching from the anterior boundary of the dentary foramen (x) on to the condyle. The rest of this in- flected margin (what remains of it) is seen imbedded in the opposite slab (fig. 1, 4, o'). It forms a lamina of great tenuity.- The base 270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL Society. | Mar. 11, of its inner bounding ridge shows a triangular fracture immediately under the orifice of the dental canal (at , fig. 4), where it is com- paratively thick : thence the section becomes gradually attenuated on to the condyle. There can be little doubt that this is the charac- teristic marsupial inflected angle, although feebly developed. It may have formed a slender elongated apophysis, with little inward in- flexion, as in dAcrobata. The characters of the anterior portion of the inner side of the horizontal ramus, which are concealed by the contact with the matrix in the fragment fig. 1, a, 6, are beautifully shown by a detached piece lately received from Mr. Beckles, represented by figs. 11-13. It comprises the anterior third of the ramus, the fracture having passed vertically through the middle of the last premolar. The in- cisor is broken off near the base of the exserted portion ; the two an- terior premolars are quite entire, and show well the diagonal grooving on both sides. The alveolar sheath of the incisor is entire all round, and its upper edge presents an exceedingly abbreviated diasteme. The symphysial portion is very short, directed upwards, massive, and obtuse. The disc of the harmonia or junction between the two man- dibular pieces is distinctly defined (fig. 12, 6). It is of comparatively small antero-posterior extent, of a broad elliptical or somewhat reni- form outline, with the smus directed backwards, and the long axis of the disc with but slight deviation from the vertical. The surface is perfectly smooth and without indentation, as is commonly seen in Hypsiprymnus and other herbivorous marsupials ; while in the car- nivorous and insectivorous genera of the same subclass, the symphy- sial harmonia is narrower and more elongated, with more or less in- equality of surface for the reciprocal firm apposition of the united pieces. It is of some importance to take due notice of this cha- racter, however trivial it may appear, as every point is of value that can assist us in determining the affinities of this remarkable fossil genus. On the outer surface of this fragment the mentary foramen (fig. 11, ¢) is seen under the middle of the diasteme. It is round, well defined, and of good size. This instructive fragment furnishes direct evidence upon another point of importance, namely that there was but one large incisor on either side of the lower jaw. It would have been of great interest and importance to have ascer- tained the character of the outer surface of the ascending ramus in Plag. Becklesii; that is to say, whether, in harmony with the mar- supial indications as here interpreted, it presents a depression bounded by a raised ridge sweeping round on the lower side from the condyle to join on with a corresponding ridge descending along the anterior margin of the coronoid ; and whether the depression terminated in a trumpet-shaped excavation of the horizontal ramus, common to it and the dentary canal, as occurs in Hypsiprymnus. But the fossil is so fragile, that I have not attempted to detach it for fear of injuring what it now exhibits. We may expect, however, if the excavations are continued at Purbeck with the same zeal with which they have hitherto been conducted, that abundant materials will be acquired for clearing up this single unascertained point connected with the cha- 1857. | FALCONER— PLAGIAULAX. 271 racters of the lower jaw of Plag. Becklesii. From the direction which the fracture has invariably taken along the line of least re- sistance, in two fragments on reversed slabs, whenever a complete jaw has been discovered, and from the circumstance that the inner surface has been always exposed, and the outer remained in adhesion with the matrix, I am led to surmise that this has been caused by the matrix forming a plug in the excavation here referred to, thus causing it to adhere firmly ; and I am prepared to expect that the outer surface of the ascending ramus will be found to agree in a great measure with that of the recent Hypsiprymnus. [P.S. Since the preceding remarks were written, a fifth specimen of Plagiaulax has been discovered by Mr. Beckles, which supplies the desired information regarding the characters of the outer surface of the ascending ramus. See fig. 14, p. 280. It consists of the left ramus, nearly entire from the incisor to the condyle, showing the whole of the outer surface exposed. The specimen would seem to have belonged to a young individual of Pl. Becklesii. The incisor is vertically inserted, and projects above the level of the premolars, of which there are three. The true molars, if pre- sent, are concealed behind the flap formed by the anterior margin of the coronoid process. This part of the jaw has been slightly crushed. The coronoid process rises more vertically, and is narrower than in the specimen, fig. 4; but a portion of the posterior margin is pro- bably wanting. ‘The base of the coronoid is occupied by a deep de- pression bounded on the lower side by a raised ridge, which sweeps round from the inferior part of the condyle, to be continued into the anterior margin of the coronoid process. ‘The characters are clearly marsupial ; but it is not determinable whether the depression termi- nates in an excavation of the ramus common to it and the dentary canal, as occurs in Hypsiprymnus. So far as can be seen, the de- pression would seem to be more limited. The matrix has been cleared away from the posterior inner margin, and a portion of the inflected angle is distinctly visible. The specimen, magnified four times linear, is represented by fig. 14. It bears out in every respect the marsupial inferences deduced from the other specimens ; and in- dicates for Plagiaulax a position between Hypsiprymnus and the Phalangers.—June 20, 1857. H. F.] The lower jaw of the other species, Plagiaulax minor, is represented by fig. 15, a, 6, magnified 4 diameters, being double the scale of Plag. Becklesu, figs. 1 & 4. The outer side is exposed, the ner being ad- herent to the matrix. The notable points are—the shortness of the horizontal ramus from the offset of the coronoid to the border of the incisive alveolus, its great relative height on a line with the premo- lars (p m), and the bold curve of the lower margin. The incisor (a) is projected with a less sudden curve upwards, and its sheath is longer than in P/. Becklesti. The premolars are also larger in proportion to the height of the jaw than in that species. Unluckily the whole of the ascending ramus is wanting, and with it are lost the significant charac- ters yielded by the form of the condyle, coronoid process, and poste- rior angle. At the fractured posterior end (4), a small portion remains 272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL sociETy. [Mar. 1], of the external oblique ridge which rises into the anterior border of the coronoid. A well marked wide depression is seen on the posterior part of the horizontal ramus under the true molars, corresponding with that shown on the jaw of Plagiaulax Becklesii. In the great development of the premolars, and the dwarfed size of the true molars, there is in the fossil an analogy with Acrobata pygmea, the “Opos- sum-mouse,”’ or “ Pigmy Flying Opossum”’ of New South Wales. But the resemblance goes no further, the principal premolars in Acrobata being much elevated and pointed in front, leaning to the insectivorous type*, while they are uniformly compressed, grooved, and serrated in Plagiaulax minor. This concludes what I have to offer in the shape of descriptive details. I shall now proceed to consider what may be legitimately inferred from them respecting the nature and affinities of the fossils. That the genus was mammal admits of no question: that it was a marsupial is inferred for the following reasons, which are given in the order of the directness of the indications :— 1. The compressed hatchet-shaped last premolar with the serru- lated edge and parallel grooving. These characters are confined, among all known mammals, to the marsupial genus Hypsiprymnus ; the correspondence in grooving is so exact that the number of fur- rows is the same in the fossils and in the recent species with which they were compared, namely seven; the difference, that they are diagonal in the former and vertical in the latter, being trivial and not typical. 2. The agreement in form, relative size, and direction of the soli- tary incisor in the fossil rami, with that of the recent Hypsiprymni. 3. The indication of the raised and inflected fold of the posterior inner and lower margin of the ramus. 4. The form and characters of the symphysial suture. 5. The absence of any character in the jaw or teeth inconsistent with the marsupial indications. The presence of only two true molars might seem, at first sight, at variance with a marsupial determination, since it has been asserted, by an able authority, that, with the exception of the edentate “ spe- cies of marsupials, or those which are nearly edentate, like the Tarsipes, and also excepting the Myrmecobius, all Marsupialia pos- sess four true molars+.’’ But the character is not absolute, for all the Pigmy-Phalangers of the subgenus Dromicia, besides Acro- bata, are admitted to have only three true molarst. In the Pur- beck fossils the premolars are inordinately developed, while the true molars are dwarfed and rudimentary in proportion. Where such characters coexist with an exceedingly abbreviated alveolar border, there is less reason for surprise in seeing two of the molars * Waterhouse, Nat. Hist. of Mammalia, vol. i. p. 338. + Waterhouse, Nat. Hist. of Mammalia, vol. i. p.8. This generalization was previously stated by Professor Owen, in his memoir in the Zoological Transactions, vol. ii. p. 333, of the 8th Jan. 1839. +t Waterhouse, op. cit. pp. 307, 337. 1857. ] . FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 273 suppressed. It is now well known, that there is no certain distinctive character, whether of placental or marsupial, that can be founded on the number of their teeth. Among the marsupials, Myrmecobius presents a case in which they are in excess; while the Purbeck Plagiaulax would seem to present the opposite condition, where they are below the normal number, from suppression. The same reasons are equally strong for referring Plagiaulax to the neighbourhood of the existing genus Hypsiprymnus. The afh- nity indicated by the premolars and incisor is so manifest and direct, that details upon the differences from other terms of comparison, placental or marsupial, would be superfluous. The large grooved premolar is confined among the Marsupialia to Hypsiprymnus ; that genus, comprising three subgenera, includes about ten species, in all of which the premolar is solitary, the true molars being con- stantly four. In Plagiaulax there are either three or four grooved premolars, and only two true molars. In Acrobata and some of the Phalangers, the inferior premolars are as many as four, the true molars in these instances being reduced to three, a dentary formula which closely approximates that of Plagiaulax ; while in other Pha- langers the premolars are single, the true molars attaining the full complement of four. In regard to the indications of the true molars, which might, a priori, have been expected to be the most significant, the trituber- cular antepenultimate, and the longitudinally two-edged last tooth are without a known analegue among living forms. They certainly bear no resemblance to any insectivorous species, placental or marsu- pial. The general form of the tubercles of the antepenultimate sug- gests some resemblance to the omnivorous pachyderms, but it is not sufficiently pronounced to counterbalance the strong leaning of the premolars to a herbivorous regimen. The wear of the two true molars would seem to indicate a grinding, as contradistinguished from acrushing or cutting action of the teeth ; and this is confirmed by the form of the articulating surface of the condy le. The characters of the jaw are so peculiar, and in some respects of so mixed and complex a nature, that they require to be weighed with caution, in conjunction with teeth, in forming any opinion regarding the affinities of Plagiaulax. The low position of the condyle is so pronounced, and the elevation of the coronoid above it so considerable, that regarded per se, supposing no teeth had been discovered, they might have been considered to imply with some degree of certainty, a predaceous animal. The condyle is even relatively lower in Plag. Becklesii than in Thylacinus, Dasyurus, and Didelphys, the most carnivorous among marsupial forms. A condyle so placed was considered by Cuvier to be a positive indi- cator of the ferine type. But im Plag. Becklesii, the force of the indication is counterbalanced by another character, of which, so far as I am aware, there is no example among any of the predaceous genera, either placental or marsupial, rece1it or fossil, namely the long neck and horizontal projection of the condyle behind the coro- noid, the term ‘‘neck”’ being used for convenience to imply the con- 274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. { Mar. 11, stricted portion of the ramus between the bottom of the sigmoid notch and the lower margin. In all the ferine animals, the pivot of motion or transverse condyle is, for obvious mechanical reasons connected with the functions of the jaw, brought ona short stem close under the base of the coronoid process. In Plagiaulazx it is carried out upon a long pedicle behind, and, pro tanto, there is a great deviation from the predaceous type. The arrangement is equally without a parallel among the herbivorous or omnivorous types, m which the condyle is ordinarily elevated above the hori- zontal plane of the teeth, with more or less freedom of lateral or longitudinal motion. Further, the convex articular surface of the condyle, and its vertical instead of transverse direction, are at variance with the locked implantation of the jaw of a ferine animal. The other Jeading indications all lean towards a vegetable feeder, namely, the limited surface and moderate elevation of the coronoid above the plane of the teeth; the feeble development of the inflected margin, and the absence of a thick angular process ; the advanced position of the orifice of the dentary canal; the offset of the inflected margin above it, and the form of the symphysial suture. These characters, taken in conjunction with the marked signification of the teeth, would seem clearly to place Plag. Becklesii among the vegetable feeders. In this view, the exceptional position of the condyle would be re- garded as a special modification, having reference to the abnormal character of the teeth, and the adjustment involved thereby ; 7. e. the excessive development of the premolars, and the suppression of so large a portion of the true molars, together with the functional degradation of the two which remain. Giving due weight to these various considerations, and with the above-indicated analogy in the dental formula to guide us, I am led to the conclusion that Plagiaulax may be regarded in the natural system as a marsupial form of rodent, constituting a peculiar type of the family to which Hypsiprymnus belongs, and as bearing, in respect of number of teeth, the kind of relation to that genus which Dromicia bears to the other Phalangers, and derodata to Petaurista. Mr. Waterhouse includes the Kangaroo-rats among the Macropedide: Plagiaulax could never be classed among the Kangaroos. But, al- though inferred to have been allied to Hypsiprymnus, the fossils were generically widely distinct from the existing Kangaroo-rats. A great many links of the chain which would place them in connexion are unknown to us, some of which may yet turn up in the fossil state. The species of Plagiaulax must have presented a form of which there is nothing to remind us among livmg marsupials. This is indicated by the extreme shortening, compression, and depth of the lower jaw, together with the sudden upward curve of the in- cisor, and still more by the depressed position and backward pro- jection of the condyle. For aught that we know to the contrary, they may have had the volant habits of the Flyimg-Phalangers, and flitted from tree to tree among the oolite forests by means of parachute-folds of their skin. As the Kangaroo-rats are strictly herbivorous, gnawing scratched-up roots, it may be inferred of 1857. FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 2795 Plagiaulax that the species were herbivorous or frugivorous. I can see nothing in the character of their teeth to indicate that they were either insectivorous or omnivorous. The larger species, PJ. Becklesii, 1 have named after Mr. Beckles, the discoverer, to whose energetic and well-considered explorations Paleeontology is indebted for so many and important additions to the Upper Oolite (Purbeck) fauna, after the efforts of the Geological Survey Department, specially directed to the same object, under so able a head as the late Professor E. Forbes, had proved unsuccessful. This species equalled the size of a squirrel, or nearly that of Petaurus macrourus*, one of the Flying-Phalangers.. The other species was very much smaller; and, being one-half the linear dimensions, was probably about one-twelfth of the bulk of the former, or near the size of the “ Pigmy Flying Opossum,” dcrodbata pygmea. About the mammalian associates of Plagiaulax 1 abstain from making any remarks beyond the few which are introductory to this paper, as the fossils will so soon pass, for a detailed description, into the hands of Professor Owen, who has already designated one of the largest of the new forms by the generic name of Triconodon. The Purbeck mammalian genera announced up to the present date are therefore Spalacotherium, Triconodon, and Plagiaulaz. There are, however, some points of general geological interest, on which I may be permitted to make a few observations. The first is the relation of resemblance which the molar teeth of Plagiaulax minor bear to those of the Triassic Microlestes antiquus of Plieninger. The agreement in general form is so close, that, had detached molars of both been met with in beds of the same forma- tion, they might have been taken for back and front, or upper and lower teeth of the same, or of nearly allied, species. The essential crown-characters are the same in both, namely, two opposed longi- tudinal marginal ridges, more or less lobed or crenated, and separated by an intermediate chasm or depressed dise+. A solution, however approximative, of so ancient and obscure a mammal as Microlestes is not devoid of interest. Plieninger considered it to be predaceous, hence the name; other naturalists were disposed to regard it as leaning, however remotely, to the omnivorous Pachyderms, or omni- vorous Insectivora ; while Professor Owen, in recognizing at once the mammalian character of the teeth, admitted them to be distinct from * The skeleton so named in the Cat. (Osteol. Mus.) Roy. Coll. Surgs., No. 1849. + Judging from the very careful drawings and casts, the two teeth of Micro- lestes, figured in Lyell’s ‘ Manual of Geology,’ would appear, as there surmised, to indicate at least distinct species. The larger tooth (fig. 442. p. 343 of that work) resembles the penultimate molar of Plagiaulax Becklesii, regarded in the side- aspect, inner surface. There is in both an anterior talon, forming an accessory lobule where it joins on with the anterior inner tubercle. But I can detect no- thing in either like the basal cingulum referred to by Mr. Waterhouse (Joc. cit.). Fig. 441, representing the first-discovered tooth of Microlestes antiguus, crown- aspect, is the one which bears the closest resemblance to the last true molar of Plagiaulax minor. 276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [Mar. 1], anything fossil or recent known to him*. Pictet, in his ‘ Paléonto- logie,’ doubtingly includes Microlestes among marsupials, for reasons which he does not state, upon the authority of some of the German describers, whose memoirs I have not been able to consult. Bronn notices Microlestes, in the ‘ Letheea Geognostica,’ as being probably a predaceous marsupial (3rd edit. vol. ii. p. 122). The next point to which I would solicit attention is, that Pla- giaulax would seem in some respects to furnish a crucial test of the soundness of certain generalizations which have been put forward regarding the order of successive appearance of mammalia upon the surface of the earth. It has been maintained by British paleeontologists and comparative physiologists t of the highest authority, that, while there is no good proof of a serial progressive development from the lower to the higher forms, there is evidence of another order of development or successive passage, namely from the general to the special, as we descend from the oldest to the modern period. It is urged by the advocates of this doctrine, that the Mammalia of the Eocene period assimilated more to the general plan of the archetype and to the embryonic condition of the vertebrate organization ; while the Mammalia of modern times successively furnish more and mere numerous examples of deviation from the archetype, all tending to- wards special adaptation. Among other arguments, they insist that the earliest Eocene Mammalia, both carnivorous and herbivorous, possessed, in most cases, the full complement of teeth; while forms characteristic of later times, such as the Felide and Ruminantia, are remarkable for special suppression of these organs. If the generaliza- tion were really of as wide an application as has been claimed for it, we ought to find evidence of closer adherence to the general arche- typic model the further back we recede in time. But so far is Pla- giaulax, at present the oldest well-ascertained herbivorous mammal yet discovered, from giving any countenance to the doctrine, that it actually presents the most specialized exception, so to speak, from the rule to be met with in the whole range of the Marsupialia, fossil or recent. Jt had the smallest number of true molars of any known genus in that subclass, six at least of the normal number of incisors being also suppressed ; thus exhibiting, at the most remote end of the chain, the very characters which, under the generalization in question, we might @ priori have expected to encounter at the near end, among existing marsupials. * Cited in Lyell’s Manual, 5th edition, p. 343. + Carpenter, Principles of Compar. Physiology, 4th edit. 1854, pp. 107-111. The doctrine here referred to is developed in considerable detail by Dr. Carpenter in the passage above indicated. In a note (Joc. cit. p. 111) he disclaims it as having originated with himself: “ The principle expounded in this paragraph has been prominently enunciated and illustrated by Professor Owen in various parts of his writings. The remarkable facts here stated with respect to the dentition of mammalia are contained in his article ‘Teeth’ in the Cyclopedia of Anatomy and Physiology, vol. iv.” Some interesting illustrations bearing upon the reten- tion of the typical formula of dentition in the placental mammals of the Eocene and Miocene periods, and upon the departure from it in modern mammals, are adduced by Professor Owen in his memoir ‘ On the Dentition of Phacochcerus,’ Phil. Trans. for 1850, p. 495.—H. F., June 20th. 1857.] FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 277 The curious fact, that only lower jaws should have turned up among the Stonesfield mammalian remains, has often been the subject of speculation or remark. The same, to a certain extent, bas held good with the remains found in the Purbeck beds. Among the de- termined fossils, lower jaws predominate largely. But some upper maxillaries have been met with, and, while writing, I have received intimation of the discovery of more. Among the undetermined remains there is a considerable number of other bones of small ani- mals, many of them probably mammals, but they are seldom or ever perfect. In these minute creatures, unless the bone be complete, and, supposing it to be a long bone, with both its articular surfaces perfect, it is almost hopeless, or at any rate very discouraging, to attempt to make out the creature which yielded it; whereas the smallest fragment of a jaw with a minute tooth in it, speaks volumes of evidence at the first glance. This I believe to be one great reason why we hear so much of jaw-remains, and so little of the other bones. For, as an inferior maxillary is to the other bones of the skeleton in the ratio of about 1 to 250, ceteris paribus, a large number of these should be encountered far every lower jaw that turns up. No indi- cation has yet been met with at Purbeck of the bone of a good-sized terrestrial mammal. But I do not consider the negative evidence in this case to be decisive of their non-existence. The matrix of the so-called “‘ Dirt-bed No. 93,” by which most of the mammal remains have been yielded, is a whitish-grey, fine-grained marl, full of the exuviee of freshwater animals, hardening into a kind of stone when the moisture is expelled by desiccation, but very bibulous, and readily becoming pasty, after immersion in water. It has properly no claim to the designation of a “‘dirt-bed,” or ‘ancient vegetable soil,” as there is rarely a speck of vegetable matter to be seen in the numerous specimens containing bone-remains which have passed through m hands*. It appears to me to present more the character of the deposit near the margin of a patch of fresh water, and that the probable explanation of the association of so many small bones of minute mammals and lizards is that they were the floating objects most readily drifted to the margin by a surface-ripple from wind, or by a wave-eddy. In India, in the tanks, or wherever running water falls into an artificial lake, numerous remains may be observed along the margin, of the bones of frogs, lizards, mice, and musk-rats, forming a more or less continuous edging, without the admixture of large bones, which lie in abundance below the deeper water. The former float and are drifted to the margin by the action of the wind, and rest there. M. Lartet pointed out to me, in the rich Falunian deposit of Seissan, certain parts of the lacustrine bed where skeletons of large terrestrial animals, such as Mastodon and Rhinoceros, are more or less abundant; while in other situations near the margin immense * I am informed by the Assistant-Secretary, however, that the hand-specimens of this bed, in which Spalacotherium occurred in 1854, were of a dark colour and contained vegetable remains, together with freshwater shells. See Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. x. p. 423. 278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL Society. [Mar. 11, Figs. 1-6. Plagiaulae Becklesii (figs. 1-5), and Hypsiprymnus Gai- mardi (fig. 6). Figs. 1 & 4 show the entire right ramus of the Lower Jaw, in two pieces, on reversed slabs of the same piece of matrix. (Magnified two diameters.) [Figs. 1 & 4 represent the same right ramus of the lower jaw seen on the opposite surfaces of a split stone, the two taken together affording data for a complete restoration of the jaw.] Fig. 1. a, 6, e'’. Outer side of the anterior portion of the right ramus of lower jaw; magnified two diameters. a, 6, outer side. 0, 0’, d’ e’, impression of inner side. a. Incisor. b, ec. Line of vertical fracture behind the premolars. d'. Impression in the matrix of the condyle. e'. Impression of top of coronoid process. o'. Broken-off inflected fold of inner margin buried in the matrix. m. Place of the two molars. pm. Three premolars, the third or last divided by a crack. Fig. 2. f. Section of the anterior piece of the jaw at the fracture 6, c; x, inner surface ; y, outer. The notch at the top is formed by one of the sockets of the double-fanged true molar. Fig. 3. g. Section of the hinder piece near 4, c; 2, inner surface; y, outer surface. Fig. 4. a’, d. Inner side of the posterior portion of the same lower jaw on the opposite slab of stone; 5, d, e, inner side; 0, a’, A, cast and impression of outer side. a’, Outline of the incisor restored. b, c. Line of vertical fracture. d. Condyle. e. Coronoid process *. h. Impression of the three premolars on the matrix. i. Empty sockets of the two true molars. n. Orifice of dentary canal. o. Indication of the raised and inflected fold of the posterior inner margin. Fig. 5. k. Third or largest premolar, showing the seven diagonal grooves; magnified 53 dia- meters. Fig. 6. 7. Corresponding premolar in the recent Australian Hypsiprymnus Gaimardi, showing the seven vertical grooves ; magnified 34 diameters. [These illustrations have been obligingly lent by John Murray, Esq., F.G.S. ] * The artist has made the point of the coronoid (e) project too much back- wards, and the curve of the posterior margin too great; the line being nearly vertical in the original. The projection of the condyle behind the coronoid mar- gin is more considerable than is shown by the figure, and the neck longer. 1857. | FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 279 Figs. 7, 8, 9, & 10.—Plagiaulax Becklesii. Portion of the right ramus of a lower jaw, and different views of the two true molars. (Fig. 7. A portion of the jaw, with two molars in situ, magnified 10 diameters ; fig. 8, inner side of the molars, magnified 10 diameters ; fig. 9, outer side, 7 dia- meters; fig. 10, summits of the crowns of the molars, 7 diameters.) UY. fy y// . Fig. 7. a. Anterior margin of the coronoid process. 6. Fractured posterior margin. pm. Impression of the last premolar, ml. First true molar. m2. Second true molar. { a. Anterior inner point of penultimate molar. | 6, Posterior inner point of the same molar, showing the disc of wear. . } ec. Anterior outer point. Figs: 8, 9, & 10. d. Posterior outer edge. ee. Fractured surface of interior edge of the last molar. ff. Ground surface of outer edge of the same. VOL. XIII.—PART I. x 280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL socreTy. [Mar. 11, Figs. 11, 12, & 13. —Plagiaulax Becklesii. Fragment consisting of the anterior portion of the right ramus of the lower jaw. Magni- fied 2 diameters. Fig. 11. Outer surface. Fig. 12. Inner surface. Fig. 13. Vertical view, seen from above. \x - - meee Se a. Incisor. pm. Premolars. 6. Symphysial harmonia. c. Mentary foramen. Fig. 14.—Plagiaulax Becklesii. The left ramus of the lower jaw, nearly perfect, showing the outer surface. Magnified 4 dia- meters. . Incisor. . Condyle. :. Coronoid process (broken at the edges.) . Inferior boundary ridge. . e. Depression on the base of the coronoid. ao oR 1857. | FALCONER—PLAGIAULAX. 281 Fig. 15.—Plagiaulax minor. Outside of the right ramus of the lower jaw ; and the two molars. Magnified. + ¢ Lee [ All the teeth in this specimen are in place and well preserved. The hinder part of the jaw-bone, with the ascending ramus and posterior angle, are broken away. | a, 6. Right ramus of lower jaw, with all the teeth; magnified 4 diameters. a. Incisor with point broken off. a‘, impression of same, showing that the inner side near the apex was hollowed out in a longitudinal direction. 5. Offset of coronoid, the rest of which is wanting. m,m. The two true molars. pm. The four premolars. c. The first molar; magnified 8 diameters. Upper figure, the crown. Lower figure, side- view. d, Second molar; the crown and side-view. e. The length of the jaw, natural size. [ Woodcut fig. 15 has been kindly lent by John Murray, Esq., F.G.S.] _ Figs. 16 & 17.—Teeth of Microlestes antiquus of Plieninger, JSrom the Upper Trias of Wirtemberg. Magnified. Fig. 16. 6. Crown of the smaller molar *. Fig. 17. e. Crown of larger tooth t, with part of the crown broken off. [The cuts, figs. 16 & 17, have been kindly lent by John Murray, Esq., F.G.S.] * See Lyell’s Manual Elem. of Geol. 5th edit. fig. 441, 4, p. 343. + Ibid. fig. 442. =x 2 282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [ Mar. 25, quantities occur of the bones of small animals, such as frogs, lizards, shrews, and minute rodents, which may be taken up by the handful unmixed with larger bones. The mammaliferous band “No. 93,” where most productive, does not exceed 5 inches in thickness. If the excavations could be carried into a line of section where the bed is thicker, it does not seem too much to hope that they might be re- warded by the discovery of larger mammals, when we consider the numerous acquisitions to Paleeontology which have been made within the last two months alone from Purbeck, and the improbability that a fauna already proved to have been so extensive, should have been restricted to small creatures only. Further, where herbivorous mam- mals are shown to have existed, it would seem in the highest degree improbable that they should have been limited to a single genus con- taining two small species like Plagiaulaz. Marcu 25, 1857. The Rev. John Montague and William Sowerby, Esq., were elected Fellows. The following communications were read :— 1. PaticutHyotocic Notes. No. 9. On some FisH-REMAINS Srom the neighbourhood of Luptow. By Sir Puitie DE Mapas Grey Ecerton, Bart., M.P., F.R.S., F.G.S. [Plates IX. and X.] At the request of Sir Roderick Murchison I have undertaken the examination of some specimens of Fossil Fishes, discovered by Mr. Salwey and Mr. Lightbody—by the former in the Old Red Sand- stone of Acton Beauchamp, and by the latter in the Upper Bone- beds in the neighbourhood of Ludlow. I have performed this task with some reluctance, in consequence of the scanty number and de- fective condition of the specimens submitted to examination, being strongly impressed with the inconvenience which results from the attempt to define genera and species upon insufficient data, the cha- racters so expressed being liable hereafter to alteration or modifica- tion, as our knowledge of the subject becomes enlarged by the discovery of more perfect materials. It is no less fortunate than singular that, concomitant with the earliest discovery of Cephalaspid remains in England, the contem- poraneous beds in Scotland should have furnished the clue to their true character; it is still more singular, but less fortunate, that, although so many years have elapsed since Professor Agassiz first recognized their Ichthyic affinities, and although so many zealous and talented explorers have since been ransacking the English locali- 1857.) EGERTON—FISH-REMAINS FROM LUDLOW. 283 ties, so far as I am aware, not one single specimen has been brought to light which would have enabled even that distinguished naturalist to pronounce a positive opinion as to its place in the scale of nature. The genus Cephalaspis is typified by the Scotch species named, after Sir Charles Lyell, Cephalaspis Lyellii. This species, as recog- nized by the cephalic buckler, is of frequent occurrence in the English beds ; and is associated with other forms, not found in the Scotch beds, differing considerably in general character, but agreeing to acertain extent in structural details. Professor Agassiz refers these to the same genus with hesitation and reservation, for, having described them as Cephalaspis Lewisii and C. Lloydii, he says*, “‘ It appears to me probable that some day, when better known, these two species should be separated generically from Cephalaspis Lyellit.”’ Following out this suggestion, Dr. R. Kner has proposed for these and some allied forms the generic title Pteraspis, a name which has been ac- cepted and adopted by Professor Huxley and Mr. Salter, in describing some new species discovered by Mr. Banks in the neighbourhood of Kington}. The materials submitted to me for examination are scanty, and afford little scope for detailed descriptions; at the same time they exhibit new characters of sufficient importance to merit notice. CrepHaLaspis SALWEYI, spec. nov. Pl. X. fig. 1. I will first speak of the specimen found by Mr. Salwey, of Acton Beauchamp. It exhibits the central and greater portion of a cephalic buckler of a large species of Cephalaspis. The peripheral parts are wanting, as are also the posterior angles of the buckler, leaving it doubtful whether or not the latter were extended to form the sharp spurs so remarkable in Cephalaspis Lyell. The length of the shield from the snout to the posterior angle of the occipital crest is 34 inches; the breadth from the median line between the orbits to the margin of the shield 1,4, inch, which gives 2,2, inches for the entire breadth. The space between the orbits is } an inch, and the transverse diameter of the orbit ;3; of an inch. From the snout to a point on the median line between the orbits is 152, inch, and from the same point to the termination of the occipital crest is 2 inches. On comparing these measurements with the corresponding dimen- sions of a specimen of Cephalaspis Lyelli of the same comparative size, it will be seen that the buckler of this species is more elongated, the orbits more distant from each other, and their position more ad- vanced. It may be said, and perhaps with justice, that Mr. Sal- wey’s specimen, from its imperfect condition, does not afford a fair standard of comparison, and that it may only be a portion of a large individual of the known species. I have already stated that the peripheral parts are wanting, and therefore I do not insist on the measurements in which they are implicated. There is, however, a constant character on which to rely in the size and relative position : * Poissons Fossiles, ii. p. 152. tT Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 93. 284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOcIETY. [ Mar. 25, of the orbits. The diameter of each eye-socket in Cephalaspis Lyellii, as compared to the interspace between them, is as one to one, whereas in the new species it is as three to five, and this without any disloca- tion or fracture, on comparison of the specimens compared, by which to account for so great a discrepancy. Some doubt has hitherto been entertained as to the true homology of the orifices which I have considered as the orbital depressions, in consequence of the absence of these features in Cephalaspis (Pteraspis) Lewisii and Lloydit. Mr. Salwey’s specimen resolves this doubt satisfactorily, for it ex- hibits unmistakeably the cast of the sclerotic coat of the eye-ball (Pl. X. fig. 1 6). There remains another character to be mentioned corroborative of the specific distinction of Mr. Salwey’s Cephalaspis. It is need- less to occupy time with a description of the structure of the several bony laminz of which the buckler is composed, which corresponds with that already published of the analogous parts in C. Lyellit. There is, however, a striking difference in the surface-ornament of the outer or dermal layer. ‘This does not present a continuous stra- tum of enamel investing the subjacent bone, nor does it exhibit any of the parallel striations seen in other species of the genus; but the enamel occurs in small drops or splashes, scattered here and there irregularly over the surface, resembling somewhat the ornament in the head-bones of Coccosteus ; the granules, however, being fewer in number and less regular in shape and disposition (Pl. X. fig. 1 ¢). It is much to be desired that other specimens of this species may be brought to light, since much remains to be known as to the form of the shield, which I am inclined to think differed considerably from the regular crescentic outlines of Cephalaspis Lyellii. I have named this species Cephalaspis Salweyz, after its discoverer. CrepHALaspis Murcuisonl, spec. nov. Pl. IX. fig. 1. Two specimens collected by Mr. Lightbody in a bed below the Paper-mill on the Teme at Ludlow afford presumptive evidence of a new species of Cephalaspid, about the size of Cephalaspis Lyellii. One shows the concave inner surface of the cranial cavity, the other is a cast of the buckler of a smaller individual with some portions of the bone still adhermg. The larger one, being the more perfect, is selected for description; but so tar as the state of pre- servation of the specimens will admit of comparison, there is a perfect agreement between the two. The occipital crest is wanting ; but, as the posterior margin of the buckler is preserved up to a point in close proximity to the crest, the comparative measurements will be taken from that point. From thence to the extremity of the snout the dimensions are 2 inches ;4,ths. From a central point on the median line, between the orbits, to the snout, is 1 inch ;4,ths; and from the same point to the hinder border of the shield, ! inch ;jth. The diameter across the line of the orbits is 2 inches ;5ths. The in- terspace between the orbits is rather less than the diameter of the orbit. As several of these dimensions must necessarily vary, subject to 1857. | EGERTON—FISH-REMAINS FROM LUDLOW. 285 the various degrees of compression and consequent expansion to which the buckler has been exposed, no great reliance can be placed upon them ; but, on comparing them with a specimen of Cephalaspis Lyellii, as near as may be in the same condition of preservation, Mr. Lightbody’s species very nearly resembled the typical species in the form of the anterior portion of the cephalic disk. The orbits, how- ever, appear to have been relatively larger, more approximated, and more distant from the snout. The most striking feature in this Ce- phalaspis is the form of the hinder margin of the shield. In Cepha- laspis Lyellii this margin advances forward from either side of the occipital crest to a considerable distance, and thence sweeps back- wards to form the lateral armatures of the shield, like two high arches springing from a central pillar. The curvature of this border is so great that it would be indicated by a very small portion of this part of the shield. In the specimen under consideration nearly an inch of the border is preserved on either side the occipital region, apparently in its natural position, without any appreciable signs of accidental fracture or tension. The curvature of these portions is so slight, that, if produced to meet the periphery of the shield, the result would be that, in lieu of the sharp elongated spines so characteristic of Cephalaspis Lyellii, the posterior external angles would be short and blunt, and the general outline of buckler rather semicircular than crescentic. The posterior margin of the shield is strengthened by a thickening of the bone, forming a marginal rib similar to that described by the late Mr. Hugh Miller and myself in the carapace of the genus Pterichthys. The structure of the bones in this species is remarkably coarse and fibrous, and the vascular impressions are large and sinuous. The characters of the dermal integument are not dis- closed in either of the specimens of this species, but the subjacent layer exhibits the curious polyhedral structure common to this genus and the allied Pteraspides. One remarkable feature, as seen in the larger of Mr. Lightbody’s species and having reference to the generic peculiarities of the Cepha- laspis, remains to be noticed. In all the specimens of the genus I have hitherto examined, the eyes would seem to have been situated in foramina in the bony envelope of the cranial cavity; but there is evidence here to show that the base of the orbit was closed by a layer of bone, and that the eye-ball was lodged in a complete bony socket: Pl. IX. fig. 1. It is much to be desired that some additional evidence may be obtained to complete the specific details of this interesting Cepha- laspid ; in the meantime, as I have little doubt of its specific dis- crepancy from Cephalaspis Lyellii, 1 should wish to dedicate this new member of the genus to the distinguished author of the ‘ Silu- rian System,’ by the name of Cephalaspis Murchisoni. The specimens next to be described are from dark micaceous shales in the cutting of the Hereford Railway at Ludlow. CEPHALASPIS ORNATUS, spec. nov. Pl. IX. figs. 2, 3. These reveal another species of Cephalaspid, well characterized 286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. | Mar. 25, by the ornament of the dermal covering of the shield. In this species the centres of the polygonal ossicles of the second stratum of the buckler are elevated into distinct umbones, and over these a thin dermal layer is spread, thickly covered by small granular asperities. From the combination of the two characters, a very orna- mental design results, which can be recognized in a mere fragment of the shield (Pl. IX. fig. 3, 5), and warrants the designation of Cephalaspis ornatus, which I propose for this species It differs in other respects from the species already described. The orbits are small and more distant from each other than they are in Cephalaspis Murchisoni. In the slight amount of curvature of the posterior margins of the shield, and in the thickening of the margin, it agrees with the corresponding parts of Cephalaspis Murchisoni. The di- mensions are as follow :—from the snout to the posterior edge of the shield 1 inch and nine-tenths,—of this the anterior portion from the snout to a point on the median line between the orbits is eight-tenths, and from thence to the nape eleven-tenths. The exact width across the line of the orbits is not ascertainable: it probably corresponded pretty nearly with the length of the shield. These specimens are from a more argillaceous stratum than those above described, and it is possible that its preservative properties may have protected delicate characters such as the skin-ornaments, which have perished in the more arenaceous beds from which the other specimens were collected. The other discrepancies are not so decided but that, should a better-preserved specimen of Cephalaspis Murchisoni reveal the dermal characters above alluded to, the spe- cific name ornatus may be cancelled, and the characters here de- tailed be appended to the specific attributes of Cephalaspis Murchi- sont. AUCHENASPIS SALTERI, gen. et spec. nov. Pl. IX. figs. 4 & 5. The same argillaceous beds in the Ludlow railway-cutting from which the specimens last described were derived have furnished two other specimens of great interest. They are both tolerably perfect, and correspond so closely in every particular, that it matters little which is selected for description. What is written concerning one is corroborated by the other. I take then the first that presents itself, and I find a Cephalaspis in miniature, a pigmy not larger than a fourpenny-piece. The outline of the shield, the eye-sockets, and the nasal depressions, are all clearly defined. If size were a cri- terion of species, it would be undoubtedly a new one. Questions, however, of age and growth (of which we have as yet had no evi- dence in this group of extinct fishes) have to be duly considered before relative magnitude can be taken as a specific character. On examining the specimen more closely, a new feature is observed. Behind the shield, and united to its posterior margin by a distinctly marked suture, is situated a broad plate divided into two lateral halves by a prolongation of the occipital crest (Pl. IX. figs. 4 & 5). These plates are nearly coincident in width with the diameter of the shield, and in length equal two-thirds of its antero-posterior dimen- sions. The evidence of the Scotch specimens of Cephalaspis Lyellit 1857. | EGERTON—FISH-REMAINS FROM LUDLOW. 287 assures us that, in that, the type of the genus, the cephalic buckler was immediately succeeded by the scaly covering of the trunk, without the intervention of a nuchal plate. Such a deviation from the type is of too much importance to be considered a mere specific character; if substantiated, it implies generic distinction. At first I imagined it might be an embryonic character, an idea somewhat strengthened by the small size of the specimens. Should, how- ever, the cranial shield of Cephalaspis have resulted from the co- alescence of several plates arising from distinct centres of ossifica- tion, appreciable in the earlier stages of development, although sub- sequently obliterated, the structure of all the plates should be ho- mogeneous. This is not the case: the coarse fibrous character is limited to the cranial shield, and the posterior plates seem to have been composed of a compact material, more analogous in struc- ture to true dermal plates. The specimens leave it in doubt whether the post-cephalic plate was single or double. The occipital crest extends backwards nearly to the extremity of the nuchal plate, and in this the fibrous structure is evident, but there is no appear- ance of any inosculation between this material and that constituting the plates. It is therefore probable that this prolongation of the occipital region of the shield gave attachment to a pair of plates, one on either side, rather than that it constituted an integral portion of a single plate. In selecting a generic title for this interesting form, I am desirous of expressing the peculiar structure above described ; I propose, therefore, to call the genus duchenaspis. Of the two specimens submitted to examination, one is rather dis- torted by pressure (fig. 5), the other retains its original figure (fig. 4). I select the latter, therefore, for those details which have reference to form. The outline of the shield anteriorly is nearly semicir- cular. From the base of the occipital crest to the snout, it measures 8 millimetres ; of this the anterior portion from between the orbits to the snout measures 5 millimetres. The diameter across the base, a little in advance of the lateral posterior angles, is 12 millimetres, or nearly half an inch. Each nuchal plate is 5 millimetres in breadth at its junction with the shield, and about 4 millimetres in length. The posterior angles of the shield are short; they project outwards and backwards beyond the anterior margins of the nuchal plates. The posterior border of the shield on either side the occipital crest is but slightly curved; it has a thickened margin, slightly bevelled poste- riorly, for the attachment of the nuchal plates. In these respects it closely resembles the corresponding parts of Cephalaspis Mur- chison and C. ornatus. 'The texture of the bone is exceedingly coarse, with the exception of the peripheral portion, which is finer in grain, and appears to have been invested with an outer layer of some thickness, forming a prominent border to the shield. None of these structures bear any evidence of immaturity. The nuchal plates are rather broader than long ; in form they very much resemble the opercula of a Leptolepis or Philodophorus. The under surface is traversed by a series of vascular grooves, di- verging outwards from the inner anterior angles. The substance 288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [ Mar. 25, of the plates is finely granular, and the exterior surface is charac- terized by minute transverse striations; whether the latter appear- ance is attributable to a thin exterior integument or not, can only be decided by microscopic examination ; indeed, many of the de- tails I have alluded to are so minute. that the aid of a pocket lens is not sufficient to enable me to offer them with any degree of certainty, and the specimens are too precious to be mutilated for more exact microscopical scrutiny. As Mr. Salter first directed my attention to the structural peculiarities these specimens present, I wish to name the species Auchenaspis Salteri. Tt remains for time and industry to determine whether the species described above as Cephalaspis Murchisoni and Cephalaspis ornatus rightly belong to that genus, or whether they ought not to be re- ferred to the genus Auchenaspis. The peculiar form of the hinder margin of the cephalic buckler, so different from that of the typical’ Cephalaspides, and yet corresponding with that of duchenaspis, gives some substance to the idea that it may have reference to the attach- ment of nuchal plates; and if so, these species must necessarily be included in that genus. Much remains to be done with reference to the structural anatomy and true affinities of this curious family— subjects far beyond my grasp; but which I trust ere long will be grappled with and elucidated by Professor Huxley, who has already bestowed some time upon them, and than whom no one is better qualified for bringing the inquiry to a successful issue. Associated with the specimens described above, both in the railway- cutting at Ludlow, and in the bed of the River Teme, Mr. Light- body has discovered some other remains of fishes worthy of notice, although too fragmentary to be accurately characterized. Of these, four specimens are portions of jaws corresponding generi- cally with those described by Professor Agassiz under the name of Plectrodus and resembling the Plectrodus mirabilis rather than P. pleiopristis*. Although at first sight the large lamiary teeth appear single, yet on closer examination the fractured surfaces are distinguishable whence the lateral denticles distinctive of the genus have been broken off. These teeth are grooved longitudinally, a character not well shown in the specimens figured in the ‘ Silurian System.’ Fig. 4 is from the railroad, and figs. 2 & 3 from the fish- bed on the river. The remaining specimens are Ichthyodorulites. One resembles Onchus Murchisoni. The longitudinal ribs (fig. 6) certainly ap- pear coarser than those in the specimens of this species already figured ; but this may be accounted for by the fact that the specimen only shows the dorsum of the ray, that portionin which the surface- character is always more strongly marked than on the lateral and posterior parts. This specimen is from the argillaceous beds in the railway-cutting at Ludlow. A second species from the same locality appears to be undescribed * Sil. Syst. p. 606, pl. 4. figs. 14-17, 21, 25, 26, & figs. 18, 19, 22-24. Vol XI PL.IX. © Quart. Journ Geol. So W. West imp Tith G We! Vv. HENASPIS AUC > & fal ASPI sage-beds (Tlestones) near Ludlow. EPHAL he Pa 1 ( S rw) trom. t by acai s ieee atk: 4. eh a | _—Th 1) vere Ath? ny id @ .' off A: ae Quart Journ. Geol Soc Vol XI PIX. W West inp FISH REMAINS. from the Old Red of Acton Beauchamp, ®. from the Tlestones near Ludlow. 1857. | EGERTON—FISH-REMAINS FROM LUDLOW. 289 (fig. 7). It is about an inch and three-quarters in length, but is imperfect at the lower end. It is much curved, and the posterior edge is armed. Both these characters separate it from the genus Onchus, as now restricted*. The longitudinal ribs are fine and numerous, and show a tendency to tuberculation not found in Onchus. Near the base and in the neighbourhood of the posterior margin, the tubercles are distinct. The ribs, although continuous, are constricted at intervals, as in the genus Ctenacanthus. In many of these particulars this ray corresponds with the genus Byssacan- thus; but it differs in being compressed rather than cylindrical. It has some resemblance to the posterior part of an Evismacanthus spine. A specimen (fig. 5) from the grit-bed opposite the Paper-Mill, in which Cephalaspis Murchisoni was found, much resembles the above. It is however shorter, more curved, and broader at the base. These characters are such as would attach to the spme of the second dorsal fin, and are not to be relied upon as specific differences, espe- cially since in the more significant features there is a close approxi- mation between the two specimens. EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES IX. & X. Pl. IX. fig. 1. Cephalaspis Murchisoni ; inside of cara- | From opposite the Paper- pace. Mill, near Ludlow. 2. C. ornatus; outside of carapace. 3 a. C. ornatus; anterior portion of carapace. 3 6. The same; portion of the surface-orna- | From the Railway- ment, magnified. t cutting, near Lud- 4a. Auchenaspis Salteri; carapace. low. 46. The same ; magnified. | 5. A. Salteri; another specimen. J Pl. X. fig. 1a. Cephalaspis Salweyi ; carapace. Prom the wold Red Sandstone at Acton Beauchamp. } 14. The same; eye-capsule. le. The same; portion of the surface-orna- ment, magnified. 2a. Plectrodus ; portion of jaw. 26. Part of the same, magnified. | 3a. Plectrodus; part of a jaw, with the im- 5 rom opposite the | pression of a larger portion. Paper-Mill, near 36. The same; magnified. Ludlow. 3c. The same, end-view, magnified. 4a. Plectrodus, portion of jaw. From the Railway-cutting, near 4. Part of the same, magnified. Ludlow. . 5a. Ichthyodorulite. 5 6. Rugosity of the ridges, magnifie 6a. Onchus Murchisoni?; fragment. 6. Portion of the rugose interior surface, magnified. | 7a. Ichthyodorulite. Sas the Rail- | e | From opposite the Paper-Mill. 76. Rugosity of the ridges, magnified. way-cutting. 7c. Cast of portion of the rugose interior surface, magnified. * Poissons du Vieux Grés Rouge, p. 117. 290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. {[ Mar. 25, 2. Note on the Relative Position of the Strata, near LupLow, containing the tcutTuyouites described by Sir P. Kgerton*. By Sir Roperick Murcuison, V.P.G.S. THE localities near Ludlow which afforded the fossil fishes described by Sir P. Egerton were examined by me in July 1856, accompanied by Mr. Lightbody, Professor Ramsay, Mr. Salter, and Mr. Aveline ; and the relations of the strata were briefly explained in a notice offered to the British Association at the Cheltenham Meeting. As the abstract of that communication, published in the ‘ Athenzeum,’ was somewhat inaccurate, and does not convey my matured opinion, I here first place on record the statement which I intend to publish in a second edition of my work ‘ Siluria.’ The section of the railway-cutting north of Ludlow exhibits an upeast by which some of the highest beds of the Ludlow Rock are brought up against Old Red Sandstone on the north-west. This small insulated mass is manifestly distinct from, and younger than the formerly described bone-bed of the Upper Ludlow Rockr+. That stratum, as described in my work, is overlaid by the Downton- castle building-stone and other grey strata constituting the lower portion of the ‘ Tilestones,’ whilst this band at the railway, in all about 6 feet thick, is at once conformably surmounted on the south- east by micaceous sandstone and red shale or marl. Though higher in the series, this thin band still contains some characteristic fossils of the lower course, such as the Plectrodus, sp., Onchus Murchisoni, Ag., and the Lingula cornea, Sow. On the other hand, the following species are unknown in any inferior stratum, viz. Cephalaspis orna- tus, Egerton}, duchenaspis Salteri, Kgerton§, Onehus or Byssacan- thus, sp., together with Pterygotus anglicus, Ag., and Eurypterus pygmeus, Salter||. The two last-mentioned fossils, having been re- cognized by Mr. Salter, are about to be described in full in the De- cades of the Survey. The natural features on the right bank of the Teme, ‘south of Ludlow, 7. e. between Ludford and the Paper-Mill, offer a more satisfactory succession. They prove that the original bone-bed, sloping down to the south-east at a very gentle angle, is covered by strata representing the Downton-castle stone, the whole passing under brownish, micaceous thin-bedded, sandstones, which, to the east of the Corn-mill, are covered by red marl or shale, with minute green concretions or cornstones. These strata are so much obscured by drift and gravel, that the observer can detect the beds here and there only, where the water is very low. It is therefore probable that the thin fossiliferous band exposed at the railway, the inter- mediate range of which is hidden by detritus, may still be discovered on the banks or in the bed of the River Teme. However this ma be, another and still higher fossil band was discovered by Mr. Light- body, and this is the ‘‘grit-bed,”’ the fossil fishes of which are also * See above, p. 282. t Sil. Syst. pp. 197, &c., and Siluria, pp. 137, &c. ~ See above, p. 285. § See above, p. 286. || Quart. Journ, Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 99. 1857. | BOLLAERT—MASTODON REMAINS. 291 described by Sir P. Egerton*. It is a whitish-grey micaceous sand- stone containing crustacean fragments and coprolites, as well as fishes, with several of the fossils before mentioned. Seeing that the Plectrodus mirabilis?, Onchus Murchisoni’, and Lingula cornea, that characterize the lowest of these bone-beds, are still present in this higher stratum, I might naturally class this mi- caceous grey sandstone, though it be associated with some red and green marls, as the last link of the Silurian series of life. But the Cephalaspis Murchisoni, Egerton+, may be rather considered to in- dicate that this stratum marks a true passage upwards into the Old Red or Devonian System, while it constitutes the uppermost layer of the so-called ‘‘ Tilestones.”’ The copious development of red marls, thick-bedded sandstones, and cornstones which follow, with the Cephalaspis Lyell, Pteraspis Lloydii, &c., form the great overlying masses of Old Red Sandstone. In conclusion, I would remark, that the Tilestones of Shropshire and Herefordshire, which connect the Silurian and Devonian rocks, may, according to the predominance of certain fossils, be classed either with the inferior or the superior system. Their maximum thick- ness may be considered to be about 40 or 50 feet. 3. On the Occurrence of Bonrs of Mastopon in Cute. By W. Bo.useErt, Esq., F.R.G.S., Corr. Mem. University of Chile, &c. [Communicated by Prof. Owen, F.G.S.] [ Abridged. ] Burt few instances of the occurrence of fossil bones on the Western side of the Andes have been recorded. During my late visit to South America, I made inquiries as to the existence of fossil bones in the Isthmus of Darien, but I could not learn that any had been met with, although railway-cuttings across the Isthmus were in progress §. Old Spanish writers speak of “bones of giants” having been found at Manta, on the coast of the Pacific, 0° 59! S., 80° 40! W., and at Punta St. Elena in 2° 11! south of the equator and also on the Pacific||. Humboldt, from the information of others, states that these bones are remains of great cetacean animals. South of this, in the desert plains of Tarapacd (19° to 22°S.), .* See above, pp. 284 & 288. t See above, p. 284. { Two species of Mastodon have been discovered on the Eastern side of the Andes. The one (Mastodon Andium) has been met with in Peru, Chile, and Tarija; the other (M/. Huméoldtii) occurs in Buenos Ayres, Brazil, and Columbia ; Cuvier’s conjectural determination of these species was settled by Laurillard (Dict. d’ Hist. Nat. Arr. Mastodon) and confirmed by Gervais (Voyage de Castelnau). § A notice of some fossil shells from the Panama Railway is given in Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. ix. p. 132.—Eprr. || Signor Osculati, an Italian naturalist, who visited South America in 1846-8 (‘ Esplorazioni,’ &c., Milano, 1 vol. 4to), alludes to bones of Mastodon found near Lake Papallacta, S.E. of Quito. 292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [ Mar. 25, where something like fossil wood has been met with, and where also large excavations for nitrate of soda have been made for years past, some vestiges of fossil bones have been found*. Dr. Phillipi, who was lately commissioned by the Chilian govern- ment to explore the Desert of Atacamat, does not mention the ex- istence of fossil bones in that very large tract of country. My late journey (1854) extended to south of Arauco in Chili, but no fossil bones of land animals could I find; nor could I learn that any had been met with. When at Santiago de Chile, however, and making inquiries on tke subject, my old friend, Mr. George Smith, H.B.M. consul there, presented me with a few fragments of fossil bones, taken by himself from the lake of Taguatagua, situated south of the capital; and the following is the account he gives me of them :— “The Lake of Taguatagua is situated in the province of Colchagua, about 45 leagues from the capital due south, and at an elevation of 2300 feet above the level of the Pacific ocean. This lake is in the centre of the third range of hills which run from north to south in Chile, and is surrounded by very high hills called the Borbollon. The form of the lake is nearly oval, and about three leagues in cir- cumference. The surrounding mountains are all of volcanic forma- tion. The highest peak of the Borbollon is about 7000 feet above the margin of the lake. The body of water is supplied from springs, —it receives no streams from the mountains, and is generally as full in summer as in winter. It is shallow towards the edge, but slopes rapidly towards the centre, where I could find no bottom with 40 fa- thoms line. The sand on the shore is principally composed of very minute grains of iron-pyrites and small crystals. This lake is appa- rently the exhausted crater of a volcano. ‘©Qn the north side the hills decline, and form there, and there only, a low pass, through which, some years ago, it was proposed to cut for the purpose of draining the lake in part. A ditch was com- menced from the margin of the lake towards the mountain, and in the progress of the work, at the depth of about 30 feet below the margin of the lake, were found the fossil bones. The first animal discovered was very perfect, with the exception of the head; and at a small distance another skeleton was found of smaller dimensions. Both were imbedded in a fine alluvial soil. As the width of the drain where the skeletons were found did not exceed 12 feet, we may conjecture that, had the trenches been wider, more remains would have been found. May not herds of these creatures have been de- stroyed whilst feeding on what at that time was an extended plain? I am inclined to this opinion, from having found fossil branches of trees in the same trench with the animals.”’ * In the Pampa de Tamarugal, province of Tarapacd, 3000 feet above the sea, bones, like those of mules, were found at the depth of 4 or 5 feet ; and at another spot on this plain, bivalve shells, like cockles, are said to have been found in the rough nitrate of soda; and in digging a well thereabouts, bones of small mam- mals and of birds were met with. t Journ. Roy. Geogr. Soc. vol. xxv. p. 158. 1857. ] BOLLAERT—MASTODON REMAINS. 293 In the ‘Annals of the University of Chile” for 1850, there is a paper on the geology of that country, by Don V. Bustillos, in which, with reference to this lake, he says, ‘“ Another geological object of interest is the Lake of Taguatagua; it is now dried up. It formerly occupied a circular depression in the chain of mountains towards the coast, which are of secondary formation. Its shores were well wooded, and there was abundance of Typha, known as ‘Tortora’ or Flag ; its waters were full of fish, the Cyprinus (‘ Pejerey,’ or King-fish) predominating. This vicinity has been inhabited by gigantic extinct animals, the teeth of one of which, probably the Mastodon, are to be seen in the national museum at Santiago.” [Norre.—The fragments of bone from the “ Lake Taguatagua, 45 leagues south of Santiago de Chile,” are parts of a femur and tibia of a Mastodon, probably Mast. Andium, Cuvier—R. Owen, British Museum, Dec. 10, 1856. ] 294 DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY From January \st, 1857, to March 31st, 1857. I. TRANSACTIONS AND JOURNALS. Presented by the respective Societies and Editors. AMERICAN Journal of Science and Art. 2nd Ser. Vol. xxiii. No. 67. January 1857. From Prof. Silliman, For. Mem. G.S. A. D. Bache.—Increase of Sandy Hook, 16. J. Le Conte.—Agency of the Gulf-stream in the formation of the Peninsula and Keys of Florida, 46. R. Bakewell.—Falls of Niagara, 85. Artesian Wells in Paris, 108. Aluminium, 111. R. P. Greg.— Meteorites from South America, 113. J. Higgins and C. Bickell.—Columbian Guano, 121. C. T. Jackson.—Serpentine-marbles of Vermont, 123. R. Owen.—Rumumantia and Aboriginal Cattle of Britain, 132. J. D. Dana.—Geological progress, 147. Art-Union of London, Report of the Council, for 1856. Assurance Magazine and Journal of the Institute of Actuaries. Vol. vi. part 6. No. 26. January 1857. Atheneum Journal for January, February, March. From C. W. Dilke, Esq., F.GS. Notices of Scientific Meetings, &c. Bengal Asiatic Society, Journal. New Series, Ixxxii. 1856. No. d. T. Thomson.—Botanical Geography of India, 414. Bent’s Literary Advertiser. Nos. 633, 634, 635. Berlin. Preisfrage der philosophisch-historischen Klasse der Kon- iglich-Preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften fiir das Jahr 1859. DONATIONS. 295 Berlin. Abhandlungen der Koéniglichen Akademie der Wissen- schaften zu Berlin. Aus dem Jahre 1855. 1856. Beyrich. Ueber den Zusammenhang der norddeutschen Tertiar- bildung, 1 (Map). Ehrenberg. Ueber der Griinsand und seine Erlauterung des or- ganischen Lebens, 85 (7 plates). Berwickshire Naturalists’ Club, Proceedings, pp. 201-216. R. Embleton.—Anniversary Address, 201. Bologna. Nuovi Annali delle Scienze Naturali. Ser. iii. Vol. x. Fasc. 11 and 12 (in one). Scarabelli.—Descrizione della Carta Geologica della Provincia di Ravenna, 337. Bianconi.—Repertorio Italiano per le Storia Naturale, 368. (Catullo, de Zigno, Reyneval, van der Heche, Ponzi, Ghirelli, Guidoni, Guiscardi, Bianconi, Caleara.) Senoner.—Rivista degli studi di Mineralogia, Geologia e Paleon- tologia nella Monarchia Austriaca, 391. Bianconi.—Se il mare abbia occupato le pianure e colli d’ Italia, di Grecia, e dell’ Asia Minore, 448. Breslau. Drei und dreissigster Jahres-Bericht der Schlesischen Ge- sellschaft fiir vaterlandische Kultur. Arbeiten und Verande- rungen der Gesellschaft im Jahre 1855. Duflos.—Ueber Alumium [{ Aluminium}, 17. Scharenberg.— Ueber die geognostischen Verhaltnisse am Ostende des Altvater-gebirges, 22. Czech.—Ueber die fossilen Insecten und Arachniden, verglichen mit den jetzt lebenden, 23. Roemer.— Ueber die Auffindung emes fossilen Fisches der Gattung Acanthodes in Schwarzen Thonschiefer unweit Lowenburg, 25. Cohn.— Ueber die Drehung der Baumstamme, 86. Canadian Journal. NewSeries. No. 7. January 1857. E. J. Chapman.—Fossils from Anticosti, 47. Fossils from altered rocks in Eastern Massachusetts, 49. Burrstone in Canada East, 49. Red Oxide of Copper from California, 49. Vanadinite, 49. c. agp Ree Rte aap Address to the British Association, 5 A. D. Bache.—Cause of the increase of Sandy Hook, 67. Charleston, Elhott Society, Proceedings, pp. 25-46. Chemical Society, Quarterly Journal. No. 36. Vol. ix. No. 4. January 1857. List of the Titles of Chemical [includmg Mineralogical and Me- tallurgical | papers in British and Foreign Journals, published in 1857, 301-371. Cherbourg, Société Impériale des Sciences Naturelles de, Mémoires. Vol. mi. 1855. Bonnissent.-—-Sur les Taleites de Gréville et sur les schistes du Rozel, 217. VOL. XIII.——PART I. »"4 296 DONATIONS. Cherbourg, Société Impériale des Sciences Naturelles de, Mémoires (continued). Lesdos et Besnora.—Analyse des limonites de Sauxmesnil, 387. Th. du Moncie.—Une fissure remarquable dans un glacier, 401. Civil Engineer and Architect’s Journal. January 1857. No. 274. ————., February 1857. No.275. Critic. St. James’s Park, 33. C. H. Smith.—Induration of Stone, 51. . No. 276. Vol. xx. March 1857. H. Austin, W. Ranger, and A. Dickens.—Water-supply, 73, 74. L. D. Owen.—Artificial stone, 79. W. W. Smyth.— Winding apparatus for Mines, 81. Nos. 379, 380, 382. Notices of Scientific Meetings, &c. Summary of Geological Discovery for 1856, p. 607. Mastodon-remains in Canada, 66. Dublin Natural History Society, Journal (Proceedings), for 1855-56. S. Haughton.—Analysis of Spodumene and Killinite, 24. France, Société Géologique de la, Bulletin. Deux. Sér. Vol. xii. Feuilles 66-71 (1855). Marie Rouault.—Notice sur quelques espéces du terrain dévonien du nord du département de la Manche (fin), 1041. P. Mérian et J. Keechlin Schlumberger.—Sur la formation de Saint-Cassian dans le Voralberg et dans le Tyrol septen- trional, 1045. ‘ Ch. Sainte-Claire Deville—Extrait d’une lettre a M. Elie de Beaumont sur l’éruption du Vésuve du 1% mai 1855, 1065. Ed. Piette.—Observations sur les étages inférieurs du terrain ju- rassique dans les départements des Ardennes et de l’Aisne (Pl. XXX.), 1082. L. Pareto.—Sur l’age des terrains 4 macignos, 1125. Nérée Boubée.—Comment on pourrait rendre facile et rigoureuse la détermination des roches de sédiment, 1127. = Feuilles 72-77 (1855). V. Raulin et J. Delbos.—Extrait d’une monographie des Ostrea des terrains tertiaires de Aquitaine, 1144. Ed. Hébert.—Quelques renseignements nouveaux sur la consti- tution géologique de l’Ardenne frangaise, 1165. J. Delanotie.—Addition a la communication précédente, 1187. Marcel de Serres.—Des végétaux fossiles des schistes ardoisiers des environs de Lodéve (Hérault), 1188. Spada et Orsini—Quelques observations géologiques sur les Apennins de l’Italie centrale (Pl. XXXIT.), 1202. Franklin Institute of Pennsylvania, Journal. 3rd Series. Vol. xxxiii. January 1857. No. 1. E. Morris.—On the Improvement of the Ohio River, 1. Drainage of the Haarlem Mere, 15. F, A. Abel.—The Composition of some varieties of foreign iron, 58. J. P. Lesley’s Manual of Coal, noticed, 70. DONATIONS. 297 Great Britain, Geological Survey, Memoirs: the Geology of the country around Cheltenham, by E. Hull, 1857. Literarium. Vol. iii. No. 23. C. H. Newell.—A submarine voleano, 1389. Vol. iv. Nos. 1 & 2. A. T. Ritchie’s Dynamical Theory of the Formation of the Earth, noticed, 1543. Literary Gazette for January, February, and March. From Lovell Reeve, Esq., F.G.S. Notices of Scientific Meetings, &c. Notice of Dr. A. Ure, 41. ~ R. W. Mylne’s Geological Map of London, noticed, 104. J. Tyndall’s views on Glaciers, 134. E. Forbes’s Memoir on the Isle of Wight Tertiaries, noticed, 269. London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine. 4th Series. No. 82. Supplement. Vol.12. January 1857. From R. Taylor, Esq., F.G.S. Scheerer.—Organic Acids in the Mineral Waters of Bruckenau, 538. Heddle.—Mallet’s Zeolitic Mineral [Laumonite | from Skye, 552. —_———. ———. No. 83. Vol. xiii. January 1857. P. J. Martin.—Anticlinal Line of the London and Hampshire Basins (continued), 33. Heddle.—Mesolite and Fardelite, 50. G. Bischof’s Chemical and Physical Geology (Cavendish Soc.), noticed, 67. ee Translation of Scheerer on the Blowpipe, noticed, 0. G. Buist.—Crystallization in Stucco, 76. J. Morris.—Allophane at Charlton, 76. J. Nicol.—Sandstones and Quartzites of N.W. of Scotland, 76. : No. 84. February 1857. Dr. Forbes.—On Tyrite, 91. W. H. Miller.—On the Anharmonic ratio of radii normal to four faces of a crystal in one zone, 96. P. J. Martin.—On the Anticlinal Line of the London and Hamp- shire Basins, 109. S. Haughton.—On the Pitchstone-porphyry of Lough Eske, Donegal, 116. E. Atkinson.—Chemical notices from Foreign Journals, 118. F. A. Weld.—Volcanic Eruption of Mauna Loa, 145. T. Coan.—Volcanic Eruptions in Hawaii, 146. Miller.—Volcanic Eruption of Mauna Loa, 146. Campbell.—Earthquake at Rhodes, 146. T. Spratt.—Geology of Bulgaria, 146. Freshwater deposits in Eubcea and Salonika, 146. T. Richardson and E. J. J. Browell.— Analyses of waters from the Turko-Persian Frontier, 147. J. Wolley.—An Ice-carried boulder at Borgholm, 147. x 2 298 DONATIONS. London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine. No. 84. February 1857 (continued.) W. B. Clarke.—Voleanic bombs in Australasia, 147. H. J. Moyle and C. B. Hillier.—Metalliferous ores in Siam, 147. Heddle.—The Antrimolite of Thomson, 148. ———. No.85. March 1857. A. Sedgwick.—Remarks on a passage in the President’s Address, 15th February, 1856, 176. R. Owen.—Dichodon cuspidatus, 209. A fossil Ophidian from Salonika Bay, 210. J. W. Salter.—Some additional fossils from the Longmynd, 211. W. Thomson.—Some species of Acidaspis from South Scotland, 211. J. W. Salter.—Some species of Acidaspis from Shropshire, 211. J. Prestwich.—Some Fossiliferous Ironstone (Crag), from the North Downs, 211. J. W. Kirkby.—Some Permian Fossils from Durham, 213. J. Cleghorn. -—Rock-basins, 213. RN. ‘Rubidge. —Copper-mines of Namaqualand, 214. Madrid, Real Academia de Ciencias de, Memorias, Vol. iii. 24 Serie. Ciencias Fisicas. Tomoi. Parte 1. 1855. Vol.iv. 3Serie. Cienc. Nat. Tomoii. Parte 1. 1856. A. V. Ozores.—Memoria geognostico-agricola sobre la Provincia de Pontevedra, 1 (2 plates). J. E. del Bayo.—Ensayo de una descripcion general de la estruc- tura geoldgica del terreno de Espaia. Seccion 4*, 115 (Map). , +, Programma para la adjudicacion de premios, en el ano 1857. Microscopical Science, Quarterly Journal of. No. 18. January 1857. J. B. P. Dennis.—Bones of Birds in the Stonesfield Slate, 63 (plate). J. W. Bailey.—Origin of green sand, and its formation in the existing oceans, 83. Modena. Memorie di Matematica e di Fisica della Societa Italiana delle Scienze residente in Modena. Vol. xxv. Parte Seconda. 1855 Palzeontographical Society. Monographs (for 1855). 1856. S. V. Wood.—The Crag Mollusca of England, Vol. ii. (Bivalves), conclusion. R. Owen.—The Fossil Reptilia of the Wealden Formation of England, part 3, Megalosaurus Buckland. F. E. Edwards.—The Eocene Mollusca of England, Prosobran- chiata. Part 3, No. 2. D. Sharpe.—Mollusca of the Chalk of England, Cephalopoda, art 3. iE. Bi donce —The Tertiary Entomostraca of England. T. Wright.—British Fossil Echinodermata, part 1. DONATIONS. 299 Paris. L’Ecole des Mines. Annales des Mines. Cing. Scr. Vol. ix. 3° Livr. de 1856. Bibliographie, 1. Chatoney.—Sur les matériaux hydrauliques, 505. Friedel.—Sur deux cristaux de zireon basés, 629 (plate). J. B. Trask.— Exploitation de Por en Californie, 649. R. Hunt.—Statistique de l’industrie minérale du Royaume-Uni en 1854, 668. _—_—. Vol. x. 4° Livr. de 1856. Chatoney.—Sur les matériaux hydrauliques, |. Damour.—Sur Vhydro-apatite, 65. Gruner.—Essais de combustibles, 73. F. Pisanii—Sur un nouveau moyen de doser Vargent par boie humide au moyen de Viodure d’amidon, 83. Parran.—Sur les formations secondaires des environs de Saint- Affrique (Aveyron), 91. Mémoires de l Académie des Sciences de l’ Institut In- périal de France. Vol. xxvii. 1° partie. Mémoires présentés par divers Savants 4) Académie des Sciences de l'Institut Impérial de France. Vol. xiv. 4°. 1856. Supplement aux Comptes rendus hebdomadaires des Séances de Académie des Sciences. Vol. i. 4°. 1856. Photographic Society, Journal. Nos. 50, 51. Royal Geographical Society, Proceedings. No.6. January 1857. A. R. Wallace.—Geology of North-west Borneo (Sarawak), 201. Royal Society of London, List of Fellows, 1856. Transactions. Vol. cxlvi. Part 2. 1856. W.B. Carpenter.—Researches on the Foraminifera, 547 (4 plates). R. Owen.—On the Megatheriwm, 571 (7 plates). A. R. Clarke and Col. James.—On the Deilection of the Plumb- lime at Arthur’s Seat, and the mean specific gravity, figure and dimensions of the Harth, 591 (4 plates). ——-. Proceedings. Vol. vii. No. 23. Lord Wrottesley’s Anniversary Address. Obituary Notices of Buckland, Crichton, Sharpe, &c., 240. _ ——. No. 24. P. P. King.—Specific gravity of sea-water, 291. F. Field.—Silver in sea-water, 292. W. S. Jacob.—The Earth’s mean density, 295. R. Owen.—The Scelidotherium leptocephalum, 312. J. Tyndall and T. H. Huxley.—Glaciers, 331. Society of Arts, Journal. Nos. 216, 217, 219-225. H. W. Reveley.—Brown lime, 130. Statistical Society, Journal. Vol. xx. Part 1. March 1857. First Report of the Committee on Beneficent Institu- tions. I. The Medical Charities of the Metropolis. 300 DONATIONS. Stuttgart. Wirttembergische naturwissenschaftliche Jahreshefte. Zebnter Jahrgang. Drittes Heft. 1854. (1856.) . — . “Lwolfter Jahrgang. Drittes Heft. 1856. A. Oppel.—Die Juraformation Englands, Frankreichs und des Siidwestlichen Deutschlands, 313. : Dreizehnter Jahrgang. Erstes Heft. 1857. Schlossberger.—Chemische Zusammensetzung der Muschelscha- len, 29. Quenstedt.—Gavial und Pterodactylus Wiirttemberg’s, 34 (plate). Von Schiibler.—Gasausstr6mungen im Schacht bei Haigerloch, 44, Von Jaeger.— Ueber Ichthyosaurus longirostris, 54. Schuler.—Ueber die Rutschflachen im Wasseralfinger Eisenerze, 56. Fraas.—Die Oolithe im weissen Jura des Brenzthals, 104. Deffner.—Conservirung von Petrefacten, 108. H. Bach’s Geognostische Uebersichtskarte von Deutschland und der Schweiz, 109. Zeitung fiir Naturhistoriker, Mathematiker und 6ffentliche Biblio- theken. No. 1. 8°. Halle. 1856. Zoological Society, Proceedings. Nos. 510-313 (pp. 145-208). S. P. Woodward.—On the land and freshwater shells of Kashmir and Tibet, 185. Il. GEOLOGICAL CONTENTS OF PERIODICALS PURCHASED FOR THE LIBRARY. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 2nd Series. Vol. xix. No. 109. January 1857. R. Howse.—Permian system of Durham and Northumberland, 33 (plate). J. Lycett.—Quenstedtia, 53. P. B. Brodie.—Inferior Oolite and Lias of Northamptonshire and Gloucestershire, 56. New species of Pollicipes from the Inferior Oolite and Lias of Gloucestershire, 102. R. Owen.—Stereognathus Ooliticus from the Stonesfield Slate, 103. T. R. Jones.—Estheria minuta, and distribution of the fossil Estheria, 103. 7 . ——. No.110. February 1857. Ansted’s Elementary Course of Geology, &c., noticed, 166. R. Owen.—On the Dichodon cuspidatus, 184. — Ona fossil Ophidian from Salonica, 185. Je W; re some additional fossils from the Longmynd, 186. W. Thomson.—On some Acidaspides from Scotland, 187. J. W. Salter.—On some Acidaspides from Shropshire, 187. DONATIONS. 301 Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 2nd Series. Vol. xix. No. 111. March 1857. W. B. Carpenter.—Structure of the shell of Rhynchonella Gei- nitziana, 214. R. Owen.—The Scelidotherium, 249. Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal. New Series. No.9. Vol. v. No. 1. January 1857. W. Crowder.—Average Composition of the Rosedale, Whitley, and Cleveland Ironstones, 35. E. Hull.—The Basalts of Antrim, 53 (plate). W. J. Henwood.—The copper-turf of Merioneth, 61. G. Wilson.—The physical sciences which form the basis of Tech- nology, 64. Kane.—Effects of Arctic climate on recent skeletons, 204. Leonhard und Bronn’s Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geognosie, Geologie und Petrefaktenkunde, 1856. Sechtes Heft. H. G. Bronn.—Ueber das geologische Entwicklungsgesetz der Muschel-Thiere, 640. A. Pichler.—Zur Geognosie der Tyroler-Alpen, 661. C. pas: .—Ueber sogennanten fleischfarbenen Schwerspath, Letters : Notices of Books, Mineralogy, Geology, and Fossils. III. GEOLOGICAL AND MISCELLANEOUS BOOKS. Names of Donors in Italics. Anciola, A. L., y E. de Cossio. Memoria sobre las Minas de Rio Tinto. With Atlas. Ansted, D. T. Elementary Course of Geology, Mineralogy, and Physical Geography. 2nd Edition. Barrande, J. Caractéres distinctifs des Nautilides, Goniatides, et Ammonitides. Bonaparte, le Prince Ch. Tableaux paralléliques de Ordre des Gallinacés. Ornithologie fossile, servant d’introduction au Tableau comparatif des Ineptes et des Autruches. (Bonnard de.) Funerailles de M. de Bonnard. (Broderip, W. J.) Memorial Historique (W. J. Broderip). From Prof. Owen, F.G.S. Bryce, James, Jun. Geological Notices of the Environs of Belfast. From James Macadam, #&sq., F.G.S. Catalogue of Stars near the Ecliptic, observed at Markree. Vol. iv. From Her Majesty's Government. oe 302 DONATIONS. Cocchi, I. Description des Roches ignées et sédimentaires de la Toscane. Delaharpe, Ph. Examen de lhypothése de Mr. D. Sharpe sur P Ex- istence d’une mer diluvienne baignant les Alpes. Quelques mots sur la Flore Tertiaire de l’ Angleterre. Dennis, J. B. The existence of Birds during the deposition of the Stonesfield Slate. Doué, J. M. B. de. Troisitme Mémoire sur la fréquence comparée des vents supérieurs et inférieurs d’aprés les observations faites au Puy, 4 Bruxelles et & Goersdorff. Goeppert, H. R. Ueber ein im hiesigen konigl. botanischen Garten zur Erlauterung der Steinkohlen-Formation errichtetes Profil. Harkness, R. & J. Blyth. On the Lignites of the Giant’s Cause- way, &c. Hartung, G. Die geologischen Verhaltnisse der Inseln Lanzerote und Fuertaventura. Hébert, E. Recherches sur la Faune des premiers sédiments Ter- tiaires Parisiens: Mammiféres Pachydermes du genre Cory- phodon. Recherches sur les Mammiféres Pachydermes du genre Coryphodon. Recherches sur les Oscillations du sol de Ja France Sep- tentrionale, pendant la période jurassique. Holmes, Rev. J. I. The Inspiration of the Mosaic Account of the Creation, &e. —— Hull, E. Geology of the country around Cheltenham. From the Geological Survey of Great Britain. Lyeil, Sir C. A Second Visit to North America. Third Edition. 2 vols. Travels in North America, Canada, and Nova Scotia. Second Edition. 2 vols. Marianini, P. D. Sopra il fenomeno che si osserva nelle calamite temporarie di non cessar totalmente, &c. Sopra aumento di Forza assorbente che si osserva in un’ elica elettrodinamica quando ¢ gircondata da un tubo di ferra. Martin, P. J. On the Anticlinal Line of the London and Hamp- shire Basins. Martins, C. La Géographie Botanique et les progrés [Three me- moirs reviewed |. Meyer, H. von. Zur Fauna der Vorwelt. Dritte Abtheil. Saurier aus dem Kupferschiefer der Zechstein-Formation. DONATIONS. 303 Murchison, Sir R. I. Separate copies of several Memoirs. On the Relations of the Tertiary and Secondary Rocks forming the southern flanks of the Tyrolese Alps near Bassano. 1829. On the Bituminous Schist and Fossil Fish of Seefeld in the Tyrol. 1829. On the Tertiary Deposits of Lower Styria, by A. Sedgwick and R.I. Murchison. 1830. Abstract of three memoirs on the Tertiary Formations of Austria and Bavaria, by A. Sedgwick and R, I. Murchison. 1830. Additional Remarks on the Deposit of Giningen im Switzerland. 847. On the Distribution of the superficial Detritus of the Alps, as compared with that of Northern Europe. (Abstract.) 1849. On the Geological Structure of the Alps, Carpathians, and Apen- nines. (Abstract.) 1849. On the Earlier Volcanic Rocks of the Papal States, and of the adjacent parts of Italy. 1850. On the Vents of Hot Vapour in Tuscany, and their relations to ancient lines of fracture and eruption. 1850. On the former changes of the Alps. 1851. On the Sedimentary Deposits which occupy the western parts of Shropshire and Herefordshire, and are prolonged from N.E. toS.W., through Radnor, Brecknock, and Caermarthen- shire, with descriptions of the accompanying rocks of intru- sive or igneous characters. 1833. On the Old Red Sandstone in the counties of Hereford, Breck- nock, and Caermarthen, with collateral observations on the Dislocations which affect the North-west margin of the South- Welsh Coal-Basin. 1834. On the Structure and Classification of the Transition Rocks of Shropshire, Herefordshire, and part of Wales, and on the Lines of Disturbance which have affected that series of depo- sits, including the Valley of Elevation of Woolhope. 1834. On the Silurian and Associated Rocks in Dalecarlia, and on the succession from Lower to Upper Silurian in Smoland, Oeland and Gothland, and in Scania. 1846. And Postscript, 1847. On the Meaning originally attached to the term “ Cambrian System,” and on the Evidences since obtained of its being geologically synonymous with the previously established term ‘*‘ Lower Silurian.”’ 1847. On the Silurian Rocks of the South of Scotland, with a list and description of the Silurian fossils of Ayrshire, by J. W. Salter. 1851. On some of the Remains in the Bone-bed of the Upper Ludlow Rock. 1853. On the Meaning of the term “Silurian System,” as adopted by geologists in various countries during the last ten years. 1852. On the Relations of the Crystalline Rocks of the North Highlands to the Old Red Sandstone of that region, and on the recent discoveries of Fossils in the former, by Mr. Charles Peach. 1855. On the Paleozoic and their associated Rocks of the Thiiringer- wald and the Harz, by Sir R. I. Murchison and Prof. J. Morris. 1855. 304 DONATIONS. Murchison, Sir R. I. Separate Memoirs, continued. On the Discovery, by Mr. Robert Simon, of Fossils in the upper- most Silurian Rocks near Lesmahago in Scotland, with Ob- servations on the Relations of the Paleozoic Strata in that part of Lanarkshire. 1856. On some new Crustacea from the Uppermost Silurian Rocks, by J. W. Salter; with a note on the structure and affinities of Himantopterus, by T. H. Huxley. 1856. Sur les dépéts lacustres tertiaires du Cantal, par C. Lyell et R. I. Murchison. 1829. Notes on the Secondary Formations of Germany, as compared with those of England. 1831. Classification of the Older Stratified Rocks of Devonshire and Cornwall, by A. Sedgwick and R. I. Murchison. 1839. Supplementary Remarks on the “Devonian” System of Rocks, by A. Sedgwick and R. I. Murchison. 1839. Sur les Roches Devoniennes, type particulier de ’Old Red Sand- stone des géologiques anglais, qui se trouvent dans le Bou- lonnais et les pays limitrophes. 1840. On the Geological Structure of the Central and Southern Regions of Russia in Europe, and of the Ural Mountains, by R. I. Mur- chison, E. de Verneuil, and A. von Keyserling. (Abstract.) 1842. On the Development of the Permian System in Saxony, as com- municated by Professor Naumann. 1849. On the Slaty Rocks of the Sichon, and on the origin of the Mineral Springs of Vichy. 1851. On the Distribution of the Flint-drift of the South-east of En- gland to the south and north of the Weald, and over the surface of the South Downs. 1851. Anticipation of the discovery of Gold in Australia, with a general view of the conditions under which that metal is distributed. 1852. On the occurrence of numerous fragments of Fir-wood in the islands of the Arctic Archipelago; with remarks on the Rock- specimens brought from that region. 1355. Address delivered at the Anniversary Meeting of the Geological Society of London, on the 15th of February, 1833. 1833. Address delivered at the Anniversary Meeting of the Geological Society of London, on the 18th of February, 1842. 1842. Address delivered at the Anniversary Meeting of the Geological Society of London, on the 17th of February, 1843. 1843. Address delivered at the Southampton Meeting of the British As- sociationfor the Advancement of Science, September 10, 1846. 1846. Address to the Royal Geographical Society of London, 24th May, 1852. 1852. Address to the Royal Geographical Society of London, 23rd May, 1853. 1853. Oldham, T. Notes on the Geological Features of the Banks of the River Lrawadee. Omboni, J. Série des Terrains Sédimentaires de la Lombardie. Oppel, A. Die Jura-Formation Englands, Frankreichs und des Sud- westlichen Deutschlands. Part 2. DONATIONS. 305 Paris Universal Exhibition, Reports of. Parts 2 and 3. From Her Majesty's Government. Percival, J. G. Annual Report of the Geological Survey of the State of Wisconsin. From J. A. Lapham, Esq. Reeve, Lovell. Conchologia Iconica: Monographs of the Genera Cancellaria and Ampullaria. Report from the Mersey Inquiry Committee to the Meeting of the British Association at Cheltenham, 1856. From G. Rennie, Esq., F.G.S. Sandberger,G. Palaontologisch-geognostiche Kleinigkeiten aus den Rheinlander. Sawkins, J. G. Report to the Directors of the Rio Grande Mining Company [Jamaica]. Schmidt, C. Ueber die devonischen Dolomit-Thone der Umgegend Dorpats. Studer, B. Sur la maniére d’écrire Vhistoire de la Géologie. Wrottesley, Lord. Address to the Royal Society, December 1, 1856. From the Royal Society. i a A hak mye ane , FOS * ’ ‘ a ua 7 ’ rie zt wl co Ws i » Ma ro 4 3 q eA eke FEO? S tak rabal cid bsnl decile — “4 ony % mee * - am : Lay . cy, 4 ar a ajeih ai AG bat a uk ey ‘A? ima 1 Ce ° ak 52 L \ doce ore 2 * fi ‘" i yt Be : 7 ERY aici at, uJ er = 2 “RUA c ~ 7, j Poh) gat The ides < OD a5 Pee » * mi 7) a oy at BN we ah , J a | - - ¥ j e } » 4 é 7 ni j J ; : > 4 4 «es ; 2 De neal = ‘ y iy ih orqrell bis | Vite Ng he al br i . > gna e a ps Gs "a wee 4 = oe i. : i - _ t | 5 °° F | i i) - ~ A ; } . 2 [ of ; in € “I ail : a } i c cal ies ed he : + bean | Agyae Lol A a » Tiere lewied " ; A ne gh he Cael ¢ wh ) : | THE QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. APRIL 8, 1857. The Rev. H. Brass, B.A., Brompton, Chatham, Kent, was elected a Fellow. The following communication was read :— On the Species of Mastopon and ELEPHANT occurring in the fossil state in Great Britarn. PartI. Mastropon. By H. Fatconer, M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., & F.G.S. [Puates XI. & XII.] ConTENTS. Introduction. Generic distinctions and nomenclature of the Proboscidea. Dinotherium. Mastodon and Elephas. The distinctive and specific characters of Mastodon and Elephas. The British fossil Mastodon, and its comparison with M. angustidens, M. Arver- nensis, and M. longirostris. Mastodon angustidens. M. Arvernensis and M. longirostris. British specimens of Mastodon. Molars. Premolars. Milk-molars. Lower jaw. Geological age of the Mastodons. Mastodon angustidens, M. longirostris, and M. Arvernensis. Mastodon of the Crag, in particular. Conclusion. - VOL. XIII.— PART I. Z 308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, Introduction.—It is of the highest importance to Geology, that every mammal found in the fossil state should be defined as regards, Ist, its specific distinctness, and, 2ndly, its range of existence geo- graphically and in time, with as much exactitude as the available materials and the state of our knowledge at the time will admit. Every form well ascertained becomes a powerful exponent; while, ill-determined, it is a fertile source of error. For the pure Geologist, in most of his conclusions where age or climatal conditions are in question, is more or less at the mercy of the Palzeontologist, since he must accept the paleeontological evidence as it is laid before him, and square his speculations to fit and dovetail into the various mortises which the data inexorably present tohim. There is a subordination in the value of the evidence: the higher the form in the scale of organization, the more weighty is the import of its indications. The difficulty with which the Mammalian-paleeontologist has to con- tend in arriving at satisfactory results depends doubtless in many cases on the imperfect nature and scantiness of his materials. But it is deserving of remark, that the fossil genera and species which are in the most unsatisfactory and unsettled state, as to definition and nomen- clature, are not those that are the rarest, but often the reverse. Take Mastodon or Rhinoceros for example, in which the array and con- fusion of specific names are signally perplexing. The reason of this apparent anomaly would seem to be this,—when the remains are few and seldom met with, the species are usually limited in number, and thus more easily discriminated ; on the other hand, when the remains are very abundant over wide areas, the species are at the same time, as a general rule, numerous: and it is well known among naturalists, that the genera which are the most difficult to disentangle specifically are the most complete and natural, where the species are many, and follow each other with the least amount of difference in serial development ; or, in other words, where they are most closely allied to one another. Remains of either of the Proboscidean genera, Dinotherium, Mas- todon, and Hlephas, abound in all the Tertiary Formations of Europe, Asia, and America, from the Miocene up to the Post-pliocene; they have been the subject of a vast amount of observation, while it is hardly possible to conceive anything more unsettled and opposed than the generally received opinions respecting the species and their nomen- clature in the standard works which are of the greatest authority on the subject. Cuvier, De Blainville, and Owen are agreed in limiting the Elephants and narrow-toothed Mastodons found fossil in Europe each to a single species ; while other paleontologists consider that the latter group comprises at least three well-marked specific forms, and ' the former three or four. This paleeontological uncertainty has naturally been reflected in systematic works on Geology, wherever the faunas of the Tertiary Formation are referred to, in statements sufficiently startling, which are repeated at the present day. Thus the Miocene Mastodon angustidens, of the Faluns of Touraine, of the Molasse of Switzerland, and of the Sub-Pyrenees, as also the Miocene Mastodon longirostris of Eppelsheim, are mentioned by Sir Charles 1857. | FALCONER—MASTODON. 309 Lyell, in the 5th edition of his Manual*, under the comprehensive name (on the authority of Owen) of Mastodon angustidens, as occurring in the so-called ‘Older Pliocene’? Red Crag, and in the “ Pleistocene ”’ Norwich Crag : while this English species of Mastodon, wherever it has been met with, whether in this country or on the Continent, has been almost invariably found in company with remains of a species of Elephant which Professor Owen has described as identical with the Elephas primigenius or Mammoth of the Post-pliocene Drift and the modern Siberian ice-fields. The object of the present communication is, to endeavour to ascer- tain what are the species of Mastodon and Elephant found fossil in Britain; what the specific names which ought to be applied to them ; and what the principal formations and localities where they are elsewhere met with in Europe. I am the more induced toattempt the task from the circumstance, that Prof. Owen in an important memoir “On some Mammalian Fossils from the Red Crag of Suffolk, ’’ which appeared in a late number of the Society’s Quarterly Journalt, adheres to the opinion expressed in his Report to the British Association for 1843, and subsequently discussed at greater length in his ‘ British Fossil Mammalia’ in 1846, that the Mastodon of the English Crag is identical with the Mastodon angustidens of Cuvier, the Mastodon longirostris of Kaup, and the Mastodon ‘Arvernensis of Croizet and Jobert. Prof. Owen, on both the occasions here quoted, up to 1846, has maintained the prevalent opinion, that all the Elephant-remains met with in England are referable to a single species, namely Elephas primigenius ; and I am not aware that he has altered his views upon this pot in any subsequent publication. I have devoted much study to the subject, during the last 15 years, in connexion with the numerous fossil species of both genera, which are met with in India, with a view to a monograph of the Proboscidean family, fossil and recent. The results to which I have been conducted, as to the dis- puted European species, are different from those arrived at by Prof. Owen. The most of those results have been long exhibited, so far as figured evidence goes, in the published illustrations of the ‘ Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis’{: but, having devoted the last summer and autumn to a Proboscidean examination, so to speak, of some of the principal collections on the Continent, with special reference to the European fossil species, I have been enabled to confirm or correct previous conclusions on a wider field of observation. In order to avoid needless repetition in the sequel, I may mention that the tour here referred to embraced a detailed study of the very extensive collec- tion of Val d’Arno Proboscidean remains contained in the Museum at Florence ; the collections of Turin, Milan, and Pavia; of Geneva, Lausanne, Berne, Zurich, Basle, and Winterthur in Switzerland ; of Darmstadt, Mannheim, and Strasbourg on the Rhine; of the Jardin des Plantes and Ecole des Mines in Paris; the Duc de Luynes’ fine collection of the Chartres fossil Elephant, in Chateau Dampierre ; and the surpassingly rich and unrivalled collection made by my friend * Op. cit. p. 156. t No.. 47, vol. xii. part 3. Aug. 1, 1856, p. 223. { Fauna Antiq. Sivalens. Illustr. par. v. pl. 42-45. Ae a 310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL Society. [April 8, M. Lartet, of the Sub-Pyrenean Proboscidea, at Seissan on the Ga- ronne ; together with some of the principal collections at Toulouse. In one or other of these museums I had opportunities of studying all the fossil species hitherto described as having been met with in Europe, together with one fine species of Mastodon discovered by M. Lartet, but which has not yet been published. Generic distinctions and nomenclature of the Proboscidea.— Before entering on the special consideration of the British fossil forms, it will be necessary to give some explanation of the principles on which the genera have been limited, and subdivided into sub- generic groups, in order to comprehend the reasons for the nomencla- ture adopted in this communication. A detailed palzeontological disquisition would be out of place on the present occasion. Such salient points only will be touched upon as are essential to the eluci- dation of the subject. The Proboscidean species, fossil and recent, constitute a large group, embracing at least 25 distinct forms, which are comprised under the three genera of Dinotherium, Mastodon, and Elephas. These genera, regarded in a systematic view, are of very unequal value numerically ; the first being very limited in the number of ascertained species, but defined by well-marked generic distinctions ; while the last two represent a large number of specific forms, which, although their opposite extremes are widely separated, yet are connected together through so complete and natural a series of intermediate specific links, that it has proved difficult to devise good generic characters to di- stinguish them. Putting aside all other considerations of structure and form, the diagnostic markswill be regarded on the present occasion solely as they are furnished by the teeth and jaws. (Dinotherium.)—The adult dentition of Dinotherium * is charac- terized by two vertically succeeding premolars and three true molars, five teeth in all, with transverse crenulated ridges closely resembling those of the Tapir ; and by two huge inferior recurved incisors, im- planted in an enormously thickened and deflected beak or prolonga- tion of the symphysis of the lower jaw. Most of the molar teeth present the normal Tapir-like crown-character of two ridges; but, when the milk- and permanent dentition are taken together, Dino- therium differs from all the non-elephantoid Pachydermata in the circumstance that the last milk-molar and antepenultimate true molar (being contiguous teeth in the order of horizontal succession) pre- sent a more complex development of three ridges, or, a “ ternary- ridged crown-formula’”’ (to use a term which will be found of im- portance in the sequel). ‘Two species only of Dinotherium have, I ' believe, hitherto been met with; the one in Kurope, and the other in Indiat+. The European species, D. giganteum, occurs in the * Kaup, Akten der Urwelt (1841), pp. 22-40. + As in the case of the Mastodon of North America, numerous nominal species have been founded by different authors (Kaup, Von Meyer, Eichwald, &c.) upon what would appear to have been merely varieties of the same species, depending on race, sex, &c., as evinced by the comparative size of the teeth. Dr. Kaup now 1857. | FALCONER—MASTODON. 311 Older Miocene formations, such as Eppelsheim, the Faluns of Tou- raine, and the Molasse and lacustrine strata of the Sub-Pyrenees : it has nowhere been met with in Britain. (Mastodon and Elephas.)—Uy to the date of the last 4to edition of the ‘ Ossemens Fossiles’ published during the author’s life in 1825, the species of Mastodon and Elephas then known were sufficiently well distinguished by the characters indicated by Cuvier*, the founder of the former genus; namely, that the molar teeth of Mas- todon consisted of a comparatively simple crown, divided into mam- mille or tubercles, arranged in transverse ridges, more or less nume- rous, and more or less prominent, with corresponding empty valleys or hollows between them; while those of Hlephas were more com- plex, consisting of numerous thin transverse plates, having their intervals filled up with cement. The subsequent discovery of the Mastodon elephantoides of Clift, in which Cuvier’s characters of both genera are blended, and of European and American forms with tusks in the lower jaw (Mastodon longirostris and Mastodon Ohioticus), led to the necessity of remodelling the technical diagnostic characters of the genera. This was first attempted, so far as I am aware, by Bronn of Heidelberg, in his ‘ Lethzea Geognostica,’ as far back as 1838. In his elaborate definition of the two genera he states (omit- ting other characters) that Mastodon is characterized by lower incisors, and by molars which are replaced from back to front, excepting, how- ever, the most anterior of these teeth, 7. e. one or more milk-molars ; while in Elephant there are no inferior incisors, and a// the molars are replaced in a horizontal directiont. In his remarks upon the species, he mentions that ‘“Tetracaulodon (i. e. Mastodon longi- rostris), according to Kaup, has premolars in the upper jaw, which are very similar to the back molars of Hippopotamus and are very caducous{,”’ and in regard to inferior tusks, that “Mastodon gigan- teus, M. angustidens, and M. longirostris do unquestionably pos- sess such inferior tusks: the other species of Mastodon occur more rarely, and we can therefore only by analogy infer their having pos- sessed them also§.”” The same characters, 7. e. of premolars and entertains doubts of there being any other European species than D. giganteum® ; the difference of size between the teeth of D. giganteum and D. Cuvieri is not greater than is known to occur between homologous teeth from different indi- viduals of M. (Tetraloph.) longirostris, dug out of the same deposit at Eppelsheim. The nominal species D. Kenigii of Kaup is founded on a single small tooth, and _ therefore doubtful. I have lately seen well-marked specimens of fossil teeth of a species of Dinotherium from Attock in the Punjab, at no great distance from the Sewalik Hills, and, judging from the associated Mammalia, out of beds of the same age with them. The materials are not sufficient to establish whether the species is identical with D. Indicum of Perim Island, or distinct. In dimensions the teeth correspond with medium-sized specimens of D. giganteum. They were discovered by Lieut. Garnett, of the Bengal Engineers, and are now in the possession of Prof. Oldham, Superintendent of the Geological Survey of India, who has obligingly communicated them to me.—July 1857, H. F. * Oss. Fossiles, tom. i. p. 205. t Bronn, Lethza Geognostica, Band ii. pp. 1233 & 1239 (1st ed.). { Id. loc. cit. p. 1218. § Id. loe. cit. p. 1233. @ Akten der Urwelt, p. 49. 312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, inferior incisors, were several years afterwards advanced by Prof. Owen (who must obviously have overlooked the previous remarks of Bronn) in his ‘ British Fossil Mammalia*’ as being distinctive of Mastodon from Elephant in a well-marked and unequivocal manner. But they are assuredly neither absolute nor constant, whether regarded in a positive or negative view, as generic distinctions. For on the one hand, premolars have not yet been met with in M. (Trilophodon) Ohioticus, in place in the jaws, although made a subject of special re- search by Dr. Warren, Dr. Jackson, and myself, upon a large quan- tity of materials}, up to a very late date; nor have they been yet met with in certain species of the T'etralophodon group ; while, so far from being restricted to species of Mastodon, they have been de- tected by us in a typical fossil Elephant from India, #. (Lozxodon) planifrons, both in the upper and lower jaws, in as great a number as in any known Mastodon. And as regards inferior tusks, although these have been observed in three species of the Trilophodon group, and in two of Tetralophodon, there are other species in which, among abundant materials, they have not been noticed up to the present time, even in young individuals, where they might have been with most confidence looked for. This remark applies with especial force to the forms here called M. (Trilophodon) Humboldti, and to M. (Tetralophodon) Sivalensis and M. (Tetralophodon) Arvernensis. Swayed by considerations of this nature, and struck more parti- cularly with the identity of general characters, and close similarity of form, running throughout the whole of the osteology of the species of Mastodon and Elephant, with the exception of the molars and in- ferior incisors, De Blainville{ abandoned the idea of there being any sufficient generic difference between the two, and made a retrograde step, arranging all the forms in two divisions, Lamellidontes and Mas- todontes, under the common designation of “ Elephas.’’ This pro- posal has deservedly met with little favour among palzontologists and zoologists. There are characters however, which, when once recognized, are happily of an obvious and readily applicable nature to distinguish Mastodon from Elephant, and which further enable the paleeontolo- gist to break up an unwieldy mass of species into subgeneric groups, that are at the same time natural and convenient. Putting aside for the moment, as extraneous, the consideration of incisors and premolars, and, as in the case of Dinotherium, taking the milk- and permanent dentition together, the species of both Mastodon and Elephant ordi- narily present six molar teeth from first to last, in the order of hori- zontal succession, 2. e. three deciduous or milk-molars, and three true molars. It was stated above, that in the Dinotherium the last milk-molar and the antepenultimate or first true molar are invariably characterized by a ternary-ridged formula, or in other words, that their crowns are divided into three ridges. Applying this criterion in a similar manner to Mastodon, we have found, that not only the last milk- and first or antepenultimate true-molar, but in addition * Brit. Foss. Mam. p. 274. t+ Warren, On Mastodon giganteus, p. 80. { De Blainville, Ostéographie : Des Eléphants. 1857. | FALCONER—MASTODON. 313 the second or penultimate true molar, being three teeth in im- mediate contiguity, in all the species (with one remarkable excep- tion) are severally characterized in both jaws by an isomerous divi- sion of the crown into either 3 or 4 ridges. These three isomerous- ridged teeth may, for convenience of description, be referred to in the aggregate as ‘‘ the intermediate molars,’ a term which has been applied to them from their position by Fischer and by Laurillard*. To the species which present the ternary-ridged formula we have assigned the subgeneric name of Trilophodon+; and to the quater- nary-ridged species, Tetralophodon{t. In citing the various forms under discussion in the sequel, these subgeneric terms will, in every case, be used for convenience in designating the species; and the same rule will be followed with the subgeneric divisions of Hlephas. This will be of obvious use on the present occasion, both as a help to the memory in dealing with a large number of specific names, and as suggestive of broad points of distinction, when referring to the dis- puted species. The ternary and quaternary formule are, I believe, never found mingled .in the intermediate molars of the same species$; 7. e. a ternary-ridged molar of this series does not occur in the species be- longing to Tetralophodon, nor a quaternary in Trilophodon. The ridge-formula indicates also, with unerring certainty, the composition * Dictionnaire Universel d’Histoire Naturelle, tom. viii. p. 29. t From rpeis et Aogos, three-ridged. t From réooapa et dogos, four-ridged. This difference of three and four ridges was, so far as I am aware, first pointed out as a distinctive character between two European species, namely Mastodon angustidens and Mastodon Arvernensis, by Von Meyer as far back as 1834, but without being extended to the three inter- mediate molars. The name Mastodon Arvernensis was applied by him to the Eppelsheim species, Mastodon longirostris of Kaup. (Die Fossilen Zahne und Knochen von Georgensgmiind, p. 33.) |The ridge-formula in the two subgenera is as follows :— Milk-molars. True molars. 14+24+3 | 34+3+4 P4243 °° 34344 Q+3+4 | 44445 2+3+4 ° 4+4+5 the numerals exhibiting the ridges in each tooth, exclusive of the “ talons.” § The only apparent exception which has come under my observation, occurs in the dentition of the South American species, to which the name of Mastodon Andium (Tetralophodon of our arrangement) has been restricted by the French paleontologists, Laurillard and Gervais, as distinct from M. Humboldtii (Trilo- phodon). In this species the last ridge in most of the intermediate molars is con- siderably reduced in size; and the teeth have been, in consequence, described by Gervais (Zoologie de l’expédition dans l’Amérique Méridionale par Le Comte de Castelnau, p. 19) as three-ridged. The specimeus represented by him, figs. 2 and 5 of pl. 5 in the ‘ Voyage de Castelnau,’ the former an antepenultimate upper true molar, and the latter a penultimate lower, are distinctly four-ridged, while the last lower milk-molar, fig. 4, is apparently three-ridged, with a large talon. My attention was directed to the subject by M.Lartet. More specimens are required for the exact determination of the point than yet exist in any of the European museums ; 7. e. whether in the intermediate molars of the form called Mastodon Andium the ternary and quaternary formule are mingled. Nine-tenths at least of the specimens of South American Mastodons in the British Museum belong to the other species, M. ( T'rilophodon) Humboldtii.—July 1857, H. F. In Trilophodon In Tetralophodon 314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. {April 8, of the crown of the tooth which is immediately in front of, and of that which is immediately behind, the three intermediate molars: the former showing invariably one ridge less, and the latter one ridge more ; that is to say, the penultimate or second milk-molar in all the species of Trilophodon is invariably two-ridged, and the last true molar four-ridged ; while in Tetralophodon, in like manner, the former is three-ridged, and the latter five-ridged,—making due allowance in the last true molar for the amount of individual variety presented by the greater or less development of the well-known talon-complication, and for its being usually more complex in the lower jaw. The “ ridge- formula” thus determines, with precision, five out of the series of six molars developed in horizontal succession in all the true Mastodons. For reasons which will be explained in the sequel, it would seem that there has existed in nature another subgeneric group of Mas- todon, of which only a single form is at present known, in which the crowns of the “intermediate molars” are divided upon a quinary ridge-formula. This group in our arrangement would be charac- terized, in harmony with the others, as Pentalophodon: and it may with some confidence be predicated, that, when the dentition shall have been well determined, the second milk-molar will present four ridges, and the last true molar six ridges in the upper jaw. The Elephants, on the other hand, are distinguished from the Mastodons by the absence of an isomerous ridge-formula to the three intermediate molars of the upper and lower jaws; and by the cir- cumstance that the ridges, instead of being limited to three or four, range from six up to an indefinite number in these teeth, in the different groups of species. We have found that the numerous forms, fossil and recent, may be conveniently arranged in three natural subgeneric groups, founded upon the ridge-formula, in conjunction with certain other dental characters. In the first of these groups, corresponding with the forms collect- ively designated Mastodon elephantoides by Clift, the ridge-formula may be said to be Aypisomerous, as the difference between the crowns of any two of the consecutive intermediate teeth does not exceed more than one ridge, and the ciphers range in the different species from 6 to 8. The ridges are not more elevated than in the true Mas- todons, so that, when the teeth are sawn through longitudinally, the section yields a succession of salient and re-entering angles, the height of the chevron-shaped ridges not much exceeding the width of their base. The enamel is very thick, and the coronal interspaces in most of the species are filled up with an enormous quantity of cement. To this group we have assigned the subgeneric name of Stegodon*. It is limited to extinct forms confined at present to the Indian Tertia- ries. The Stegodons constitute the intermediate group of the Pro- boscidea from which the other species diverge through their dental characters, on the one side into the Mastodons, and on the other into the typical Elephants. In the second group, which includes the species allied to the * From oréyn tectum, and dcovs dens, having reference to the gable-end form of the section of the ridges. 1857. | FALCONER—MASTODON. 315 African Elephant, the ridge-formula is also hypisomerous, as in the Stegodons, the ciphers ranging from 7 to 9 in the crown- ridges of the intermediate molars of the different species. But the colliculi, instead of yielding a gable-shaped or “‘tectiform”’ section as in the Stegodons, are much more elevated and compressed, so that when the teeth are sawn longitudinally and vertically, the ridges present the appearance of elongated wedges, with thinner plates of enamel. For this subgeneric group, the name of Loxodon*, first indicated by Frederick Cuvier, has been adopted. It comprises both extinct and living species. The last group, which is numerically the largest and most im- portant, including the Elephants with thin-plated molars, as in the existing Asiatic species, is characterized by the ridge-formula being regulated in the “intermediate molars,”’ not by hypisomerous ciphers, but by progressive increments (anisomerous), which may be ex- pressed (e. g. for the Indian Elephant) by the series 12+14+18 +. These ciphers, be it remarked, are not put forward as being rigidly exact in every case: for the higher the numerical expression of the ridge-formula in the species, the more liable to vary within certain limits, dependent on the race, sex, and size of the individual, is the number of the plates ; and they do not rigidly correspond throughout in the upper and lower molars, the latter often exhibiting an excess. But it may safely be asserted that the numbers are never transposed or reversed, 7. e. the younger tooth among the “‘intermediate molars”’ never normally exhibits in the same individual a higher number than the older; the increments may not always be symmetrical, but they are invariably more or less progressive. For this subgeneric group we propose the term of Huelephast. [ Note.—The following systematic Diagnoses of the genera Mastodon and Elephas were prepared as an Appendix by the author, but their insertion in this place more conveniently elucidates the subject-matter of this memoir. —EpiIrT.] * From \o%ds obliquus, and édods dens, having reference to the rhomb-shaped discs of the worn molars ; an adaptation of the term ‘“ Loxodonta”’ proposed by Fred. Cuvier, ‘ Hist. Naturelle des Mammiféres,’ tom. iii., Article “‘ Eléphant d’Afrique.” 1835. + The illustration in this case is taken from the existing Indian Elephant, E. (Zu- elephas) Indicus, in which the ridge-formula of the whole series is nearly thus :— Milk-molars. True molars. 4+8+12 | 14+18+24 4+8+12 ° 14+18+4+24-27 the numerals representing the ridges in each tooth, exclusive of the talons. A progressive increment runs throughout the series: but the selected numbers refer only to the ‘‘intermediate molars.’’ In the species which approach nearest to Loxodon, the numerical expression of the ridge-formula is lower. t From ev dene, and édégas, having reference to the typical Elephants most fa- miliarly known. In the illustrations of the ‘ Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis,’ the term Elasmodon was applied to this subgeneric group : but, the designation of Elasmodus having been preoccupied by Sir Philip Egerton for a series of fossil fish (Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. iv. p. 163, 1843), to prevent confusion, the term of Huelephas has been substituted for it. 316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, Genus Mastopon (Cuv.). Formula Dentium deciduorum.—Primores = vel “ ; Laniari ; Molares -=8-7. Formul. Dent. persist.—Primor. ~ vel meal an TOP - ; Premol. 0 3 1 0 - 3 (>? jvel[3 Molares veri 5 =12-8. ro | bs Primores eburnei plerumque exserti: superiores maximi vario modo porrecti, inferiores horizontales vel leviter deflexi, recti, minores. Molares complicati, tritores ; coronidis rima longi- tudinali obsolete bifidee collieuli concavi e tuberculis mammilla- ribus per paria transverse aut alternatim dispositis, constantes : adamante crasso, cemento in valliculis parco aut subnullo. Premolares aut ceteris forma simpliciores minores, aut nulli. Molares veri 3, deinceps majores, altero alterum extrusum a tergo vicissim excipiente, demum utrinque solitariii—Molares 3 utrinque intermedi (nempe deciduorum postremus et verorum antepenultimus penultimusque) colliculis isomeris aut 3, 4, aut 5 conformes. Proboscis longissima, prehensilis. Corpus vastum artubus elevatis insistens. Pedes 5-dactyli. Subgenus 1. TritopHopon.—Dentium molarium 3, utrinque in- termediorum coronis colliculis 3. Subgenus 2. TeTRALoPHODON.—Dent. molar. 3, utrinque in- termediorum coronis colliculis 4 (raro 5). Observations.—The adult dentition varies much in the different species of the genus; the premolars and inferior incisors being in- constant. The typical complete formula is best shown by M. (Trr- loph.) angustidens of Simorre :—Ineis. = ; Can. ~ ; Premol. >; Mol. - = 12, being identical with that of Dinotherium, so far as the dentition of the latter has been determined, 7. e. Incis. - ; Can. “ : Premol. = ; Mol. = 12; the only question being in regard of upper incisors, the presence or absence of which has not yet been clearly ascertained in Dinotherium. ‘The affinity indicated by the agreement in number is corroborated by the last milk-molar and ante-penultimate true molar being three-ridged alike in Dinothe- rium and in the section of Mastodon here called Trilophodon. Pre- molars have not been met with in M. (Triloph.) Ohioticus, which, counting both sides of both jaws, has 8 molars less in the adult state than M. (Triloph.) angustidens ; nor have they been observed in M. (Triloph.) Humboldtu. They occur probably in M. (Tri- loph.) tapiroides. Their presence or absence has not yet been ascertained in the other species of Trilophodon. These teeth have been observed tm situ in the upper and lower jaws of M. (Tetraloph.) longirostris, and in the upper of M. (Tetral.) Arvernensis. They have not yet been seen zz situ in the other species of Tetralophodon. 1857. | FALCONER—MASTODON. 317 Inferior incisors have been discovered in M. (Triloph.) angustidens , M. (Triloph.) Ohioticus, and M. (Triloph.) tapiroides; and also in M. (Tetraloph.) Andium and M. (Tetraloph.) longirostris, in the first of which they occasionally attain a very large size. They do not appear to occur ever in M. (Tetraloph.) Sivalensis, nor in M. (Tetraloph.) Arvernensis. Their presence or absence in the two other species of Tetralophodon has not yet been satisfactorily determined. The ridge-formula, as being respectively ternary in Trilophodon and quaternary in Tetralophodon, is very constant, the only doubtful case being presented by the form or forms named Mastodon Andium by the French paleontologists. Cement, al- though quantitatively inconspicuous in most of the species of both subgenera, is present in considerable abundance in the valleys of the crowns of M. (Tetralophodon) Perimensis and in M. (Triloph.) Humboldtii. In the former it fills up the bottom of the interstices between the mammille. The transverse or alternate direction of the mamnnille of the ridges, and the open or interrupted nature of the valleys connected therewith, are not equally defined in all the species, intermediate stages being met with. But the ridges are invariably transverse and the valleys open in M. (Triloph.) Borsoni, Ohioticus, and tapiroides, andin M. (Tetraloph.) latidens; while the mammillz are constantly more or less alternate, and qe valleys interrupted among the Trilophodons in M. (Triloph.) angustidens, Humboldti, and Pandionis ; and among the Tetralophodons in M. (Tetraloph.) Stvalensis and Arvernensis. The most complex crowns are pre- sented in the Trilophodons by M. (Triloph.) Pandionis (an Indian fossil species recently discovered and as yet undescribed), and M. (Triloph.) Humboldtii ; and among the Tetralophodons by M. (Te- traloph.) Sivalensis and Arvernensis. The upper adult molars in several of the species (e. g. M. (Triloph.) angustidens and M. (Te- traloph.) Andium) were invested with a longitudinal belt of enamel, disposed more or less spirally, and reaching the apex. The lower incisors, according to Lartet, are constantly devoid of any such belt. In M. (Triloph.) angustidens inferior incisors would appear to have been common to males and females, and not to have been a mark merely of sexual difference. Mastodon Sivalensis, although with five-ridged ‘‘intermediate molars,” is provisionally included under Tetralophodon. Genus Evepuas (Linn.). Form. Dent. decid.—Primor. ~; Lan. > ; ; Mol. <= 7s Form. Dent. persist.—Primor.— ; Lan. 7 =. Peaean = vel 2; Mol. = = 11-7. Primores eburnei plerumque exserti, sursum et antrorsum adscen- dentes. Molares aut complicati aut lamellosi, tritores; coro- nidis longitudinaliter integree colliculi convexi e tuberculis mam- millaribus, aut laminis cuneiformibus vel compressis digitatis transversis, constantes: adamante illis crasso, his attenuato, ' eemento in valliculis copioso. Premolares rarissime utrinque 2 (seepius nulli), ceeteris forma simpliciores, minores. Molares 318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [April 8, vert 3, deinceps majores, altero alterum extrusum a tergo vicis- sim excipiente, demum utrinque solitarii.—Molares 3 utrinque intermedii (nempe deciduorum postremus et verorum antepe- nultimus penultimusque) colliculis supra 5 (6-18), aut hypi- someris, aut anisomeris. Proboscis longissima, prehensilis. Corpus vastum artubus elevatis insistens. Pedes 5-dactyli. Subgen. 1. SteGopon.—Dentium molarium 3 utrinque interme- diorum coronis complicata colliculis hypisomeris (e. 9. 7+7+8), mammillatis, tectiformibus. Pre- molares nondum observati. Subgen. 2. Loxopon.—Dent. molar. 3 utrinque intermedior. coronis lamellosa colliculis hypisomeris (e. g. 7+ 7+8), cuneiformibus. Preemolares raro utrinque 2. Subgen. 3. EvreLerpHas.—Dent. molar. 3 utrinque intermedior. coronis lamellosa colliculis demceps numero auctis, anisomeris (e. g. 12+14+18), attenuatis, com- pressis. Przemolares nulli. Observations.—The adult dentition of the Elephants, although typically more aberrant, is more constant than that of the Mastodons. Inferior incisors are wanting in all the species, fossil and recent, at present known ; and premolars have as yet only been met with in a single form, L. (Loxodon) planifrons. The common formula is, Ineis. - ; Can. “ ; Premol. ° ; Mol. + =7,; but in this exceptional case the premolars are as numerous as in any species of Masto- don, the formula being, Incvs. - ; Can. 2 ; Premol. =; Mol.==11. It exceeds the rest of the species by 8 molars in both jaws, as M. (Triloph.) angustidens exceeds M. (Triloph.) Ohioticus. A longi- tudinal belt of enamel has not yet been observed on the tusk of any Elephant. The molars are presented under two forms: in the sub- genus Stegodon as “Dentes complicati,’’ resembling those of Masto- don in the folded form of their crown-eminences, and as “ Dentes lamellosi’’ in Lowvdon and Euelephas. 'The convexity of the crown- ridges, and the absence of the longitudinal mesial bipartient cleft, so characteristic of the true Mastodons, are very constant in the Ele- phants, the only exception, limited to the latter character, being in- distinctly seen in an #. (Stegod.) Cliftii. The passage from the Stegodons into the Loxodons is effected through L. (Steg.) insignis and EL. (Loxod.) planifrons ; and from the Loxodons into Huelephas through F. (Low.) meridionalis and E. (Euel.) Hysudricus. The anisomerous ridge-formula in Euelephas is not numerically the same in all the species, being in some higher, in others lower: but they all agree in exhibiting progressive increments. The amount of un- dulation presented by the worn edges of the enamel-plates furnishes a good means of distinguishing the nearly allied fossil species in Euelephas. The distinctive and specific characters of Mastodon and Elephas. —A safe criterion by which to test the soundness of any proposed “us Rabag | 3 4 i } ha pid ip a wihcy v4 A ‘“ JPTICAL 119. ies. a ” ia ¢ { ” ¢ ese { be) | » Lb- lee 33> 1 € i 9 4 nil- 55. ha0e ro. Spec. ones ee mo ay Se sr 4 idi- na- joa 1185 we len ar la- } 1857. ] FALCONER—MASTODON. 319 arrangement in Natural History is, that the technical characters, how- ever abridged, should be exponents, so to speak, of the natural and serial affinities, and in nowise at variance with them. If this test be applied to the ridge-formula, as a consistent basis for the arrange- ment of the Mastodons and Elephants, it will, we believe, not be found wanting : thus the Mastodons ranged under Trilophodon and Tetralo- phodon include all the Elephantoid species which have the crowns of the molars comparatively simple, and uniformly divided into two subequal divisions by a longitudinal line or cleft; the ridges limited in number, each with fewer mammillary eminences, and invariably more or less concave across; the enamel thick and in conical or com- pressed points ; and the valleys between the ridges deep and empty, or with but a sparing quantity of cement. The Elephants, on the other hand, as restricted by the ridge-formula and ranged under Stegodon, Loxodon, and Euelephas, include all the Proboscidean species which have the crowns of the molars more complex, and usually wanting in a longitudinal line of division ; the ridges more numerous and less defi- nite, each being composed of a greater number of mammillary or digital points, which are most elevated in the middle, rendering the ridges convex across, instead of concave; the processes of enamel thinner, higher, and more divided ; and the deep narrow valleys between them entirely filled up with cement. The limitations of the two genera agree pretty well with the views generally entertained by palzeontolo- gists regarding them ; with the exception, that the group comprising the collective Mastodon Elephantoides of Clift, and by some called transitional Mastodon*, is here regarded as more properly belonging to the Elephants. A Synoptical Table is appended of the species of Mastodon and Elephas, ranged under subgenera, after the manner here indicated. The species were first determined or adopted after a careful examination of all the original materials accessible, in the foreign collections already referred to (p. 309) or in various museums in the United Kingdom. They were then arranged serially, according to their relative affinities, as indicated by the molar teeth; the common characters were next analysed, to furnish a key for breaking up the mass of species into groups representing genera and subgenera; and the synoptical table shows the result. It is put forward as exhibiting a fair represent- ation of the subject so far as the materials and state of knowledge at the present time admit, but with no pretension to being either unexceptionable or complete. The progress of investigation, by the discovery either of new forms, or of more abundant materials of the species which are now the most imperfectly determined, will in all probability modify more or less, or break down, any generic or sub- generic limitations that may be at present devised. For the daily experience of every department of Mammalian paleontology tends to show, that, while the characters of species are persistent over wide areas and through long periods of time, genera are nothing more than ideal or conventional centres, around which groups of species are arranged, subject to incessant modifications through the discovery * Owen, ‘ Odontography,’ p. 624. SYNOPTICAL TABLE OF THE SPECIES OF MASTODON AND ELEPHANT, Guardacloubia Geeks Suecleeaie x Opposite page 319, Genera, Subgenera, and Species. Geological Age. Country. Remarks, Spec. |. M. (Trilophodon) — Borsoni (LI. Han) Pliocene France ; Piedmont Syn. Mastodon Buffonis 1 SOI 7 LT GY Sire ermine sma teen eee 5 J eiemetsiwe ie + SVN. Pomel). eee Is (Triloph.) tapiroides (Cuv.) ........../Upper Miocene ....|France; Switzerland .......... Syn. Mastodon Tinea ee juxta Von ( (a.) Colliculi acuti valliculeeque transversi .......- P : Fee 4 Meyer). » 92 M. (Triloph.) Ohioticus (Blumb.) ........ Post-Pliocene ...... North Amerted 2202. ss.- ce Syn. Mastodon mawimus (Cuy.) ; M. gigan- Subgen. 1. L 4 ; p ; teus (Auctorum). TRILOPHODON.... pe M. (Triloph.) angustidens (Cuv.)..........|Upper Miocene ....|/France; Germany ; Switzerland. . Syn. Mastodon Simorrense (Lart.) ; M. Cu- 5 De NS (Triloph.) Pyrenaicus (Lart. MSS.) ....\Upper Miocene ....|France. viert (Pomel). ; (4.) Colliculi obtusi alternatim mammillati, es po Wi, (Triloph.) Humboldtii (Cuv.)..........|Post-Pliocene?...... SouthAmerica eee eee An Syn. M. australis of Owen (2); of reputed interruptee. i. p it ' Australian origin ! Giese eV (Triloph.) 1 HOON Cah garda naeoomya ce Pliocene?.......... Southern India ..............|Imperfectly known, but very distinct as a MASTODON <., species ; is the only Indian Trilophodon. Cee , : , » 8. M. (Tetralophodon) longirostris (Kaup)..........|Upper Miocene ..../Germany : Eppelsheim. : ( @:) Colliculi obtusi valliculeeque transverst { » 9. M. (Tetraloph.) latidens (GHD) ss0aca0 Sacha Niiccene ser nena Southern Indie : Ava. | », 10. M. (Tetraloph. ?) Andium (Cwv.) ............|Pliocene?..........|South America .............. Large inferior incisors, one or two. The sub- | Subgen. 2. (d.) Colliculi obtusi alternatim mammillati, valliculee genus doubtful. | TeTRALOPHODON. interrupte. », Il. M. (Tetraloph.) Perimensis) 4-7-5 oso. ns cit nc] WHO Cen ae aeeaeras Southern and Western India .. ..|Hitherto found only in Perim Island. ; — 12. M. (Tetraloph.) Arvernensis (Croizet § Joberé) |Pliocene .......... England; France; Italy ...... Syn. Mastodon brevirostre (Gervais). (e.) Colliculi numero 5, obtusi alternatim mae | », 13. M. (Tetraloph.) Sivalensisneamacn cant tore Miocene ..........|India: Sewalik Hills .......... ‘The only known species indicating a Pentalo- lati, valliculee interrupte. phodon-type. j Subgen. 1. (a.) Colliculi circiter 6, ceemento in valliculis parco _— Spec. 1. KE. (Stegodon) Clittiinn OR Sater acorns Miocene Ene ROR Southern India: Ava..........|Syn. Mastodon latidens (Clift, pro parte). STEGODON. . » . Hy eae LAM NONGIY Go cdce es coneas oF MOCO 25 spondence India: Sewalik Hills. poe , bee eee » /3. KE. (Stegod.) MGanesie cbr roe eee Miocene .......... India: Sewalik Hills ..........|Distinctness as a species doubtful. (6.) Colliculi 7-8, cxemento in valliculis copiosissimo4 =" 4 (Stegod.) insignis ..................|Mliocene and Pliocene |Sewalik Hills and Central India..|Found both in the valley of the Nerbudda (Pliocene), and Sewalik Hills (Miocene). | | Baca eee eerie », 9. K. (Loxodon) planifronstee sae Miocene .......... India: Sewalik Hills .......... The only Elephant in which premolars have : Subgen. 2. | (c.) Colliculi gross’ digitati, adamante crasso. . ... . Mey i (Dezod)) meridionalie. (VEE). mao NERoceren ama Magtandl, eanga eettary Lah ara aa as p ELEPHAS CON rs asi (d.) Colliculi medio angulatim dilatati, macheridi-{ ,, 7. EB. (Loxod.) macs (COMP) oo ccaesecn cof OCHO oo ooo u noes England ; Lombardy ..........|Imperfectly known. Fossil remains rare. eee | bus per detritionem rhomboideis. » 8. E. (Loxod.) Africanus (Blumb.).......... Bx Stine ert erelelerete Africa. ( (e.) Colliculi subremoti, adamante crassiusculo .... » 9. HE. (Buelephas) LER AICIES 6556.2 ccoa snoons Miocene ..........|India: Sewalik Hills. ieqamae Soren p : otatt mmo { >, LO. HE. (Hueleph.) EMC TUS Goon se a000 Hoan cnd. Pliocene ..........|England; France; Italy. | (f) Coe ep eee ibe Jeration gilsiin), ws » Il. E. (Bueleph.) NAMOOKGIE so c0sGa0c5 occas Pliocene .......... Central Mnidiairerte te Saye . |Restricted to the Pliocene Fauna of the valley ; : of Nerbudda, Central India. » 12. HK. (Hueleph.) Columbiicconcsiach cena Post-Pliocene?...... Mexico; Georgia; Alabama....|An Syn. H. Jacksoni? (Sillim. Journ. 1838, Subgen. 3. vol. xxxiv. p. 363). | EUELEPHAS...... andi Bone +4 », 13. EK. (Bueleph.) Indicus (Linn.) ............|Existing .......... | at ererarne Barer corti et errs Syn. 2. Sumatranus (Temminck). . -) Se ea machrendibuss valde june ,, 14. EK. (Kueleph.) AIBONEOVS 5 concave sconue enteric ca cele ae Armenia: Erzeroom .......... In the Brit. Mus. Coll. Discovered between al Erzeroom and Moosh in 1856. The molar plates closely approximated, and the ena- ; mel-edges very undulated. | CD) Pelion coat a ag mele a ,, 15. E. (Hueleph.) primigenius (Blumb.)........|Post-Pliocene ......|Europe, Asia, and North America. ee , | | es TAO * 320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, of new forms. It would be foreign to the main object of the present communication, and beyond the limits within which it is necessarily restricted, to discuss in detail the grounds on which the arrangement is founded. As this will be done more fully elsewhere, I shall content myself here with stating them in a general way, and with indicating where the assailable points are. Although the Mastodon of North America and the Mammoth are so widely different in the form of their molar teeth that they must be ranked under distinct genera, the intermediate gradations are so complete as to establish a passage from the one into the other. Failing the characters of premolars and inferior incisors, previously relied upon, as distinctive of the Mastodons, and abundant cement as distinctive of the Elephants, the constancy of the ridge-formula in being isomerous, whether ternary, quaternary, or quinary in the intermediate molars, appeared to furnish a sufficient technical demarcation between Mastodon and Llephas, and to subdivide the former satisfactorily into the natural subgeneric groups of Trilophodon and Tetralophodon. It remains to be seen whether there is any intermediate species in which the characters of these two groups are blended. Mastodon Sivalensis is regarded as having five ridges to the ‘‘in- termediate molars,” instead of four; but this remarkable character, being restricted at present to a single species, it was deemed inex- pedient to form a systematic section for it alone; and it is ranged at the end of the Tetralophodons. Although a mesial, bipartient, longitudinal cleft along the summit of the crown is very common in the molars of most of the species of Mastodon, and usually absent in the Elephants, there is one spe- cies of the former, M. (Triloph.) Borsoni, in which the cleft is so obsolete, that Isaac Hays* founded the specific character upon the supposed absence of this cleft. But the cleft, although but shghtly pronounced, is distinctly present in unworn germ-teeth of this form ; and it is even visible in the original molar described by Abbé Borson, upon which Dr. Hays relied for its absence. The plurality of the species in the first subgeneric group of Elephas, namely Stegodon, are sufficiently distinguished from the Mastodons by the higher numerical expression of the crown-formula, in showing 7 or 8 ridges instead of 3 or 4; by the great quantity of laminated cement which fills the transverse valleys; by the ridges being convex as in the typical Elephants; by the greater number of points to each ridge; and by the absence of a mesial dividing furrow. But in one of the species, HL. (Stegodon )Cliftii, there is an obsolete indication of this furrow ; and its affinity to the Mas- todon is further evinced by the low or senary expression of the ridge-formula. This species constitutes a frontier form, through which the passage between the two genera is effected; but the details of the other dental characters show that it is most nearly allied to the Stegodons, and the characters of the subgeneric group were con- structed to admit of its reception among them. Two of the Loxodons, namely LH. (Lox.) planifrons and EL. (Lox.) Africanus, have a ridge- * Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, ser. 2, vol. iv. p. 334. i857. | FALCONER—MASTODON. 321 formula which is identical or nearly so with that of Stegodon insignis ; but the separation of the group is indicated by the great increase of vertical height in the colliculi, and by the layers of enamel assuming the character of plates, instead of the mastoid eminences of Stegodon. EE. (Low.) meridionalis has a higher number of plates in the ‘‘intermediate molars’ than those two species, and con- stitutes a frontier form, leading towards the next group, Luelephas. But the ridge-formula in this form would appear to be hypisomerous, and the aggregate characters indicate its position among the Loxodons. The majority of the species in the group Huelephas are well marked by the progressive increments and high numerical expression of the crown-ridges of the intermediate molars, by the great vertical height of the colliculi, and the attenuated plates of enamel. One species among them, LH. (Hueleph.) Hysudricus, constitutes a frontier form leading towards E. (Lox.) meridionalis. More ample details re- ‘ specting the Elephants will be given in the Second Part of this memoir, when treating of the European fossil species. To revert specially to the Mastodons, Trilophodon and Tetralo- phodon (including under the latter the exceptional five-ridged Mas- todon Sivalensis), as regards the number of forms at present known, are of nearly equal value, the former in our view comprising 7, and the latter 6, well-marked species ; and they are each divisible into two parallel subordinate groups, the exact appreciation of the characters of which is of much service in the determination of the European fossil species. In.the one series, the ridges are broad, transverse, more or less compressed into an edge, with the valleys open through- out and uninterrupted by subordinate tubercles: these are well represented in Trilophodon by M. (Triloph.) Ohioticus, and in Tetralophodon by M. (Tetral.) latidens. In the other series, the ridges are composed of blunt conical points, which are fewer in number, more elevated, and flanked in front and behind by one or more subordinate outlying tubercles, which disturb the transverse direction of the ridges, and block up the valleys, interrupting their continuity across. This series is represented in T’rilophodon by the Miocene European species M. (Triloph.) angustidens, and in Tetra- lophodon by the Pliocene M. (Tetraloph.) Arvernensis of the Crag (See Plates XI. & XII.). The species with transverse, compressed ridges, in both subgenera, may be compared with Dinotherium, as regards their molar crowns; and the other series with Hippopo- tamus. The European fossil species of Mastodon at present known are the following *,—all of which are of Miocene age, with the exception * M. Aymard has added largely to the nomenclature of the Proboscidea by creating a new genus, and new species for the remains found in the Velay and Auvergne, viz.: Anancus macroplus, as a generic form distinct from Mastodon ; and M. Vellavus and M. Vialettii, regarded by Pomel as synonyms of M. Borsoni; also a fossil Elephant, E. giganteus, Aym. But the specific distinction of these nominal species is exceedingly doubtful (vide Bulletin de la Société Géologique ; and Congrés Scientifique de France, 1855, p. 276). The species referred to in a preceding page as having been made out by M. Lartet has not yet been published. 322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, of M.(Trilophodon) Borsont and M. (Tetralophodon) Arvernensis, which are Pliocene. M. (Triloph.) Borsoni, Isaac Hays (Pliocene). M. (Triloph.) tapiroides, Cuvier. M. (Triloph.) angustidens, Cuvier, pro parte. M. (Tetraloph.) longirostris, Kaup. M. (Tetraloph.) Arvernensis, Crovzet § Jobert (Pliocene). The British fossil Mastodon, and its comparison with M. angus- tidens, M. Arvernensis, and M. longirostris.—The remains of only one species of Mastodon have hitherto been discovered in the British Isles, in what is called the Older Pliocene ‘‘ Red Crag,” at Felixstow and Sutton in Suffolk, and in the Newer Pliocene, “ Fluvio-marine,”’ or “‘ Mammaliferous Crag”’ in various localities near Norwich and in Suffolk. I shall now endeavour to ascertain what this species is ; and, as I consider that the question is one of considerable import- ance, as a turning-point upon which the independent character of the British Pliocene fauna hangs,—that is to say, whether it is di- stinct or merely a long-lived offset from the Miocene,—I shall not hesitate to enter at length upon the details calculated to throw light upon the subject. Professor Owen is the only English paleeontologist who has under- taken to identify and describe in connexion all the Mastodon-remains of the Crag, which he has done very fully in his valuable work ‘On the British Fossil Mammalia,’ published in1846. He there designates the species Mastodon angustidens or Mastodonte a dents étroites of Cuvier ; and gives as synonyms, in his opinion, M. Arvernensis of Croizet and Jobert, and M. longirostris of Kaup. He heads the chapter with a woodcut of the upper and lower jaws of the Eppelsheim M. longirostris, after Kaup, under the name of Mastodon angustidens ; and in his description of the dentition of M. angustidens in the ‘Odontography*,’ he draws his details of the various teeth indif- ferently from the three nominal species above mentioned, namely, M. angustidens, M. longirostris, and M. Arvernensis. In his memoir on the Crag Mammalia, contained in the 47th number of the ‘ Quar- terly Journal,’ published in August of the present year, he reiterates the opinion that Mastodon angustidens and Mastodon longirostris are synonyms of the English Crag species. Any opinion emanating from so distinguished a palzeontologist as Professor Owen, and repeated by him after mature study, at various intervals, between 1843 and 1856, must necessarily carry great weight with it. The first point, therefore, to determine is, what is the species to which Cuvier’s name of M. angustidens is legitimately applicable. (Mastodon angustidens.)—The fluviatile or lacustrine Molasse of the basin of the Sub-Pyrenees has from a very remote time been worked, at Simorre, by mines for what was called the ‘‘ Turquoise de nouvelle Roche,’ this substance being the ivory of Mastodon- tusks chiefly highly injected with a metallic infiltration, so as to * Op. cil. p. 619 et seq. 1857. | FALCONER—MASTODON. 323 simulate the natural mineral Turquoise*. The excavations brought to light the numerous Miocene remains found in this rich depot, and among others the molars of Mastodon. These were vaguely referred to by the old naturalists, under the name of the “ Animal de Simorret.’’ Some of them found their way, in the progress of time, to the Museum of Natural History in Paris, about the middle of the last century, and Daubenton described them under the title of “petrified teeth having relations to those of Hippopotamus,” to which indeed in some important respects they bear a very striking analogy. Cuvier, having established his ‘“‘grand Mastodonte”’ of North America, next directed his attention to the European remains of the genus, the first of which he published under the title of ‘ Mas- todonte 4 dents étroites’ or M. angustidens. It has been proved vpon the clearest evidence, by various palzeontologists, and admitted among others by his devoted friend and follower Laurijlardt, that Cuvier has included more than one species under this nominal desig- nation of M. angustidens. It is requisite therefore to ascertain precisely what were the original types which suggested a name of such palpable signification to a shrewd and philosophical observer like Cuvier. On referring to his original memoir, it will be found that Cuvier commences §, as his first illustration, with a description of one of the Simorre molars previously described by Daubenton. The second. piece is the Dax specimen from near Sort, Département des Landes, and obtained from a fluvio-marine Molasse formation probably of the same age as the Simorre lacustrine beds. ‘The third specimen is a South American fragment, brought to Europe by Humboldt, which has no connexion with the European species: on this head all later paleeontologists who have investigated the subject, without exception (exclusive of mere compilers), are agreed ; among others, Laurillard ||, who identifies it with M. Andium, as restricted by him. The fourth specimen which Cuvier quotes is another Simorre fossil. The sixth, a very important and characteristic specimen, is from the same locality. Now, all these Simorre specimens, with the exception of the third, which is a premolar—and therefore a normal exception,—are characterized by having their crowns divided into three principal ridges. ‘‘ It is therefore,” as we have elsewhere { stated, ‘to a species having the intermediate molars distinguished by a ternary division of the crown, as in M. Ohioticus, that the specific name of M. angustidens is strictly applicable, so far as priority of description and reference to original types can be taken as the guides to a decision on the point.” See Plate XI. figs. 3 & 4. Since the time of Cuvier, Simorre and Sansan have become classical palzeontological ground through the important discoveries, * Reaumur, Mém. del’Acad. des Sciences, 1715, p. 174; and Lartet, Quelques Apercus Géologiques dans le Département du Gers,” p. 19. tT Id. op. cit. p. 24. + Dictionnaire Universel d’Histoire Naturelle, tom. viii. pp. 29-30. § Annales du Muséum, tom. viii. p. 412. || Dictionnaire Universel d’Histoire Naturelle, tom. viii. p. 29. *| Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis, par. i. 1846, p. 57. VOL. XIII.— PART I. 2A 324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, made by M. Lartet, of the first announced fossil monkey in Europe, of Macrotherium, Anisodon, &e. Among others, a vast quantity of Mastodon-remains have been met with, including the whole den- tition, from the young sucking-calf up to the adult and old animals. A superb skeleton was disinterred by Laurillard at Seissan, so com- plete in every respect, that it has been set up in the Paris Mu- seum, alongside of the skeletons of the existing Indian and African Elephants. Two points which have been invariably exhibited by all these teeth are of special importance in their bearing upon the present question ; the first is, that theimtermediate molars are constantly three-ridged, or, in other words, belong to the Trilophodon type ; no Tetralophodon molars having ever, within the knowledge of M. Lartet, been discovered either at Simorre, Sansan, or Lombez: the second is, that they entirely agree with the original Simorre types described by Cuvier, upon which his M. angustidens is founded ; and that they are absolutély the narrowest of all known Mastodon-molars. Another remarkable character of the species is this, that, in harmony with the narrow teeth, the horizontal ramus of the lower jaw is more com- pressed, and higher in relation to the width, than in any other known Mastodon. This is well shown in the Paris skeleton, and in nume- rous lower jaws contained in the palzeontological gallery. M. Lartet possesses, in his rich collection at Seissan, several lower jaws exhibit- ing the same character. A nearly entire skeleton of this species was discovered in the latter part of 1855, in the sandstone-quarry of Veltheim, near Winterthur in Canton Zurich ; this I was enabled to examine minutely through the kindness of M. Ziegler-Ernst of Winterthur. It is the largest specimen of the species that I have anywhere seen. The lower jaw, although in fragments, is nearly complete, and shows the extreme compression of the horizontal ramus, and its great depth. JI found, by measurement with the callipers, that this compression was even greater than is seen in Dinotherium, while the lower jaws of most of the known Mastodons and Elephants yield more or less of a circular section. This tenuity of form is carried on throughout the skeleton in the Mastodon of Simorre. From these remarks it would appear sufficiently evident, that, whether we are guided by priority of description and reference to the original specimens, or by the obvious signification of the term, the title of Mastodon angustidens is legitimately applicable to the T77- lophodon of Simorre, and to no other species: for it 1s, par excellence, the ‘‘Mastodonte a dents ¢troites’’ of Cuvier. The species, thus limited, has nowhere been met with in the fossil state in England. (Mastodon Arvernensis and M. longirostris.)—But Cuvier, as al- ready stated, included under this name of M. angustidens other remains which do not belong to it. Upon this head nearly all the French paleontologists are agreed, although at variance as to the details. Of the specimens figured in the four plates devoted to «‘ Tivers Mastodontes’’ in the ‘Ossemens Fossiles,’ all those from South America, amounting to 10 in number, are by common con- sent referred to one or two species peculiar to that country. Seven are referable to the Mastodon of Simorre with narrow molars; one 1857. | 7 FALCONER—MASTODON. 325 to M. tapiroides; five are doubtful, either from inexact knowledge as to their origin, or from their undecided character ; and all the rest, being 11 in the aggregate, are from Italy, with the exception of one specimen from Trevoux in France. It is curious to observe the different views that have been taken of them. De Blainville * limits the South American remains to a single species, while Laurillard and Gervais range them under two well-defined forms. De Blainville and Owen agree with Cuvier in referring the so-called narrow-toothed re- mains from Simorre, Italy, Auvergne, and Eppelsheim also, to a’ single species. Laurillard, devoted as he was to the traditions of his great leader, was compelled by the evidence to adinit two species, namely M. angustidens, under which title he included the Italian, Auvergne, and part of the Eppelsheim remains,—and M. longirostris, under which he ranged both the principal part of Kaup’s Eppelsheim species, and the whole of the Simorre remains+. Misled by the undue importance which he attached to the presence of mandibular incisors’ common to the two forms, he sunk the characters presented by the molars, and confounded ternary-ridged and quaternary-ridged forms under the same name, although it is distinctly evident that he was aware that two of the European species severally possessed 3 and 4 ridges to their intermediate molars, and that the ternary formula was common to the Mastodons of North America and of Simorre. In 1828, four years before the demise of Cuvier, Croizet and Jobertt proposed the name of M. Arvernensis for the Auvergne remains, as di- stinct from M. angustidens, and soon afterwards Dr. Kaup$ published his magnificent series of the Eppelsheim form as equally distinct, under the designation of M. longirostris, which has been regarded b Herman von Meyer to be identical with M. Arvernensis ||. Lartet{ had accurately determined the milk- and permanent dentition (so far as the true molars are concerned) of the Simorre form as far back as 1847. He assigned three ridges to the last milk-molar and to the ante-penul- timate and penultimate true molars in bothjaws, and inhis ‘Notice,’ ** published in 1851, he proposes to distinguish it by the name of Masto- don Simorrense, retaining the designation of Mastodon angustidens for the.Italian and Auvergne remains, characterized by four ridges in the penultimate true molar, instead of three. Lartet at the same time ++ proposed the name of Mastodon Gaujaci for a supposed small form. from the same Miocene deposit at Lombez. Laurillard considered it as furnishing a confirmation of the conjectural species named Mastodon minutus by Cuvier ft. | Gervais followed Laurillard in considering the Simorre M. (Triloph.) angustidens and M. (Tetraloph.) longirostris as be- * Ostéographie: Des Eléphants. tT Dictionnaire Universel d’ Histoire Naturelle, tom. viii. p. 29. + Recherches sur les Ossements fossiles du Département du Puy-de-Dome, p. 133. § Ossements Fossiles de Darmstadt, part iv. | Nova Acta Acad. Nat. Cur. vol. xvii. p. 113. {| Dictionnaire Universelle d’Histoire Naturelle, tom. viii. p. 29. ** Notice sur la Colline de Sansan, p. 24. tt Op. cit. p. 27. tt Dictionnaire Universel d’Histoire Naturelle, tom. viii. p. 31. 2Aa2 326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, longing to the same species, Mast. longirostris; but adopted for the Auvergne form the name of M. Arvernensis; and went a step beyond his predecessors in propesing a new name for the Mas- todoa-remains found in the arenaceous deposits near Montpellier, whica he identifies with the Mastodon of the Astesan and the Val uw’ Arno under the name of M. érevirostre*. Pomel, in his memoir ot 1848, proposes a new name for the Simorre 7rilophodon, namely M. Cuvieri, and he retains that of M. angustidens tor the Auvergne and Italian forms, admitting their distinctness from WM. longiros- tris of Eppelsheim f. In his ‘ Catalogue Méthodique’ of 1854 he adopts the name of M. Arvernensis for the Auvergne and Montpel- lier form, to which he assigns the additional foreign localities of the Val d’Arno, Piedmont, and the Crag in England: but in a remark on the next page he reiterates the view expressed in his previous me- moir, that he has retained the name of M. angustidens for the species of Italy {. Nesti §, in his description of the Tuscan remains, adopts the name of M. angustidens (Mastodonte a denti stretti) in the loose comprehensive sense in which it was used by Cuvier; while Eugenio Sismonda, aware of the various and contradictory opinions upon the point, guardedly described the fine skeleton found at Dusino in Pied- mont, under the title of ‘Osteographia di un Mastodonte angusti- dente ’||.. My friend and collaborateur Colonel Sir Proby Cautley, in 1836, figured and described some teeth of the Indian species to which we subsequently restricted the name of M. (Tetralonhodon) Siva- lensis, as identical with the ‘‘ Mastodonte a dents ¢ctroites’” of Cuvier, and he expressed at the same time the opinion that the Italian form which he had more particularly in view would, with the Sewalik one, constitute a subgenus of the dngustidens type, in contradistinction to the type of Clift’s M. latidensY. These, so far as Lam aware, are the leading opinions which have been put forward by original writers on this much-disputed question. Those which have been expressed by the compilers of systematic works on Paleeontology, however useful, are of little weight in the dis- cussion, as they express more the balance of the authorities numeri- cally, than opinions formed upon independent examination of the subject by themselves. The specific name Mastodon angustidens is even struck out of the list of Huropean species, except as a synonym, in the last edition of Bronn’s ‘‘ Letheea,”’ and replaced by the terms M. Arvernensis, M. longirostris, and M. Cuvieri **. Paleeontologists would confer a great boon on Geology, if they could be brought to agree in applying this name (M. angustidens) to the Simorre form, for which it was devised by Cuvier. The views which we entertain were partially disclosed in the first * Annales des Sciences Naturelles, 3me série, tom. v. p. 268. T Bull. de la Soc. Géologique, 1848, tom. v. p. 257. $ Catal. méthod. et descript. pp. 74, 75. § Nuovo Giorn. de Letterat., Pisa, tom. xii. pp. 17-34. || Mem. del Reale Accad. di Torino, 1851, pp. 175-235. *| Journ. of the Asiat. Soc. of Bengal, vol. v. p. 294. ** Lethaa Geognostica, drd edit. vol. iii. pp. 827-832 (1856). 1857. | FALCONER—-MASTODON. 327 part of the letter-press of the ‘ Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis,’ and fully elucidated in the four plates of outline-heads, from Plate 42 to 45, of Part 5 of the illustrations, where a synopsis is given of all the species, fossil and recent, then known. The forms included under the nominal species of M. angustidens of Cuvier are there ranged as distinct species, namely M. (Triloph.) augustidens, M. (Triloph.) Andium, M. (Tetraloph.) longirostris, M. (Tetraloph.) Arvernensis. The only change which subsequent investigation on fresh materials has led us to make, is to transfer M. Andivm from the subgenus T7- lophodon into that of Tetralophodon, for reasons which it is not neces- sary to detail on the present occasion. Of these forms the only one which I believe has been met with in the fossil state in England is M. (Tetralophodon) Arvernensis (Pl. XII.) ; and I shall now pro- ceed to the consideration of the evidence in support of this conclusion. (British specimens of Mastodon.)—Remains of two out of the three species of Mastodon with which we are chiefly concerned now, viz, M. (Trilophodon) angustidens, M. (Tetralophodon) longirosiris, and M. (Tetralophodon) Arvernensis, have been discovered on the Continent, in the localities where they prevail, in such a perfect con- dition, that very little remains to be desired in regard to their entire osteology. The skeleton of MM. (Trilophodon) angustidens from Seissan, set up in the gallery of Comparative Anatomy in Paris, is so complete in every respect, from the cranium down to the digital phalanges, that it may be compared bone for bone, throughout the frame, with the skeletons of the African and Indian Elephants which adjoin it. Of M. (Tetraloph.) Arvernensis, a nearly entire skeleton was disclosed by a railway-excavation at Dusino near Asti in Pied- mont, and is now deposited in the Turin Museum. It is deficient only in the cranial portion of the head, right hind leg, part of the scapula and pelvis, and some of the bones of the carpus and tarsus. The upper and lower jaws, with the tusks entire to their tips, are preserved ; and Prof. Sismonda was only deterred by the brittle condition of the bones, from attempting to reconstruct the whole. A skeleton of the same species nearly as perfect, which I have examined, was discovered in the lower Val d’Arno in a marine stratum, along with the skeleton of a Whale. It is now laid out in the museum at Florence, together with numerous other bones of the same species. From the Miocene sands of Eppelsheim, Kaup disinterred the upper and lower jaws, with an immense quantity of molars, showing the entire dental series, milk and adult, besides various other portions of the skeleton, of M. (Tetralophodon) longirostris. The materials are therefore so abundant now, that it is in a measure easy to institute a comparison more or less rigorous between the three species. But as regards the English remains of Mastodon, it is quite the reverse. Only solitary teeth detached from the jaws, or part of a mutilated young cranium, have hitherto been described, and the teeth in most cases mutilated. The beautiful vignette which heads 328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, the chapter upon Mastodon angustidens in the ‘ British Fossil Mam- malia’ would convey a very exaggerated notion of the English re- mains as they are ordinarily met with, but that the author takes care to apprise his readers that it is derived from Kaup’s figure of the Eppelsheim species. No good specimen of the lower jaw, so far as I am aware, has yet been found in Britain ; nor have any of the large bones of the extremities been identified, although it is more than probable that such do exist in the numerous collections which have been formed in Norfolk and Suffolk. The pieces are usually more or less mutilated ; and it is clear that the bones have been broken up before the fragments were deposited in the strata where they are now found. Nothing approaching the remains of a perfect skeleton has been seen in any one locality, with the exception of the notable case recorded by the Rev. J. Layton, in which the entire skeleton of a Mastodon is stated to have been found lying on its side stretched out between the chalk and gravel, at Horstead near Norwich, ona bed of marl. The bones in this stance were heedlessly broken up by the workmen, or dispersed before any steps could be taken for their preservation*. The molars or other fragments occur scattered and detached. Prof. Owen mentions a well-preserved atlas of apparently Mastodon angus- tidens as being preserved in the Ipswich Museumt. Mastodon mo- lars have been found both in the Red Crag of Suffolk and im the Fluvio- marine Crag of Norfolk and Suffolk; im the former at Sutton and Felixstow, in the latter at Postwick, Whitlingham, Thorpe, Horstead, and Bramerton near Norwich, and at Easton near Southwold. Mr. Charlesworth, in reference to their supposed rarity, mentions, that within the twelve months preceding September 1851, upwards of a dozen of Mastodon molars had been discovered, in washing the Crag to get out the phosphatic nodules {. Prof. Owen notices their occur- rence in the Crag-pits of Suffolk §. Iam not aware that they have yet been discovered in the Fluvio-marine Crag of Bridlington in York- shire, nor in any of the freshwater deposits below the Drift, where re- mains of Elephant and Hippopotamus are more or less abundant. It is no part of the object of this communication to describe the numerous remains of Mastodon from the Crag, that are to be met with in different English collections. All that is intended, is to determine what the species really is, and only such characteristic specimens will be referred to as exist either in original or as casts in public museums, or as have been so accurately figured and described in works of authority as to be susceptible of satisfactory identification. First as regards the Molars.—The most perfect specimen that has yet been discovered, is the famous Whitlingham tooth, which forms the frontispiece of Mr. W. Smith’s ‘ Strata Identified,’ and of which (reversed) a beautiful woodcut is given in fig. 97 of the ‘ British Fossil Mammalia.’ It is also very carefully represented, unreversed, both as regards the plan and profile views of the crown, * Fairholme’s ‘ Geology of the Scriptures,’ p. 281. fT Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 223. ¢ Warren, ‘On Mastodon giganteus,’ 2nd edit. p. 204. § Op. cit. p. 223. 1857. | FALCONER—MASTODON. 329 in the ‘Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis,’ pl. 36. figs. 8 and 8a. It is the last true molar (upper jaw, right side), being composed of five ridges, with an anterior “talon,”’ and a strong back “talon.” The crown is obscurely divided longitudinally by a shallow cleft along its axis. Hach ridge consists of about two pairs of thick, high, conical mammille, with very thick enamel. Deep clefts or valieys intervene between these ridges; but the valleys, instead of being transverse, are interrupted in the middle by one or more large accessory conical mammillz, which are interposed between the ridges, and alternate with the outer and inner divisions. These mammillee are usually connected with the inner division of each ridge in the upper jaw, and with the outer in the lower. They are much thicker than in the other species of Mastodon which possess them, and have a large conical core of ivory. The consequence of this complex composition of the crown is, that, when the ridges have been worn down by continued grinding, they present a great number of distinct alternate trefoil discs, surrounded by a ring or belt of enamel, instead of the single or double transverse disc exhibited by the Mastodon of Eppelsheim, M. (Tetralophodon) longirostris, or by the M. (Trilo- phodon) augustidens of Simorre. In the Eppelsheim species, of which I have carefully examined all the molars contained in the rich collection at Darmstadt, there is a considerable range of variety as regards the accessory tubercles which flank the main ridges. In some of the last molars, the main ridges are perfectly free from any outlying or flanking mammille ; they are regularly transverse, and the valleys between are equally transverse, and open throughout. In others, the ridges bear numerous small warty tubercles of enamel, which jut into the valleys and distort them. But the transverse continuity of the valleys is never blocked up by the large conical mastoid mammillz which in the molars of M. (Tetralophodon) Arver- nensis invariably alternate with the main ridges, and reduce the valleys to disconnected gorges, occupying the outer and inner sides of the crown. The accessory tubercles in the Eppelsheim species are so unimportant, that their only effect, after advanced wear, is to expand the diameter of the disc, or communicate to it some- thing of a trefoil pattern. The discs are always transverse, while in the English Crag Mastodon they are invariably more or less alternate. In illustration of this very obvious differential character in M. (Tetralophodon) longirostris, the beautiful series of figures given by Kaup in the ‘QOssements Fossiles de Darmstadt,’ from plates 16 to 21 inclusive, may be quoted; but I would more espe- cially refer to figs. 4 and 5 of pl. 16, figs. 1, 3, 4, and 9 of pl. 18, and figs. 2, 6, and 7 of pl. 21. We have endeavoured to exhibit these differences in a well-marked and obvious manner, by contrasted figures (drawn with the greatest care and fidelity by Mr. George Ford) of the same tooth in three species, placed side by side, in pl. 36 of the ‘ Fauna Antiqua Siva- lensis.’ Figs. 6 and 6 a@ represent in plan and profile the last molar (upper jaw, left side) of M. (Tetralophodon) Swalensis, an Indian fossil species, which is the most nearly allied to the English Crag 330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL society. [April 8, Mastodon so far as the alternate disposition of the crown-mammillee is concerned, but differing in the ridge-formula. Figs. 8 and 9 re- present two specimens of the same tooth of M. (Tetralophodon) Ar- vernensis, the one being Mr. William Smith’s Whitlhngham fossil, and the other, fig. 9, Captain Alexander’s specimen, dredged up be- tween Southwold and Easton, of which there is a cast in the Geolo- gical Society's Museum. Figs. 12 and 13 represent two specimens, of different races or sexes, of “the same tooth of M. (Tetralophodon) longirostris, from Eppelsheim. The Sewalik molar, fig. 6, exhibits six ridges and a hind “talon’’; the Crag and Eppelsheim molars show only five ridges and the “talon.” In the Eppelsheim teeth, figs. 12 and 13, the crown is broad, the mammille are thicker in proportion to their height, the ridges are less elevated, and consist of a greater number of coronal points (there being often as many as six or seven to each ridge), the outer and inner lines of points con- verge less towards the apex of the crown as they rise upwards, and the valleys are either entirely open and transverse, or interrupted only by an insignificant amount of warty tubercles. In the Crag fossils, figs. 8 and 9, the crown is narrower m proportion, the mam- mille form more attenuated cones, and are more elevated; the ridges consist of fewer coronal points, which, instead of running across im a wide crest, appear, so to speak, as if they had been squeezed together, and their transversality disturbed; the outer and inner lines of points, especially the latter, converge ‘vapidly as they ascend, rendering the apex of the crown much narrower than the base ; the outer and inner divisions of the crown are more or less alternate, and the vallicular mammille that flank and alternate with them are large conical points, which yield discs of wear approaching im size to those of the principal points; the valleys are completely obstructed by these mammillee, and reduced to a gorge on either side of them. When the teeth are viewed in pro- file, such as fig. 8, on the above-mentioned plate, compared with fig. 13, the difference is very marked, the latter yieldimg a series of salient and re- entering angles, corresponding with the prominent points and valleys, which the former does not, the re-entering angles being mntercepten, by a dark shade, which represents the accessory mammille. If the eye is next directed to figs. 6 and 6a, the differ- ences are still more marked, M. (Zetr alophodon) Stvalensis exhibit- ing a greater amount of alternation of the crown-mammille, and more complexity of pattern, than is even seen in the English Crag Mastodon. ‘To summarize the distinctive characters of the two European species, it may be stated, that M. (Tetr.) Arvernensis (Pl. XII.), with JZ. (Letr.) Sivalensis, resemble the Hippopotamoid type, and M. (Tetr.) longirostris (Pi. XI. fig. 1), with the Indian species M. (Tetr.) latidens, the Dinotherian type, in so far as the form of the crowns of the molar teeth is concerned. Of the last true molar of the lower jaw no good entire specimen, so far as I am aware, has yet been published as having been yielded by the English Crag. But in the Museum of the Geological Society there is a cast of a very fine specimen of this tooth from the left 1857.| FALCONER—MASTODON. 331 side of the lower jaw, which, according to the label on the cast, was found in the Crag of Suffolk (see Plate XII. figs. 3,4). It is a nearly unworn germ, measuring about 8} inches ong, by 3 in width in front ; without fangs; and the xireune ridge alone being slightly touched by wear. It is composed of five ridges and a talon of two mammille. The anterior ridge shows two pairs of mammille ; the next four ridges present only two large conical mammille each, which converge rapidly towards the summit of the crown, and are disposed in an alternate manner. One or more large accessory mammillz are interposed between the ridges, blocking up valleys in the manner described as characteristic of the species, and the ridges are inclined with a slope which increases successively backwards. The talon appears to have been composed of a 1Oe of points, one of which is mutilated on the inner side, and a small portion of the back end of the tooth is wanting. The slope of the posterior ridges is SO pronounced as to approach neatly to the character of “ vy eah 4 77, el goa Vem fe yy ¥ _ red : 371 DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. From April \st, 1857, to June 30th, 1857. I. TRANSACTIONS AND JOURNALS. Presented by the respective Societies and Editors. AMERICAN Journal of Sciences and Arts. 2nd Series. Vol. xxiii. No. 68. March 1857. From Prof. Silliman, For. Mem. G.S. J. W. Bailey.—Microscopic Examination of Soundings from the Atlantic, 153. Coal-fields of the East-Indian Archipelago, 157. J. W. Mallet.—Rose-coloured Mica of Goshen, Mass., 189. Analyses of Marble, Greensand, Iron-ores, &c., of Alabama, 181. J. Hall.—Carboniferous limestones of the Mississippi Valley, 187. Archimedes or Fenestella of the Carboniferous lime- stones, 203. J.S. Newberry.—Formation of Cannel-coal, 212. F. v. Kobell.—Notice of J. N. v. Fuchs, 225. C, & A. Tissier, and Debray.—Alloys of Aluminium, 265. Troost.—Lithia, 266. W. P. Blake.—Telluret of Silver in California, 270. J. Leidy.—Fossil Vertebrata from Carolina and Virginia, 271. D. D. Owen.—Geological Survey of Kentucky, 272. G. Jones.—Shower of ashes in Quito, 276. J. Hall.—Paleotrochis of Emmons, 278. H. Poole.—Visit to the Dead Sea, 290. Notice of W.C. Redfield, 292. Notice of Hugh Miller, 293. Bibliography, 299. a ee . No. 69. May 1857. J.D. Whitney—The Huronian and Laurentian Systems of the Canada Geological Survey, 305. J.B. Trask.—Earthguakes in California during 1856, 341. VOL. XIII.—PART I. 2D 372 DONATIONS. American Journal of Sciences and Arts. No. 69 (continued). G. P. Scrope.—Craters and Lavas, 346. N. A. Pratt.—Two Sulphurets of Copper from the Canton (Ga.) Mine, 409. F, A. Genth.—Contributions to Mineralogy, 415. J. W. Mallet.—Separation of Lithia and Magnesia, 427. Wohler & Deville.-—Boron, 433. T. Coan.—Voleanic Action of Hawaii, 435. I. A. Laphani. i i AS]. T.S. Hunt.—Reaction of the alkaline silicates, 437. Obituary Notice of J. W. Bailey, 447. Obituary Notice of M. Tuomey, 448. Assurance Magazine. Vol. vi. part 1. April 1857. Athenzeum Journal for April, May, and June 1857. From C. W. Dilke, Esq., F.G.S. Notices of Scientific Meetings, &c. Belgium. Annuaires de l Académie Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de Belgique, 1856 & 1857. Bulletins de l Académie Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de Belgique. Vol. xxii. 2™° partie, 1855. Vol. xxii. 1856. Biver and Nerenburger.—Les triangulations géodétiques, I. 88, 92, 99, II. 430. Ad. de Vaux.—Gisement et formation de Poligiste, de la limonite et de la pyrite, I. 69. L. De Koninck.—La distribution de quelques fossiles carboni- féres, IT. 309. ———. Mémoires de l Academie Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de Belgique. Vol. xxx. 1857. Mémoires Couronnés des Savants Etrangers, publides par P Académie Royale de Belgique. Vol. xxvi. 1854-55. Vol. xxvi. 1855-56. Vol. xxvii. 1856. Bengal Asiatic Society, Journal. New Series, 1856. No. 6. H. Schlagintweit.—Magnetic Survey of part of the Himalayas, 554 —— —— —— ee No. 84. 1856. No. 7. Inde to vols. 1. to xxi. of the Journal, and to vols. xix. and xx. of the Asiatic Researches; with Appendix of classified lists of the Antiquarian, Geological, and Mineralogical papers in the Journal. Bent’s Monthly Literary Advertiser. | Nos. 636, 637, 638. Berlin. Monatsbericht der Kon.. Preuss. Akad. der Wissen. 1856, Januar—October. Rammelsberg.—Ueber die chemische Zusammensetzung des Leucits und seiner Pseudomorphosen, 148. ee eee DONATIONS. 373 Berlin. Monatsbericht der Kén. Preuss. Akad. der Wissen. 1856, Januar—October (continued). Rammelsberg.—Ueber das Vanadinbleierz, 153. Hagen.— Ueber die Fluth- und Boden-Verhaltnisse des Preuss- ischen Jade-Gebietes, 339. -Miiller.—Ueber neue Crinoiden aus dem Eifeler Kalk, 353. Ueber ein Echinoderm mit Schuppenférmigen Tafeln _ und Echinidstacheln im Eifeler Kalk, 356. Ehrenberg.—Bericht iiber die Fortsetzung der Mikrogeologie, 362. Ueber zwei neue siidamerikanschen Gebirgsmassen aus mickroscopischen Organismen, 425. G. Rose.—Ueber die Beschaffenheit und Lagerungsverhialtnisse der Gesteine im Riesen- und Iser-gebirge, 444. (ee es : , for November and December 1856. KE. Mayer und v. Neimans.—Berichte tiber das Erdbeben vom 34 Oct. 1856, 471. Ewald.—Ueber die am nordlichen Harzrande vorkommenden Rudisten, 596. Rammelsberg.— Ueber den Zoisit und seme Beziehung zum Epidot, so wie iiber die Zusammensetzung des Jetzteren, 605. G. Rose.—Ueber Diamanten des koénigl. mimeralogischen Mu- seums, 652. Zeitschrift der Deutschen geologischen Gesellschaft. Vol. iv. 3 Heft. Mai—Juli 1852. Proceedings of the Society, 497. Letters, 508. A. Braun.—Ueber fossile Goniopteris-Arten, 545 (plate). J. Roth.—Analysen dolomitischer Kalksteine, 565. Von Huene.—Das Vorkommen von Galmei, Blende, Bleierz, Schwefelkies und Braunkohle bei Bergisch-Gladbach, 571 (plate). ee Das Vorkommen von Hartmanganerz im Trachyt am Drachenfels am Rhein, 576. Hermann Karsten.—Geognostische Bemerkungen iiber die Nord- kiiste Neue-Granada’s, insbesondere iiber die sogenannten Vulkane von Turbabo und Zamba, 579. Meyn.—Eine neue Insel in Norddeutschland. Vol. v. 1. Heft. November, December 1852—Januar. 1853. Proceedings of the Society, 1. Letters, 14. ; A.v. Humboldt.—Schichtung der Gebirgsarten am siidlichen Ab- fall der Kiistenkette von Venezuela gegen das grosse Becken der Ebenen (Llanos), 18 (plate). Scacchi und Palmieri.—Ueber die vulkanische Gegend des Vultur und das dortige Erdbeben vom 14 August 1851, 21 (plate). Von Franzius.—Fossile Ueberreste von Anthracotherium mini- mum und einer Antilopen-art aus Dalmatien, 75 (plate), Von Strombeck.—Der obere Lias und braune Jura bei Braun- schweig, 81. Sonnenschein.—Ueber das Carolathin, 223. E. E. Schmid.—Ueber die basaltischen Gesteme der Rhon, 227, 2pd2 374 DONATIONS. Berlin. Zeitschrift der Deutschen geologischen Gesellschaft. Vol. vi. 3 Heft. Mai—Juli 1854. Proceedings of the Society, 501. Letters, 516. J. Routh.—Bohrungen bei Wendisch-Wehningen, 522. H. Karsten.—Die Planer-Formation in Meklenburg, 527 (plate). V. Schauroth.—Ein Beitrag zur Palaontologie des deutschen Zechsteingebirges, 539 (3 plates). Scharenverg.—Bemerkungen tuber die geognostichen Verhilt- nisse der Stidkuste von Andalusien, 578. A. Erman.—Eimige Beobachtungen iiber die Kreideformation an der Nordkiiste von Spanien, 596 (2 plates). Bornemann.— Ueber Semionotus im oberen Keupersandstein, 612 (plate). Berwickshire Naturalists’ Club, Proceedings, 1856. Vol. ii. No. 7. G. Tate.—Farne Islands, 222. Cambridge Philosophical Society, Transactions. Vol.ix. Part 4. 1856. J. B. Phear.—Geology of part of Suffolk, 431. O. Fisher.—Purbeck strata of Dorsetshire, 555. W. Hopkins.—External Temperature of the Earth and the other Planets of the Solar System, 628. Canadian Institute: Canadian Journal of Industry, Science, and Art. New Series. No. 8. March 1857. W. Bessemer.—Manufacture of Iron, 117. —-——. No.9. May 1857. Hugh Miller’s Testimony of the Rocks, noticed, 207. Nott and Gliddon’s Indigenous races of the Earth, noticed, 208. G. D. Gibb. i England, 216. D. D. Owen.—Kentucky Coal-fields, 217. Friedel.—Zircon with basal planes, 218. E. J. Chapman.—Cale-spar crystals from South Africa, 219. Chemical Society, Quarterly Journal. Vol.x. No.1. April 1857. Civil Engineer and Architect’s Journal. No. 277. April 1857. Fowke.—On civil construction, 109. Contour-levels, 127. ——. ————.. No. 278. May L857. J. Phillips and A. Ramsay.—Leading points in Geology, 135. E. Burstall.—River Thames, 139. W. Austin.—Artesian wells, 140. J. Percy.—Steel, Platinum, Aluminium, &e. 151. ——. ———_.. No. 279. June 1857. Cornwall Royal Institution, 38th Annual Report. 1856. W. W. Smyth.—Report on the State of the Mining School, 17. W. J. Henwood.—The Copper-turf of Merioneth, 41. Critic. Nos. 381-390. Notices of Scientific Meetings, &c. Dublin Society (Royal), Journal. Nos. 4 and 5 (in one). January and April 1857. M°Clintock and Haughton.—Geology and Fossils of Arctic Regions, 183 (6 plates and a map). DONATIONS. 375 France, Congrés Scientifique de. Vingt-deuxitme Session, tenue au Puy, en Septembre 1855. Tomei. 1856. De Vutilité d’un texte explicatif comme complément des cartes géolo- giques et agronomiques départementales; du plan 4 suivre dans le confection de ce travail. Pp. 202, 261. A quelles époques géologiques peut-on assigner le soulévement et les mouvements successifs qui ont produit le relief du plateau central de la France? P. 209. A quelles causes faut-il attribuer la présence des blocs de gneiss et de porphyres empatés dans certains gneiss et granites, et, en particulier, dans ceux de la Haute-Loire et de l’Ardéche? Pp. 214, 358. Des bassins houilliers de la Haute-Loire sous le rapport des accidents plutoniques qu’on y observe. Pp. 218, 361. Existe-t-il des vestiges de terrains secondaires sur le plateau central de la France, et, dans le cas de l’affirmative, a quelle cause faut-il attribuer leur rareté? P. 219. Aymard.—Sur les collections de M. Pichot-Dumazel. P. 227. Les gypses du bassin du Puy doivent-ils leur origine 4 un dépét chimique, ou bien au métamorphisme des calcaires? P. 244, Déterminer l’époque géologique pendant laquelle ont éclaté les premiers volcans sur le plateau central de la France, celle ot les volcans ont cessé de briler, et quelles sont les caractéres auxquels ont peut reconnaitre leur age relatif. P. 246. Faut-il considérer les gemmes, tels que zircons, corindons, rubis, grenats, etc., qu’on rencontre dans les terrains voleaniques de Croustet et de Riou-Pezzouliou, prés le Puy, comme les produits de la volcanisation, ou comme provenant de formations géologiques antérieures? P. 255. Croizet sur les collections paléontologiques et géologiques de M. Aymard. P. 258. La paléontologie de la Haute-Loire offre-t-elle, pour certaines époques, des caractéres qui la particularisent? P. 261. A quelle race humaine doit-on attribuer les ossements fossiles découverts dans les cendres volcaniques de Denise, prés le Puy? P.277.3 Les mammiféres didelphes (marsupiaux) ont-ils apparu sur la terre avant les monodelphes? A quelle époque géologique ont-ils disparu de l’Europe? A quels genres de l’Amérique ou de la Nouvelle-Hol- lande pourrait-on comparer, sous le rapport des meeurs et des habi- tudes de vie, les genres fossiles, et, en particulier, le peratherium du terrain tertiaire des environs du Puy? P. 315. Aymard.—Sur des ossemens fossiles trouvés dans les bréches du volcan de Coupet. P.319. Assigner la place que doivent occuper, dans le classement général des mammifeéres, soit prés des anoplothérides, soit avec les suillides, les divers genres de pachydermes fossiles qui ont recu les noms de cheeropotamus, pale@ocheerus, entledon, &c. P. 321. Est-il établi, que le grand genre des mastodontes ait apparu sur la terre avant d’autres genres de proboscidiens? P. 325. A quel usage était appropriée la grande canine cultriforme qui arme la miachoire supérieure des félides connus sous le nom de macherodos ou smilodon. P. 325. Ces renouvellements successifs correspondent-ils 4 un nombre limité des plus grandes phases géologiques, ou bien se sont-ils produits plus fréquemment, a des intervalles de temps plus ou moins rapprochés, dans chacune de ces périodes? P. 325. Bertrand de Lom.—Sur un gisement de gemmes et d’ossements fossiles dans le canton de Langeac (Haute-Loire). P. 335. De l’influence du sol chimique et dusol physique sur la végétation. P.367. Indiquer les moyens les plus simples et les plus a la portée des agricul- teurs pour reconnaitre la nature de leur sol, et celie des marnes, calcaires, argiles, sables, et, en général,de toutes substances qui peu~ vent étre employées comme amendement. P. 376. 376 DONATIONS. France, Société Géologique de, Bulletin. Deux. Sér. Vol. xii. feuill. 75-80. Michel Four.—Note sur les dépéts de fer pisiforme de la Haute- Sadne (fin), 1233. Keechlin-Schlumberger.—Notice sur la falaise entre Biaritz et Bidart (pl. xxxii.), 1235. Marcel de Serres.—Des caractéres et de l’importance de la période quaternaire, 1257. Ed. Hébert.—Note sur les fossiles de Montreuil-Belley (Mame- et-Loire), 1263. M. Fournet.—Sur le terrain houiller découvert par des sondages au Creusot, 1266. Vol. xii. feuill. 81-85. Réunion extraordinaire 4 Paris, 1273. oo. Vol. xiii. feuill. 20-25. A. Favre.—Recherches sur les minéraux artificiels, 307. A. Leymerie et G. Cotteau.—Catalogue des Echinides fossiles des Pyrénées, 349. A.Leymerie.—Considérations géognostiques sur les Echimodermes des Pyrénées et des contrées annexes de cette chaine de montagnes, 355. Vileys Notre minéralogique sur le cercle de Laghouat (Algérie), 366. : Gressly.—Découverte dans le bone-bed du canton de Bale des restes d’un énorme Dinosaurien, 369. J. Barrande.—Caractéres distinctifs des Nautilides, Goniatides et prima Bite rae ee du genre Nothoceras (pl. xii.), 372. Ward.—Note sur la montagne nommée Gebel Nakous, ou mon- tagne de la Cloche (Arabie-Pétrée), 389. Th. Ebray.—Comparaison des oolithes inférieures du bassin anglo-parisien avec celles du bassin méditerranéen, 395. Ville-—Notice minéralogique sur la province d’Alger, 399. : : Vol. xii. feuill. 26-30. 1856. Ville.—Notice minéralogique sur la province d’ Alger (fin), 401. A. Meugy.—Sur le gisement, l’age et le mode de formation des terrains a meuliéres du bassin de Paris, 417. Vv. Boule aioe sur la constitution géologique de Vile de Créte, 39. J. Barrande.—Paralléle entre les depdts siluriens de la Bohéme et de la Seandinavie, 461. A. Boué.—Paralléle des tremblements de terre, des aurores bo- réales et du magnétisme terrestre, mis en rapport avec le relief et la géologie du globe terrestre, etc., 466. : Vol. xiv. feuili. 1-7. H. Coquand.—Mémoire sur le terra permien et le représentant du grés vosgien dans le département de Sadne-et-Loire et dans les montagnes de la Serre (Jura), (pl. i.), 13. Ch. Lory.—Note sur les terrains erétacés de la vallée de Dieu-le- Fit (Dréme), 47. H. Coquand.—Note sur la formation crétacée du département de la Charente, 55. DONATIONS. 377 France, Bulletin de la Société Géologique de, vol. xiv. (continued). Scarabelli—Sur un sondage artésien exécuté a Conselice (pro- vince de Ferrare), 102. J.-J. Bianconi.—Note sur lVorigme métamorphique des argiles écailleuses du terrain serpentineux des environs de Bologne (Italie), 105. P. de Berville.—Note sur une nouvelle espéce de crustacé fossile trouvée dans le calcaire grossier inférieur (pl. u.), 108. Geological Survey of Great Britain, Annual Report of the Director- General, 1857. ————_. ————.. A Descriptive Guide to the Museum of Practical Geology. By R. Hunt. 1857 Halle. Abhandlungen des naturwissenschaftlichen Vereines fiir Sachsen und Thiiringen in Halle. Herausgegeben von C. Giebel und W. Heintz. Vol. i. Part 1. 1856. C. Giebel.— Die Verstemerungen im Muschelkalk von Lieskau bei Halle, 53 (7 plates). Heidelberg. Verhandlungen des naturhistorisch-medizinischen Ve- reins zu Heidelberg. I. Bronn.— Ueber das Meteoreisen von Atacama, 10. Schiel.—Reisebericht [ Rocky-mountains, &c.], 11. Blum.—Ueber die hohlen Geschiebe von Lauretta im Leithage- birge, 15. India, Geological Survey of, Memoirs. Vol.i. Part 1. 1856. T. Oldham.—Coal and Iron of Talcheer, 1. W.T. and H. F. Blanford, and W. Theobald, jun.—The Talcheer Coal-field, 33 (2 plates & map). Dalton and Hannay.—Gold-yielding deposits of Upper Assam, 90 T. Oldham.—Gold and Gold-dust from Shué-gween, 94. Indian peeinclage and Eastern Asia, Journal of the. New Series. Vol. i. No. Institute of pen Assurance Magazine, and Journal of the. Vol. vii. Part 1 (No. 27). April 1857. International Association for obtainmg a uniform Decimal pied of Measures, Weights, and Coins; Extracts of Returns from Public Bodies and otherwise, showing the differences in the Weights and Measures in different localities of the United Kingdom. | (British Branch), First Report of the Council. 1857. Liége, Mémoires de la Socicté Royale de. Vol. xii. 1857 ‘Linnean Society, Journal. Vol.i. No. 4. March 1857; Vol. ii. No. 5. June 1857. ‘Literarium. Vol. iv. Nos. 5 & 11. Literary Gazette for April, May, and June, 1857. From L. Reeve, Esq., F.G.S. Notices of Scientific Meetings, &c. Miller’s Testimony of the Rocks, noticed, 365 & 392. 378 DONATIONS. Literary Gazette for April, May, and June, 1857 (continued). Lyell’s Supplement to 5th Edit. of Manual of Geology, noticed, 368. Geological Survey of India, noticed, 420. London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine. 4th Series. Vol. xii. No.86. April1857. From R. Taylor, Esq., F.G.S. T. S. Hunt.—Chemical composition of the waters of the St. Lawrence and Ottowa Rivers, 239. W. J. M. Rankine.—Stability of loose earth, 292. H. S. Ongley.—Earthquake in Crete, 293. D. T. Ansted.—Muineral veins (Cuba, Baltimore, Tennessee), 293. - ———. 4thSeries. Vol. xii. No. 87. May 1857. From R. Taylor, Esq., F.G.S. A. B. Northcote.—Allophane, 338. W.H. Miller.—Application of Elementary Geometry to Crystal- lography, 345. D. Forbes.—Chemical composition of the Silurian and Cambrian limestones, 365. H. J. Brooke.—The Geometrical Isomorphism of Crystals, 373. R. Owen.—Dichobune ovina of the Isle of Wight, 385. H. Falconer.—Plagiaulax of the Isle of Purbeck, 385. Sir P. Egerton.—Fish-remains from Ludlow, 386. Sir R. Murchison.—On the beds with fish-remains near Ludlow, 387. W. Bollaert.— Mastodon bones in Chile, 388. A. Damour.—Enudialite and Eukolite, 391. 4 . 4thSeries. Vol. xin. No. 88. June 1857. From R. Taylor, Esq., F.G.S. H. Faleoner.—On the species of Mastodon and Elephant occur- ring in Great Britain, 462. C. Gould.—On a Crustacean (Tropifer levis) from the Lias Bone-bed, 465. T. H. Huxley.—On a Crustacean (Pygocephalus Cooperi). from the Coal-measures, 465. A. Geikie.—On the Geology of Strath, Isle of Skye, 466. J.J. Monteiro.—On a new locality for Atacamite, 470. Longman’s Monthly List of New Books. New Series. No. 172. Milan. Giornale dell’ I. R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti e Bibliotéea Italiana. Nuova Serie. Fascicoli xxxvii- xlii. (Vol. vii.) 1855. Giulio Curioni.—Sulla suceessione normale dei diversi membri del terreno Triasico nella Lombardia, 204 (3 plates). Fase. xlii. 1856. ————. Memorie dell’ I. R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Vol. v. 1856. Giulio Curioni.—Sulla successione normale dei diversi membri de terreno Triasico nella Lombardia, 311 (3 plates). Moscow. Bulletin de la Socicté Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou, publié sous la Rédaction du Docteur Renard. Année 1855.) Nox2. R. Hermann.—Uehber I]menium, Niobium und Tantal, 241. ——e ———e —_—_—_—- DONATIONS. 379 Moscow. Bulletin de la Société Impériale des Naturalistes de Mos- cou, 1855 (continued). V. Kiprijanoff.—Zweiter Beitrag zu Hybodus Eichwaldi, 392 (plate). Lindenmayer.—Eubeea, 401. J.T. Weisse.—Die Schwarz-Erde (Tscherno-Sjom), 452. : Année 1855. Nos. 3 & 4. Buhse.—Eine Reise durch Transkaukasien und Persien, 86, 267. E. Eichwald.—Beitrag zur geographischen Verbreitung der fos- silen Thiere Russlands, 433. ; ——. Année 1856. No. 1. E. Eichwald.—Beitrag zur geographischen Verbreitung der fos- silen Thiere Russilands, 88. N. Nordenskiold.—Demidovite, nouvelle espéce minérale de Nijne Taguil dans l’Oural, 128. ————-. Nouveaux Mémoires de la Société Impériale des Natu- ralistes de Moscou. Vol. x. 1855. E. v. Eichwald.—Zur Naturgeschichte des Kaspischen Meeres, 285 (plate). Neuchatel. Bulletin de la Société des Sciences Naturelles de Neu- chatel. Vol.iv. Part 1. 1856. Gressly.—Coupe géologique du tunnel projeté pour le chemin de fer de la Chaux-de- Fonds, 2. Ed. Desor, Rion, Th. de Meuron, Vonga, et F. Borel.—Tremble-. ments du terre, 3, 43. Ed. Desor.—Goniopygus, 11. Gressly.—Ossements fossiles d’un Dinosaur, qu’il a déconverts récemment dans le canton de Bale, 13. - G. De Tribolet.—Carte géologique des Environs de Sainte Croix, 14. Ed. Desor.—Le Clivage des roches, 54. A. Jaccard.—Sur la Flore Fossile du terrain d’eau douce supérieur du Locle, 57. G. De Tribolet.—Catalogue des Fossiles du Néocomien Moyen de Neuchatel, 69. Ed. Desor.—Sur le ‘Tunnel du Hauenstein et les difficultés qui s’y rencontrent, 56, 123 (plate). Sur la Classification des Cidarides, 129 (plate). Paris. Archives du Muséum d’ Histoire Naturelle. Vol. ix. Parts 1 & 2 (in one), and 3. 1856. L’ Académie des Sciences, Comptes Rendus, Tables, vol. xli. et Tables, vol. xlii.; vol. xlii. Nos. 1-26; vol. xliy. Nos. 1-7. L’Ecole des Mines. Annales des Mines. Cinq. Sér. Tome x. 5° Livre de 1856. Glépin.—Sur le nouveau mode d’extraction et de triage de la houille appliqué aux mines du Grand-Hornu (Belgique), 149 (plates). Rossi.—De la fabrication du fer par l’emploi des Lignites, 299, Delesse.—Sur la pierre ollaire, 333. 380 DONATIONS. Pennsylvania. Franklin Institute, Journal of the. 3rd Series. Vol. xxxui. No.2. February 1857. E. Morris.—Ohio River, 73. C. Ellet.—Ohio River, 78. Bessemer.—Iron-manufacture, 133. ———. 3rd Series. Vol. xxxii. No.3. March 1857. E. Morris.—Improvement of the Ohio River, 145. Aluminium, 210. —_——. ———. _ 3rd Series. Vol. xxxii. No. 4. April 1857. H. D. Rogers.—Geology and Physical Geography of North Ame- rica, 224. —. ———. Report on the Twenty-fifth Exhibition of American Manufactures. 1857. 4 ard Series. Vol. xxxii. May 1857. No. 5. H. D. Rogers.—Geology and Physical Geography of North Ame- rica, 319. Photographic Society, Journal. Nos. 52-55. Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science (and Transactions of the Microscopical Society). No. 19. April 1857. A. Beardsley.—Diatomaceous deposit in Leven Water, near Coniston, 146. Royal Geographical Society, Proceedings. No.7. February 1857. ——-——--. No.8. March 1857. Journal. Vol. xxvi. 1856. Royal Society. Proceedings. Vol. vii. No. 25. 1856. T.S. Hunt.—The Serpentines of Canada and their associated rocks, 423. P. Yorke.—Silica, 440. St. Petersburg. Verhandlungen der Russisch-Kaiserlichen mmeralo- gischen Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg. Jahrgang 1855-56. 1856. Holmberg, H. J.— Hydrographische und orographische-geo- gnostische Beobachtungen im nordlichen Finnland, als Er- gebnisse der, Golduntersuchungen im den Jahren 1847, 1848, und 1850, | (map). , Jeremejew, P.—Geognostische Beobachtungen an den Ufern des Wolchow, 63. Romanowsky, G.—Geognostische Uebersicht des siidlichen Theils des Gouvernements Rjasan, 85 (map). . be Meglitzky, N.—Geognostische Skizzen von Ost Sibirien. I. Der Baikal und seine Umgebungen, 109 (map). Gadolin, A.—Beobachtungen tiber einige Mimeralien aus Pitka- ranta in Fimnland, 173 (plate). Barbeaut-de-Marny, N.—Mineralogische Novellen vom Ural, eve Mendellejew, D.—Pyroxen aus Ruskiala in Finnland, 207. DONATIONS. 381 St. Petersburg. Verhandlungen der Russisch-Kaiserlichen mineralo- gischen Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg (continued). Kutorga, S.—Notiz iiber einige Verhaltnisse der Felsarten Finn- lands, 211. Fucus in den silurischen Kalkstemen des Gouverne- ments von St. Petersburg, 217. Fahrenkohl, A.—Fliichtiger Blick auf die Bergkalk- und Jura- Bildung in der Umgebung Moskwas, 219 (2 plates). Lawrow, N.—Zwei neue Asaphus-Arten aus den silurischen Kalk- stemen des Gouvernements St. Petersburg, 237 (2 plates). Kutorga, S.—Berichte iiber die Fortschritte mineralogischer Wissenschaften in Russland in den Jahren 1854 und 1855, 241. Society of Arts, Journal. Nos. 226-240. Vol. v. C. Binks.—Manufacture of iron and steel, 407. Stuttgart. Wiirttembergische naturwissenschaftliche Jahreshefte. Achten Jahrgang. Drittes Heft. Erste Abtheilung (1852). 1857. Th. Pheninger.—Ein merkwiirdiger Blitzschlag, 382. R. K. Warthausen.—Merkwiirdiger Blitzschlag im Jahre 1854, 387. ——. Dreizehnter Jahrgang. Zweites Heft. 1857. Von Fehling.—Chemische Untersuchung eimiger Quellen des neuen Stuttgarten Mineralbades bei Berg, 113. Fraas.—Geognostisches Profil eimiger Bohrlocher im Stuttgart- Constatter Thale, 131. A. Oppel.—Die Juraformation Englands, Frankreichs und des sudwestlichen Deutschlands, 141. Tyneside Naturalists’ Field Club, Transactions. Vol. ii. 1851-54. W.C. Trevelyan.—Address (Notice of some Permian fossils), 333. ——. Vol.ii. Parts1&2: 1855-56. T. Sopwith.—Address (Coal-seams, Coal-structure, &c.), 5, 24, 34. Vienna. Jahrbuch der K. K. Geologischen Reichsanstalt. 1856. No. 2. April-June. Fried. Rolle-—Geologische Untersuchungen in dem Theile Steiermarks zwischen Gratz, Obdach, Hohenmauthen und . Marburg, 219. Ferd. von Lidl.—Beitrage zur geognostischen Kenntniss der Steinkohlen-Formation im Pilsener Kreise in Bohmen, 249 (plate). Karl Kotiacka, —Bericht iiber emige in den Sudeten, in den Bies- kiden und im westlichen Mahren ausgefiihrte Hohenmes- sungen, 279. K. Reissacher.—Der neue Quellenstollen in Wildbad-Gastein im Jahre 1856, 307. Ferd. Hochstetter.—Allgememer Bericht tiber die geologische Aufnahme der I. Section der k. k. geologischen Reichsanstalt in Bohmen im Sommer 1855, 316. M. V. Lipold.—Erlauterung geologischer Durchschnitte aus dem ostlchen Karnten, 332 (plate). — Hohenbestimmungen im siidostlichen Karnten, 346. 382 DONATIONS. Vienna. Jahrbuch der K. K.Geologischen Reichsanstalt (continued). Moriz Hornes.—Sammlungen von Tertiar-Petrefacten des Wiener Beckens, aus den Doubletten der k.k. geologischen Reichs- anstalt, zur Vertheilung und zum Tausche zusammengestellt, 353. J. Barrande.—Bemerkungen wtber einige neue Fossilien aus der Umgebung von Rokitzan im silurischen Becken von Mittel- Bohmen, 355. K. R. von Hauer.—Arbeiten in dem chemischen Laboratorium der k. k. geologischen Reichsanstalt, 560. Sitzungen der k. k. geologischen Reichsanstalt, 362. Verzeichniss der mit Ende Juni 1856 loco Wien, Prag, Triest und Pesth bestandenen Bergwerks-Producten-Verschleisspreise, 402. _—_—. No. 3. July—September. Dionys Stur.—Die geologischen Verhaltnisse der Thaler der Drau, Tsel, Moll und Gail in der Umgebung von Lienz, ferner der Carnia im venetianischen Gebiete, 405 (3 plates). D. Stur und F. Keil.—Barometrische Hohenmessungen aus dem Gebiete der obersten Drau in der Umgebung von Lienz und aus dem oberen Gebiete der Piave und des Tagliamento, 459. Ferd. Hochstetter.— Ueber die Dachschieferlager des Ziegenruck- berges bei Rabenstein im Egerer Kreise n Bohmen, 466. Johann Jokély.—Zur Kenntniss der geologischen Beschaffenheit des Egerer Kreises in Bohmen, 479. F. Rolle.—Die tertiaren und diluvialen Ablagerungen in der Gegend zwischen Gratz, Koflach, Schwanberg und Ehren- hausen in Steiermark, 535. K. R. von Hauer.—Arbeiten in dem chemischen Laboratorium der k. k. geologischen Reichsanstalt, 603. Verzeichniss der mit Ende September 1856 loco Wien, Prag, Triest und Pesth bestandenen Bergwerks-Producten-Ver- schleisspreise, 626. Warwickshire Natural History and Archeological Society. 21st Annual Report. West Sussex Gazette, March 26, 1857. Martin’s Geology of the Weald, noticed. Wiesbaden. Jahrbiicher des Vereins fiir Naturkunde im Herzog- thum Nassau. Herausgegeben von C. L. Kirschbaum. Eilftes Heft) 1856. G. Sandberger.—Geognostiche Skizze des Amtes Reichelsheim, 114 (map). C. B. Greiss.—Ueber den Magnetismus der Eisenerze, 127. Fresenius.— Die Mineralquelle zu Weilbach, 145. G. Kerner.—Chemische Analyse der heissen Mineralquelle im Badhause zum Spiegel in Wiesbaden, 179. F. Carl—Untersuchung der warmen Quelle des Gemeindebades in Wiesbaden, 192. A. Eglinger.—Analyse eines Schalsteins von Villmar, 205. Proceedings of the Society, 216, DONATIONS. 383 Il. GEOLOGICAL CONTENTS OF PERIODICALS PURCHASED FOR THE LIBRARY. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 2nd Series. Vol. xix. No. 112. April 1857. W. K. Parker and T. R. Jones.—Foraminifera, 273 (2 plates). R. Howse.—Permian fossils, 304. W. King.—Rhynchonella Geinitziana, 349. : . —. No.113. May 1857. S. P. Woodward.—Land and freshwater Shells of Khasmir and Tibet, 408. R. Owen.—Dichobune ovina, 426. H. Falconer.—Plagiaulax, 426. Sir P. G. Egerton.—Fish-remains from Ludlow, 427. , ; No: 114. June 1857. R. Howse.—On the Permian System of the Counties of Durham and Northumberland, 463. S. P. Woodward.—On the Mantle and Oral Apparatus of Tere- bratula caput-serpentis, 482. Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal. New Series. No. 10. April 1857. L. Blodgett.— Distribution of heat in the North American climate, 205. W. S. Symonds.—Triassic rocks of the vale of Worcester and at the Malvern Tunnel, 257. P. B. Brodie.—Notice of corals in the lias of Gloucestershire, Worcestershire, Warwickshire, and Scotland, 260. W. Crowder.—Iron-manufacture in the Cleveland district, 264. H. C. Sorby.—Physical Geography of the Tertiary Estuary of the Isle of Wight, 275 (plate). D. Page’s Text-book of Geology, noticed, 330. W.H. Emory.—United States and Mexican Boundary Survey, 331. C. F. Winslow.—Volcanic phenomena, 359. J. E. Gavit.—Garfish, 359. A. Winchell.—Geology of Middle and Southern Alabama, 359. J. W. Dawson and W. B. Rogers.—Parallelism of rock-formations in Nova Scotia and other parts of America, 359. J. Wyman and L. Agassiz.—Carboniferous reptiles, 360. J. W. Foster.—Fossil Elephant of North America, 361. James Hall.—Geology of the Upper Mississippi Valley, 362. J.D. Dana.— Geological history of North America, 362. J.D. Whitney.—Inclined stratification in Warren County, New York, 363. J. P. Lesley —The Broadtop Coal-region in central Pennsylvania, 363. J.S. a fishes and Coal-beds of Linton, Ohio, 364 T. S. Hunt.—Some Euphotides and other felspathic rocks, 366. aoe The Serpentines of the Green Mountains, 367, A. H. Worthen and L. Agassiz.—Fish-remains from the Carbo- niferous Limestone and Coal-measures of Illinois, 367. 384 DONATIONS. Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, No. 10 (continued). J. H. and W. C. Redfield.—Relation of the Post-permian fishes of Connecticut and other Atlantic States to the Triassic and Jurassic Periods, 369. E. ae and Triassic Systems of North Carolina, 370. W. P. Blake.—Geography of the Western portion of the United States, 370 W.S. Symonds.—Organic remains at Kidderminster, 380. J. ee dog hs of northern California and Oregon, 380. Bailey.—Voleaniec cinders at the bottom of the Atlantic, 381. ae. ant Rodgers.— Deep-sea soundings in the Arctic Ocean, 82. The Gulf-stream and its deposits, 383. Hewitt.—Annual production of iron, 384. Waugh.—Height of the Himalayas, 384. III. GEOLOGICAL AND MISCELLANEOUS BOOKS. Names of Donors in Italics. Astronomical Observations made at Madras, 1843-52. From the Hon. EL. I. Company. Binney, EH. W. Additional Observations on the Permian Beds of the North-west of England. Catalogue, a general, of the principal Fixed Stars, made at Madras, 1830-43. From the Hon. EH. I. Company. Catalogue d’une Collection Extraordinaire de Livres, provenant de la Bibliothéque de M. Libri. Coode, J. Description of the Chesil Bank. Davidson, T. Notes sur les Genres Athyris (Spirigera), Camaro- phoria, Orthisina et Strophalosia des Terrains Permiens d’ An- gleterre. Deshayes, P.G. Description des Animaux sans Vertébres décou- verts dans le Bassin de Paris. lLivr. 1-4. Emmons, E. American Geology. Part 6. Hébert, FE. Cours de Géologie. Lecon d’ Ouverture. Les Mers Anciennes et leurs rivages dans le Bassin de Paris. Sur la Constitution Géologique et sur la Classification des Terrains Paléozoiques de P Ardenne Frangaise, et du Hai- nault. Houzeau, J.C. De la Symmétrie des Formes des Continents. DONATIONS. 385 Hunt, R. A Descriptive Guide to the Museum of Practical Geology. . From the Mus. Pract. Geol. Jenzsch, G. Considérations relatives 4 la partie minéralogique des Instructions pour |’ Expédition Scientifique Brésilienne. Laurent, C. Notice sur le Sahara Oriental au point de vue de l’Etablissement de Puits Artésiens dans l Oued-Souf. Lectures on Gold, delivered at the Museum of Practical Geology [Jukes, Forbes, Playfair, Smyth, Percy, Hunt]. 2nd Edition. From Prof. Tennant, F.G.S. Ludwig, R. Geologische Specialkarte des Grossherzogthums Hes- sen: Section Budingen. From the Middle-Rhine Geological Society. Lyell, Sir C. Supplement (2nd Edition) to the 5th Edition of a Manual of Elementary Geology. ————. Supplement (2nd Edition, revised) to the 5th Edition of a Manual of Elementary Geology. Lyons. Résumé des Observations de Météorologie faites entre le 1 Décembre 1853 et le 1° Dec. 1855, par M. A. Drian. From the Hydrometrical Commission of Lyons. Résumé des Observations recueillies en 1855 dans le Bassin de la Sadne par les soins de la Commission Hydromé- trique de Lyon. From the Hydrom. Comm. of Lyons. Observations Météorologiques faites 4 9 heures du Matin, a l Observatoire de Lyon du 1° Décembre 1853 au 1° Déc. 1855. From the Hydrom. Comm. of Lyons. M‘Clintock, Capt., Reminiscences of Arctic Ice Travel im search of Sir J. Franklin by; with Geological notes and illustrations by the Rev. 8. Haughton. From the Rev. Prof. Haughton, F.G.S. Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India. Vol. i. Part 1. From the Geological Survey of India. Meteorological Register kept at the Hon. East India Company’s Observatory at Madras for 1822-43. From the Hon. E. I. Company. eae Observations made at the Magnetical and Meteorological Observatory — at Toronto in Canada. Vol.i. From the British Government. Oppel, A. Die Jura-Formation Englands, Frankreichs und des Sidwestlichen Deutschlands. Drittes Heft. Oppel, A., § H. Suess. Ueber die muthmasslichen Acquivalente der Rdseener Schichten in Schwaben. Parker, W.K., § T.R. Jones. Description of some Foraminifera from the Coast of Norway. Phillips, J. On the Geology of the Malvern Hills, From the Rev. W. Dyson. 386 DONATIONS. Pictet, F. J. Traité de Paléontologie, ou“ Histoire Naturelle des Animaux Fossiles. 2de édit. Vol. iv. with Atlas of plates. Pusey, Ph. On the Source and Supply of Cubic Saltpetre. 2nd Edition. From W. Bollaert, Esq. Quetelet, 4. Rapport adressé 4 M. le Ministre de l’Intérieur, sur P Etat et les Travaux d’Observatoire Royal. 1856. Report and Memorial on Syrian Exploration. From W. Ferguson, Lsq., F.G.8. Ruskin, J. Modern Painters, vol. iv. ; containing Part 5 of Moun- tain Beauty. Schmidt, J. F.J. Die Eruption des Vesuv im Mail855; mit Atlas. Neue Hohen-Bestimmungen am Vesuv. Shumard, B. F. Description of New Fossil Crinoidea from the Paleeozoic Rocks of the United States. Smith, G. Vistas en la Provincia de Tarapaca, y del Puerto de Arica. From W. Bollaert, Esq. Sorby, H.C. On the Physical Geography of the Tertiary Estuary of the Isle of Wight. Swallow, G.C. The first and second Annual Reports of the Geolo- gical Survey of Missouri. From James Colquhoun, Esq., F.GS. Tate,G. The Farne Islands. Trimmer, J. On the Agricultural Relations of the Western portion of the Hampshire Tertiary District. Tuomey, M., & F. 8S. Holmes. Fossils of South Carolina, Nos. 3 to 7; and Circular. Zepharovich, V.R.von. Die Halbinsel Tihany im Platten-See und die nachste Umgebung von Fired. Die Silur-Formation in der Gegend von Klattau, Pres- titz und Rozmital in Bohmen. Zigno, A.de. Sulla Flora Fossile dell’ Oolite. Sa ALPHABETICAL INDEX TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. [The fossils referred to are described, and those of which the names are printed in italics are also figured. ] ABERDEENSHIRE, Mr. Salter on the fossils found in the chalk-flints and greensand of, 83. Acidaspis from Shropshire, Mr. Salter on two Silurian species of, 210; the lower Silurian beds of the south of Scotland, some species of, 206; Aci- daspis callipareos, 208; Caractaci, 211; coronata, 210; Hystrix, 207; Lalage, 206; unica, 209. Africa, copper-district of South, 233. Allahdyn, fossils and columnar rocks at, 74. Allophane at Charlton, Kent, Mr. Mor- ris on the occurrence of, 13. Ammonites, 2 sp., 87. Analysis of waters from the Turko-Per- sian frontier, Dr. Richardson and Mr. Browell on the, 184. Annelide-burrowsand surface-markings from the Cambrian rocks of the Long- mynd, Mr. Salter on, 199. Anniversary Address of the President, Col. Portlock, xxiii-cxlv. See also Portlock, Col. J. E. Annual General Meeting of the Society, proceedings at the, i. Annual Report, i. Anoplotherioid quadruped from the upper eocene marl, Isle of Wight, de- scription of the lower jaw and teeth of an, 254. Ansted, Prof. D. T., on some remark- able mineral veins, 240. Arenicolites sparsus in the Cambrian rocks, 199, 203. Atalanta, freshwater deposits at, 178. Auchenaspis Salteri, 286. Australasia, the occurrence of volcanic bombs in, 188. Avicula simulata, 86. Award of the proceeds of the Donation Fund, xxv. of the Wollaston Medal, xxiii. Babbage, C., on oceanic sediments, no- ticed, exxxii. Bache, A. D., on the Gulf-stream, no- ticed, cxxxi. Baljik, freshwater beds at, 77. Barrande, J., award of the Wollaston Medal to, xxiii; on Spanish fossils, noticed, Ixxvii. Barton clays, 107. fossils, table of, 118. Beckles, S. H., on the geology of Hast- ings, noticed, cxxxiv. Belgium, tertiaries of, 106. Binney, E. W., on foot-tracks in the millstone grit, noticed, cxxxix ; on the Permian formation, noticed, exxviii. Blanford, W. T., and H. F., on the Tal- cheer coal-field, noticed, exxiii. Bollaert, W., on the occurrence of bones of Mastodon in Chile, 291. Borgholm, notice of an ice-carried boulder at, 189. Boué, A., on the English Channel, no- ticed, ciii. Boulder at Borgholm, notice of an ice- carried, 189. Bowen, H. G., on the geology of Trini- dad, noticed, cxxxv. Bracklesham sands and Calcaire gros- sier, compared, 90. INDEX TO THE Brick-earth of Sussex, 62. British and foreign tertiaries, Mr. Prest- wich on the, 89. British species of fossil Mastodon, 322. Bruxellian tertiaries, 106. Buist, G., on the occurrence of crystal- lization in a stucco-casting, 11. Bulgaria, Capt. Spratt on the geology of parts of, 72. Bunbury, C., on peat-deposit, noticed, CXXXiV. Calcaire grossier and Bracklesham sands, compared, 90. Cambrian rocks, annelide-burrows in the, 199. Campbell, R., on the occurrence of an earthquake at Rhodes, 176. Cephalaspis Murchisoni, 284. ornatus, 285. Salweyi, 283. Chalk, allophane in the, 13. Chalk-flints and greensand of Aberdeen- shire, fossils from the, 83. Changes of level in Hants and the Isle of Wight, 64. Charlton, allophane in the chalk at, 13. Chemnitzia Roessleri, 216. Chile, the occurrence of bones of Mas- todon in, 291, Chiton Howseanus, 216. Loftusianus, 216. Clarke, Capt., on the mean density of the earth, noticed, exxx. Clarke, Rev. W. B., additional notice of the occurrence of volcanic bombs in Australasia, 188. Cleghorn, J., on the rock-basins of Dartmoor, 231; noticed, cxxxv. Coal in Siam, 188. © Coal-shales at Medlock Park Bridge, description of a new crustacean from the, 263. Coan, Rev. T., on the volcanic eruptions in Hawaii, 170. Cocchi, I., on the geology of Tuscany, noticed, exili. Cololites, Mr. Salter on, 204. Columnar rocks near Varna, 75. Committee, Report of the Library and Museum, iii. Concordia mine, Namaqualand, 234. Conglomerates and quartzites of North- west Scotland, 17. Copperberg in Namaqualand, 234. Copper-lodes at San Fernando, near Cienfuegos in Cuba, Prof. D. T. An- sted on the, 240; near Sykesville, in Maryland, North America, 242; of Ducktown, in East Tennessee, U.S., description of the, 245; map of the Ducktown mineral district, 247. PROCEEDINGS. Copper-mines of Namaqualand, R. N. Rubidge on the, 233. Correlation of the eocene tertiaries of England, France, and Belgium, Mr. Prestwich on the, 89. Crag, Dr. Falconer on the age of the, 359; mammalia of the, 351 ; the Mas- todon of the, 322, 347. Cretaceous fossils of Aberdeenshire, Mr. Salter on the, 83. Crete, notice of the late earthquake at, 240. Crimea and Bulgaria, Capt. Spratt on the comparison of the geological fea- tures of, 79. Crustacean, fossil, from the lias bone-bed, 360; from the coal-measures, 363; from the magnesian limestone, 213. Crystallization in a stucco-casting, Dr. Buist on the occurrence of, 11. Cuba, description of copper-lodes at San Fernando in, 240. Cyprina Fergusoni, 87. Dardanelles, marine deposits at the, 81. Dartmoor, the rock-basins of, 231. Degousée and Laurent on the Valen- ciennes coal-basin, noticed, cxix. De la Harpe on the English eocene flora, noticed, cviii. Dentalium celatum, 87. Dentition of Dichodon and allied ani- mals, 194; of Mastodon and Ele- phant, 312. Deshayes, G., on the Paris tertiary mol- luses, noticed, cv. Dichobune, description of the genus, by Prof. Owen, 258. Dichobune ovina, 254. Dichodon ecuspidatus, Prof. Owen on the, 190. Dichodon, description of the genus, by Prof. Owen, 190. Dinotherium, Dr. Falconer on the, 310. Donations to the Society, ix, 135, 219, 294, 371. Dorset and Hants, the gravels of, 40, 45. Drift-clay of Sussex, 55. Ducktown in East Tennessee, U.S., de- scription of the copper-lodes of, 244. Durham, Mr. Kirkby on some Permian fossils from, 213. Earthquake at Crete, 240; at Rhodes, 176. Egerton, Sir P., palichthyologic notes, No. 9, on some fish-remains from the neighbourhood of Ludlow, 282. Elephants occurring in the fossil state in Great Britain, Dr. Falconer on the species of, 307. Elephas, Dr. Falconer’s diagnosis of the genus, 317. INDEX TO THE PROCEEDINGS. Eocene tertiaries of England, France, and Belgium, Mr. Prestwich on the correlation of the, 89. Eubeea, the coast of Greece, and Salo- nika, Capt. Spratt on the freshwater deposits of, 177. Euelephas, Dr. Falconer on the, 315. Falconer, Dr. H., on the species of Mas- todon and Elephant occurring in the fossil state in Great Britain, Part I. Mastodon, 307; description of two species of the fossil mammalian genus Plagiaulax from Purbeck, 261. Ferguson, W., on the chalk-flints and greensand found in Aberdeenshire, 88. Fish-remains from the neighbourhood of Ludlow, 282, 290. Flustrellaria dentata, 86. Forbes, E., on the tertiaries of the Isle of Wight, noticed, ciii. Fossil crustacean, description of a new, by Mr. C. Gould, 360; from the coal- measures, description of, by Prof. Huxley, 363. Fossiliferous ironstone occurring on the North Downs, Mr. Prestwich on some, 212. Fossils found in the chalk-flints and greensand of Aberdeenshire, 83 ; from Bulgaria, 82; from Varna, the Bul- garian coast, and the Dardanelles, 82 ; of the Barton clay, 118; of the mud- deposits of the Sussex levels, 51. Fossil species of Mastodon and Elephas, 307 vertebre of a serpent (Laophis crotaloides, Ow.) discovered by Capt. Spratt in a tertiary formation at Sa- lonika, 183, 196. French coast, gravels of the, 43. Freshwater deposits of Bulgaria, 80; of Eubcea, the coast of Greece, and Salonika, Capt. Spratt on the, 177. Geinitz, H. B., on the coal-formation of Saxony, noticed, exxv. General Meeting, Annual, i. Geological age of the Mastodons, 343. history of the north-western di- strict of Scotland, 36. Geology of Namaqualand, Dr. Rubidge on the, 233; some parts of Greece, Capt. Spratt on the, 177; the Bul- garian coast, Capt. Spratt on the, 72; the N.W. Highlands, Prof. J. Nicol on the, 17; the Sussex coast, Mr. Godwin-Austen on the, 40; Varna and its vicinity, Capt. Spratt on the, 72. Gneiss of Namaqualand, 235 ; the north- west of Scotland, 17. Godwin-Austen, K., on the newer ter- tiary deposits of the Sussex coast, 40 ; noticed, xcvi. Goniodactylus (recent), 368. Gossan-lodes in the Ducktown mineral district, U.S., 248. Gould, Charles, description of a new fossil crustacean (Tropifer levis, C. Gould) from the lias bone-bed, by, 360. Granite of Namaqualand, 235. Gravels of Dorset and Hants, 40; Sus- sex, 41, 47. Greece, Capt. Spratt on the freshwater deposits of the coast of, 177. Greensand in Aberdeenshire, fossils of the, 85. Grés de Beauchamp, 107. Hants, the gravels of, 40. Harkness, R., on the Dingle Promon- tory, noticed, Ixxxii; on the lowest sedimentary rocks of Scotland, no- ticed, lxxvili; on the Permian rocks of the south of Scotland, noticed, Ixxxi; J. Blyth on the cleavage of the Devonian rocks in Ireland, no- ticed, 1xxxii. Haughton, S., on the carboniferous and old red beds of Ireland, noticed, exxi. Hawaii, the volcanic eruptions in, 164, 170, 176. Helminthites, Mr. Salter on, 204. Hennessy, on the earth’s internal struc- ture, noticed, cxxix. Highcliff, sections at, 45, 108. Hillier, C. B., and H. J. Moyle, notice of the occurrence of metalliferous ores and coal in Siam, 188. Hippothoa Voigtiana, 217. Hopkins, W., on the internal structure of the earth, noticed, cxxix. Huxley, T. H., description of a new crustacean (Pygocephalus Cooperi, Huxley) from the coal-measures, by, 363. Hypsiprymnus Gaimardi (recent), 278. Ice-carried boulder at Borgholm, 189. Ichthyodorulites from near Ludlow, 288. Indian Geological Survey, memoirs of the, noticed, exxiil. Ironstone, fossiliferous, of the North Downs, 212. Isle of Wight, lower jaw and teeth of an anoplotherioid quadruped (Dicho- bune ovina) from the upper eocene marl in the, 254; Dichodon cuspida- tus from the, 190; sectional lists of the tertiary beds at the, 109; sections of cliffs at, 108, 109; the gravels of, 46. Jones, T. Rupert, on Estheria minuta, noticed, Cxxxix. INDEX TO THE PROCEEDINGS. Kelly, J., on the carboniferous rocks and old red sandstone of Ireland, noticed, CXX. Kilauea, volcano of, 165. Kinahan, C. H., on the igneous rocks of the Berehaven district, noticed, eXxXiil. King, W., on the Permian formation of Ireland, noticed, cxxviii. Kirkby, J. W., on some Permian fossils from Durham, 213; noticed, exxxvili. Kollyrite, Mr. Morris on, 16. Kustenjeh, section at, 78. Laekenian tertiaries, 107. Lake Van, analysis of the water from, 186. Laophis crotaloides, 196. Lias bone-bed, crustacean from the, 360. Library Committee, Report of the, iii. Lima elegans, 85. Permiana, 217. Limestones, fossiliferous, of the North- western Islands, 17. Limopsis texturata, 86. Livonati Hills on the Locrian coast, section of the freshwater deposits at the, 180. Longmynd, -Mr. Salter on annelide- burrows and surface-markings from the Cambrian rocks of the, 199; section of the, 200. I.oxodon, Dr. Falconer on the, 315. Ludlow, Sir P. Egerton on some fish- remains from the neighbourhood of, 282, 290. Lyell, Sir C. (Vice-President), Address on handing to Sir R. Murchison the Wollaston Medal awarded to M. Joachim Barrande, xxiii. Mammalia of the crag, Dr. Falconer on the, 351. Manchester, fossil crustacea from the coal-measures near, 363. Maryland, copper-lodes near Sykesville in, 242. Mastodon and Elephant occurring in the fossil state in Great Britain, Dr. Falconer on the species of, 307. Mastodon, Dr. Falconer’s diagnosis of the genus, 316; occurrence of the bones of, in Chili, 291. Mastodon ( Tetralophodon) Arvernensis, 324, 331, 333. longirostris, 324. (Trilophedon) augustidens, 323. Mauna Loa, in the island of Hawaii, volcanic eruptions at, 164, 170, 176. Metalliferous ores and coalin Siam, 188. rocks of Namaqualand, 233. Microlestes antiquus, 281. Miller, Mr., further notice of the erup- — tion of Mauna Loa, 176; CXXXil. Mineral-veins of Namaqualand, 233. , Prof. Ansted on some re- markable, 240. Mineral waters from the Turko-Persian frontier, 184. Molecular changes, Dr. Buist on, 11. Moore, J. C., on the Silurian rocks of Wigtonshire, noticed, 1xxxiii. Morris, J., on the occurrence of allo- phane at Charlton, Kent, 13 ; noticed, CXXXV. Moyle, H. J., and C. B. Hillier, notice of the occurrence of metalliferous ores and coal in Siam, 188. Murchison, Sir R., note on the relative position of the strata near Ludlow, containing the ichthyolites described by Sir P. Egerton, 290; reply on re- ceiving for M. J. Barrande the Wol- laston Medal, xxiv. Museum Committee, Report of the, iii. Mysis (recent), 368. Namaqualand, Dr. Rubidge on the cop- per-mines of, 233. Newer tertiary deposits of the Sussex coast, 40. Nicol, James, on the red sandstone and conglomerate, and the super- posed quartz-rocks, limestones, and gneiss of the north-west coast of Scotland, 17; noticed, lxxxiv. North America, description of some copper-lodes in, 242. North Downs, some fossiliferous iron- stone occurring on the, 212. North-west Scotland, limestone, con- glomerates, and quartzites of, 17. Nummulitic rocks near Varna, 74. Oldham, T., geological survey of the Irrawaddy, noticed, cxi; on the iron- ores of Talcheer, noticed, cxxiv. Onchus Murchisoni ?, 288. Onchus, on, 289. Ongley, H.S., notice of the late earth- quake at Crete, 240. Oppel, A., on the Jura-formation, no- ticed, xcii. Owen, R., description of the lower jaw and teeth of an anoplotherioid quadruped (Dichobune ovina, Ow.) from the upper eocene marl, Isle of Wight, 254 ; on Gastornis Parisiensis, noticed, cxxxvi; on mammalian re- mains from thecrag, noticed, cxxxvi ; on the affinities of Stereognathus ooliticus (Charlesworth), a mammal from the oolitic strata of Stones- field, 1; noticed, cxxxvi; on the Dichodon cuspidatus (Owen), 190; noticed, INDEX TO THE PROCEEDINGS. on thefossil vertebrz of aserpent (La- ophis crotaloides, Owen) discovered by Capt. Spratt in a tertiaryformation at Salonika, 196; noticed, cxxxvii. Palichthyologic notes, No. 9, by Sir P. Egerton, 282. Paris tertiary group, 90. Passage-beds of the Silurian and Devo- nian series, 291. Pectunculus umbonatus ?, 86. Percy, J., on the manufacture of sul- phate of magnesia, 187. Permian fossils from Durham, Mr. Kirkby on some, 213. . Pholerite, Mr. Morris on, 16. Pictet and Humbert, on the Chelonians of the Swiss mollasse, noticed, cxvi. Plagiaulax from Purbeck, description of two species of the fossil mam- malian genus, by Dr. Falconer, 261. Plagiaulax Becklesii, 262, 278. minor, 262, 281. Plectrodus, species, 288. Poole, H., on the Dead Sea, noticed, CXXXii. Portlock, Col. (President), Address on presenting the proceeds of the Do- nation Fund to Mr. Woodward, xxv; Anniversary Address, February 20, 1857, xxvi. Notices of Deceased Fel- lows: the Rey. Dr. Buckland, xxvii; Daniel Sharpe, xlv; Sir Alexander Crichton, Ixiv; Sir Benjamin Fon- seca Outram, lxvi; Nathaniel John Larkin, Ixviii; Archdeacon Hare, Ixviii; Dr. Ure, lxix; Col. Lloyd, lxix ; M. Constant Prévost, Ixxi; the Rev. Mr. Image, Ixxv. Notice of the death of Mr. Hugh Miller, Ixxv; re- view of geological progress, ]xxvi; M. Casiano de Prado on Almaden and the neighbouring mountains, and MM. de Verneuil and Barrande on Spanish fossils, xxvii; Prof. Hark- ness on the lowest sedimentary rocks of the south of Scotland, lxxviii; on the Permian sandstones and breccias of the south of Scotland, Ixxix, and Mr. Sharpe’s observations thereon, xxx ; Harkness on the geo- logy of Dingle Territory, lxxxii; Harkness and Blyth on the cleavage of the Devonian rocks of the south- west of Ireland, with Mr. Sharpe’s comments thereon, lxxxii; on the Silurian rocks of Wigtonshire, by Mr. J. C. Moore, Ixxxiii; Prof. J. Nicol on the red sandstones and quartzites of the north-west of Scot- land, lxxxiv; Guido and Fridolin _ Sandberger on the Devonian fossils of the Rhenish provinces of Nassau, Ixxxv; Dr. Wright on the palzonto- logy and stratigraphical relation of the sands hitherto called sands of the inferior oolite, xci; Dr. Albert Oppel on the Jura formation, xcii ; observations on the tertiary forma- tions, xcv; Mr. Godwin-Austen on the newer tertiary deposits of the Sussex coast, xevi; Mr. Prestwich’s various papers on the tertiary forma- tion, xcix; Mr. Prestwich on the discovery recently made of a fossili- ferous ironstone on the North Downs, cii; Prof. Edward Forbes’s work on the Isle of Wight Tertiaries, edited by Mr. Godwin-Austen, ciii; M. Des- hayes’s ‘ Description des Animaux sans Vertébres découverts dans le Bassin de Paris,’ cv; Dr. De la Harpe’s ‘ Quelques Mots sur la flore tertiaire de 1l’Angleterre,’ cviii ; notice of the Museum of Economic Geology in India, and the report by Mr. Oldham on the Irrawaddy river, cxi; Capt. Spratt on the geology of Varna and the neighbouring parts of Bulgaria, cxi; Signor Cocchi on the igneous and sedimentary rocks of Tuscany, cxili; MM. Pictet and Humbert on the chelonians of the Swiss mollasse, exvi; Mr. Prestwich on the peculiarities of the Paris basin as distinguished from those of the London basin, cxviii; MM. Tuomey and Holmes on the pliocene fossils of South Carolina, cxix; MM. Degou- sée and Laurent on the Valenciennes coal-basin, cxix; Mr. Kelly and Prof. Haughton on the coal-formation of Ireland, and its relation to the old red sandstone, exx; Dr. C. H. Kina- han on the igneous rocks of the Berehaven district, cxxiii; the me- moirs of the Geological Survey of India, relating to the Talcheer coal- field in the province of Cuttack, cxxili; notices of the gold of Assam and of the province of Martaban, in Burmah, by Capt. E. T. Dalton and Lieut.-Col. J. F. Hannay, cxxv; no- tice of a work on the coal-formation of Saxony, by Prof. Hanns Bruno Geinitz, cxxv; Prof. King on mag- nesian limestone and Permian fossils in Ireland, and Mr. Binney on the extension of the limits of the Per- mian strata, cxxvili; the opinions of Prof. Hennessy, Mr. W. Hopkins, and M. Delesse on the influence of the earth’s internal structure on the INDEX TO THE PROCEEDINGS. length of the day, exxix ; Col. James and Capt. Clarke on the density of the earth, cxxix ; the researches made by the coast survey of the United States, and by Prof. A. D. Bache on the distribution of temperature in and near the Gulf-stream, cxxxi ; no- tice of Mr. Poole’s visit to the Dead Sea, cxxxii; the reports by Consul- General Miller on the eruption of Mauna Loa in Hawaii, cxxxii; Mr. Babbage’s paper on oceanic sedi- ments, cxxxii; Mr. Poulett Scrope’s views on the formation of craters and on the nature of the liquidity of lava, exxxil; Mr. James Gay Sawkins’s visit to the Friendly Islands, cxxxiii; papers on minerals by Dr. Rubidge, Mr. Dick, the Rev. R. H. Cobbold, and the Rev. W.S. Symonds, exxxiii; notice of the coal-formation of the neighbourhood of Sydney, by Mr. J. S. Wilson, cxxxiv; Mr. S. H. Beck- les’s description of a cliff-section from Hastings to Cliffend, cxxxiv; Mr. Bunbury on a peat-deposit near Wretham Hall, Norfolk, exxxiv ; ana- lysis by Dr. Richardson and Mr. Browell of mineral waters brought from the borders of Persia by Mr. W. K. Loftus, exxxv; Mr. J. Wol- ley’s notice of an ice-carried boulder at Borgholm, cxxxv; Mr. Cleghorn on the origin of the potholes on the surface of the rocks of Wick, cxxxv; Mr. H. G. Bowen’s sketch of the geology of Trinidad, cxxxv; Mr. H. J. Moyle’s notice of the occurrence in Siam of various metalliferous ores, cexxxv ; the Rev. W. B. Clarke’s note on volcanic bombs in the alluvial drift of Victoria and Tasmania, cxxxv; Mr. Morris on allophane at Charlton, Kent, cxxxv; Prof. Owen’s papers on the Stereognathus ooliticus from the Stonesfield slate, cxxxvi; Gastor- nis Parisiensis from the lower eocene of Mendon, near Paris, exxxvi ; mam- malian fossils from the red crag of Suffolk, exxxvi; a large serpent from Capt. Spratt’s collection of Greek freshwater tertiaries, cxxxvii; Mr. Salter on organic remains found in the Longmynd, exxxvii; on Diploce- ras, CXXXvili; on a new species of Ascoceras from Ludlow, exxxviii; Mr. Salter’s and Mr. W. H. Baily’s notice of the fossils found in the chalk-flints and greensand of Aberdeenshire, exxxvili; Mr. J. W. Kirkby on the occurrence of a minute malacostra- cous crustacean and other fossils in the magnesian limestone of Durham, exxxvili; Mr. 8. P. Woodward’s de- scription of the appearance of some Orthocerata from China, cxxxviii; Mr. Binney on footprints in the mill- stone-grit of Tintwistle, Cheshire, cxxxix ; Mr. Rupert Jones’s notice that some of the minute species of Posidonomya should be removed from the mollusca, and classed with the bivalved phyllopodous entomostraca, CXxXxix; observations on the Museum of Practical Geology and the School of Mining Science associated with it, cxl; thoughts on creation, and conclusion, cxliii. Pot-holes at Wick, 231. Prado, C. de, on the Geology of Spain, noticed, Ixxvii. Prestwich, J., on some fossiliferous ironstone occurring on the North Downs, 212; on the correlation of the eocene tertiaries of England, France, and Belgium; Part II. The Paris group continued, 89; noticed, xcix. Proboscidea, Dr. Falconer on the, 310. Prosoponiscus problematicus, 214. Purbeck, Dr. Falconer’s description of two species of the fossil mammalian genus Plagiaulax from, 261. Pygocephalus Cooperi, 363. Quartzites of the north-west of Scot- land, 17. Rain-prints in the Cambrian rocks, 201. Recent and fossil ophidian vertebre, moa: Red sandstone and conglomerate, and the superposed quartz-rocks, lime- stones, and gneiss of the N.W. coast of Scotland, Prof. Nicol on the, 17. Report, Annual, of the Council, i; of the Library and Museum Committee, iii. Rhodes, Mr. Campbell on the occur- rence of an earthquake at, 176. Richardson, T., and E. J. J. Browell, on the analysis of waters fram the Turko- Persian frontier, 184. Ripple-marks in the Cambrian rocks, 201. Rock-basins of Dartmoor, 231. Rubidge, R. N., on the copper-mines of Namaqualand, 233; noticed, cxxyiii. Sables moyens, 107. Salonika, Capt. Spratt on the fresh- water deposits of, 177; fossil verte- bre of a serpent (Laophis crotaloides, Ow.) discovered by Capt. Spratt at, 183, 196. Salter, J. W., on annelide-burrows and surface-markings from the Cambrian INDEX TO THE PROCEEDINGS. rocks of the Longmynd, 199; no- ticed, cxxxvil; on Diploceras, no- ticed, cxxxviii; on the cretaceous fossils of Aberdeenshire, 83 ; noticed, CXXxviii; on two Silurian species of Acidaspis from Shropshire, 210. Sandberger, G. and F., on the Devonian fossils of Nassau, noticed, Ixxxv. San Fernando, near Cienfuegos, in Cuba, Prof. D. T. Ansted on the copper-lodes at, 240. Sawkins, J. G., on the Friendly Islands, noticed, cxxxvl. Searbroite, Mr. Morris on, 16. Scolithus and Scolites, Mr. Salter on, 204. Scotland, Dr. Thomson on some spe- cies of Acidaspis from the lower Silu- rian beds of the south of, 206. ——, Prof. Nicol on the red sand- stone and conglomerate, and _ the superposed quartz-rocks, limestones, and gneiss of the north-west coast of, iy. Scrope, P., on volcanos, noticed, cxxxii. Section at Kustenjeh, Black Sea, 78; at Pagham creek, 68. Sections in Bulgaria, 72; in the north- west of Scotland, 18. Section of gravels near Cowes, 46; Portsmouth harbour, 65; cliff at Alum bay, Isle of Wight, 109; at White Cliff bay, Isle of Wight, 109 ; from High Cliff to Barton on the coast or Hampshire, 108 ; the fresh- water deposits at the Livonati hills on the Locrian coast, 180; the Hampshire coast, 45 ; the Longmynd, 200. Section of the copper-lodes in Mary- land, 244; Tennessee, 248; the ter- tiaries in Oise, 110. Semiescharipora mumia, 86. Serpent (Laophis crotaloides, Owen), fossil vertebre of a, 196. Shropshire, Mr. Salter on two Silurian species of Acidaspis from, 210. Siam, notice of the occurrence of me- talliferous ores and of coal in, 188. Silurian species of Acidaspis, 206, 210. Skye, section in the southern part of, 31. South Africa, copper district of, 233. Spektakel mine in Namaqualand, 234. Spratt, T. A. B., additional observa- tions on the geology of Bulgaria, 176; on the freshwater deposits of Eubcea, the coast of Greece, and Salonika, 177; on the geology of Varna and the neighbouring parts of Bulgaria, 72; noticed, cxi. Springbok Fontein mine in Namaqua- land, 234. Stegodon, Dr. Falconer on the, 314. Stereognathus ooliticus, a mammal from the oolitic slate of Stonesfield, Prof. Owen on the affinities of, 1. Stonesfield, Prof. Owen on the Stereo- gnathus ooliticus from, 1. Sun-cracks in the Cambrian rocks, 201. Surface-markings in the Cambrian rocks, 199. Surf-ripple on the Cambrian rocks, 202. Sussex coast, Mr. Godwin-Austen on the newer tertiary deposits of, 40. levels, deposits of the, 48. Sykesville in Maryland, North America, copper-lodes near, 242. Symonds, W. S., on burnt syenite, noticed, cxxxiil. Synoptical table of the species of mas- todon and elephant, 319. Table of Barton fossils, 118; synchro- nous strata of the Paris tertiary group, 133; the fossil shells at Brack- lesham, which occur also in the Paris tertiaries, 93; range and distribution of the mollusca of the Bracklesham sands and Barton clay in the English and French eocene marine series, 134; species of mastodon and elephant, 319; times of appearance of the per- manent teeth in the ox, sheep, and hog, 195. Tennessee, copper-lodes of, 245. Tertiaries, Mr. Prestwich on the British and foreign, 89. , newer, of the Sussex coast, 40. Tertiary formation at Salonika, fossil vertebre of a serpent discovered in a, 183, 196. Tetralophodon, Dr. Falconer on the,313. Theobald, W., on the Talcheer coal- field, noticed, cxxiii. Thomson, Wyville, on some species of Acidaspis from the lower Silurian beds of the south of Scotland, 206. Trilophodon, Dr. Falconer on the, 313. Toxaster, sp., 86. Tropifer levis, 361. Tuomey and Holmes on the pliocene fossils of South Carolina, exix. Turko-Persian frontier, analysis of wa- ters from the, 184. Varna and its vicinity, Capt. Spratt on the geology of, 72. Verneuil, E. de, on Spanish fossils, no- ticed, lxxvii. Visits to the crater of Mauna Loa, 164, 1/2. Volcanic bombs in Australasia, the oc- currence of, 188. INDEX TO THE PROCEEDINGS, » Volcano of Mauna Loa in Hawaii, no- tices of the recent eruptions from the, 164, 170, 176. Waters from the Turko-Persian frontier, analysis of, 184. Wave-marks in the Cambrian rocks, 201. Weld, F. A., on the volcanic eruption at Hawaii in 1855-56, 163. Wick, Mr. Cleghorn on pot-holes at, Zot. Wilson, J. S., on the geology of some parts of Australia, noticed, cxxxiv. Wollaston Donation Fund, award of the proceeds of, xxv. Wollaston medal, award of the, xxiii. Wolley, John, notice of an ice-carried boulder at Borgholm, 189. Woodward, S. P., on an -Orthoceras from China, noticed, cxxxviii; reply on being presented with the proceeds of the Donation Fund, xxv. Wright, T., on the so-called sands of the inferior oolite, noticed, xci. Xiphodon, description of the genus, by Prof. Owen, 257. END OF VOL. XIII. PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. QUARTERLY JOURNAL GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, EDITED BY THE ASSISTANT-SECRETARY OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. VOLUME THE THIRTEENTH. 1857. PART II. MISCELLANEOUS. : eer i, | i : ee : A Af pA: és ; ae fi * Ms h nn 4 Pit wa. ae ay RMR et ; far ule’ PP. any ton De ats Ma A oT Me, if t mT Ts 7 ” i, 4 f } i a Y, A wt at A . ; ; ET ane abe ce eer ‘ re mh = lade tata = BY ow Ws at x 5 A i 4 ch fi ' A a6 eee J ¥ . e y i % P F a \ : ame - phe ‘ “Maal 7 ai LK Sa “ete at Ve OMe ate ie Wa rs. vi bo ; b. sv f u } Bs sok a “a; ie ae ware pee Be y + i ‘., Ly =n) ihaex ) va ORF ot xy Y ae ej, ‘ Dee ie ; welt { hid = te j ny . DUKE: Cn Bish Arey oe ; : rt es a 7 7 ' al is. 7 7 2, J é . y ‘ . * ay va ie A | ‘ i. . = A ‘ . +f { ‘ Me A : ah ¥ ~ r e& . cig “at . af a) a A ‘ 2 a " iT Ale : tay eG : “ oy i ES 3 v ys i oe at AEA ¥- ye Bi ot | Ra oe ain anise : PEON ECTS qs ‘ya § : ) j Ae & 7 ~ ‘ a i at BAS NA A) yf “ YY oe A. Roo! , : 2 , ee + hes Bay . Wea: Hing ROO \ } iat j ry ri . on . ame r ; ara iy noe ; SOSA: ane eau Mh " # § i . hy Sac ice P ye . » Li 1 1 nes : Fi uta) ra ) Sas ag } ‘ i k a P te oe oe CONTENTS OF PART II. Alphabetically arranged—the names of the Authors in capital letters. Asphaltic Slates and Limestones from Seefeld in the Tyrol, Analysis of, BM NRG, 5 sete reise olen neste neds to wahoo tn nas es iaisdeeednenen gas Beust. On the Metalliferous and Porphyritic Veins of the Erzgebirge Carboniferous and Triassic Strata of S.W. Carinthia, Fa:rrerLe on SMe ver ch Lis beck wenmwhn se Paakun iene’ Sek RESES La dae saebatceee cchlntae Cervus euryceros, DE MORLOT On the .........cecsecscecerecsovesseecees Degey. On the Cretaceous Flora of Aix-la-Chapelle ................6. EmmricH. On the Geology of the Eastern Environs of Trente, in NCE OTH) OYTO): gosie sieges. suneacenseaeoenosee ip edusns Rilo Dua Leduc es ForTTERLE and Wotr. On the Geology of part of the Tyrol ...... ForTrTeRLE. On some Lignites in Southern Styria........... cece eee ea ithe stack Coal Of Cosiiad i insets vsscieceadecsccseeagueelcssves On the Carboniferous and Triassic Strata of S.W. Carinthia... Fossils from Raibl in Carinthia, Von HAUVER on some. Gailthal-Strata and Alpme Trias of 8.E. Carinthia, ie on thie Geology of Edelény, in Hungary, HocustTerrer on the ............... Geology of parts of the Tyrol and Vorarlberg, GUMBEL on the ...... Geology of the Eastern Environs of Trente, i in the Southern Tyrol, EMBME EON NG eh Oy iosinak sta cewaseqicnrs s5seescdeseaerendssengenssane se GtmsBeEt. On the Geology of parts of the Tyrol and Vorarlberg ... Harpincer. On the Hollow Pebbles found near Lauretta............ Hartite from Rosenthal, ZEPHAROVICH ON ...........cccccccccssccsecees Haver, Fr. von. On the Geology of the Eastern Alps............... Hocustetrer. On the Geology of Edelény, in Hungary ............ On the Lignite-basin of Falkenau and Elbogen, in Bohemia... Hollow Pebbles found near Lauretta, HAIDINGER on the ............ Hornes, Dr. Morirz. On the Fossil Mollusca of the Tertiary ‘Basin of Vienna. Vol. I. Univalves. (Noticed.) .............c0e0 Iron-deposits of the Circle of Jaslo, m Galicia, Ltroup on the ...... JOKELY. On the Metals and Mines of North-western Bohemia...... Koninck, L. pE. On the Mountain Limestone and Old Red of RMT ce toc Cosueneea ay actu civ es nace sobeses aces runner ek neat ols ceed Kossen-strata in Suabia, OpPEL and Susss on the Equivalents of the KraynacG. Analysis of some Asphaltic Slates and Limestones from Bae deat RE READE cohen ss oc saicivini-hs ein vnioo niin WG ele dieaeesaesledinedes Lead-ores of S.E. Carinthia, LIPOLD on the ..........sccccenceecsceccsees 1V Lignite-basin of Falkenau and Elbogen, n Bohemia, HocHsSTETTER ON ENG sed epemeae eevee ove sasncqcenmemenped suede aimee «5 oh cunee= es ae eeeeeeeee Lipotp. On the Gailthal-strata and Alpine Trias of S.E. Carinthia ——. On the Iron-deposits of the Circle of Jaslo, in Galicia ......... ——. On the Lead-ores of South-east Carinthia ......cccsseeeeseeseeees ——. On the Metalliferous Deposits in Upper Carinthia ............ On the Tertiary Deposits of the South-east of Carinthia ...... Mayence Tertiary, Additional Information by SANDBERGER, respect- ATI GAC oo on anaeaninas cesiasis «neem ae Seen kane Ee mee Eeens ne emen ese eaaeseeeeee Metalliferous and Porphyritic Veins of the Erzgebirge, Brust on the Metals and Mines of North-western Bohemia, JoKELY on the......... Mortot, De. On Cervus euryceros in Switzerland...............s0000. Mountain-Limestone and Old Red of Britain, De Kon1ncx on the.. Norti-castern Alps, STUUR Of the ,..c...0.secsnceteacacenandssscesasceuueeees OppeEL and Suess. On the Equivalents of the Kossen-strata in ADI A) | wcielen slanseceusedancite Sebebainateqeayes Sans geaeesaesaaaier ieee Peters. On the Geology of Buda and its environs..........cseeeeeeee —. On the Trachytes near Pesth, Hungary ...............cecssseseees SANDBERGER. Additional Information respecting the Mayence Ter- TABLEY. opm iauias os gantaees ducer aenaeeaa tenets ta eeiaer eeaeee er ese rseacsstigies ScHmMipT. On the Caverns in Mount Oetscher .....0.-....sscsssesaens Stmony. On the Inundation in Vintschgau in Tyrol .............00005 SonKLAR. On the Glacier of Sulden (Vedretta del Monte Martello) Wm Diy tl . ois. co ihe saves eseneewsessdeve ods asuseebseeereten ta seauaeanaeeeme Stur and Joxéty. On the Geology of parts of Bohemia ............ —. On the Distrbution of Plants on the Styrian Alps ccocessesces On the North-eastern Alps, iis ads sunk fans $= coax pine oid has ee eee Tertiary Deposits of the South-east of Carinthia, Liroup on the UnceEr. On Plant-remains in some of the Austro-Hungarian Strata Von Haver. Qn some Fossils from Raibl, in Carinthia............... ——. On some of the Tron-ores Of Styria -..2..-casescnsssn one ceraeevanee —. On the Geology of the neighbourhood of Innspruck............ ZEPHAROVICH. On Hartite from Rosenthal...............ccsececccoccees TRANSLATIONS AND NOTICES OF GEOLOGICAL MEMOIRS. On the Equivalents of the “‘ Kossen Strata”’ in SuABIA. By Dr. A. Oprrx and M. E. Suzss. [Proceedings Imp. Acad. Vienna, July 1856.] A well-developed group of secondary rocks has been observed in the Eastern Alps, subsequently to the discovery of the organic remains of the St. Cassian beds. The series has a paleeontological character of its own, differing in that respect from any other sedimentary formation hitherto known. The group in question may be divided into two sub-groups, distinctly separated from each other by the nature of their organic remains, although conformable in stratification (as far as at present observed) and equally affected by the powerful upheavings of sub- sequent periods. Each of these sub-groups has, in certain localities, a thickness of several thousand feet; both of them are of purely marine origin; and limestones greatly predominate in both. The inferior deposit, to which belong the beds of St. Cassian and Hall in Tyrol, the Hallstadt beds in Upper Austria, the deposits of Esmo im the Lombardian Alps, and of Raibl in Carinthia, are now known to contain about 800 species of organic remains, not one of which is found anywhere beyond the Kast Alpine territory. The superior deposit, comprising the Kossen beds in Tyrol, those of Starhemberg and of Kitzberg near Pepnitz in Lower Austria, of Bellagio on the Lake of Como, of Scesaplana in the Vorarlberg, and of the Stockhorn, together with the whole calcareous deposit known as “ Dachstein Limestone,” is admitted by the Austrian geologists to be more nearly connected with the Lower Lias than is the lower sub-group of Hallstadt and St. Cassian. The Swiss naturalists, how- ever, think that this Kossen group should be united with the lower sub-group under the common denomination of St.Cassian Formation ; the separation lying, as they suppose, not below, but above the Kos- sen Beds. This question having no influence on the opinions regarding the stratigraphical order of the deposits, we may now set it aside ; and, in order to prevent any misunderstanding, we intend to use the term *‘Cassian Strata” for the lower sub-group exclusively. No strata exactly concordant in paleontological characters with those in question having been found among the marine deposits of Western Europe, German and other naturalists have acquiesced in the opinion that the chronological equivalents of these deposits.were to be sought for elsewhere, in the Keuper strata deposited in shal- lower water. This hypothesis still wants more proofs, on account of the totally discrepant physical circumstances under which the Keuper VOL. XIII.—PART II. B 2 GEOLOGICAL MEMOIRS. was formed, and on account of recent deposits covering all the area between the genuine Keuper and the Alpine sedimentary rocks. MM. Escher v. der Linth*, of Zurich, and P. Merian‘+, of Basle, both of whom possess the knowledge and energy requisite for the solution of this question, have lately visited the Vorarlberg, where the genuine Cassian and Kossen beds begin to assume a more littoral character, particularly conspicuous in the Cassian beds. These eminent geologists succeeded further in finding out some relations between the Keuper and the Cassian beds, which led them to seek in the Upper Keuper for the equivalent of the Késsen beds. We now intend to give a description of certain strata occurring in Suabia intercalated between the true Keuper and the lowest Lias with Ammonites planorbis. These strata seem to us to offer some remarkable analogies with the Kossen strata. In West Germany, France, and England the Keuper appears gene- rally in the form of a great marl-deposit with local occurrences of sandstone, gypsum, and dolomite beds of varying thickness. The subdivision of the Keuper formation, as now in use, depends on local petrographical differences. ‘The Wirtemberg Keuper is considered to be normally developed when its component beds (of a total thickness of 700 feet) succeed each other in the following order :— - Red Keuper marls; overlaid by the hard yellow sandstones of the Bone-bed. . Sandstone (Stuben-sandstein). . Marls with bands of sandstone. . Argillaceous sandstones (fit for building-purposes). . Variegated marls. . Gypsum. (Dolomite; generaily ranked with the argillaceous coal series.) tet DD OS Ha OT OD Such subdivisions offer exceptions even at short distances, one or other of the beds disappearing; they may serve for practical pur- poses or for local characters, but they are not adapted for tracing the parallelism of strata for great distances. Many of the stratigraphical characters undergo alteration on the opposite side of the Rhine; variegated marls (Marnes irisées) here become prevalent, and the subordinate beds of heterogeneous rockst occurring in it succeed in an order quite different from that of the Wirtemberg beds. This is still more conspicuous in the English Keuper. The coast of Ax- mouth (Dorsetshire) presents high cliffs of denuded New Red (Keuper) exclusively composed of variegated marls, not admitting lines of separation analogous to those traceable in foreign Keuper deposits. It has hitherto been impossible to make out in the Keuper petrographical horizons which may be recognized in distant countries ; nor have observers succeeded in establishing zones with determinate and constant palzeontological characters, indicative of coeval strata wherever they may be met with. * “Geologische Bemerkungen iiber Vorarlberg” in the Helvetian Transactions for 1853; and Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. part 2. Miscell. p. 16, &c. 5 pe fe the “Verhandlungen der Basler naturforsch. Gesellschaft,” 2 series, Nos. 1 & 2, &c.; and Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. p. 451. + Dufténoy & E. de Beaumont.—Explicat. de la Carte Géol. de la France, t. ii. pp. ’ . OPPEL AND SUESS—KOSSEN BEDS. 3 The Keuper of West Germany, the Marnes irisées of France, and the New Red of England are sandy and muddy deposits not con- taining organic remains sufficient (as are those of the Jurassic or Cretaceous marine deposits) to establish the coevality of their respect- ive subdivisions. The study of the vegetable remains in the Keuper Sandstone does not seem to have led to any positive result on this question; nor do the few, and generally ill-preserved, remains of Keuper shells, as hitherto described*, materially contribute to its solution. The large Labyrinthodont saurians, whatever may be their paleontological interest, are but seldom of essential use in compa- rative stratigraphy. Recently the Suabian geologists have paid considerable attention to certain fossiliferous sandstone-strata intercalated between the Lias and the Keuper, and immediately connected with the Bone-bed, well- known for the great number of vertebrate remains contained in it. We shall now describe these sandstone-strata in some detail. The stratigraphical order of these beds in the environs of Esslingen is as follows :— Clays with beds of limestone and sandstone. Zone of Ammonites ia... MUMIMGSTERT clean ds daslon ay sad conn tae eeees Sone cedteae sbGnesbasenavseancciene eseeay” Ge : pet is ete mestone | Zone Of A. Planorbis..cccseccseveee 3 {7 inches of bluish clay. S | 8 inches of light-blue sandstone with remains of Vertebrata, to- = gether with Cardium Rheticum, C. cloacinum, Schizodus cloaci- S nus, Leda Deffneri, Avicula contorta, Mytilus minutus, Pecten BS Valoniensis, &c. (Bone-bed.)......s.+ssessseessssssensrsesesteeeeeees é. & | 6 inches of light-grey micaceous clay with fragments of coal. “* UG feet of hard yellow sandstones..........6c.ccoccocessceceseccees Bencenns b. RMR EPEMCHINICNDED TOALY 62 oyu, cadsnccssccnuncsaccvalsosssQansadey sartevsbivansendis a. Near Niirtingen, 5 hours (about 12 English miles) south-east of Stuttgart, the following series has been made out :— Beds of clay, limestone, and sandstone. Zone of Ammonites Like ,angulatus See pe EEE dL akee ca ca resuacttads wanda. cuted asgees=*apaavays'ns é. "| 14 to 2 feet of grey limestones with iron-ochre. Zone of 4. Splinaetit (bbGNEs Anaad oabedibeodesacatesccshiocsdssansced BB essavbes sacsee d. 4 inches of yellow clay. 1 inch to 2 inches of loose qaurtzose sands with traces of the PREC. nce dsakan tks nanapassehends el aah Vote naaseted acan savanna tenes ott : 2 (7 to 8 feet of non-fossiliferous sandstone. 8 | 20 to 30 feet of fine- | 3 feet of sandstone with casts of gastero- = j grained, yellowish- | pods (Acteonina, sp., Nerita, sp., &c.), ‘3 } white sandstone, in| Anatina precursor, Cypricardia Suevica, 4 | its upper portion in-<{ Neoschizodus posterus, Avicula contorta, 5 | terspersed with ga-| Mytilusminutus,Gervilliaprecursor,Lima, | Pens BG SUNCTOWIS | Siig MNase dprantachsrd eal iro va s 2 iA Ova ie op the q A 7a Pit. apy > ay al tay rc ‘ la - ta : 4 r. tik. oa LD! °* «6 - a Ya ees , aA wi oS x n *" “ips fi i eitée ; ae Wek a fobs Vie Medio ® 4 Wir pure ok ~“ ~ ef tuts cay C1 - ee oe nts i a